Home

RMX 1800 Administrator`s Guide Version 8.1.8

1. a Soe w fe A i BE a a 2 tatus 1D _ staretime End Time me Status Role 1P Address Phone Alias Na Network t Hierarchy a Type Name VIP address Ph JH H e Marc_45305 8 Single Partici 26644 10 20 11 20 Marc_453065100 1 participant ogian E 7 a Re HDX lt D Connected 10 253 72 24 se aT g a 3 pct a u c2 i T Duke 10 253 725 A Re Dan tata s g fer HDX 4000 TW 10 253 72 24 Rr Marc 10 253 72 13 i Anat 10 245 69 15 Address Book pane n Network services GE Recording Links Conference Profiles amp SP Factories J a X ASEE Participant Alerts Port Usage Video 0740 WELA MCU State MAJOR The Address Book contains two panes e Navigation pane contains the hierarchical tree and All Participants list e List pane displays the list of all the members of the selected group and sub groups List pane Address Book Akaan Ey 2 Hierarchy a dHress P V7 Alias Y Network Y7 Dialing Direction Y Encryption a g Main A Human Resources g Marketing z x d R amp D eam D Product Management Bill James 1 2 3 14 dial_out P Development Team 1 P Development Team 2 Navigation pane a a Development Team 3 Sara Moncreek 1 2 3 16 dial_out A Teama Gianluca Magnani 1 2 3 18 dial_in Team A John Jacobson 1 2 3 15 dial_out a A TeamB Jeffrey Peterson 1 2 3 19 dial_out Sales A Sup
2. a ao For more information see Participant Level Monitoring on page 12 15 12 26 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring Detecting SIP Endpoint Disconnection When an abnormal disconnection of SIP endpoints occurs because of network problems or client application failures SIP endpoints remain connected to the conference causing connection disruptions For example the video freezes in the layout or blocks content for SIP endpoints when a quick re connection is performed It can take several minutes to detect the SIP endpoint disconnection using the SIP standard behavior In a normal SIP video call audio and video RTP and RTCP messages are sent from the endpoints to the MCU to detect the signaling of connected endpoints Conversely SVC endpoints might not send video RTP messages to the MCU when a participant is not displayed in the video layout of any of the participants in the conference For SVC endpoints the MCU will only verify audio RTP and RTCP messages and video RTCP messages Video RTP messages will not be checked To detect the disconnection of SIP endpoints in a reasonable amount of time a new system flag can be defined to specify the amount of time that the MCU should wait for an RTCP or RTP message from the SIP endpoint before the endpoint starts the disconnection process The system default value is automatically set to 20 seconds The system flag DETECT_SIP_EP_DISCON
3. Export Path C Documents and Settings ana g Deskt Collect Information 2 Inthe From Date and Until Date fields use the arrow keys to define the date range of the data files to be included in the compressed file 3 Inthe From Time and Until Time fields use the arrow keys to define the time range of the data files to be included in the compressed file time range include the time and date in which the issue occurred The default date and time ranges may not be sufficient For example if a specific issue occurred on October 1 2013 at 12 15 the From Date and Until Date should be October 1 2013 the From Time should be around 12 10 and the Until Time should be around 12 20 If logs are being collected in order to troubleshoot a specific issue it is important that the date and 4 Select check boxes of the information to be collected 5 Inthe Export Path field click the Browse button and navigate to the directory path where the compressed file is to be saved 6 Click the Collect Information button A progress indicator is displayed in the Information Collector dialog box while the file is being created 19 44 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Step 2 Saving the Compressed File 1 The compressed file is automatically saved in the directory selected in the Information Collector dialog box The file is named info tgz A success information box is displayed 2
4. Resolution Configuration Maximum CP Resolution HD 1080p60 C HD 1080p30 Resolution Configuration Resource Quality Balanced default C Resource Optimized C HD 720p30 SD 30 C Video Quality Optimized Detailed Configuration AVC CP Basic Configuration Detailed Configuration Maximum CP Resolution ees ced default C HD 1080p30 HD 720p30 C sp30 C Video Quality optimized C cIF30 Manual 2 Detailed Configuration AVC CP Sharpness Motion Base Profile CIF 30 SD 30 HD 720p30 Minimum HO 1080p30 Connection Threshold HD 1080p60 T 256 kbps 71 1024 kbps L 2048 kbps T gt 3584 kbps High Profile Line Rate Sliders CIF 30 SD 30 HD 720p30 HD 1080p30 HD 1080p50 ee eee a ee E CON Pee ee Fe T 2048 kbps mT 64kbps mT 256 kbps T 1 832 kbps gt 1536 kbps Resolution Configuration Basic The Resolution Configuration Basic dialog box contains the following panes e Max CP Resolution Pane e Resolution Configuration Pane Maximum CP Resolution Pane The Collaboration Server can be set to one of the following Maximum CP Resolutions HD 1080p60 e HD 1080p30 HD 720p30 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 3 12 e D30 CIF 30 Limiting Maximum Resolution Before a selection is made in this pane the Maximum CP Resolution of the system is determined by th
5. My Documents lt My Computer amp COLEUS File name A Places Files of type Accord Audio files ACA x Cancel L A 3 Select the appropriate wav file and then click the Open button The selected file name is displayed in the Install Audible Alarm File dialog box 4 Optional You can play the selected file or the currently used file by clicking the Play button as follows a Click Play Selected File to play a file saved on your computer b Click Play Collaboration Server File to play the file currently saved on the Collaboration Server 5 Inthe Download Audible Alarm File dialog box click OK to download the file to the MCU The new file replaces the file stored on the MCU If multiple Collaboration Servers are configured in the RMX Manager the file must be downloaded to each of the required MCUs separately Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Multilingual Setting Each supported language is represented by a country flag in the Welcome Screen and can be selected as the language for the Collaboration Server Web Client Customizing the Multilingual Setting The languages available for selection in the Login screen of the Collaboration Server Web Client can be modified using the Multilingual Setting option To customize the Multilingual Setting 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt Customize Display Settings gt Multilingual Setting The Mu
6. At the End e Cc I Auto Redialing I Exclusive Content Mode I Enable FECC r Interval 0 Seconds 3 The following information is displayed in the Advanced tab Table 12 2 Conference Properties Advanced Parameters Encryption Indicates whether the conference is encrypted 12 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring Table 12 2 Conference Properties Advanced Parameters Continued Indicates wether Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA is enabled for the conference Field Option Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA Auto Terminate When selected indicates that the MCU will automatically terminate the conference when Before First Joins At the End After Last Quits and At the End When Last Participant Remains parameters apply Auto Redialing Indicates whether dial out participants are automatically when selected or manually when cleared connected to the conference Exclusive Content When selected Content is limited to one participant Mode Enable FECC When selected Far End Camera Control is enabled FW NAT Keep Alive When selected sends a FW NAT Keep Alive message at specific Intervals for the RTP UDP and BFCP channels The interval specifies how often a FW NAT Keep Alive message is sent For more information see 4 Click the Video Quality tab The Conference Properties Video Quality dialog box opens gt General
7. Templates E Marc_12693 OK gt a a a Display Name _ Status a List of g SUPPORT_1 OK Saved 8 x m D w AS SUPPORT OK E Marc_20183 OK As Marc OK E Duke_13626 OK Number of Saved Conference Templates The Conference Templates are listed by Conference Template Display Name and ID and can be sorted by either field The list can be customized by re sizing the pane adjusting the column widths or changing the order of the column headings For more information see Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Customizing the Main Screen on page 3 10 Clicking the anchor pin button hides the Conference Templates list as a closed tab Toolbar Buttons The Conference Template toolbar includes the following buttons Table 1 Conference Templates Toolbar Buttons C Fa New Conference Creates a new Conference Template Template x Delete Conference Deletes the Conference Template s that are selected in the list Template Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 11 Conference Templates Table 1 Conference Templates Toolbar Buttons Continued E T 2 Start Conference Starts an ongoing conference from the Conference Template that has an identical name ID parameters and participants as the template from Template 3 Creates a conference Reservation from the Conference Template Schedule Reservation with the same name ID parameters and participants as the from T
8. Each conference is a separate record in the MCU memory Each conference is archived as a separate file Each conference CDR file contains general information about the conference such as the conference name ID start time and duration as well as information about events occurring during the conference such as adding a new participant disconnecting a participant or extending the length of the conference The CDR File CDR File Formats Polycom Inc The conference CDR records can be retrieved and archived in the following two formats e Unformatted data Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records in raw data format The first record in each file contains general conference data The remaining records contain event data one record for each event Each record contains field values separated by commas This data can be transferred to an external program such as Microsoft Excel for billing purposes 17 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The following is a sample of an unformatted CDR file B TestConf 838343740_c100 cdr Notepad lolx File Edit Format View Help Conference 675 TestConf 838343740 110 25 07 2006 21 55 22 01 00 00 25 07 2006 21 55 22 00 01 04 2 C100 0 a summary record 0 03021 25 07 2006 21 55 22 0 0 1 6 0 255 3 255 255 255 0 0 0 DOAL 25 07 2006 21 55 222 0 0 0 300 5 05255 1 0 20 0 0 0 050 0 65535 65535 1 65535 65535 6553 5 65535 32 service 0 15 0 0 0 03
9. Invalid chairperson password Please try again Please enter the conference password Press the pound key when complete Invalid conference password Please try again Press any key to enter the conference Please enter the Billing code Press the pound key when complete Please wait for the chairperson to join the conference The chairperson has left the conference Note The TERMINATE_CONF_AFTER_CHAIR_ DROPPED flag must be enabled to play this message The participant enters the conference IVR queue The participant is asked to self identify as the chairperson The participant is asked for the chairperson password A participant enters an incorrect Chairperson password A participant is requested to enter the conference password An incorrect conference password is entered A participant is requested to press any key A participant is asked to enter a billing code A participant attempts to join a conference prior to the Chairperson joining The chairperson has left the conference General_Welcome wav Chairperson_ Identifier wav Chairperson_Password wav Chairperson_ Password_Failure wav Conference_ Password wav Retry_ Conference_ Password wav Request_Digit wav Billing_Code wav Requires Chairperson wav Chairperson_Exit wav 15 31 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 15 12 Default IVR Messages C
10. All conference participants are listed in the left pane All Participants while the participants that are to be displayed in the Auto Scan enabled cell of the video layout are listed in the right pane Scanning Order The dialog box buttons are summarized in Table 12 5 Table 12 5 Customized Polling Buttons Co Select a participant and click this button to Add a the participant to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned The participants name is removed from the Al Participants pane Delete Select a participant and click this button to Delete the participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned The participants name is moved back to the All Participants pane Add All Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned All participants names are removed from the Al Participants pane Up Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Up in the Scanning Order Down Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Down in the Scanning Order 8 Optional Add a participant to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned Delete All Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned All participants names are moved back to the All Participants pane a Click on the participant s name in the All Participants list Polycom Inc 12 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 16 17 18 19 20 21 12 10 b Click the
11. 5 Define the following parameters Table 13 3 Conference Profile Recording Parameters Enable Recording Select to enable Recording Settings in the dialog box Recording Link Select a recording link for the conference from the list Start recording Select one of the following e Immediately conference recording is automatically started upon connection of the first participant Upon Request the operator or chairperson must initiate the recording manual Audio only Select this option to record only the audio channel of the conference Note An Audio Only Recording Link cannot be used to record a conference if there are no Voice resources allocated in the Video Voice Port Configuration Display Recording Select this option to display Recording Indication to all conference Icon participants informing them that the conference is being recorded The recording icon is replaced by a Paused icon when conference recording is paused 6 Click OK Recording is enabled in the Conference Profile 13 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 13 Recording Conferences Recording Link Encryption Polycom Inc The Recording Link can be encrypted when recording an encrypted conference The encryption of the Recording Link is enabled when Encryption is selected in the Conference Profile on the Collaboration Server and on the RSS and the system flag ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_COMF is set to NO Recording Link Encryption Gui
12. Indicates whether or not the line is restricted as follows 27 Restricted line 28 Non restricted line 255 Unknown or not relevant Indicates whether or not the participant is an Audio Only participant as follows 0 The participant is not an Audio Only participant 1 The participant is an Audio Only participant 255 Unknown Note This field is only relevant to dial out ISDN PSTN participants The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default Note This field is only relevant to dial out ISDN PSTN participants The network sub service name An empty field means that MCU selects the default sub service Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants The number of participant phone numbers In a dial in connection the participant phone number is the CLI Calling Line Identification as identified by the MCU In a dial out connection participant phone numbers are the phone numbers dialed by the MCU for each participant channel Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants The number of MCU phone numbers In a dial in connection the MCU phone number is the number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU In a dial out connection the MCU phone number is the MCU CLI number as seen by the participant Polycom Inc Pol
13. Please enter your conference NID Press the pound key when complete Invalid conference NID Please try again The conference is now secured The conference is now in an unsecured mode Conference you are trying to join is locked The conference is being recorded The conference recording has failed All video resources are currently in use Connecting using audio only A chairperson requests the chairperson help menu A participant requests the participant help menu A participant attempts to join a full conference A participant enters an invalid conference NID A chairperson or participant secures a conference A chairperson or participant unsecures a conference Chapter 15 IVR Services Chairperson_ Help_Menu wav Participant_Help_Menu wav Maximum_ Participants_ Exceeded wav Request_ Conference_NID wav Retry_Conference_NID wav Conference_Secured wav Conference_Unsecured wav Conference_Locked wav Recording_ in_Progress wav Recording_Failed wav No_Video_Resources_Audio_ Only wav 15 33 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Volume Control of IVR Messages Roll Call and Music The volume of IVR music and IVR messages is controlled by the following system flags e IVR_MUSIC VOLUME e IVR_MESSAGE VOLUME To control the volume of IVR music Roll Call and messages gt gt Modify the values of the System Flags
14. Table 19 12 Collaboration Server SNMP Properties Agent Options CO Contact person for Type the name of the person to be contacted in the event of problems this MCU with the MCU MCU Location Type the location of the MCU address or any description MCU System Name Type the MCU s system name 9 Click the Traps tab The Collaboration Server SNMP Properties Traps dialog box opens SNMP Properties gt Agent Traps can be sentto a group of Managers identified by their IP gt Security The Community Name or User Name will be used with all traps Trap Destinations q Version 3 SNMP Trap Version Version 3 x Version 7 Version 2 Trap Destinations RE PSS EST Versions 1 amp 2 J add J Remove gt Agent CG Traps gt Traps can be sent to a group of Managers identified by their IP gt Security The Trap Community Name is used for all traps Trap Community Name SNMP Trap Version Version 1 Trap Destinations je community Name 1 2 3 4 comm_1 2 1 2 1 comm_i E CS Traps are messages sent by the MCU to the SNMP Managers when events such as MCU Startup or Shutdown occur Traps may be sent to several SNMP Managers whose IP addresses are specified in the Trap Destinations box Polycom Inc 19 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 10 Define the following parameters Table 19 13 SNMPv3 Traps ie Cee SNMP Trap
15. Table C 39 Disconnection Cause Values Call Disconnection Cause o w S aoo Participant hung up z omn s ews e pwne o C Nopatitrawio C 33 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 34 Table C 39 Disconnection Cause Values Continued A common key exchange algorithm could not be established between the MCU and the remote device Remote device did not open the encryption signaling channel The remote devices selected encryption algorithm does not match the local selected encryption algorithm Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 39 Disconnection Cause Values Continued m eames O ENCO m rm O m rmo O m semwa O seem O ae ses O m remem O e w s o w sewoe O w sen o ENC srmn O mns o w sno COC CEC aa rm O e semen aes aemeno COCO m mwe m framo O e wame SIP client error 414 C 35 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 39 Disconnection Cause Values Continued MGC Manager Events that are not Supported by the Collaboration Server The following MGC Manager events are not supported by the Collaboration Server For details of these events see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Appendix A e Event 8 REMOTE COM MODE e Event 11 ATM CHANNEL CONNECTED e Event 12 ATM CHANNEL DISCONNECTED C 36 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Event 13 MPI CHANN
16. The selected file name is displayed in the Install Music File dialog box 5 Optional You can play the selected file by clicking the Play button a Click Play Selected File to play a file on your computer b Click Play Collaboration Server File to play a file already uploaded on the Collaboration Server 6 Inthe Install Music File dialog box click OK to upload the file to the MCU The new file replaces the previously uploaded file and this file is used for all background music played by the MCU Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides The Collaboration Server is shipped with default voice messages in WAV format and video slides that are used for the default IVR services You can create your own video slides and record the voice messages for different languages or customize them to your needs Recording an Audio Message Polycom Inc To record audio messages use any sound recording utility available in your computer or record them professionally in a recording studio Make sure that recorded message can be saved as a Wave file wav format and that the recorded format settings are as defined in steps 4 and 5 on page 15 28 The files are converted into the Collaboration Server internal format during the upload process This section describes the use of the Sound Recorder utility delivered with Windows 95 98 2000 XP To define the format settings for audio messages
17. e Slot ID 1 Riser PCI slot 0 in the middle e Slot ID 2 Riser PCI slot 1 bottom e Slot ID 3 Riser PCI slot 2 top Polycom Inc Chapter 21 Collaboration Server Hardware Monitoring The following information is displayed Table 21 3 Card Properties General Info onto the component and is automatically identified by the system 2 Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the hardware component i e temperatures and main power sensors For more information see Active Alarms on page 21 5 3 Click Close to return to the Hardware Monitor pane To view the resource usage on a DSP card 1 Inthe Hardware Monitor pane double click a desired DSP card 2 The available chip list opens You can find the following information SS ee en congue a Percentage Occupied The percentage of the resource used on this chip 3 To view the port usage of a specific chip double click the desired chip You can find the following information Port ID The ID of the port Whether this port is active Polycom Inc 21 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide i a Percentage Occupied The percentage of the resource used on this chip Port Type The type of this port To view the supporting hardware components properties 1 Inthe Hardware Monitor pane either double click or right click and select properties for the desired supporting hardware component The component s properties dialog
18. gt Skins gt IVR gt Information gt Recording gt Site Names I Presentation Mode I Lecturer View Switching Lecturer gt Message Overlay Auto Scan Interval s gt Network Services I Auto Layout 1 Enable or disable the Lecturer View Switching between participants displayed on the lecturer monitor by selecting or clearing the Lecturer View Switching check box Change the video layout for the lecturer by selecting another video layout Restricting Content Broadcast to Lecturer Content broadcasting can be restricted to the conference lecturer only when one of the conference participants is set as the lecturer and not automatically selected by the system Restricting the Content Broadcast prevents the accidental interruption or termination of H 239 Content that is being shared in a conference Content Broadcast restriction is enabled by setting the RESTRICT_CONTENT_BROADCAST_TO_LECTURER system flag to ON When set to OFF default it enables all users to send Content When enabled the following rules apply 4 42 Content can only be sent by the designated lecturer When any other participant tries to send Content the request is rejected If the Collaboration Server user changes the designated lecturer in the Conference Properties Video Settings dialog box the Content of the current lecturer is stopped immediately and cannot be renewed T
19. DE 802_1X_SKIP_CERTIFICAT Not Supported in RMX 1800 E VALIDATION 802_1X_CRL_MODE Not Supported in RMX 1800 802_FIPS_MODE Not Supported in RMX 1800 ACCEPT_VOIP_DTMF_TYP_ Defines the type of DTMF tones inband or digits outband E that the Collaboration Server will accept in VOIP calls Range 0 Auto default Inband or outband DTMF tones digits are accepted depending on the endpoint s current setting If the endpoint switches from inband to outband or visa versa the value of the SET_DTMF_SOURCE_DIFF_IN_SEC flag determines the time interval after which both inband and outband tones digits will be accepted e 1 Outband H 245 only e 2 Inband only 20 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued i ee ANAT_IP_PROTOCOL_SET TING APACHE_KEEP_ALIVE_TIM EOUT AVOID_VIDEO_LOOP_BAC K_IN_CASCADE BLOCK_CONTENT_LEGAC Y_FOR_LYNC DETECT_SIP_EP_DISCON NECT_TIMER Polycom Inc If YES enables Alternative Network Address Types For more information see Alternative Network Address Types ANAT on page 23 49 Range DISABLED AUTO PREFER_IPv4 PREFER_IPv6 e Default YES If the connection is idle for longer than the number of seconds specified by this flag the connection to the Collaboration Server is terminated Value 0 999 Default 15 Note A value of 0 results in an unlimited keep alive duration When set t
20. Table 12 10 Participant Properties Channel Status Parameters e e o Channels Used When checked indicates the channel type used by the participant to connect to the conference Incoming channels are endpoint to MCU Outgoing channels are from MCU to endpoint Channels H 225 Signaling The call signaling channel H 245 SDP The Control channel Audio in Incoming audio channel Audio out Outgoing audio channel Video in Incoming video channel Video out Outgoing video channel Content in H 239 People Content conferences Content out H 239 People Content conferences FECC in The incoming FECC channel is open FECC out The outgoing FECC channel is open Columns e Faulty A red exclamation point indicates a faulty channel condition This is a real time indication when resolved the indication disappears An exclamation point indicates that further investigation may be required using additional parameters displayed in the Advanced Channel Status tab Bit Rate The actual transfer rate for the channel When channel is inactive bit rate value is 0 For example if the participant is connected without video the bit rate for the video channel is 0 Note The CTS Audio Auxiliary channel is used only for Content In all other cases the bit rate shown in this column for this channel is 0 Packet Loss The accumulated count of all packets that are missing according to the RTCP report since the channel was opene
21. Viewing Permissions GX ati Ei y amp z 7 5 Status fio start Time En S 3 UPPORT 967108349 Proper 2 S J8 2 amp jS S T S amp Display Name SIRIS gt Advanced Tab O lt gt Video Quality Duration gt Video Settings General Y v v gt Audio Settings gt Customized Polling ae Routing Name A gt MR Start Time gt Information End Time 02 12 2012 at fo9 53 gt Recording gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services 1D Conference Password Chairperson Password Profile Line Rate Maximum Number of Participants The following information is displayed in the General tab Table 12 1 Conference Properties General COO Display Name The Display Name is the conference name in native language and Unicode character sets to be displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client Note This field is displayed in all tabs Duration The expected duration of the conference using the format HH MM Note This field is displayed in all tabs Permanent Indicates whether the conference is set as a Permanent Conference Conference with no pre determined End Time This conference continues until it is terminated by an administrator operator or chairperson Note This field is displayed in all tabs Routing Name The ASCII name of the conference It can be used by H 323 and SIP participants for dialing in directl
22. moo f TestCP01_confProfiles xml already exists Are you sure you want to replace it Pte Te 6 Click Yes to replace the exported file or click No to cancel the export operation and return to the Conference Profiles list You can modify the export file name and restart the export operation Importing Conference Profiles You can import Conference Profiles from another MCU in your environment To import Conference Profiles 1 Inthe RMX Management pane expand the Rarely Used list 2 Click the Conference Profiles button 2 38 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane Sas amp xO Display Name Layout Line Ra Routing Encrypt Status s SagilCBC m 1920 Profile No OK DBA_Profile Auto Layout 4096 Profile No OK cjwei_test Auto Layout 1024 Profile No OK s Factory_Video_Profil i 384K Factor No OK ce Factory_GW_Profile Auto Layout 384K Factor No OK 3 Click the Import Conference Profiles E button or right click the Conference Profiles pane and then click Import Conference Profiles Export Selected Conference Profiles Profile Properties The Conference Profile Import dialog box is displayed Conference Profie Impot U B mone 4 Inthe Import Path field click Browse to navigate to the path and file name of the exported Conference Profiles you want to import
23. on page 20 10 Flags defined per Network Service override their general definition in the System Configuration 5 Click the Routers tab 6 Define the routers used in this network and that are other than the routers defined in the Management Network The field definitions of the Routers tab are the same as for the Default Management Network 7 Click the Gatekeeper tab 8 Define the Primary and Alternate Gatekeepers and at least one Alias for this network Service The field definitions of the Gatekeeper tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service In Multiple Services mode an Alias must be defined for the specified gatekeeper 9 Optional Click the Ports tab Settings in the Ports tab allow specific ports in the firewall to be allocated to multimedia conference calls If required defined the ports to be used multimedia conference calls handled by this Network Service The field definitions of the Ports tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service 10 If required click the QoS tab The Collaboration Server s implementation of QoS is defined per Network Service not per endpoint 4 The routers must support QoS in order for IP packets to get higher priority The field definitions of the QoS tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service 11 Click the SIP Servers tab 12 Define the Primary and Alternate SIP Server for this network Service Polycom Inc 16 33 Polycom RMX 1800
24. 172 223 242 Alias Name Type 7e4858 24006 Etes zi Website IP Address I Audio only Extension Identifier String 3 Define the following parameters Table 2 New Participant Dial out Cascade Link Li Enter the participant s name This field may not be left blank Duplicate participant names comma and semi colon characters may not be used in this field Dialing Direction Select Dial out IP Address Enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of the MCU running the other second conference where the cascade enabled Entry Queue is defined 5 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences Table 2 New Participant Dial out Cascade Link Continued Ki Ee Alias Name If you are using the target MCU IP address enter the Conference ID of the target conference For example 24006 If a gatekeeper is used instead of the IP address you can enter the prefix of the target MCU as registered with the gatekeeper as part of the dialing string and the conference ID in the format lt Target MCU Prefix gt lt Conference ID gt For example 92524006 If the conference has a password and you want to include the password in the dial string append the password to in the dial string after the Conference ID For example 9252400 6 1234 If the conference has a password and you do not want to include the password in the dial string set the ENABLE CASCADED LINK TO JOIN WITHOUT PASSWORD flag to YES For mor
25. 5118 Invalid MCU Version 5150 Music file error 5205 Unspecified problem ns 5207 Unit not responding 5209 Failed to mount Card folder 5401 The Log file system is disabled 5450 Action redirection failure 5601 Process terminated 5602 Terminal initiated MCU reset 5603 User initiated MCU reset 5604 Internal MCU reset 5605 MCU reset 5606 MCU Reset to enable Diagnostics mode 5607 Startup process failure 5801 Polycom default User exists For security reasons it is recommended Only in non to delete this User and create your own User Ultra Secure Mode 5904 Single clock source MCU is not configured for AVF gatekeeper mode ee 5950 5652 Hard disk error AA_HARD_DISK_FAILURE Not in use Port configuration modified Used for testing the Active Alarms mechanism 5551 5011 Polycom Inc 19 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 19 11 SNMP MIB entities that do not generate traps Continued 5001 License not found Not in use Product activation failure is trapped Defining the SNMP Parameters in the Collaboration Server The SNMP option is enabled via the Collaboration Server Web Client application The addresses of the Managers monitoring the MCU and other security information are defined in the Collaboration Server Web Client application and are saved on the MCU s hard disk Only users defined as Administrator can define or modify the SNMP security parameters in the Collaboration
26. 7 Signaling H 322 SIP ee R Media RTP RTCP DNS Server DNS a amp e RealPresence Collaboration Server preie a Web Glient schon Figure 16 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Multiple Network Topology Sample Guidelines On the Polycom RMX 1800 system when Multiple Network Services option is enabled the two network services must be configured to different subnets e Participants on different networks can connect to the same conference with full audio video and content capabilities e Traffic on one network does not influence or affect the traffic on other networks connected to the same MCU If one network fails it will not affect the traffic in the other connected networks e Maximum two network services and one management service can be defined 16 30 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services e Participants are associated with a Network Service and use its resources as follows Dial in participants according to the network used to place the call and connect to the Collaboration Server Dial out participant according to the Network Service selected during the participant properties definition or during conference definition according to the Network Service selected as default e Recording Links use the default Network Service to connect to conferences therefore the recording system must be defined on the default network to enable the recording Resource Allocation and Capacity The Video and Voice
27. A Display Name gt Video Quality gt Video Settings Duration Tal o e gt Audio Settings gt Customized Polling gt Skins gt IVR gt Information gt Recording gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services People Video Definition Video Quality Maximum Resolution Content Video Definition Content Settings Content Protocol Content Resolution es a ao 12 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The following information is displayed Table 12 3 Conference Properties Video Quality Parameters People Video Definition Video Quality Indicates the resolution and frame rate that determine the video quality set for the conference Possible settings are Motion or Sharpness For more information see Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing on page 4 1 Maximum Resolution Indicates the Maximum Resolution setting for the conference e Auto default indicates that the Maximum Resolution is as selected in the Resolution Configuration dialog box The Maximum Resolution settings for conferences and participants cannot be changed during an ongoing conference Content Video Definition Indicates if AS SIP is enabled for the conference For more information see Enabling AS SIP Content on page 23 51 Multiple Content Indicates if Multiple Content Resolutions mode for content sharing is Resolutions
28. Networking gt Network Service Name P Network Service gt Routers gt Conferencing gt Gatekeeper Default Router IP Address g Ports 1Pv4 102341044 ooo gt QoS gt SIP Servers IP Network Type H 323 amp SIP x ASSET Static Routes gt SIP Advanced Router IP Addre Remote IP Addrd Subnet Mask Remote Type 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Network a e With the exception of IP Network Type the field definitions of the Routers tab are the same as for the Default Management Network For more information see page 16 4 5 Optional Click the DNS tab Settings in this dialog box are relevant to Multiple Network Services only For more information see NAT Network Address Translation Traversal on page 16 23 Polycom Inc 16 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 6 Click the Gatekeeper tab gt Networking gt IP Network Service Name P Network Service gt Routers S IP Network Type H 323 amp SIP x Conferencing gt Gatekeeper Gatekeeper OF x gt Ports Primary Gatekeeper PoE IP Address or Name gt SIP Servers f Backup Gatekeeper gt Security IP Address or Name gt SIP Advanced MCU Prefix in Gatekeeper Service Mode board_hunting Refresh Registration every
29. PatyName PatyName Party ID Connection Type Bonding Mode Number Of Channels The login name of the operator who moved the participant to the conference The login name of the operator who moved the participant to the conference name of the operator who moved the participant to the conference The name of the source conference The name of the source conference of the source conference The identification number of the source conference as assigned by the MCU The name of the participant who was moved name of the The name of the participant who was moved who was moved The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU The connection type as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants The number of channels as follows 255 Auto Otherwise in range of 1 30 C 29 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 30 Table C 35 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued eee Net Channel Width Net Service Name Number Type Net SubService Name Number of Party Phone Numbers Number of MCU Phone Numbers The bandwidth of each channel This value is always 0 which represents a bandwidth of 1B which is the only bandwidth that is currently supported The name of the Network Service An empty field indicates the default Network Service
30. Polycom Version 8 1 8 September 2013 3725 69959 002 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Trademark Information POLYCOM and the names and marks associated with Polycom s products are trademarks and or service marks of Polycom Inc and are registered and or common law marks in the United States and various other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Patent Information The accompanying product may be protected by one or more U S and foreign patents and or pending patent applications held by Polycom Inc Product model Polycom RMX 1800 This software has not achieved UC APL certification This document provides the latest information for security conscious users running Version 8 1 software The information in this document is not intended to imply that DoD or DISA certifies Polycom RMX systems 4 For regulatory notices see the Polycom RMX 1800 Hardware Guide End User License Agreement Use of this software constitutes acceptance of the terms and conditions of the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1800 system end user license agreements EULA The EULA for your version is available on the Polycom Support page for the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1800 system 2013 Polycom Inc All rights reserved Polycom Inc 6001 America Center Drive San Jose CA 95002 USA No part of this document may be
31. Possible values TRACE t DEBUG d INFO_NORMAL n INFO_HIGH i WARN w ERROR e FATAL f OFF o Default n The maximum number of Recording Links available for selection in the Recording Links list and the Conference Profile Recording dialog box Range 1 100 Default 20 Low quality low frame rate video is prevented from being sent to endpoints by ensuring that an SD channel is not opened at frame rates below the specified value Range 0 30 Default 15 In H 239 enabled MIH Cascading when MGC is on level 1 setting this flag to YES will adjust the line rate of HD Video Switching conferences run on the Polycom RMX 1800 from 1920Kbps to 17897 100bits sec to match the actual rate of the HD Video Switching conference running on the MGC Note If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT is set to YES the IP_ENVIRONMENT_LINK flag must be set to NO Indicates how many times the Hello keep alive message is sent from the Collaboration Server to the endpoint in an environment that includes a Session Border Controller SBC with a 3 second interval between messages Range 1 to 10 Default 3 Enter the number re dialing attempts required Dialing may continue until the conference is terminated Default 3 20 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued i es OCSP_RESPONDER_TIME OUT PORT_GAUGE_ALARM PRESERVE_PARTY_CELL_ ON_FORCE_LA
32. Resolution 1472 1728 2048 4096 1920 HD720 5 rem eres me o oe mm Ce O l e e e e ww i O me e e The selection of the appropriate Content Resolution option when several options are available should be based on the line rate and capabilities that can be used by most or all endpoints connecting to the conference Examples e Ifthe conference Line Rate is 1024 kbps and e If the Content Settings selection is Graphics Content Resolutions of HD720 5 and HD1080 15 are selectable with 256 kbps and 768 kbps allocated as the Conference Content Rate respectively Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps Cascade Resolution fps CMe HD720 30 D1080 15 768 The higherContent Resolution HD1080 15 should be selected only if most of the endpoints connecting to the conference can support a Content Rate of 768Kbps which requires the participant to connect to the conference at a Line Rate of 1024kbps When the lower Content Resolution HD720 5 is selected the conference Content Rate is set to 256 kbps This will enable the endpoints that connect to the conference at a Line Rate of at least 768 kbps to receive content in the Content channel Endpoints that connect to the conference at a line rate lower than 768Kbps will not receive content Content Settings 4096 6144 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information e If the Content Setting
33. e Network type that the Collaboration Server connects to e IP address of the Collaboration Server Signaling Host e Subnet mask of the Collaboration Server s IP cards e Gatekeeper parameters or add gatekeepers to the Alternate Gatekeepers list e SIP server parameters 16 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Fast Configuration Wizard The Fast Configuration Wizard enables you to configure the Default IP Service It starts automatically if no Default IP Network Service is defined This happens during First Time Power up before the service has been defined or if the Default IP Service has been deleted followed by an Collaboration Server restart The IP Management Service tab in the Fast Configuration Wizard is enabled only if the factory default Management IP addresses were not modified If the Fast Configuration Wizard does not start automatically the Default IP Service must be modified through the IP Network Properties dialog boxes To view or modify the Default IP Service 1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane click IP Network Services i 2 Inthe Network list pane double click the Default IP Service Sir or a entry The Default IP Service Networking IP dialog box opens P Network Service Properties J gt Networking gt IP Network Service Name P Network Service gt Routers Ser onerencing IP Network Type H 323 amp SIP Zi gt Gatekeeper Signaling Host IP Addre
34. m m ee a gt SS Participant Alerts _ Port Usage Voice 07 48 Wi Video 26 778MM MCU State MAJOR If you are connecting to any MCU from the MCUs pane in the RMX Manager Main Screen and have defined the Username and Password for the connecting MCU the MCU icon changes to connected and its status type and number of audio and video resources are displayed in the MCUs pane If the Username and Password are missing from the MCU parameters or if the Remember Me check box has been cleared the Connect dialog box opens Username Password V Remember Login a e 2 Inthe Username field enter the user name with which you will login to the MCU 3 In the Password field enter the password as defined for the user name with which you will login to the MCU Polycom Inc 18 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 To add the user name and password to the MCU properties so you will not have to enter them each time you login to the MCU make sure that the Remember Login check box is selected Otherwise clear the Remember Login check box 5 Click OK The system connects to the Collaboration Server and the RMX Manager Main Screen is displayed If a User with the entered Username and Password is not defined in the Collaboration Server an error message is displayed and the system lets you re enter the Username and Password RMX Manager Main Screen The RMX Manager Main Screen is displayed only when at leas
35. 2 The format settings for audio messages need to be set only once The settings will then be applied to any new audio messages recorded The utility or facility used to record audio messages must be capable of producing audio files with the formats and attributes as shown in the following procedure namely PCM 16 000kHz 16Bit Mono Windows XP Sound Recorder is one of the utilities that can be used On your PC click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Entertainment gt Sound Recorder The Sound Sound Recorder dialog box opens 4j Sound Sound Recorder 0 x File Edit Effects Help Position a Length 0 00 sec 0 00 sec jA A A E To define the recording format click File gt Properties The Properties for Sound dialog box opens 15 27 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 15 28 3 4 5 Click the Convert Now button Properties for Sound E 21xl Details 4E Sound Copyright No Copyright information Length 0 00 sec Data Size 0 bytes Audio Format PCM 22 050 kHz 8 Bit Mono Format Conversion sje To adjust the sound quality or use less space for gt this sound click Convert Now Choose from Convert Now The Sound Selection dialog box opens In the Format field select PCM In the Attributes list select 16 000 kHz 16Bit Mono Sound Selection Name untitled X Save s Remove Format PCM Attributes 16 000 kHz 16 Bi
36. 5 Click OK to import the Conference Profiles Conference Profiles are not imported when A Conference Profile already exists An IVR Service does not exist for the related Conference Profile When Conference Profiles are not imported into the Conference Profiles list a Message Alert window is displayed with the profiles that were not imported Message Acts iii Current Message Number 1 Factory_Video_Profile Profile name already exists Factory_GW_Profile Profile name already exists ICBC Profile name already exists DBA_Profile Profile name already exists Conference Profiles that are not problematic are imported Polycom Inc 2 39 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 6 Click Cancel to exit the Message Alerts window The imported Conference Profiles appear in the Conference Profiles list 2 40 Polycom Inc Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing Polycom Inc G The following video resolution information applies to AVC CP Conferencing Mode The Polycom RMX 1800 always attempts to connect to endpoints at the highest line rate defined for the conference If the connection cannot be established using the conference line rate the Collaboration Server attempts to connect at the next highest line rate at its highest supported resolution Depending on the line rate the Collaborat
37. 80 MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAG Defines the maximum number of concurrent management EMENT_SESSIONS_PER_U sessions http and https connections per user SER Value 4 80 Default 10 MAX_PASSWORD_REPEAP Allows the administrator to configure the maximum number of ED_CHAR consecutive repeating characters to be allowed in a user password Range 1 4 Default 2 MCU_DISPLAY_NAME The name of the MCU that is displayed on the endpoint s screen when connecting to the conference Default POLYCOM RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 MIN_SYSTEM_DISK_SPACE Defines a minimum remaining Collaboration Server disk _TO_ALERT capacity in megabytes If the remaining disk capacity falls below this level an active alarm is raised Default 2048 MULTIPLE_SERVICES Determines whether the Multiple Services option is be activated once the appropriate license is installed Possible Values YES NO Default NO 20 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued cea ee ee ae NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_D This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of EFAULT_LEN chairperson passwords and determines the number of digits in the chairperson passwords assigned by the MCU Possible values are e Odisables the automatic password generation Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation of chairperson passwords if the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO e 1 16 default
38. 9 Inthe Collaboration Server Web Client Login screen enter the default Username POLYCOM and Password POLYCOM and click the Login button Remote access to the Collaboration Server s Alternate Management Network is supported via an external PSTN lt gt IP modem Polycom Inc F 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Polycom Inc Appendix G SIP RFC Support Table G 1 SIP RFC Support in RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX Systems 2032 RTP Payload for H 261 te ae a oo e C C C E C ee se Omer Ee wooo e o o C oe 3890 Transport Independent Bandwidth Modifier for SDP RP Payastomarernaee ei Sewntneen aus TePMataTanponngOP 4666 Sssontesitonrome SOF Polycom Inc G 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table G 1 SIP RFC Support in RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 5168 XML Schema for Media Control Fast Update cc transfer Call Transfer Capabilities in SIP Systems Continued Limited support Polycom Inc
39. Advance dialog box The option Encrypt When Possible enables the negotiation between the MCU and the endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants according to their capabilities where encryption is the preferred setting Defined participants that cannot connect encrypted are connected non encrypted with the exception of dial out SIP participants The same system behavior can be applied to undefined participants depending on the setting of the System Flag FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_ MODE e When set to NO and the conference encryption in the Profile is set to Encrypt When Possible both Encrypted and Non encrypted undefined participants can connect to the same conferences where encryption is the preferred setting e When set to YES default Undefined participants must connect encrypted otherwise they are disconnected For defined participants connection to the conference is decided according to the encryption settings in the conference Profile the Defined Participant s encryption settings For undefined participants connection to the conference is decided according to the encryption settings in the conference Profile the System Flag setting and the connecting endpoint s Media Encryption capabilities 4 28 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Direct Connection to the Conference Table 4 10 summarizes the connection status of participants based
40. Central Signaling indicating Recovery status Failed login attempt Failed to open Apache server configuration file Failed to save Apache server configuration file Fallback version is being used Polycom Inc 19 49 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 19 50 Table 19 23 Alerts and Faults Continued File system scan failure File system space shortage Internal MCU reset Internal System configuration during startup Invalid date and time Invalid MCU Version IP addresses of Signaling Host and Control Unit are the same IP Network Service configuration modified IP Network Service deleted Login Logout Management Session Time Out MCU Reset to enable Diagnostics mode MCU reset Music file error New activation key was loaded New version was installed NTP synchronization failure Polycom default User exists Private version is loaded Restoring Factory Defaults Secured SIP communication failed Session disconnected without logout SSH is enabled System Configuration modified System is starting System Resets TCP disconnection Terminal initiated MCU reset The Log file system is disabled Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Table 19 23 Alerts and Faults Continued The software contains patch es USB key used to change system configuration User closed the browser User initiated MCU reset Transac
41. Daat 180 Bs ite gt Gatekeeper Status RecoverySet 52 Level 1 RecoveryPackets 10 CustomMaxMBPS at 18 9000 MB s maxPacketSize 1400 CustomMaxFS at 2 512 MBs ISirenLPR_G64k 1 frame per packet customMaxBrAndCpb Value at 26 650000 IG719_48k 2 frames per packet bps G7221C 2 frames per packet sampleAspectRatios Value at 13 13 HV Rates are 1exQ 5000 bps IG722_64k 20 50 frames per packet G728 60 duration G71 Ulaw64k 40 milli packet duration G71 Alaw64k 40 milli packet duration oi 01 rate per second Level 1 3 standard CustomMaxMBPS at 98 49000 MB s ine Profile CustomMaxFS at 7 1792 MBs 13 customMaxBrAndCpb Value at 64 1600000 iMaxMBPS at 98 49000 MB s s MaxFS at 7 1792 MBs tios Value at 13 13 HAV MaxBrAndCpb Value at 64 1600000 H264 Tr t Obps z H239 ti List s the endpoint s capabilities as Displays the MCU s capabilities used for retrieved from the remote site connection with the participant 12 18 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring varda Properties SIP Participant ee pen eee AVC based gt Information Endpoint Type Svc purces z Ca D Remote Capabilities Remote Communication Mode gt Connection Status a SirenLPR_ScalabletodoVideoCap gt Channel Status gt Channel Status Adva Oramo rate par second gt Call Admission Control BaseLine Profile Level 22 CustomMaxMBPS at 44 22000 M
42. Kbps Content Not Supported 2 ee se ors ae The default resolution for all Content Rates is HD720p5 Modifying the Threshold Line Rate for HD Resolution Content The threshold line rate for HD Resolution Content is the line rate at which the Collaboration Server will send Content at HD1080 Resolution The default is 768 kbps When the threshold value is set to 0 HD720p HD1080p resolutions for Content sharing are disabled To modify the HD Resolution Content threshold line rate 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt System Configuration The System Flags dialog box opens Polycom Inc 4 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 4 5 In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab double click the MIN_H239_HD1080_RATE entry System Flags F gt MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER Flag Name Value A gt gt CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS ISDN_IDLE_CODE_E1 0x54 ISDN_IDLE_CODE_T1 ISDN_NUM_OF_DIGITS ISDN_RESOURCE_POLICY IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME IVR_ROLL_CALL_VOLUME LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT MAX_CP_RESOLUTION MCU DISPLAY NAME MIN_H239_HD1080_RATE MS_ENVIRONMENT NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN NUMERIC CONF ID MAX LEN 0x13 9 LOAD_BALANCE 6 5 5 CP_LAYOUT_1P7 HD1080 POLYCOM RMX 2000 768 YES 5 16 Edit Flag Delete Flag New Flag The Update Flag dialog box is displayed In the Value field enter the minimum line rate at which HD1080 Resolution Content will
43. P_REDIRECT Messages ICMP message type 5 For more information see Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP on page 23 51 Possible values YES NO e Default YES ENABLE_AGC Set this flag to YES to enable the AGC option Default setting is NO When disabled selecting the AGC option in the Participant Properties has not effect on the participant audio For more information see Managing the Address Book on page 8 7 The Auto Gain Control mechanism regulates noise and audio volume by keeping the received audio signals of all participants balanced Note Enabling AGC may result in amplification of background noise Polycom Inc 20 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 20 4 Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued i ENABLE_AUTO_EXTENSIO N ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK _TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_PASS WORD ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SY STEM_ALARMS ENFORCE_SAFE_UPGRAD E ENABLE_SENDING_ICMP_ DESTINATION_UNREACHA BLE FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOC ATION When set to YES allows conferences running on the Collaboration Server to be automatically extended as long as there are participants connected and the system has free resources Set this flag to NO prevent conference duration from being automatically extended It can also be used to enable the definition of conference duration that is shorter than is 11 minutes Default YES Note If this flag is set to e YES Gateway Calls are not limited in dura
44. Possible values Enter 0 to disable the automatic generation of passwords Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation of conference passwords provided the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO If the default is used in non secured mode the system will automatically generate conference passwords that contain 6 characters This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of chairperson passwords The length of the automatically generated passwords is determined by the flag value Possible values Enter 0 to disable the automatic generation of passwords Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation of chairperson passwords provided the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO If the default is used in non secured mode the system will automatically generate chairperson passwords that contain 6 characters If the default password length defined by the NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN or NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT LEN does not fall within the range defined by the minimum and maximum length an appropriate fault is added to the Faults list 20 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 20 26 Polycom Inc Collaboration Server Hardware Monitoring The status and properties of the Collaboration Server hardware components can be viewed in the Hardware Monitor list pane Viewing the Status of the Hardware Components Polycom Inc The Hardware Monitor s status column displays the
45. RMX is displayed instead as a general indication To display the RMX Manager main screen you must connect to one of the listed Collaboration Servers For more details see Connecting to the MCU on page 18 4 Connecting to the MCU Once an MCU is defined the RMX Manager can be connected to it This allows you to set up conferences make reservations monitor On Going Conferences and perform other activities on several MCUs The first Collaboration Server unit that is connected to the RMX Manager dictates the Authorization Level of Users that can connect to the other MCUs on the list For example if the Authorization level of the User POLYCOM is Administrator all Users connecting to the other MCUs on the list must be Administrators Each user can have a different login name and password for each of the listed MCUs and they must be defined in the Users list of each of the listed MCUs To connect the RMX Manager to an MCU 1 Inthe MCUs pane or screen use one of the following methods a Double click the MCU icon b Select the Collaboration Server to connect and click the Connect MCU button 18 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application c Right click the MCU icon and then click Connect MCU pC Remove MCU Stop Monitoring Export RMX Manager Configuration Import RMX Manager Configuration MCU Properties If you are connecting to the MCU from the MCUs opening screen and
46. RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide All media channels are encrypted video audio and FECC Collaboration Server SRTP implementation complies with Microsoft SRTP implementation LPR is not supported with SRTP The ENABLE_SIRENLPR_SIP_ENCRYPTION System Flag enables the SirenLPR audio algorithm when using encryption with the SIP protocol The default value of this flag is NO meaning SirenLPR is disabled by default for SIP participants in an encrypted conference To enable SirenLPR the System Flag must be added to system cfg and its value set to YES The SEND_SRTP_MKI System Flag enables or disables the inclusion of the MKI field in SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration Server The default value of the flag is YES Add the flag to system cfg and set its value set to NO to disable the inclusion of the MKI field in SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration Server when using endpoints that cannot decrypt SRTP based audio and video streams if the MKI Master Key Identifier field is included in SRTP packets sent by the Collaboration Server This System Flag should not be set to NO when HDX endpoints Microsoft Office Communicator and Lync Clients For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Mixing Encrypted and Non encrypted Endpoints in one Conference Mixing encrypted and non encrypted endpoints in one conference is possible based on the Encryption option Encrypt When Possible in the Conference Profile
47. The New Entry Queue IVR Service Conference ID dialog box opens New Entry Queue IVR Service Entry Queue IVR Service Name Request Confer Retry Conferen 7 Select the voice messages Table 15 11 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Conference ID Request Conference Prompts the participant for the conference ID ID Retry Conference ID When the participant entered an incorrect conference ID requests the participant to enter the ID again 8 Assign an audio file to each message type as follows Inthe Message File column click the table entry and then select the appropriate audio message 9 Click the General tab Entry Queue IVR Service Name Enty Queue IVR Servic Message File No Video Resources Audio Only No_Video_Resources_Audio_Only wav Polycom Inc 15 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 15 22 13 The administrator can enable an audio message that informs the participant of the lack of Video Resources in the Collaboration Server and that he she is being connected as Audio Only The message states All video resources are currently in use Connecting using audio only The following guidelines apply The IVR message applies to video participants only Audio Only participants will not receive the message Only H 323 and SIP participants receive the audio message The audio message is the first message after the call is connected preceding al
48. There is one event for each participant defined before the conference started Information about the IP address of the participant For more information about the fields see Table C 16 Event fields for Event 15 H323 CALL SETUP on page C 19 An H 323 participant connected to the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 17 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED on page C 20 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 2 CDR Event Types Continued NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT BILLING CODE SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME DTMF CODE FAILURE SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED RECORDING LINK SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS GATEKEEPER INFORMATION PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE A new undefined participant joined the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 18 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT on page C 22 A billing code was entered by a participant using DTMF codes For more information about the fields see Table C 20 Event Fields for Event 20 BILLING CODE on page C 24 A user assigned a new name to a participant or an end point sent its name For more information about the fields see Table C 21 Event Fields for Event 21 SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME on page C 25 An error occurred when a participant entered a DTMF code F
49. This field is only relevant to dial in participants Memog The method by which the destination conference is identified as follows 1 Called IP address or alias 2 Calling IP address or alias Meet Me Method Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The meet me per method as follows 3 Meet me per participant Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 18 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT Continued ea Seen yn Network Type The type of network between the participant and the MCU as follows 2 H 323 5 SIP H 243 Password Not supported This field remains empty Chair Not supported Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol as follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 4 H 264 255 Auto Broadcasting The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant Volume The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB Undefined Indicates whether are not the participant is an undefined participant as Participant follows 0 The participant is not an undefined participant 2 The participant is an undefined participant Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal Bonding Phone Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants Number The phone number for Bonding dial out calls Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates from two up to thirty 64
50. To stop the Audible Alarm on the Collaboration Server Client or RMX Manager gt gt On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt Audible Alarms gt Stop Repeating Alarm When selected all audible alarms are immediately stopped Configuring the Audible Alarms 19 30 User Customization The operators and administrators can e Enable Disable the Audible Alarm e Select whether to repeat the Audible Alarm e Define the number of repetitions and the interval between the repetitions To Customize the Audio Alert on the Collaboration Server Client or RMX Manager 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt Audible Alarms gt User Customization Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities The User Customization window opens serCustomization Awaiting Operator Assistance MV Enable Audible Alarm V Repeat Audible Alarm Number of Repetitions 4 Repetition interval in seconds 20 2 Define the following parameters Table 19 17 Audible Alarm User Customization Options oe lew Enable Audible Alarm Select this check box to enable the Audible Alarm feature and to define its properties When this check box is cleared the Audible Alarm functionality is disabled Repeat Audible Alarm Select this check box to play the Audible Alarm repeatedly When selected it enables the definition of the number of repetitions and the interval between repetitions
51. UDP and BFCP channels This is necessary because port mappings in the firewall are kept open only if there is network traffic in both directions The firewall will only allow UDP packets into the network through ports that have been used to send packets out By default the Collaboration Server sends a FW NAT Keep Alive message every 30 seconds As there is no traffic on the Content and FECC channels as a call begins the firewall will not allow any incoming packets from the Content and FECC channels in until the Collaboration Server sends out the first of the FW NAT Keep Alive messages 30 seconds after the call starts If Content or FECC are required within the first 30 seconds of a call the FW NAT Keep Alive Interval should be modified to a lower value To enable and modify FW NAT Keep Alive FW NAT Keep Alive is enabled in the New Profile Advanced dialog box gt General Display Name gt Video Quality Line Rate 384 Kops v gt Video Settings F Conferencing Mode gt Audio Settings g CP Continuous Presence v gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording Encryption oimn SSI gt Site Names E gt Message Overlay Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA gt Network Services I Auto Terminate Before First Joins 10 Minutes At the End 1 be kk Minutes After last participant quits C When last participant remains I Auto Redialing Exclusive Content Mode TIP Compa
52. When cleared the Audible Alarm will not be repeated and will be played only once Number of Define the number of times the audible alarm will be played Repetitions Default number of repetitions is 4 Repetition interval in Define the number of seconds that the system will wait before playing seconds the Audible Alarm again Default interval is 20 seconds 3 Click OK Replacing the Audible Alarm File Each Collaboration Server is shipped with a default tone file in wav format that plays a specific tone when participants request Operator Assistance This file can be replaced by a wav file with your own recording The file must be in wav format and its length cannot exceed one hour Only the User with Administrator permission can download the Audible Alarm file To replace the Audio file on the Collaboration Server Client or RMX Manager 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt Audible Alarms gt Download Audible Alarm File The Download Audible Alarm File window opens Polycom Inc 19 31 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 19 32 2 Click the Browse button to select the audio file wav to download The Open dialog box opens Look in Bt EERE e mee e 1 My Computer My Recent My Network Places EE ED shortcut to Canon PowerShot 5410 E L Shortcut to History 143 Shortcut to My Recent Documents Desktop 3 Shortcut to OperwSinstall f Shortcut to PDF Output ja Shortcut to Versions
53. affect the audio and video quality For more information see Appendix E Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information on page E 1 6 Optional for H 323 AVC based participants Click the Gatekeeper Status tab to view its parameters fare Properties gt General gt Advanced Name Marc Endpoint Website gt Information Endpoint Type AVC gt Media Sources gt H 245 i Requested Bandwidth gt Connection Status gt Channel Status Allocated Bandwidth gt Channel Status Adva Viewing Permissions KEIR MUSHU ECE Gatekeeper State a S g i D TENE EESE Tab O lt Gatekeeper v Status Add to Address Book Table 12 12 Participant Properties Gatekeeper Status Parameters E Requested The bandwidth requested by the MCU from the gatekeeper Bandwidth Allocated Bandwidth The actual bandwidth allocated by the gatekeeper to the MCU Required Info Interval Indicates the interval in seconds between registration messages that the MCU sends to the gatekeeper to indicate that it is still connected 12 24 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring Table 12 12 Participant Properties Gatekeeper Status Parameters Continued Si aE Gatekeeper State Indicates the status of the participant s registration with the gatekeeper and the bandwidth allocated to the participant The following statuses may be displ
54. amp Participant Move If more than one Collaboration Server is monitored in the RMX Manager the Audible Alarm must be enabled separately for each Collaboration Server installed in the site configuration A different wav file can be selected for each MCU When multiple Audible Alarms are activated in different conferences or by multiple MCUs the Audible Alarms are synchronized and played one after the other It is important to note that when Stop Repeating Alarm is selected from the toolbar from the Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager all activated Audible Alarms are immediately halted For more details on Audible alarms and their configuration see Audible Alarms on page 19 29 Moving Participants Between Conferences Polycom Inc The Collaboration Server User can move participants between ongoing conferences including the Operator conference and from the Entry Queue to the destination conference if help is required When moving between conferences or when a participant is moved from an Entry Queue to a conference by the Collaboration Server user after failure to enter the correct destination ID or conference password the IVR messages and slide display are skipped Move Guidelines e Move between conferences can be performed without an active Operator conference e When moving the conference chairperson from his her conference to another conference the source conference will automatically end if the Auto Termin
55. default DTMF code 00 Participants in Entry Queues who failed to enter the correct destination conference ID or the conference password will wait for operator assistance provided that an Operator conference is active Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring When requiring or requesting operator assistance the Collaboration Server management application displays the following View Administration Setup Help RMX IP Address 172 22 191 95 Sig Cor es 2 E Tra rticipants EP 21 Pix ht me l gx W a pew kO Bae HF ie Display Name Status ID Start Tir Name Status Role IP Addres Alias Na Ne SS SUPPORT Single Participant 37160 7 45 Ph I sales 1 participant sales A Awaiting Operator Sing 43430 9 03 PW x Duke i Awaiting Individual assistance 172 22 H e The participant s connection Status changes reflecting the help request For details see Table 12 6 e The conference status changes and it is displayed with the exclamation point icon and the status Awaiting Operator e The appropriate voice message is played to the relevant participants indicating that assistance will be provided shortly The following icons and statuses are displayed in the Participant Status column Table 12 6 Participants List Status Column Icons and Indications r Awaiting Individual The participant has requested the o
56. gt General a Aed Display Name gt Video Quality Line Rate 384 Kbp v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR Enable gt Recording Content gt Site Names Font Size F gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Color z Vertical Position 10 WW Display Repetition 3 Display Speed Slow v AaBbC 4 UW o l ea Message Overlay enables you to send text messages to all participants during ongoing Continuous Presence conferences The text message is seen as part of the in the participant s video layout on the endpoint screen or desktop display For more details see Message Overlay for Text Messaging on page 2 33 Define the following fields Table 2 14 New AVC Profile Message Overlay Parameters Co Enable Select this check box to enable Message Overlay Clear this check box to disable Message Overlay Default Cleared Note e The Message Overlay field is shaded and disabled when Video Switching mode is selected in the New Profile General tab All other fields in this tab are also disabled Clearing the Enable check box enables Video Switching for selection in the New Profile General tab If Message Overlay is selected the Video Switching check box in the New Profile General tab is disabled and cannot be selected Content Enter the message text The message text can be up to 50 Chinese characters Polycom Inc
57. the Entry Queue IVR Service prompts the participant for a destination conference ID Once the correct information is entered the participant is transferred to the destination conference Setting a Transit Entry Queue The Collaboration Server factory default settings define the Default Entry Queue also as the Transit Entry Queue You can designate another Entry Queue as the Transit Entry Queue Only one Transit Entry Queue may be defined per Collaboration Server and selecting another Entry Queue as the Transit Entry Queue automatically cancels the previous selection To designate an Entry Queue as Transit Entry Queue 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management Rarely Used pane click Entry Queues 7 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 Inthe Entry Queues list right click the Entry Queue entry and then click Set Transit Entry Queue Fentry Queues 3 Display Name ID 86599 37879 000 Delete Entry Queue Set Transit Entry Queue Entry Queue Properties The Entry Queue selected as Transit Entry Queue is displayed in bold To cancel the Transit Entry Queue setting 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management Rarely Used pane click Entry Queues 2 Inthe Entry Queues list right click the Transit Entry Queue entry and then click Cancel Transit Entry Queue 7 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 7 Entry Queues Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories SIP Factories A SIP Factory is a co
58. the default layout automatically selected for the conference contains more cells than the number of connected participants resulting in an empty cell For example if the number of connected participants is 4 the default layout is 2x2 but as only 3 participants are displayed in the layout the participants do not see themselves one cell is empty Table 2 8 Auto Layout Default Layouts in CP Conferences Number of Video Participants Auto Layout Default Settings Polycom Inc 2 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 2 8 Auto Layout Default Layouts in CP Conferences Continued Number of Video Participants Auto Layout Default Settings In layout 2 8 the two central windows display the last two speakers in the conference the current speaker and the previous speaker To minimize the changes in the layout when anew speaker is identified the previous speaker is replaced by the new speaker while the current speaker remains in his her window The Collaboration Server supports the VUI addition to the H 264 protocol for endpoints that transmit wide video 16 9 in standard 4SIF resolution 2 18 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles 10 To select the Video Layout for the conference click the required number of windows from the layouts bar and then select the windows array The selected layout is displayed in the Video Layout pane Table 2 9 Video Layout Options Av
59. time period The cyclic display only occurs when the number of participants is larger than the number of cells in the layout Guidelines e Participants that are in the conference layout will not appear in the Auto Scan enabled cell e If Customized Polling is not used to define the order of the Auto Scan it will proceed according to order in which the participants connected to the conference e If the user changes the conference layout the Auto Scan settings are not exported to the new layout If the user changes the conference layout back to the layout in which Auto Scan was enabled Auto Scan with the previous settings will be resumed 4 24 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Enabling Auto Scan and Customized Polling Auto Scan To enable Auto Scan 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Web Client Main Screen Conference list pane double click the conference or right click the conference and then click Conference Properties 2 Inthe Conference Properties General dialog box click Video Settings The Video Settings tab is displayed Sales PO er a gt General Display Name Sales gt Customized Polling I Presentation Mode gt Skins gt IVR gt Information I Lecturer View Switching gt Recording Lecturer Pisas z gt Site Names r Auto Scan gt Message Overlay Auto Scan Interval s PIETE Interval s lt 4 Drop Down Aulo SBa Menu
60. video To modify the number of UDP ports Enter the first and last port numbers in the range and the range must be 1024 ports settings and issue a warning Calls will be rejected when the Collaboration Server s ports are 4 If the network administrator does not specify an adequate port range the system will accept the exceeded 10 If required click the QoS tab P Network Service Properties gt gt Networking gt 1P Network Service Name IP Network Service gt Routers IP Network Type H 323 8 SIP X gt Conferencing gt Gatekeeper I Enable gt Ports gt Qos Type Diffserv z gt SIP Servers gt Security gt SIP Advanced Quality of Service QoS is important when transmitting high bandwidth audio and video information QoS can be measured and guaranteed in terms of e Average delay between packets e Variation in delay jitter e Transmission error rate DiffServ and Precedence are the two QoS methods supported by the Collaboration Server These methods differ in the way the packet s priority is encoded in the packet header The Collaboration Server s implementation of QoS is defined per Network Service not per endpoint The routers must support QoS in order for IP packets to get higher priority Polycom Inc 16 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 11 View or modify the following fields Table 16 8 Default IP Service
61. where 0 is the lowest priority and 5 is the highest The recommended priority is 4 for audio and 4 for video to ensure that the delay for both packet types is the same and that audio and video packets are synchronized and to ensure lip sync TOS Select the type of Service TOS that defines optimization tagging for routing the conferences audio and video packets e Delay The recommended default for video conferencing prioritized audio and video packets tagged with this definition are delivered with minimal delay the throughput of IP packets minimizes the queue sequence and the delay between packets None No optimization definition is applied This is a compatibility mode in which routing is based on Precedence priority settings only Select None if you do not know which standard your router supports 16 14 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services 12 Click the SIP Servers tab gt Networking gt IP Network Service Name P Network gt Routers P H IP X Ec conferencing IP Network Type 323 amp S Zi gt Gatekeeper ans erver Specify X gt Ports gt Qos SIP Server Type Microsoft a gt SIP Servers gt Security gt SIP Advanced Refresh Registration every 3600 seconds Certificate Method CSR zi Send Certificate SIP Servers Parameter Primary Server Alternate Server Server IPAddr crplyncfeprd01 Server Domain polycom com Port
62. 06 2 22 190 40 172 22 190 40 Normal RMX 20 V Display N s 172 22 190 40 Marc Empt 73f35 16 23 Rarely Used x 3 Click the New Reservation F button For more information see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Starting a Reservation on page 3 20 Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a Template An ongoing conference or a Reservation can be started from any Conference Template saved in the Conference Templates list of the selected MCU To start an ongoing conference or a reservation from a Template 1 Inthe MCUs pane select the MCU to run the conference 1 Inthe Conference Templates list select the Template you want to start as an ongoing conference 2 Click the Start Conference from Template E button to start a conference or Schedule Reservation from Template 3 button to schedule a reservation or Right click and select Start Conference from Template to start an ongoing conference or Schedule Reservation from Template to schedule a reservation 18 14 Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application Name of selected MCU Name of selected MCU 172 22 190 40 Conterence Templates 6 172 22 190 4 fanference templates 6 tea ey TEREPRE Display Nafpe Status Display Name tatus Li SuPPO SUPPO New Conference Template E ew Conference Template Delete Conference Template S SUPPO of Start Conference f
63. 1 If an MGC is deployed on level 1 MGC or Collaboration Server can be used on level 2 Conference A Conference B ID 12345 Dial out e A a Participant fa ee RMX MCU A Slave RMX MCU B Master MCU Prefix in GK 76 Dial out Participant RMX MCU D Slave RMX MCU C Slave Figure 5 3 Master Slave Star Cascading Topology When creating a cascading link between two Collaboration Servers The Collaboration Servers operate in CP Continuous Presence mode When creating a cascading link between MGCs and Collaboration Servers The following table summarizes Video Session Modes line rate options that need to be selected for each conference in the cascading hierarchy according to the cascading topology Table 1 MIH Cascading Video Session Mode and Line Rate Video Session Collaboration Levelt Server CP HD e Mb s Collaboration S Level 2 Server Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences Table 1 MIH Cascading Video Session Mode and Line Rate Continued Video Session f Collaboration Server Collaboration Server Level 1 CP CIF 768Kb s 2Mb s Collaboration Ena CIF 264 768Kb s 2Mb s Level 2 Server a ar VSW HD Collaboration VSW HD 1 5Mb s Level 2 Server To establish the links between two Collaboration Servers requires the following procedures be performed e Establish the Master Slave relationships between the cascaded co
64. 12 Event Fields for Event 2007 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 Ps ees Mux Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 Audio Codec Board Not supported ID Always contains the value 0 Audio Codec Unit Not supported ID Always contains the value 0 Audio Bridge Board Not supported ID Always contains the value 0 ID Video Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 Video Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 T 120 Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 T 120 Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 T 120 MCS Board Not supported ID Always contains the value 0 T 120 MCS Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 H 323 Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 H323 Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 Audio Bridge Unit Not supported Always contains the value 0 Table C 13 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 DEFINED PARTICIPANT USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT Fa User Name The login name of the user who added the participant to the conference or updated the participant properties Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Dialing Direction The dialing direction as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 13 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 DEFINED PAR
65. 120 2 5555 Depending on the format used to enter the information in the IP address and Alias fields select H 323 ID or E 164 for multiple Recording links E mail ID and Participant Number are also available 13 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 Click OK The Recording Link is added to the Collaboration Server unit Enabling the Recording Features in a Conference IVR Service To record a conference a Conference IVR Service in which the recording messages and DTMF codes are activated must be assigned to the conference The default Conference IVR Service shipped with the Collaboration Server includes the recording related voice messages and default DTMF codes that enable the conference chairperson to control the recording process from the endpoint You can modify these default settings To modify the default recording settings for an existing Conference IVR Service 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the IVR Services aj button The IVR Services are listed in the IVR Services list pane 2 To modify the default recording settings double click the Conference IVR Service or right click and select Properties The Conference IVR Service Properties dialog box is displayed 3 To assign voice messages other than the default click the General tab and scroll down the list of messages to the recording messages onference IVR Service Properties x gt Global gt Welcome Conference I
66. 120 seconds Aliases Alias Type Non No Non No Non Pox 7 Modify the following fields Table 16 6 Default IP Service Conferencing Gatekeeper Parameters fee ee Sees ded Gatekeeper Select Specify to enable configuration of the gatekeeper IP address When Off is selected all gatekeeper options are disabled Primary Gatekeeper Enter either the gatekeeper s host name as IP Address or Name registered in the DNS or IP address Backup Gatekeeper Enter the DNS host name or IP address of the IP Address or Name gatekeeper used as a fallback gatekeeper used when the primary gatekeeper is not functioning properly MCU Prefix in Enter the number with which this Network Service registers in the Gatekeeper gatekeeper This number is used by H 323 endpoints as the first part of their dial in string when dialing the MCU Register as Gateway Select this check box if the Collaboration Server is to be seen as a gateway for example when using a Cisco gatekeeper 16 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services Table 16 6 Default IP Service Conferencing Gatekeeper Parameters Continued HS Refresh Registration The frequency with which the system informs the gatekeeper that it is every___ seconds active by re sending the IP address and aliases of the system to the gatekeeper If the system does not register within the defined time interval the gatekeeper will not refer calls to the system until it re registe
67. 172 22 187 18 H 323 Dia Rex 172 21 41 106 172 21 41 106 H 323 Dia Rex 172 21 41 107 172 21 41 107 H 323 Dia E 172 21 41 108 172 21 41 108 H 323 Dia 3 Click the matching pattern to be applied The filtered list is displayed with a filter indicator F displayed in the selected column heading Example If the user selects 172 21 41 104 as the matching pattern the filtered group in the Address Book is displayed as follows Selected Column Active Filter Indicator amp amp Ee r Xo Hierarchy 2 P Address Ph Y Alias Name S1 Y Networ E ap Main tex 172 21 41 104 172 21 41 104 H 323 a Test iJ IcBc Keren g icac 1 Entry matching 172 21 41 104 in filtered group Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Filtering Address Book Data Using a Custom Pattern To filter the data in an address book group 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group to filter 2 Inthe Address Book List pane in the column that you want to use for filtering click the filter F button 3 Select the Custom option from the drop down list Selected Column Filter Button i g CH EL ey Hierarchy a Type Address Ph W Alias Name SI Y Network Dial_ A E A a g Main Reuse 4 Wee Rex 472 22 186 23 H 323 Dia ICBC Q NonBlanks ap Keren 172 21 41 104 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dia R 172 21 41 105 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dia A 172 21 41 106 o isd ak
68. 1800 Administrator s Guide 13 12 Polycom Inc 14 Users Connections and Notes Users User Types Polycom Inc Collaboration Server Web Client users are defined in the User s table and can connect to the MCU to perform various operations A maximum of 100 users can be defined per MCU The MCU supports the following user Authorization Levels Administrator Operator Machine Account Application user Administrator Read only Chairperson Auditor Users with Auditor authorization level cannot connect to the Collaboration Server via the RMX Manager application and must use the Collaboration Server Web Client The authorization level determines a user s capabilities within the system Administrator An administrator can define and delete other users and perform all configuration and maintenance tasks Administrator Read only A user with Administrator permission with the same viewing and monitoring permissions of a regular Administrator However this user is limited to creating system backups and cannot perform any other configuration or conference related operation Operator An Operator can manage Meeting Rooms Profiles Entry Queues and SIP Factories and can also view the Collaboration Server configurations but cannot change them Administrator and Operator users can verify which users are defined in the system Neither of them can view the user passwords but an Administrator can c
69. 2 27 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 2 14 New AVC Profile Message Overlay Parameters Continued cas IG Font Size Vertical Position Display Repetition Display Speed 2 28 Click the arrows to adjust the font size points for the Message Overlay display Range 9 32 Default 24 Note In some languages for example Russian when a large font size is selected both rolling and static messages may be truncated if the message length exceeds the resolution width From the drop down menu select the color and background of the Message Overlay display text The choices are AaBbCc AaBbCe AaBbCc AaBbCe AaBbCc Default White Text on Red Background Move the slider to the right to move the vertical position of the Message Overlay downward within the Video Layout Move the slider to the left to move the vertical position of the Message Overlay upward within the Video Layout Default Top Left 10 Click the arrows to increase or decrease the number of times that the text message display is to be repeated Default 3 Select whether the text message display is static or moving across the screen the speed in which the text message moves e Static e Slow e Fast Default Slow Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles As the fields are modified the Preview changes to show the effect of the changes For example aa amp Small Text White on red Top Middle Small
70. 21 41 107 172 21 41 108 172 21 41 109 172 21 41 110 172 21 41 111 172 21 41 112 172 21 41 113 172 21 41 114 172 21 41 115 172 21 41 116 172 21 41 117 CEP EP EEE ERLE ERS 3 172 21 41 118 Clearing the Filter 172 21 41 104 172 21 41 105 172 21 41 106 172 21 41 107 172 21 41 108 172 21 41 109 172 21 41 110 172 21 41 111 172 21 41 112 172 21 41 113 172 21 41 114 172 21 41 115 172 21 41 116 172 21 41 117 172 21 41 118 To clear the filter and display all entries 1 In the filtered Address Book column heading click the Active Filter indicator H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 The pattern matching options menu is displayed Click All Aragan W a ess P Y Alias Name SI Y Networ Hierarchy a Type ex am P Add a g Main 41 104 GY Test R CEAk E 172 21 41 105 pee le ee ea Ra 172 21 41 105 172 21 41 107 A 172 21 41 106 EEE ax 172 21 41 107 _ Ra 172 21 41 109 172 21 41 109 Rex 172 21 41 110 172 21 41 110 Ra 172 21 41 111 172 21 41 111 Rx 172 21 41 112 172 21 41 112 Rar 172 21 41 113 172 21 41 113 Rar 172 21 41 114 172 21 41 114 Re 172 21 41 115 172 21 41 115 Re 172 21 41 116 172 21 41 116 Rex 172 21 41 117 172 21 41 117 Ra 172 21 41 118 172 21 41 118 The filter is deactivated and all the group level entries are displayed H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H
71. 264 HD default The H 264 HD option should be selected only if most endpoints in the conference support H 264 to ensure high quality Content When this protocol option is selected endpoints must connect at Content bit rates above a minimum as specified by specific System Flags to ensure high quality Content for all participants For more information about System Flags see Setting the Minimum Content Rate for Each Content Quality Setting for H 264 HD on page 4 9 Bit rate allocation to the Content channel by the Collaboration Server is dynamic according to the conference line rate and Content Setting selected for the conference For more information see Content Sharing Parameters in Content Highest Common Content Video Switching Mode on page 4 5 Endpoints that do not support H 264 or those that do not meet the minimum line rate threshold for the Content Settingwill not receive content Guidelines e Only endpoints that support H 264 capability at a resolutions of HD720p5 or higher will be able to receive and send Content e The minimum Content Rate required for allowing a participant to share Content is the lower valued parameter when comparing the System Flag setting Table 4 6 and the content bit rate allocation derived from the conference line rate When the flag settings enable an endpoint to share Content at a content rate that is lower than the conference content rate the content rate of the entire conference is reduced to
72. 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 H 323 Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Obtaining the Display Name from the Address Book Guidelines The MCU can be configured to replace the name of the dial in participant as defined in the endpoint site name with the name defined in the Address Book In this process the system retrieves the data name alias number or IP address of the dial in participant and compares it first with the conference defined dial in participants and if the endpoint is not found it then searches for the endpoint with entries in the address book After a match is found the system displays the participant name as defined in the address book instead of the site name in both the video layout and the Collaboration Server Web Client Manager The system compares the following endpoint data with the address book entries e For H 323 participants the system compares the IP address Alias or H 323 number e For SIP participants the system compares the IP address or the SIP URI Guidelines e Only Users with Administrator and Operator Authorization Levels are allowed to enable and disable the Obtain Display Name from Address Book feature e This feature is supported only for IPv4 participants Enabling and Disabling the Obtain Display Name from Address Book Feature Polycom Inc Enabling and Disabling the Obtain Display Name from Address Book Feature The Obtain Display Name from Address Book optio
73. 4 Selecta destination folder and enter the file name 5 Click Save Participant Alerts Participant Alerts enables users participants and conferences to be prompted and currently connected This includes all participants that are disconnected idle on standby or waiting for dial in Alerts are intended for users or administrators to quickly see all participants that need their attention To view the Participants Alerts list 1 Click the red blinking Participants Alerts indication bar The Participant Alerts pane opens Participant Alerts EP 1 COT Conference Name Status Disconnection Ti Role IP Address Phone AliasName SIP Network Dialing Direc Mare Rex HDX 4000 T gh Awaiting Individ 10 253 72 24 SIP amp amp Dial out 4 MIT information see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Participant Level Monitoring on The Participant Alerts pane displays similar properties to that of the Participant List pane For more page 3 36 2 To resolve participant issues that created the Participant Alerts the administrator can either Connect x Disconnect 9 or Delete 3 a participant Polycom Inc 19 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide RMX Time To ensure accurate conference scheduling the MCU has an internal clock that can function in standalone mode or in synchronization with up to three Network Time Protocol NTP servers Guidelines e NTP Version 4 is the
74. AB 1 32 3 Voltage 115 12 1 64 1 69 13 VDIMM CD 1 32 13 Voltage 1 15 1 2 1 64 1 69 14 11V 1 08 1 1 Voltage 0 92 0 97 1 21 1 26 15 415V 1 47 S Voltage 1 29 1 34 1 64 1 69 16 aav 231 32 Voltage 2 78 2 92 3 64 3 79 17 3 3VSB 3 35 3 2 Voltage 2 78 2 92 3 64 3 79 18 5V 4 99 5 Voltage 4 28 4 48 S5 5 69 19 5VSB 5 05 5 Voltage 4 28 4 48 ae 5 69 20 nv 11 76 12 Voltage 10 49 10 81 13 25 13 51 21 BAT 3 16 3 2 Voltage 2 54 2 68 3 31 3 45 24 CPU Usage 12 0 IPMI System 1 2 950 990 A gt Unit ID Card ID Type Error Level Description The Active Alarms dialog box displays fields that relate to faults and errors detected on the Collaboration Server by sensors The Active Alarms dialog box is divided into two sections hardware Alarm List and SW Alarm List Each section s alarm list can be saved as a xls file by clicking the Save HW Alarm List and Save SW Alarm List buttons respectively Each alarm list color codes the severity of the alarm Critical RED Major ORANGE and Normal GREEN To view the card properties 1 Inthe Hardware Monitor pane right click and select properties for the desired card gt General Info gt Active Alarms The mapping between the DSP slot IDs and the physical PCI slots is as the following Hardware Version Firmware Version Serial Number Card Type Card Part Number Card MAC Address 1 Card MAC Address 2 m MRD2 1G0 0 2 0 2 NetraDSP V100 0 0 46 DSP Card WW
75. AVC CP Profile Video Settings Parameters 11 Define the remaining Profile parameters For more details see Defining AVC CP Conferencing Profiles 12 Click OK to complete the Profile definition A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list Starting an Ongoing Operator Conference To start a conference from the Conference pane 1 Inthe Conferences pane click the New Conference button The New Conference General dialog box opens 10 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move 2 Inthe Profile field select a Profile in which the Operator Conference option is selected COA gt General gt Participants Display Name SUPPORT_1676061673 Information gt Duration 1 3 Jo0 I Permanent Conference Routing Name Profile AVC_ONLY ID Conference Password Chairperson Password Maximum Number of Participants Automatic e e Upon selection of the Operator Conference Profile the Display Name is automatically taken from the Collaboration Server User Login Name This name cannot be modified Only one Operator conference can be created for each User Login name 3 Define the following parameters Table 10 1 New Conference General Options eee Duration Define the duration of the conference in hours using the format HH MM default 01 00 Notes e The Operator conference is automatically extended up toa
76. AVC participants or reserved for defined participants Free The number of MCU resources available for connecting AVC endpoints The Total column displays the total number of resources of that type Occupied and Free The actual number of occupied or free resources can also be displayed by moving the cursor over the columns of the bar graph Moving the cursor over the Video bar displays the following 19 8 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities 8 Occupied Video Resources 64 Free Video Resources Govunied 11 Geeuped 11 When viewing the Collaboration Server resource report for mixed CP and SVC conferences the resource allocations are described in AVC HD720p30 units A port ratio of 1 AVC HD port will equal 2 AVCSD ports which equals 3 SVC ports in a non mixed conference When the Collaboration Server is reporting the available capacity it will appropriately round up the remaining capacity to the nearest whole value of available ports For example one SVC endpoint in a conference is equal to 1 3 of the resource value The resource report displays this as one full resource used Two SVC endpoints is equal to 2 3 of the resource value Therefore the resource report displays this as one full resource used and so forth The following table explains the actual resource capacity utilization for both CP only and mixed CP and SVC conferences Table 19 5 Resource Ca
77. Administrator s Guide The field definitions of the SIP Servers tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service 13 Click the Security tab The field definitions of the Security tab are the same as for the Default IP Network Service 14 Click the OK button The new Network Service is added to the IP Network Services list pane Setting a Network Service as Default The default Network Service is used when no Network Service is selected for the following e Dial out participants e Reserving resources for participants when starting an ongoing conference In addition the Signaling Host IP address and the MCU Prefix in GK displayed on the RP Collaboration Server Web Client main screen are taken from the default H 323 Network Service One IP Network Service can be defined as default for H 323 connections and another Network Service as default for SIP connections If the IP Network Service supports both H 323 and SIP connections you can set the same Network Service as default for both H 323 and SIP or for H 323 only or for SIP only To designate an IP Network Service as the default IP Network Service 1 Inthe Device Management pane click IP Network Services 2 Inthe Network Services list pane right click the IP Network Service to be set as the default and then click Set Default H 323 Service or Set Default SIP Service To set this IP Network Service for both H 323 and SIP connections repeat step 2 and select the option yo
78. Alarm gt User Customization When the Audible Alarm is activated the wav file selected in the User Customization is played and it is repeated according to the number of repetitions defined in the User Customization If more than one Collaboration Server is monitored in the RMX Manager the Audible Alarm must be enabled separately for each Collaboration Server installed in the site configuration A different wav file can be selected for each MCU When multiple Audible Alarms are activated in different conferences or by multiple MCUs the Audible Alarms are synchronized and played one after the other It is important to note that when Stop Repeating Alarm is selected from the toolbar from the Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager all activated Audible Alarms are immediately halted Polycom Inc 19 29 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Audible Alarm Permissions An operator administrator can configure the Request Operator Assistance audible alarm however Users with different authorization level have different configuration capabilities as shown in Table 19 16 Table 19 16 Audible Alarm Permissions Stop Repeating Message The Collaboration Server User can stop playing the audible alarm at any time If more than one audible alarm has been activated all activated alarms are immediately stopped If after stopping the Audible Alarms a new Operator Assistance request event occurs the audible alarm is re activated
79. Audio gt H 245 Layout Type Conference E Media smpone ideo gt Connection Status v v Block Audio gt Channel Status 1 Sources Change to Regular Participant gt Channel Status Adva Ba Auto I Change To Content Token Owner gt Gatekeeper Status Add Participantto Address Book View Participant Sent Video View Participant Received Video Request Intra for Received Video Request Intra for Sent Video 4 Request Intra for Received Sent ffdeo Copy Participant 3 Cut Participant Te Send Text Message To Parftipant an Participant Properties Audio Video I Audio mcu a a User m O Participant E Participant Add to Address Book ae The Media Sources dialog box enables you to mute participant s audio suspend participant s video transmission and select a personal Video Layout for the participant IP Participant Properties The following parameters are displayed for an IP participant Table 12 7 Participant Properties Media Sources Parameters SS Indicates the participant s name Note This field is displayed in all tabs 12 15 Polycom Inc Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 7 Participant Properties Media Sources Parameters Continued a ee Endpoint Website Click the Endpoint Website hyperlink to connect to the internal website of link the participant s endpoint It enables you to perform administrative configuration and troubleshooting activities on the endpoint The co
80. Audio resources is exceeded The threshold is defined in the Setup gt Port Gauge dialog box Alert when port usage exceeds a0 When the flag is set to YES the system will allow SIP audio endpoints to connect to the MCU until the Port Usage threshold is reached Once this threshold is exceeded the SIP audio endpoints will not be able to connect ensuring that the remaining system resources can be used by all other connections including SIP video and H 323 cascaded links When the call is rejected by the MCU because of lack of resources the appropriate indication will be sent by the MCU to the SIP audio endpoint For example if the Port Gauge threshold is set to 80 when 80 of the Audio resources are used the system will not allow additional SIP audio endpoints to connect and will send a busy notification to the endpoint This does not affect the video resources usage 19 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Port Usage Gauge 19 12 The Port Usage Gauges are displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Collaboration Server Web Client screen Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 __View Administration Setup Help RMX IP Address 172 21 125 83 Signaling Host 172 21 125 84 Logon SC C 6 a x AKRE Display Name 10 Duration Conference Pass Chairperson Pas Profile Dial in Number Status Find 4 Display Name Status I amp
81. Authorization Level Login Time Workstation ERI POLYCOM Administrator 9 20 2006 4 44 PM EM4 F5 VARDAL LT H ewe a oe ae z eee os z EEEE REER BA fy POLYCOM Administrator 9 20 2006 10 46 AM F3 NOAL The information includes The user s login name The user s authorization level Chairperson Operator Administrator or Auditor The time the user logged in The name identification of the computer used for the user s connection Polycom Inc Chapter 14 Users Connections and Notes Notes Notes are the electronic equivalent of paper sticky notes You can use notes to write down questions important phone numbers names of contact persons ideas reminders and anything you would write on note paper Notes can be left open on the screen while you work Notes can be read by all system Users concurrently connected to the MCU Notes that are added to the Notes list are updated on all workstations by closing and re opening the Notes window Notes can be written in any Unicode language Using Notes To create a note 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Notes The Notes window opens N Note Y Last Modified Y Modified By V Modified From Y Ori 289 is working on 189 178 7 12 2006 9 46 AM POLYCOM EM4 F3 HAGAIGE test 8 16 2006 2 36 PM POLYCOM EM4 F4 BBI LAP 2 Inthe Notes toolbar click the New Note _ button or right click anywhere inside the Notes window and select New N
82. Book dialog box select the directory to save the file You may also rename the file in the File Name field 4 Click Save You will return to the Export File dialog box 5 Click OK The exported Address Book is saved in the selected folder in XML format Importing an Address Book To Import and Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book pane click the Import Address Book button or right click an empty area in the pane and then click Import Address Book The Import Address Book dialog box is displayed Import Address Book g Import ddress Book Path Are you sure you want to merge the two Address Books 2 Enter the path from which to import the Address Book or click the Browse button 3 In the Open dialog box navigate to the desired Address Book file in XML format to import Polycom Inc 8 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide When importing an Address Book participants with exact names in the current Address Book will be overwritten by participants defined in the imported Address Book 4 Click Open You will return to the Import File dialog box 5 Click OK The Address Book is imported and a confirmation message is displayed at the end of the process 6 Click Close 8 24 Polycom Inc 9 Reservations The Reservations option enables users to schedule conferences These conferences can be launched immediately or become ongoing at a specified time on a specified
83. Button Option Selected Video Layout Selected Video Layout Cell a 3 If Auto Layout check box is selected clear it 4 Inthe video layout cell to be designated for Auto Scan click the drop down menu button and select Auto Scan 5 Select from the Auto Scan Interval s drop down list the scanning interval in seconds 6 Click the Apply button to confirm and keep the Conference Properties dialog box open or Click OK to confirm and close the Conference Properties dialog box Customized Polling The order in which the Auto Scanned participants are displayed in the Auto Scan enabled cell of the video layout can be customized 1 Open the Customized Polling tab a Ifthe Video Settings tab is open click the Customized Polling tab or b Inthe Conference list pane double click the conference or right click the conference and then click Conference Properties Polycom Inc 4 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide c Inthe Conference Properties General dialog box click Customized Polling The Customized Polling tab is displayed All Conference Participants Scanning Order farketing Properties gt General A Avanesi Display Name gt Video Quality gt Video Settings Duration gt Audio Settings gt Customized Polling gt Skins gt IVR gt Information All Participants Name Name inji Rex Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 Move participant up E in Scanning Order E
84. CP conference EndpointDispayName i The name of the MCU that is displayed on the screen of endpoints that are connecting to the conference PALNTSC NTSC PAL The video encoding of the RMX AUTO SeparateMgmtNet Boolean Indicates whether management network separation is enabled NumVideoPorts Number of ports confi a for video 19 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 19 10 Unified MIB SNMP Fields Continued tee eee ServiceH323 Integer Indicates the status of H 323 capabilities 1 The service is enabled and operational 2 The service is enabled but is not operational 3 The service is disabled ServiceS P Integer Indicates the status of SIP capabilities 1 The service is enabled and operational 2 The service is enabled but is not operational 3 The service is disabled ServicelSDN Integer Indicates the status of SIP capabilities 1 The service is enabled and operational 2 The service is enabled but is not operational 3 The service is disabled RsrcAllocMode Fixed The resource allocation method which determines Flexible how the system resources are allocated to the connecting endpoints Status of the integrated boards of the Status of the integrated boards boards UltraSecureMode Boolean Indicates whether the RMX is operating in Ultra Secure Mode The temperature of the chasis The temperature of the chasis of the chasis Failed new calls in the last minute Failed n
85. Change Threshold is the amount of time a participant Threshold must speak continuously before becoming the speaker When defining or editing a conference profile you can define the Speaker Change Threshold Select the desired threshold e Auto Default 3 seconds e 1 5 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds 13 Click the Skins tab to modify the background and frames The New Profile Skins dialog box opens gt General gt Advanced Display Name i gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Note When enabled Site Names text is displayed without a background EE a Note When enabled Site Names textis displayed with a background 14 Select one of the Skin options 15 Click IVR tab 2 22 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles The New Profile IVR dialog box opens gt General Display Name gt Advanced I gt Video Quality Line Rate 384 Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR Conference IVR Service Conference IVR Service gt Recording I Conference Requires Chairperson gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services 16 If required set the following parameters Table 2 11 New AVC CP Profile IVR Parameters Conference IVR The default
86. Click OK to export the RMX Manager configuration To Import the RMX Manager Configuration 1 In the Multi RMX Manager click the Import RMX Manager Configuration button in the toolbar or right click anywhere in the MCUs pane and then click Import RMX Manager Configuration Add MCU Export RMX Manager Configuration Import RMX Manager Configuration The Import RMX Manager Configuration dialog box opens Import RMX Manager Configuration xl Import Path Are you sure you want to merge the two MCU lists 18 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 Click the Browse button to select the saved file or enter the required path in the Export Path box The Open dialog box is displayed ones 2 x Lookin Desktop A eadem File name JIntemnaiConfigSet_Customized aml x Files of type import Fite xm z lt Select the XML file previously saved and click the Open button The selected file path is displayed in the Import Path box 4 Click OK to import the file Management Network Properties Network Service Name Management Network MCU Host Name DNS Specify x J Register Host Names Automatically to DNS Servers c oe DNS Servers Addresses A a SELE maa rie Domain Secondary Server Joo00 ame Tertiary Server Jooo0 18 20 Polycom Inc 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities System and Participant Alerts The MCU ale
87. Click the OK button Step 3 Viewing the Compressed File Auditor Auditor Files Polycom Inc The compressed file is saved in tgz format and can be viewed with any utility that can open files of that format for example WinRAR 3 80 To view the compressed file 1 Navigate to the directory on the workstation in which the file was saved 2 Double click the info tgz file to view the downloaded information Some browsers save the file as info gz due to a browser bug If this occurs the file must be manually renamed to info tgz before it can be viewed An Auditor is a user who can view Auditor and CDR files for system auditing purposes The Auditor user must connect to the Collaboration Server using the Collaboration Server Web Client only The Event Auditor enables administrators and auditors to analyze configuration changes and unusual or malicious activities in the Collaboration Server system Auditor operates in real time recording all administration activities and login attempts from the following Collaboration Server modules e Control Unit e Shelf Manager For a full list of monitored activities see Table 19 23 on page 19 49 and Table 19 24 on page 19 51 The Auditor must always be active in the system A System Alert is displayed if it becomes inactive for any reason The Auditor tool is composed of the Auditor Files and the Auditor File Viewer that enables you to view the Auditor Files Tim
88. Columns Continued FS Process Completed Status of the process action request or transaction returned by the system e Yes performed by the system e No rejected by the system Description A text string describing the process action request or transaction Additional Information An optional text string describing the process action request or transaction in additional detail The order of the Auditor File Viewer field header columns can be changed and the fields can be sorted and filtered to facilitate different analysis methods 2 Inthe event list click the events or use the keyboard s Up arrow and Down arrow keys to display the Request Transaction and Response Transaction XML trees for each audit event The transaction XML trees can be expanded and collapsed by clicking the expand i and collapse buttons To open an auditor event file stored on the workstation 1 Click the Local File button F to open the Open dialogue box 2 Navigate to the folder on the workstation that contains the audit event file 3 Select the audit event file to be opened 4 Click Open The selected file is opened in the Auditor Viewer Audit Events Alerts and Faults Table 1 lists Alerts and Faults that are recorded by the Auditor Table 19 23 Alerts and Faults Event Attempt to exceed the maximum number of management session per user Attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions per system
89. Conference in which Operator Assistance options are enabled 10 2 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move A Conference Profile with the Operator Conference option enabled An active Operator conference with a connected Operator participant Defining a Conference IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options 10 In the RMX Management pane expand the Rarely Used list and click the IVR Services al entry On the IVR Services toolbar click the New Conference IVR Service j button The New Conference IVR Service Global dialog box opens New CONFEPENCe TVRSEPUICE gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General gt Roll Call Notifications Language English x Video Services External Server Authentication Never gt gt DTMF Codes BaOuerstonaesista sce Number of User Input Retries 3 Timeout for User Input Sec 5 DTMF Delimiter lt Enter the Conference IVR Service Name Define the Conference IVR Service Global parameters For more information see Table 15 3 Conference IVR Service Properties Global Parameters on page 15 7 Click the Welcome tab The New Conference IVR Service Welcome dialog box opens Define the system behavior when the participant enters the Conference IVR queue For more information see Defining a New Conference IVR Service o
90. Content Video Content Rate Definition pane See Selecting a Customized Content Rate on page 4 13 Table 4 5 summarizes the Maximum Resolution of Content and Frames per Second fps for Bit Rate Allocations to the Content Channel Table 4 5 Content Maximum Resolution Frames Second per Bit Rate Allocation Bit Rate Allocated to Content content Channel Kbps Maximum Resolution Frames Second From 64 and less than 512 H 264 HD720p From 512 and up to 768 H 264 HD720p From 768 and up to 1536 H 264 HD1080p Content Protocols Two Content Protocols can be used for sharing content e H 263 e H 264 H 264 offers higher quality content but is not supported by legacy endpoints Depending on the endpoints capabilities you can determine the content sharing experience by selecting the appropriate protocol and system behavior from the Content Protocol list e H 263 amp H 264 Auto Selection e H 263 e H 264HD e H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized H 263 amp H 264 Auto Selection The H 263 amp H 264 Auto Selection option should be selected when Content is to be shared using a mix of H 263 supporting and H 264 supporting endpoints 4 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 8 Bit rate allocation to the Content channel by the Collaboration Server is dynamic according to the conference line rate and Content Setting selected for the conference If an endpoint that supports only H 263 for Content Sharing connects t
91. EE Rex Polycom RMX 2000 PERS Rex Polycom RMX 2009400 P x Polycom Rmx 3f6o_ 00 Move participant Rex Polycom R 2000_ 00 down in Scanning Rex PolycopRmx 2000_ 00 Order Rex Pop om RMX 2000_ 00 amp Aolycom Rmx 2000_ 00 Gx Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 Add Rex Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 Delete Add All Delete All Rex Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 Scanning Order Rex Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 gt Recording f fx Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 gt Site Names Rex Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 fx Polycom RMX 2000_ 00 All conference participants are listed in the left pane All Participants while the participants that are to be displayed in the Auto Scan enabled cell of the video layout are listed in the right pane Scanning Order The dialog box buttons are summarized in the following table oe Cn Select a participant and click this button to Add a the participant to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned The participants name is removed from the All Participants pane Select a participant and click this button to Delete the participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned The participants name is moved back to the All Participants pane Add All Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned All participants names are removed from the All Participants pane Delete All Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned All participants names are moved bac
92. Error response The server encountered an unexpected condition that prevented it from fulfilling the request SIP server error 501 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 501 Not Implemented response The server does not support the functionality required to fulfill the request SIP server error 502 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 502 Bad Gateway response The server while acting as a gateway or proxy received an invalid response from the downstream server it accessed in attempting to fulfill the request SIP server error 503 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 503 Service Unavailable response The server is temporarily unable to process the request due to a temporary overloading or maintenance of the server SIP server error 504 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 504 Server Time out response The server did not receive a timely response from an external server it accessed in attempting to process the request SIP server error 505 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 505 Version Not Supported response The server does not support or refuses to support the SIP protocol version that was used in the request SIP temporarily not available The participant s endpoint was contacted successfully but the participant is currently unavailable e g not logged in or logged in such a manner as to preclude communication with the participant SIP remote device did not respond inthe The endpoint did not respond in
93. File ssssssssessssssssesssssessresresrisrenresseeresnrsresstesees 19 31 Multiling al Setting siisscsccscsssssseseessarcsosevssazchobanssodevessssead aai 19 33 Customizing the Multilingual Setting ss sssssessesssesisseessisresresreresresresnenreenesnrneese 19 33 Banner Display and Customization sssssesssesesessessesserterrisresrtsnterienisrrssrententenesrensne tes 19 34 GUI SLIMSS ais sais ore Sosa ashes tae Mocs A a Meas aa A E N A ENE TETA 19 34 Non Modifiable Banner Text 0 ccc eccseseseseeceeseseseecesenseececesssensnesesesensneseeeanes 19 35 Sample T Bamnen iier ne e E eE EES 19 35 Sample 2 Banwmeryasesscessves ees ses hea a E E E EE e iE ESen 19 35 Samples PaNN E eea a ae Raine AOE E AE E AEE 19 35 Sample4 Banner inenen mia aaas a Ee a aE E A EE a teats Ab 19 35 Customizing Banners arseno eenia e Eseese kn Ta aera E SEN Ear E oi ERE 19 36 Banner Display sisrnernepensranio nie a A A eeaae teat 19 37 Login Screen Banner npsrpsep ispiser dessins seesdsesves otacevepsedecestevedsdesteaveetestendeedades 19 37 Main screen Banner i ith citwisstin n p E E nies amet 19 37 Software Manageme nt nies c re e e a a Ei E E E 19 37 Backup and Restore Guidelines se e sesesesesseseeseserssreresrertrtestereteeretrrerrreresesrerrserseeres 19 37 Using Software Management 0 0 0 0 cscs csceseseseeesceeseseeceesesesnececssensnetecsenes 19 38 Ping Collaboration Server icississssscssssessesecssesetscssascessaegesaseasovcedses
94. Global Address Book GAB e Up to ten levels can be defined in the hierarchical structure of the Address Book e The default name of the root level is Main The Main root level cannot be deleted but the root level name can be modified e Address Book names support multilingual characters e Participants in the Address Book can be copied to multiple groups However only one participant exists in the Address Book Groups that contain the same participants refer to the same definition of the participant entity Adding a Participant to the Address Book Polycom Inc Adding participants to the Address Book can be performed by the following methods Directly in the Address Book e Moving or saving a participant from an ongoing conference to the Address Book When adding dial out participants to the ongoing conference the system automatically dials out to the participants using the Network Service defined for the connection in the participant properties 8 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Adding a New participant to the Address Book Directly You can add a new participant to the Main group or to a group in the Address Book Additionally you can add a participant from a new conference ongoing conference or Conference Template To add a new participant to the Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group to where you want to add the new participant 2 Click the New Par
95. H 263 4CIF A high video resolution available to H 263 endpoints that do not support H 264 It is only supported for conferences in which the video quality is set to sharpness and for lines rates of 384kbps to 1920kbps Standard Definition SD A high quality video protocol which uses the H 264 and H 264 High Profile video algorithms It enables compliant endpoints to Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles connect to Continuous Presence conferences at resolutions of 720X576 pixels for PAL systems and 720X480 pixels for NTSC systems For more information see Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing on page 3 1 High Definition HD HD is an ultra high quality video resolution that uses he H 264 and H 264 High Profile video algorithms Endpoints are able to connect to conferences at the following resolutions e 720p 1280 x 720 pixels e 1080p 1920 x 1080 pixels For more information see Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing on page 3 1 Supplemental Conferencing Features In addition to Standard Conferencing the following features can be enabled H 239 Allows compliant endpoints to transmit and receive two simultaneous streams of conference data to enable Content sharing H 239 is also supported in cascading conferences Both H 263 and H 264 Content sharing protocols are supported If all endpoints connected to the conference have H 264 capability Content is shared using H 264 otherwise Con
96. High profile e Video Resolutions from QCIF CIF and up to 1080p e Frame rates up to 60 fps The MCU process the received video transcodes it and send the resulting video streams to the endpoints The video processing that is required differs according to the video session set for the conference with all the processing performed by the MCU For more details see AVC Conferencing Continuous Presence CP Conferencing on page 2 2 Polycom Inc 2 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide AVC Conferencing Continuous Presence CP Conferencing 2 2 All endpoints have AVC capabilities and can connect to AVC conferences running on the MCU AVC based Endpoints can connect using different signaling protocols and different video protocols The dynamic Continuous Presence CP capability of the Collaboration Server system enables viewing flexibility by offering multiple viewing options and window layouts for video conferencing Endpoints can connect to the conference using any signaling protocol H 323 SIP line rate up to a maximum line rate defined for the conference Video Protocol H 261 H 263 H 264 Base and High Profile and at any resolution and frame rate provided they meet the minimum requirements set for the conference In Continuous Presence conferences the MCU receives the video stream from each endpoint at the video rate video resolution and frame rate that it is capable of sending and it superimposes all
97. IP Network Services the DNS in the IP Network Services Encryption Server Error Failed to FIPS 140 test failed while generating the new encryption key generate the encryption key Error in external database certificate in external database certificate B 2 Polycom Inc Appendix B Active Alarms Table B 1 Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description Error reading MCU time Failed to read MCU time configuration file status Manually configure the MCU Time in the Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager Manager application d eUserMsgCode_Cs_SipTLS_CertificateH asExpired eUserMsgCode_Cs_SipTLS_CertificateS ubjNamelsNotValid_Or_DnsFailed eUserMsgCode_Cs_SipTLS_ Certificate WillExpireInLess ThanAWeek eUserMsgCode_Cs_SipTLS_FailedToLo adOrVerifyCertificateFiles eUserMsgCode_Cs_SipTLS_Registration HandshakeFailure eUserMsgCode_Cs_SipTLS_Registration ServerNotResponding Event Mode Conferencing resources deficiency due to inappropriate license Please install a new license External NTP servers failure The MCU could not connect to any of the defined NTP server for synchronization due to the remote server error or network error or configuration error Change the configuration of the NTP server Failed to access DNS server Failed to access DNS server Failed to configure the Media card IP Possible reasons for the failure address e Failure type OK Or Not supported Does not exist Or IP failure
98. IV Login Page Banner By using this IS which includes any device attached to this IS you consent to the following conditions Login Banner Menu The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS for purposes including but not limited to penetration testing COMSEC monitoring network operations and defense personnel misconduct PM law enforcement Iv Main Page Banner Restore Default One of the the following Login Banners can be selected e Non Modifiable Banners Sample 1 Sample 2 Sample 3 Sample 4 e Modifiable Banner Custom Default Guidelines The Login Banner must be acknowledged before the user is permitted to log in to the system e Ifa Custom banner has been created and the user selects one of the alternative non modifiable banners the Custom banner not deleted The Custom Login Banner banner may contain up to 1300 characters e An empty Login Banner is not allowed 19 34 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities e Any attempt to modify a non modifiable banner results in it automatically being copied to the Custom banner Non Modifiable Banner Text Polycom Inc Sample 1 Banner You are accessing a U S Government USG Information System IS that is provided for USG authorized use only By using this IS which includes any device attached to this IS you consent to the followin
99. Negotiation Yes oo 10 Half Duplex 10 F Duplex 100 Full Dup 0 399547 0 Error Packet Packet ill 0 0 0 FIFO Drops Error Packet 196686380 0 656184 0 Error Packet Packet 0 0 0 CRC Error Packet 406331065 Close 2 Click Close to return to the Hardware Monitor pane Resetting the RMX 1800 DSP cards If the DSP cards don t function properly you can reset them during a meeting When you reset a DSP card during a meeting the system switches the impacted meeting media to other DSP cards if available If no other DSP cards available the impacted meeting media is lost and there may be few seconds pause in the meeting video 4 Only Polycom Support can test DSP cards For more information contact your Polycom Support To reset a DSP card 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click the Hardware Monitor button The Hardware Monitor pane appears 2 Right click a desired DSP card and 3 fr select Rescue Slot Type Status Temperature Voltage Polycom Inc RMX Normal Normal Normal DSP Card Normal Normal DSP Card Properties al Normal Normal FANS Normal Normal Normal PWR Normal Normal LANS Normal 21 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 3 When asked Are you sure you want to send the rescue command to the card click Yes The card resets and its Status changes to Resetting Upon the completion of the reset its Status changes back to
100. Normal Temperature Thresholds On each Collaboration Server card or there are temperature sensors that are placed near specific components on the card In the Hardware Monitor you can view the properties of each card together with their temperature statuses By right clicking on any card and viewing the cards Properties the Active Alarms tab displays all the card sensors their statuses and lists each sensor s temperature specifications When the temperature on the cards initially rises a fault could be triggered and can viewed in the System Alerts Faults List Load issues can arise when the system nears the maximum conference mark or high port capacity occurs on an Collaboration Server resulting in Upper Major or Upper Critical faults With an Upper Major alarm activation it is recommended to perform the following checks Fans fan tray functions Overall System Ventilation and Filter top bottom amp sides free and no dust and Room temperature cool When no apparent cause can be found then contact your next level of support However only when the Upper Critical threshold is passed does the Collaboration Server system as a precaution initiate a system shutdown Hardware Monitor 4 3 Ol Slot Type Status Temperature Voltage kg RMX Normal Normal Normal FANS Normal Normal Normal D PWR Normal Normal R LANS Normal Figure 21 1 RMX 1800 Hardware Monitor pane Polycom Inc Appendix A Disconnection
101. Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 13 Recording Conferences The New Recording Link dialog box is displayed Name Recording Link H 323 SIP Type H 323 v IP Address 0 0 0 0 Alias Name Type H 323 1D 3 Define the following parameters Table 13 1 Recording Link Parameters IP Address Alias Name Alias Type Displays the default name that is assigned to the Recording Link If multiple Recording Links are defined it is recommended to use a descriptive name to be indicate the VRR to which it will be associated Default Recording Link Select the network environment H 323 SIP If no gatekeeper is configured enter the IP Address of the RSS Example If the RSS IP address is 173 26 120 2 enter 173 26 120 2 If a gatekeeper is configured you can either enter the IP address or an alias see the alias description If using the endpoint s alias instead of IP address first select the alias type and then enter the endpoint s alias If you are associating this recording link to a VRR on the RSS define the alias as follows e Ifyou are using the RSS IP address enter the VRR number in the Alias field For example if the VRR number is 5555 enter 5555 Alternatively if the Alias Type is set to H 323 ID enter the RSS IP address and the VRR number in the format lt RSS_IP_Address gt lt VRR number gt For example If the RSS IP is 173 26 120 2 and the VRR number is 5555 enter 173 26
102. Port usage are reflected in the port gauges displayed on the Collaboration Server management application s main screen However the port gauges do not reflect the resource availability per Network Service Flexible Resource Allocation Mode On the Polycom RMX 1800 system with two Network Services defined the resources of the two Network Services are not split between the network services In such a case resources are used per their availability by both Network Services equally Using Multiple Network Service Polycom Inc Multiple Services is enabled by licence and must be purchased for the system Follow these steps to use Multiple Network Service 1 Enable Multiple Services and disable LAN Redundancy 2 Add the required IP Network Services to accommodate the networks connected to the Collaboration Server unit 3 Select a Network Service to act as default for dial out calls for which the Network Service was not selected Place several calls and run conferences to ensure that the system is configured correctly Enabling Multiple Network Service You must set the system flags MULTIPLE_SERVICES to YES and LAN_REDUNDANCY to NO before you can enable Multiple Network Service To change system flags for use with Multiple Network Service 1 On the RMX menu click Setup gt System Configuration gt System Configuration The System Flags dialog box opens 2 Select MULTIPLE_SERVICES and select Edit Flag 3 Inthe New Value field ch
103. Profile Profile Figure 3 2 Resolution usage for H 264 High Profile and H 264 Base Profile for Sharpness at various line rates when Resolution Configuration is set to Resource Optimized Resource vs Quality Quality Optimized H 264 High Profile vs H 264 Base Profile Resolution Sharpness 1080p 60 fps 1080p 30 fps H 264 Base amp High Profile 720p 60 fps SD 30 fps H 264 Base amp High Profile SSS 64 128 256 512 768 832 1024 1280 1728 2048 3584 4M Gx x Profile Profile Figure 3 3 Resolution usage for H 264 High Profile and H 264 Base Profile for Sharpness at various line rates when Resolution Configuration is set to Video Quality Optimized Line Rate 3 6 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing H 264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison Motion A comparison between the resolutions used at various line rates for H 264 Baseline and the H 264 High Profile for Motion Video Quality setting according to the following Resolution Configuration Modes Resource vs Quality Balanced H 264 High Profile vs H 264 Base Profile Motion Resolution 1080p 60 fps 720 60 fps H 264 High Profile SD 60 fps H 264 CIF 60 fps Base amp High Profile H 264 Base amp High Profile CIF 30 fps H 264 Base Profile TT j I 64 128 256 384 768 832 1024 1280 1920 3072 8M Line Rate ms Xx Profile Prof
104. Q When the participant belongs to only one group click Yes to permanently delete the participant from the address book b When the participant belongs to multiple groups a message is displayed requesting whether to delete the participant from the Address Book or from the current selected group Select Current group to delete the participant from the selected group Address Book to permanently delete the participant from the address book all groups Click OK to perform the delete operation or Cancel to exit the delete operation Copying or Moving a Participant You can copy or move a participant from one group to another group using the Copy Cut and Paste options A participant can belong to multiple groups However there is only one entity per participant Groups that contain the same participants refer to the same definition of the participant entity Alternatively you can drag a participant from one location in the Address Book to another location moving the participant to its new location using the drag and drop operation The cut and copy actions are not available when selecting multiple participants To copy or move a participant to another group 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group from where to copy the participant 2 Inthe Address Book List pane select the participant you want to copy 3 Right click the selected participant and select one of the following functions from the dr
105. RTM LAN or RTM ISDN installed One of these cards must be installed in the RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 4000 No usable unit for audio controller No media card is installed or the media card installed is not functioning Install the appropriate media card Pow Product activation failure Assign a new activation key Product Type mismatch System is The user is alerted to a mismatch between the product type that is stored in restarting MCU software and the product type received from another system component In such a case the oe is automatically restarted Received Notification failed Notification failed a device has disconnected unexpectedly Polycom Inc B 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table B 1_ Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description Requested changes to the certification repository were not completed Repository must be updated to implement these changes Resource process failed to request the Without the Meeting Rooms list the system cannot allocate the appropriate Meeting Room list during startup dial numbers Conference ID etc and therefore cannot run conferences Restore Failed Restoring the system configuration has failed as the system could not locate the configuration file in the selected path or could not open the file Restore Succeeded Restoring the system configuration has succeeded Reset the MCU Restoring Factory Defaults Default Default system se
106. Reservation properties It also enables the automatic generation of passwords in general Yes Conference and Chairperson Passwords are hidden they are replaced by asterisks It also disables the automatic generation of passwords NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MIN_LEN Enter the minimum number of characters required for conference passwords Possible values 0 16 0 default means no minimum length NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MIN_LEN Enter the minimum number of characters required for chairperson passwords Possible values 0 16 0 default means no minimum length However this setting cannot be applied when the Collaboration Server is in Ultra Secure Mode 20 24 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 6 Automatic Password Generation Flags Continued Ee ean eed b NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MAX_LEN NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MAX_LEN NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_L EN NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN Enter the maximum number of characters permitted for conference passwords Possible values 0 16 16 default Conference password maximum length is 16 characters Enter the maximum number of characters permitted for chairperson passwords Possible values 0 16 16 default chairperson password maximum length is 16 characters This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of conference passwords The length of the automatically generated passwords is determined by the flag value
107. Server Web Client application To enable SNMP option 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Web Client menu bar click Setup gt SNMP The Collaboration Server SNMP Properties Agent dialog box is displayed NMP Properties Traps V SNMP Enabled gt gt Security Retrieve MIB Files In order to be correctly identified by the SNMP Managers the following fields must be defined Contact person for this MCU MCU Location MCU System Name SNMP Agent Version Version 1 d ersion 1 ersion 2 o S e This dialog box is used to define the basic information for this MCU that will be used by the SNMP system to identify it 2 Inthe Agent dialog box click the SNMP Enabled check box 3 Click the Retrieve MIB Files button to obtain a file that lists the MIBs that define the properties of the object being managed The Retrieve MIB Files dialog box is displayed 4 Click the Browse button and navigate to the desired directory to save the MIB files 19 22 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities 5 Click OK The path of the selected directory is displayed in the Retrieve MIB Files dialog box 6 Click the Save button The MIB files are saved to the selected directory 7 Click Close to exit the Retrieve MIB Files dialog box 8 Inthe Agent dialog box define the parameters that allow the SNMP Management System and its user to easily identify the MCU
108. Templates dialog boxes Permanent Conference gt Participants Display Name SUPPORT_768250228 14 00 IF Permanent Conference SUPPORT 1451806447 o Duration i o Maximum Number of Participants a Maximum Number of Participants Automatic E New Conference New Meeting Room New Conference Template 4 48 Polycom Inc 5 Cascading Conferences Cascading enables administrators to connect one conference directly to one or several conferences depending on the topology creating one large conference The conferences can run on the same MCU or different MCUs There are many reasons for cascading conferences the most common are e Connecting two conferences on different MCUs at different sites e Utilizing the connection abilities of different MCUs for example different communication protocols such as serial connections and ISDN etc The following cascading topologies are available for cascading e Basic Cascading only two conferences are connected usually running on two different Collaboration Servers The cascaded MCUs reside on the same network e Star Cascading one or several conferences are connected to one master conference Conferences are usually running on separate MCUs The cascaded MCUs reside on the same network e MIH Multi Hierarchy Cascading several conferences are connected to each other in Master Slave relationship The cascad
109. Text White on yellow Bottom 22 Click the Network Services tab The New Profile Network Services tab opens New Profile gt General gt Advanced Display Name gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR IP Network Services gt Recording Service Name SIP Registration Accept calls gt Site Names IP Network Ser Vv gt Message Overlay gt Network Services a e Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories with SIP servers is done per conferencing entity This allows better control on the number of entities that register with each SIP server Selective registration is enabled by assigning a conference Profile in which registration is configured to the required conferencing entities Assigning a conference Profile in which registration is not configure to conferencing entities will prevent them from registering By default Registration is disabled in the Conference Profile and must be enabled in Profiles assigned to conferencing entities that require registration Polycom Inc 2 29 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 23 Define the following parameters Table 2 15 New AVC Profile Network Services Parameters IP Network Services Service Name This column lists all the defined Network Services one or several depending on
110. The MGCs must be configured to operate in VSW mode For more details about the MGC to MGC connection see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume I Chapter 1 Ad Hoc Auto Cascading and Cascading Links Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences e To enable the connection of the links between cascaded conferences they must run at the same line rate e To enable Content sharing between the RMX and the MGC the rate allocated to the content must be identical in both conferences Make sure that the line rate set for both conferences and the Content Settings Graphics Hi res Graphics or Live video are selected correctly to ensure the compatible rate allocation For more details on the RMX rate allocation to the Content channel see SIP BFCP Content Capabilities on page 4 2 The following table summarizes Video Session Modes line rate options that need to be selected for each conference in the cascading hierarchy according to the cascading topology Table 5 2 MIH Cascading Video Session Mode and Line Rate Topology MCU Type Video Session Type 1 5Mb s 1Mb s 2Mb s CP CIF 768Kb s 2Mb s 768Kb s 2Mb s 768 kb s 2Mb s 1 5Mb s CP HD 1 5Mb s 1Mb s 2Mb s 384 kbps 768 kbps CP VSW HD 1 5Mb s 1Mb s 2Mb s 768kb s 2Mb s When MGC is on Level 3 Content cannot be shared between Level 2 and Level 3 Video Layout in Cascading CP Conferences Cascade links are treated as endpoints in CP conferenc
111. Traversal topologies are given as examples Actual deployments will depend on user requirements and available infrastructure Remote Connection Using the Internet SIP HDX A gt r N me 4 External DMAy Client D P amm 4 a rs DS Enterprise Firewall a v RPAD Acme Packet ee SIP Signaling lt _ Media RMX The following Remote Connection call flow options are supported Table 16 14 Remote Connection CMA Client Enterprise Client SIP H 323 SAM Acme Packet SIP H 323 SAM Acme Packet No SIP Wt Ut Polycom Inc 16 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 16 14 Remote Connection Continued Enterprise Client CMA Client SIP H 323 SAM Only Business to Business Connections Enterprise B Firewall SBC RPAD Acme Packet H 323 SIP k NEP HDX i SIP i l HDX l H 323 x DMA i a y y p l S g y Pa l H 323 SIP Fi Enterprise A i Firewall f SBC RPAD Acme Packet lt amp H 323 SIP Signaling RMX a Media The following Business to Business connection call flow options are supported Enterprise B Client Table 16 15 Business to Business Connection Yes Ye wuuu dv 16 24 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services FW Firewall NAT Keep Alive Polycom Inc The Collaboration Server can be configured to send a FW NAT keep alive message at specific Intervals for the RTP
112. Version Trap Destination Specifies the version either Version 1 2 or 3 of the traps being sent to the IP Host Polycom software supports the standard SNMP version 1 and 2 traps which are taken from RFC 1215 convention for defining traps for use with SNMP Note The SNMP Trap Version parameters must be defined identically in the external SNMP application This box lists the currently defined IP addresses of the Manager terminals to which the message trap is sent IP Enter the IP address of the SNMP All trap recipient Versions Community Enter the Community Name of the Version 1 Name manager terminal used to monitor and the MCU activity Version 2 User Name Enter the name of the user who is to have access to the trap Authentication Enter the authentication protocol Protocol MD5 or SHA Privacy Enter the privacy protocol DES or Version 3 Protocol AES Engine ID Enter an Engine ID to be used for both the Agent and the Trap Default Empty 11 Click the Add button to add a new Manager terminal 19 24 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Depending on the SNMP Trap Version selected one of the two following New Trap Destination dialog boxes opens New Trap Destination lt Trap Version 1 2 IP Address Trap Version 3 Community Name I Enable Trap Inform New Trap Destination a IP Address User Name Enable Tr
113. Video Definition Content Settings Select the transmission mode for the Content channel Graphics basic mode intended for normal graphics Hi res Graphics a higher bit rate intended for high resolution graphic display Live Video Content channel displays live video Customized Content Rate manual definition of the Conference Content Rate mainly for cascading conferences Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in a lower bit rate for the people channel For a detailed description of each of these options see Content Sharing Parameters in Content Highest Common Content Video Switching Mode on page 4 5 Content Protocol H 263 e Content is shared using the H 263 protocol e Use this option when most of the endpoints support H 263 and some endpoints support H 264 H 263 amp H 264 Auto Selection e Content is shared using H 263 if a mix of H 263 supporting and H 264 supporting endpoints are connected Content is shared using H 264 if all connected endpoints have H 264 capability H 264 Cascade e All Content is shared using the H 264 content protocol and is optimized for use in Cascaded Conferences H 264 HD Default e Ensures high quality Content when most endpoints support H 264 and HD Resolutions For more information see Content Protocols on page 4 7 and Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference on page 4 3 Polycom Inc 2 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Adminis
114. Y First Message Y Last Message Y StartUp Y File Retrieved vial Log00045825_00 0 8 True False Log00045824_00 0 8 False False Log00045823_00 0 8 True False Log00045822_00 0 8 True False Log00045821_00 0 8 False False Log00045820_00 0 8 True False Log00045819_00 0 8 False False Log00045818_00 0 8 True False Log00045817_00 0 8 False False Retrieve Files Refresh List The following tasks can be performed Table 19 21 Diagnostic File Button Options C A Refresh List Refreshes the list and adds newly generated logger files Select All Selects all the logger files listed Browse Selects the destination folder for download Retrieve Files Saves files to the destination folder When retrieved the log file name structure is as follows e Sequence number starting with 1 e Date and Time of first message Polycom Inc 19 41 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e Date and Time of last message e Filesize e Special information about the data such as Startup File name structure Log_SNxxxxxxxxxx_FMDddmmyyy_FMThhmm_LMDddmmyyyy_LMThhmm_SZxxxxxxxxxx_SUY log File name format e SN Sequence Number e FM First Message date and time e LM Last Message date and time SZ Size e SU Startup Y N during the log file duration Example Log_SN0000000002_FMD06032007_FMT083933_LMD06032007_LMT084356_SZ184951_SUY log Retrieving the Logger Files 1 Select the log files to retrieve Multiple se
115. a participant or multiple participants to a new conference ongoing conferences or to Conference Templates by using the drag and drop operation Multiple selection of group levels is not available To add a participant to a new conference or an ongoing conference 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group from which to add participants 2 Inthe Address Book List pane select the participant or participants you want to add to the conference 3 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the Participants pane of the conference The participants are added to the conference 8 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Adding a Group from the Address Book to Conferences Polycom Inc You can add a group of participants to a new conference ongoing conferences or to Conference Templates by using the drag and drop operation To add a group to a new conference or an ongoing conference 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group you want to add to the conference 2 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the Participants pane of the conference The participants in the group level and all sub levels are added to the conference Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Participant Groups A group is a predefined collection of participants A group provides an easy way to manage clusters of participants that are in the same organizational structure and to conne
116. and time the defined participant disconnected from the conference Connection Retries Indicates the number of retries left for the system to connect defined Left participant to the conference Call Disconnection Displays the cause for the defined participant s disconnection from Cause the conference See Appendix A Disconnection Causes on page A 1 Video Disconnection Displays the cause the video channel could not be connected For Cause more information see Appendix A Disconnection Causes on page A 1 Polycom Inc 12 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 8 Participant Properties Connection Status Parameters Continued ies Possible Solution In some cases a possible solution is indicated to the cause of the video disconnection 3 Click the H 245 H 323 or SDP SIP tab during or after the participant s connection process to view information that can help in resolving connection issues LPR activity Displays the endpoint s actual H 323 Participant Displayed in all three panes capabilities used for the connection AVC based Mare Properties gt General gt Advanced Endpoint Website gt Information gt Media Sources m Refmote Capabilities munication Mode gt Connection Status H439Contro SirenLPR_64f O frames per packet LPR H264 32000 bps gt Channel Status brsionID 1 Oframe rate er second ProtectionPeriod 150 de gt Channel Status Adva
117. aon indicates subtracting from the start time Offset hhimm fo A j CAUTION adjust time for recurrihg reservations should only be submitted after DST time chana Click the arrows to adjust the start time by minutes Range is between 45 minutes and 45 minutes A positive value indicates adding to the start time indicates subtracting from the start time 9 16 Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations Click the arrows of the Offset Hours box to indicate the number of hours to add or subtract from the current start time a positive value indicates adding time while minus indicates subtracting time Click the arrows of the Offset minutes box to indicate the number of minutes to add or subtract from the current start time of the reservations Increments or decrements are by 15 minutes For example to subtract 30 minutes from the start time of all the reservation enter 0 in the hours box and 30 in the minutes box To add one hour and 30 minutes to the start time enter 1 in the hours box and 30 in the minutes box Click the Adjust button to apply the change to all the reoccurring reservations currently scheduled on the Collaboration Server When adjusting the start time of 1000 2000 reservations an Internal communication error message may appear Ignore this message as the process completes successfully Deleting Reservations To delete a single reservation 1 4 In the Reservatio
118. audio algorithm Currently the only value is 255 Auto The video session type Currently the only value is 3 Continuous Presence The video format Currently the only value is 255 Auto Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START Continued C Seer CIF Frame Rate The CIF frame rate Currently the only value is 255 Auto QCIF Frame Rate The QCIF frame rate Currently the only value is 255 Auto LSD Rate Not supported Always contains the value 0 HSD Rate Not supported Always contains the value 0 T120 Rate Not supported Always contains the value 0 Table C 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 ie nt Audio Tones Not supported Always contains the value 0 Alert Tone Not supported Always contains the value 0 Talk Hold Time The minimum time that a speaker has to speak to become the video source The value is in units of 0 01 seconds Currently the only value is 150 which indicates a talk hold time of 1 5 seconds Audio Mix Depth The maximum number of participants whose audio can be mixed Currently the only value is 5 Operator Not supported Conference Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol Currently the only value is 255 Auto Meet Me Per Indicates the Meet Me Per Conference setting Conference Currently the only value is 1 The Meet Me Per Conferen
119. being disconnected due to resource deficiency e If the Profile assigned to a conference is deleted while the conference is ongoing the conference cannot be saved as a template e A Profile assigned to a Conference Template cannot be deleted The system does not permit such a deletion e Profile parameters are not embedded in the Conference Template and are taken from the Profile when the Conference Template becomes an ongoing conference Therefore any changes to the Profile parameters between the time the Conference Template was created and the time that it is activated and becomes an ongoing conference will be applied to the conference e Only defined participants can be saved to the Conference Template Before saving a conference to a template ensure that all undefined participants have disconnected e Undefined participants are not saved in Conference Templates e Participant properties are embedded in the Conference Template and therefore if the participant properties are modified in the Address Book after the Conference Template has been created they are not applied to the participant whether the Template becomes an ongoing conference or not e The Conference Template display name routing name or ID can be the same as an Ongoing Conference reservation Meeting Room or Entry Queue as it is not active However an ongoing conference cannot be launched from the Conference Template if an ongoing conference Meeting Room or Entry Que
120. bold indicating that it is the current default service To select the Default Entry Queue IVR Service gt gt Inthe IVR Services list select the Entry Queue IVR Service to be defined as the default and then click Set Default Entry Queue IVR Service a button Alternatively in the Conference IVR Services list right click the Entry Queue IVR Service and then select Set Default Entry Queue IVR Service TVR Services a 15 24 TQ fet ie By x JOLE Display Name Status ID Start Tim E Name Language Service Type B SUPPORT 99466 1 02PM Conference I R Service English Conference I R Service D Marketing 46630 3 52 PM English Conference IVR Service Logistics 43974 3 51PM g Entry Queue I R Servic Delete Service Set Default Entry Queue Service Add Supported Languages Replace Change Music File K3 iit RMX Management iv e Properties 4q Signaling Monitor W Hardware Monitor 5 Meeting Rooms The default Entry Queue IVR Service is diged in bold indicating that it is the current default service Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Modifying the Conference or Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Polycom Inc You can modify the properties of an existing IVR Service except the service name and language To modify the properties of an IVR Service 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click IVR Services 2 Inthe IVR Services list Click the IVR Ser
121. box will appear with the General Info tab displayed FAN Properties The Collaboration Server unit s chassis contains 3 fans that regulate the unit s temperature If the temperature increases the fans speed will increase and vice versa A Critical condition in the fans operation will result in a system shut down gt General Info General Settings Minimum Speed Level rpm O 10 Maximum Speed Level rpm 16000 10 Normal Operating Level rpm 9600 10 Current Fan Level rpm 9600 10 Fans Fannumber Speed rpm 1 4275 10 4200 10 2 4350 10 Table 21 4 FANS Properties General Info a ey Normal Operating Level The normal operating level defined for the fans rpm Fan 3 Speed rpm Present speed of fan 3 21 6 Polycom Inc LAN 1 and LAN 2 Properties Chapter 21 Collaboration Server Hardware Monitoring The Collaboration Server unit s chassis contains two external LAN connectors which register the following information listed below The information will be refreshed every 8 seconds and also contains a peak detector to log the maximal values since the last peak values reset gt General Info LAN General LAN Status Link Status Active Port Speed 1000 Full Duplex Auto Negotiation Yes Transmit Error Packet FIFO Drops Number of Octets Receive Error Packet CRC Number of Octets Advertised Auto
122. cascading conferences DTMF forwarding is suppressed The video layout of the link is set to 1x1 by the appropriate system flag Flags controlling Cascade Layouts Setting the FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_CASCADED_LINK _CONNECTION System Flag to YES default automatically forces the cascading link to Full Screen 1x1 in CP conferences hence displaying the speaker of one conference to a full window in the video layout of the other conference Set this flag to NO when cascading between an RMX and an MGC that is functioning as a Gateway if the participant layouts on the MGC are not to be forced to 1X1 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences e Setting the AVOID_VIDEO_LOOP_BACK_IN_CASCADE System Flag to YES default prevents the speaker s image from being sent back through the participant link from the cascaded conference This can occur in cascaded conferences with conference layouts other than 1x1 It results in the speaker s own video image being displayed in the speaker s video layout This option is supported with InH 323 SIP and ISDN environments For Basic Cascading of Continuous Presence and Video Switched conferences If a Master MCU has two slave MCUs participants connected to the slave MCUs will not receive video from each other Video resolution will be according to the Resolution Configuration or VSW profile For more details on defining system flags see Modifying System Flags o
123. conference IVR Service is selected You can select Service another conference IVR Service if required Conference Requires Select this option to allow the conference to start only when the Chairperson chairperson connects to the conference and to automatically terminate the conference when the chairperson exits Participants who connect to the conference before the chairperson are placed on Hold and hear background music and see the Welcome video slide Once the conference is activated the participants are automatically connected to the conference When the check box is cleared the conference starts when the first participant connects to it and ends at the predefined time or according to the Auto Terminate rules when enabled Polycom Inc 2 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 2 11 New AVC CP Profile IVR Parameters Continued Terminate When enabled it allows a conference to be automatically terminated Conference after after the chairperson leaves When the chairperson leaves the chairperson drops Chairperson Has Left IVR message is played to all participants and the conference terminates Note If there is a single chairperson in the conference who is changed to a regular participant the conference will be terminated as if the chairperson left It is therefore recommended that before changing a single chairperson to regular participant another participant first be changed to chairperson 17 Opti
124. content format that supports higher video resolutions Depending on the amount of movement contained in the conference video select either Motion for a higher frame rate without increased resolution When selected Video Clarity is disabled Sharpness for higher video resolution and requires more system resources Note When Sharpness is selected as the Video Quality setting in the conference Profile the Collaboration Server will send 4CIF H 263 at 15fps instead of CIF H 264 at 30fps For more information see Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing on page 3 1 Maximum Resolution This setting overrides the Maximum Resolution setting of the Resolution Configuration dialog box The administrator can select one of the following Maximum Resolution options Auto default The Maximum Resolution remains as selected in the Resolution Configuration dialog box CIF SD HD720 HD1080 Maximum Resolution settings can be monitored in the Profile Properties Video Quality and Participant Properties Advanced dialog boxes Notes The Resolution field in the New Participant Advanced dialog box allows Maximum Resolution to be further limited per participant endpoint The Maximum Resolution settings for conferences and participants cannot be changed during an ongoing conference 2 14 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Table 2 6 New AVC Profile Video Quality Parameters Continued Content
125. displayed E G R Eada 1 Search Display Name Jio Start Time End Time Internpl 10 Status Conference Pass Chairperson Pas Profile Sales 1 57162 27 11 2008 27 11 20 150 ok Factory_Vid 57162 25 11 2008 25 11 20 148 ok Factory_Vid 57168 24 11 2008 24 11 20 147 ok Factory_Vid 57168 26 11 2008 26 11 20 149 ok Factory_Vid 57162 28 11 2008 28 11 20 151 ok Factory_Vid oo Closest Matching Reservations 3 Optional Double click the Reservation s entry in the list to open the Reservations Properties dialog box to view or modify the Reservation or Right click the Reservation s entry in the list and select a menu option to view modify or delete the Reservation To clear the search and display all reservations 1 Clear the Quick Search field 2 Click Search All Reservations are displayed Polycom Inc Operator Assistance amp Participant Move Users operators assistance to participants is available when e Participants have requested individual help using 0 DTMF code during the conference e Participants have requested help for the conference using 00 DTMF code during the conference e Participants have problems connecting to conferences for example when they enter the wrong conference ID or password In addition the user operator can join the ongoing conference and assist all conference participants Operator assistance is available only when an Operator conference is ru
126. displayed Resolution Indicates the video resolution in use If the actual resolution is higher than video only resolution declared in the capabilities exchange the Faulty flag is dis played For example if the declared resolution is CIF and the actual reso lution is 4CIF the Faulty flag is displayed Frame Rate The number of video frames per second that are transferred between the video only MCU and the endpoint Annexes video only Indicates the H 263 annexes in use at the time of the last RTCP report If the actual annexes used are other than the declared annexes in the capa bilities exchange the Faulty flag is displayed Channel Index For Polycom Internal use only Polycom Inc E 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table E 1 Participant Properties Channel Status Advanced Parameters Continued Piela Beseriton o RTP Statistics Actual loss The number of missing packets counted by the IP card as reported in the last RTP Statistics report If a packet that was considered lost arrives later it is deducted from the packet loss count Packet loss is displayed with the following details Accumulated N number of lost packets accumulated since the channel opened Accumulated percentage of lost packets out of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened Interval N number of packets lost in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Interval percentage of l
127. e Not configured Registration with the SIP Server was not enabled in the Conference Profile assigned to this conferencing Entity In Multiple Networks configuration If one service is not configured while others are configured and registered the status reflects the registration with the configured Network Services The registration status with each SIP Server can be viewed in the Properties Network Services dialog box of each conferencing entity When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile the Collaboration Server s registering to SIP Servers will each register with an URL derived from its own signaling address Failed Registration with the SIP Server failed This may be due to incorrect definition of the SIP server in the IP Network Service or the SIP server may be down or any other reason the affects the connection between the Collaboration Server or the SIP Server to the network Registered the conferencing entity is registered with the SIP Server Partially Registered This status is available only in Multiple Networks configuration when the conferencing entity failed to register to all the required Network Services if more than one Network Service was selected Meeting Room Toolbar amp Right click Menu The Meeting Room toolbar and right click menus provide the following functionality Table 6 3 Meeting Room Toolbar and Right click Menus Toolbar button Right click menu Description New Meetin
128. ensure that endpoints that support the protocol will connect using it Setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the default may affect the video quality of endpoints that do not support the H 264 High Profile For monitoring purposes the Collaboration Server and endpoint H 264 High Profile capability is listed in the Participant Properties H 245 and SDP tabs for H 323 participants and SIP participants respectively For more information see IP Participant Properties on page 12 15 H 264 High Profile is not supported For Content Sharing With Video Preview HD1080p 60 is supported in Continuous Presence CP mode In Motion Video Quality mode With maximum bit rate of up to 4 Mbps With a symmetrical video qualities the RMX receives HD720p60 and sends HD1080p60 PAL endpoints are supported at a frame rate of 50 fps Each HD1080p60 participant consumes 4 HD video resources Polycom Inc Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing e HD1080p60 is not supported With Content sharing CP Conferencing with H 263 4CIF The video resolution of 4CIF in H 263 endpoints is only supported for conferences in which the video quality is set to sharpness and for line rates of 384 Kbps to 1920 Kbps as shown in the following table Table 3 1 Video Quality vs Line Rate Video Quality Endpoint Line Rate Kbps The Collaboration Server Web Client supports monitori
129. find details of the fields that are specific to that type of event event in the formatted CDR file The event code identifies the event in the unformatted CDR file and the event name identifies the Table C 2 CDR Event Types CONFERENCE START CONFERENCE END PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED DEFINED PARTICIPANT H323 CALL SETUP H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED The conference started For more information about the fields see Table C 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START on page C 10 Note There is one CONFERENCE START event per conference It is always the first event in the file after the conference summary record It contains conference details but not participant details The conference ended For more information about the fields see Table C 8 Event Fields for Event 2 CONFERENCE END on page C 15 Note There is one CONFERENCE END event per conference and it is always the last event in the file A participant disconnected from the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 11 Event Fields for Event 7 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED on page C 15 Information about a defined participant that is a participant who was added to the conference before the conference started For more information about the fields see Table C 13 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 DEFINED PARTICIPANT USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT on page C 16 Note
130. following knowledge e Familiarity with Windows XP or Windows 7 operating systems and interface e Familiarity with Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 7 8 or 9 e Basic knowledge of video conferencing concepts and terminology How This Guide is Organized The following typographic conventions are used in this guide to distinguish types of in text information Table 1 1 Typographic Conventions Bold Highlights interface items such as menus soft keys flag names and directories Also used to represent menu selections and text entry to the phone Italics Used to emphasize text to show example values or inputs file names and to show titles of reference documents available from the Polycom Support Web site and other reference sites Underlined Blue Used for URL links to external Web pages or documents If you click on text in this style you will be linked to an external document or Web page Blue Text Used for cross referenced page numbers in the same or other chapters or documents If you click on blue text you will be taken to the referenced section Also used for cross references If you click the italic cross reference text you will be taken to the referenced section lt variable name gt Indicates a variable for which you must enter information specific to your installation endpoint or network For example when you see lt IP address gt enter the IP address of the described device Indicates that you need to selec
131. gt Inthe RMX Management pane in the Frequently Used list click the Meeting Rooms button 24 6 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The Meeting Rooms List is displayed Meeting Room Toolbar Meeting Room List Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 _Miew Adminstration Setup_Help are Signaling Host 172211254 _Logot XX of o ja afs EEEE a Display Name 10 Duration Conference Pass Chairperson Pas Profile Dial in Number Status Find Ja Display Name Status 1D Fig Room 1004 1 00 Factory_Video_ OK Hiera amp Type a x SUPPORT_1 Empty 1111 I Maple_Room 1001 1 00 Factory_Video_ oK awm amp I Oak_Room 1002 1 00 Factory_Video_ oK Re I Juniper_Roo 1003 1 00 Factory_Video_ OK Rex MX Management ii janagemen fer Rex Frequently Used i te E Connections Ks oo PY users Rx A Signaling Monitor FS 2 ex i fa Used a fe R Services Ree Network Services Re Fcordi All Partici Q X l lt Participant Alerts Port Usage Voice 0736 MM Mideo HD 0736 Mill MCU State NORI Access to Meeting Rooms An active Meeting Room becomes an ongoing conference and is monitored in the same way as any other conference The Meeting Room List columns include Table 6 2 Meeting Rooms List Columns a eee Display Name Displays the name and the icon of the Meeting Room in the Collaboration Se
132. listed in Table 15 13 by clicking the menu Setup gt System Configuration If these flags do not appear in the System Flags list they must be manually added For more information see System Configuration Flags on page 22 1 Table 15 13 System Flags IVR Volume Control CEE IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME The volume of the IVR music played when a single participant is connected to the conference varies according to the value of this flag Possible value range 0 10 Default 2 0 disables playing the music 1 lowest volume 10 highest volume IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME The volume of IVR messages varies according to the value of this flag Possible value range 0 10 Default 2 0 disables playing the IVR messages 1 lowest volume 10 highest volume Note It is not recommended to disable IVR messages by setting the flag value to 0 The following System Flags do not require an MCU reset 4 e IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME IWVR_MUSIC_VOLUME For all other flag changes the MCU must be reset for the modified flag settings including deletion to take effect 15 34 Polycom Inc IP Network Services To enable the Polycom RMX 1800 to function within IP network environments network parameters must be defined for the IP Network Services The configuration dialog boxes for the IP network services are accessed via the Collaboration Server Management pane of the Collaboration Server Web Client Polycom RealPresence Collab
133. lower video quality less video resources The following example demonstrate the usage of the sliders Base Profile CIF 30 SS LL A LLL EA E E A CN ee SD 30 es Sa e g DE ST ae VS ee oe oes En e256 Kbps HD 720p30 eri ic Wis E gt pay ele S ERS HD 1080p30 T UD ape Pn UO CD E A plete e 2048 kbps 4o HD 1080p60 A hire ia ai ihe ES e Moving the HD720p30 resolution slider from 1024kbps to 1920kbps increases the minimum connection threshold line rate for that resolution Endpoints connecting at line rates between 1024kbps and 1920kbps that would have connected at HD 720p30 resolution will instead connect at SD 30 resolution Each of the affected endpoints will connect at lower resolution but will use less video resources e Moving the HD1080p60 resolution slider from 3584kbps to 2560kbps decreases the minimum connection threshold line rate for that resolution Endpoints connecting at line rates between 2560kbps and 4096kbps that would have connected at HD 1080p30 resolution will instead connect at HD 1080p60 resolution Each of the affected endpoints will connect at higher resolution but will use more video resources Polycom Inc Flag Settings Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing Setting the Maximum CP Resolution for Conferencing The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the system during First time Power up and after a system upgrade The default value is HD1080 All subseque
134. mos Templates file name Profiles file name IV Import includes conference profiles 11 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 11 16 Optional Clear the Import includes conference profiles check box when you only want to import Conference Templates When this check box is cleared the Conference Templates Import dialog box is displayed without the Profiles file name field Confrence Tempares meor Import Path Templates file name In the Import Path field click Browse to navigate to the path and file name of the Conference Templates you want to import When clicking the exported templates file you want to import the system automatically displays the appropriate files in the Templates file name field and the Profiles file name field when the Import includes conference profiles check box is selected Click OK to import the Conference Templates and their associated Conference Profiles if selected Conference Templates are not imported when A Conference Template already exists An associated Conference Profile is not defined in the Conference Profiles list When one or more Conference Templates are not imported a Message Alert window is displayed with the templates that were not imported Current Message Number 1 Jeff1_1546854610 Display name already exists Click Cancel to exit the Message Alerts window The imported Conference
135. multiple participants Paste Participant as Pastes as a new participant into the selected group This paste action New adds Copy at the end of the participant name This action is only available after a Copy action was activated for a single participant Rename Group Renames the group name 8 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Table 8 2 Groups Drop down Menu Actions Continued pc OS bees Delete Group Deletes the group and all of its members This action displays a message requesting confirmation to delete the group and all members connected with the group Additionally you can drag a group from one location in the Address Book to another location moving the group and all its members including sub groups to its new location using the drag and drop operation Moving a group to a new location can be done in the navigation pane or the list pane To drag a group from a location in the address book to another location 1 Select the group you want to move 2 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the new location The new location can be either the Main root level or another group level The group and all its members participants and groups are moved to the new address book location Managing the Address Book Guidelines The multi level Address Book can only be used in a local configuration on the Collaboration Server The hierarchical structure cannot be implemented with the
136. not be established 24 The endpoint closed its video channels 25 The participant video settings are not compatible with the conference protocol 26 The endpoint could not re open the video channel after the conference video mode was changed 27 The gatekeeper approved a lower bandwidth than requested 28 Video connection for the SIP participant is temporarily unavailable 255 Other Polycom Inc C 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 22 Table C 18 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Dialing Direction The dialing direction as follows 0 Dial out 5 Dial in Bonding Mode Not supported Always contains the value 0 Number of Channels Net Channel Width Not supported Always contains the value 0 Network Service The name of the Network Service Name An empty field indicates the default Network Service Restrict Not supported Always contains the value 0 Audio Only Indicates the participant s Audio Only setting as follows 0 The participant is not an Audio Only participant 1 The participant is an Audio Only participant 255 Unknown Default Number Type Net Sub Service Not supported Name This field remains empty Number of Participant Phone Numbers Number of MCU Phone Numbers Party and MCU Phone Numbers Identification Note
137. one MCU and imported to multiple MCUs in your environment Additionally you can export Conference Templates and their associated Conference Profiles simultaneously Using this option can save configuration time and ensures that identical settings are used for conferences running on different MCUs This is especially important in environments using cascading conferences that are running on different MCUs Polycom Inc Administrators can export and import Conference Templates Operators are only allowed to export Conference Templates You can select a single multiple or all Conference Templates to be exported 11 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e Both Conference Templates and their associated Conference Profiles can be exported and imported simultaneously when enabling the Export includes conference profiles or Import includes conference profiles options e Exporting and importing Conference Templates only can be used when you want to export and import individual Conference Templates without their associated Conference Profiles This option enables you to import Conference Templates when Conference Profiles already exist on an MCU Exporting Conference Templates Conference Templates are exported to a single XML file that can be used to import the Conference Templates on multiple MCUs Using the Export Conference Templates option you can e Export all Conference Templates from an MCU e Export selected Conference Temp
138. only supported protocol Ifapplicable daylight saving adjustments must be implemented by the administrator whether the MCU is in standalone mode or synchronized with NTP Servers Altering the clock The MCU s date and time can be set manually or enabled to synchronize with external NTP servers To Alter the MCU Time 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt RMX Time to open the RMX Time dialog box RMX Time GMT Date 9 15 2011 Local Time GMT Time GMT Offset 1 13 02 l2 a 5 fo a Retrieve Client Time I Use NTP Server Status Status Status 5 Adjust Reservations Time 2 View or modify the following fields Table 19 2 RMX Time Fields Properties GMT Date The date at Greenwich UK Local Time The MCU s local time settings are calculated from the GMT Time and the GMT Offset GMT Time The MCU s current GMT Time settings Select the Up or Down arrows to alter the GMT Time on the MCU 19 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Table 19 2 RMX Time Fields Properties Continued i Ee GMT Offset The time zone difference between Greenwich and the MCU s physical location in hours and minutes Select the Up or Down arrows to alter the GMT Offset time on the MCU To enter a negative offset either type a minus in the hour box or use the down arrow and decrease the offset below zero Retrieve Client Time Click this butt
139. order according to the selected video protocol Video Intra Sync Indicates whether the synchronization on a video Intra frame was successful Video Resolution The video resolution of the participant The received line rate The transmitted line rate Tx Video Sync Loss When checked indicates a video synchronization problem in the outgoing channel from the MCU The counter indicates the sync loss count Rx Video Sync Loss When checked indicates a video synchronization problem in the incoming channel from the endpoint The counter indicates the sync loss count Tx LPR Activation When checked indicates LPR activation in the outgoing channel Rx LPR Rx LPR Activation When checked indicates LPR activation in the incoming channel checked indicates LPR activation in the i When checked indicates LPR activation in the incoming channel channel CELOR Token When checked indicates that the participant is the holder of the FECC Token Content Token When checked indicates that the participant is the holder of the Content Token 12 22 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring 5 Click the Channel Status Advanced tab to view additional information for selected audio and video channels In the Channel Status Advanced tab channels can be selected for viewing additional information Viewing Permissions S i 3 gt General E g S Z vena Name Derm ROK I72219
140. present status of the hardware components In addition to the status temperature and voltage indications are provided for each component To view the status of the hardware components on the RMX 1800 gt gt In the RMX Management pane click the Hardware Monitor button The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed Hardware Monitor m i Slot Type Status Temperature Voltage W RMX Normal Normal Normal Wi DSP Card Normal Normal W2 DSP Card Normal Normal E DSP Card Normal Normal a FANS Normal gt PWR Normal Normal SS LANS Normal The Hardware Monitor pane displays the following Collaboration Server hardware componen s status columns Table 21 1 Hardware Monitor Pane Status Columns N Displays an icon according to the Hardware component type and the slot number The icon displays the hardware status as follows e An exclamation point indicates errors in the hardware component e Card icon with the reset button ig indicates that the hardware component is currently resetting Type The type of hardware component card 21 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 21 1 Hardware Monitor Pane Status Columns Continued CO e Status The current status of the hardware component Normal Major Critical Resetting Diagnostics or Empty Temperature Monitors the temperature of the hardware components Normal Major and Critical Note Critical condition invokes a system
141. process via DTMF codes see the RSS 2000 User s Guide Recording between the Collaboration Server and the Codian VCR is enabled by adding an IP participant to the recorded conference that acts as a link between the conference and the recording device This participant is identified as a recording link to the Codian VCR according to the product ID sent from the VCR during the connection phase in the call setup parameters The video channel between the conference and the recording device is unidirectional where the video stream is sent from the conference to the recorder If the Codian VCR opens a video channel to the conference this channel is excluded from the conference video mix To record a conference running on the Collaboration Server using Codian recorder gt gt Inthe conference define or add a dial out participant using the Codian VCR IP address as the address for dialing Once added to the conference the MCU automatically connects the participant the link to Codian VCR and the recording is automatically started on the Codian VCR A connection can also be defined on the Codian VCR dialing into the recorded conference using the MCU prefix and the Conference ID as for any other dial in participant in the conference Monitoring the recording participant This connection is monitored as any other participant in the conference The connection can also be monitored in the Codian VCR web client Polycom Inc 13 11 Polycom RMX
142. requests sent from the Collaboration Server to the endpoint sending the Content to refresh the Content display Refresh requests that will be received from endpoints within the defined interval will be postponed to the next interval Default setting 5 Forcing Other Content Capabilities The H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIES System Flag in system cfg gives additional control over Content sharing When the flag is set to NO default the Collaboration Server only verifies that the endpoint supports the content protocols H 263 or H 264 When set to YES the Collaboration Server checks frame rate bit rate resolution annexes and all other parameters of the Content mode as declared by an endpoint during the capabilities negotiation phase If the endpoint does not support the Content capabilities of the MCU the participant will not be able to send or receive content over a dedicated content channel Content Sharing via the Polycom CCS Plug in for Microsoft Lync Clients From version 8 1 Polycom CCS Content Collaboration Solution Plug in for Lync clients allows Lync clients to receive and send Content on a separate channel without having to use the video channel Content is transmitted using SIP BFCP For more information see Appendix 4 Exclusive Content Mode on page 4 16 Video Preview Collaboration Server users can preview the video sent from the participant to the conference MCU and the video sent from the conference to
143. requirements must be met A gatekeeper must be defined The alias of the participant must be defined The alias type must be defined not set to None e If an H 323 gatekeeper is defined but is not connected the MCU will fail to connect to H 323 dial out participants 8 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide In order for the MCU to ignore the IP of SIP participants the following requirements must be met ASIP proxy must be defined The SIP address must be defined If a SIP proxy is defined but is not connected the MCU will fail to connect to SIP dial out participants Adding a Participant from an Ongoing Conference to the Address Book You can add a participant to the Address Book directly from an ongoing conference When adding a participant to the address book from a new conference Participants list of an ongoing conference or Conference Template the participant is always added to the Main group To add a participant from the conference to the Address Book 1 During an ongoing conference select the participant in the Participant pane and either click the Add Participant to Address Book button f or right click and select Add Participant to Address Book The participant is added to the Address Book Alternatively you could a Double click the participant s icon or right click the participant icon and click Participant Properties The Participant Properties window opens O
144. send text messages to the conference participants during the conference and adjust the display properties of the text messages a ao For more information see Message Overlay for Text Messaging on page 2 33 Click the Network Services tab to verify the SIP registration for the conference Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring 22 Click OK to close the Conference Properties dialog box 23 Click the Video Settings tab to view the video parameters defined for the conference SUPPORT 298785866 Properties Display Name SUPPORT _298785866 Duration I 14 o0 a I Permanent Conference Conferencing Mode T Presentation Mode T Telepresence Mode Enabled I Send Content to Legacy Endpoints Telepresence Mode or z Telepresence Layout Mode Continuous Presence ind I Same Layout T Lecturer View Switching Nectar None v Auto Scan Interval s 10 X T Auto Layout Overlay In SVC conferences only Auto Layout is enabled and cannot be disabled All other video settings are disabled 12 11 Polycom Inc Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 24 Click the Audio Settings tab to view the audio parameters defined for the conference SUPPORT 298785866 Propertics e gt General Display Name SUPPORT 2987859 tened isplay SUPPORT_298785866 gt Video Quality Durations 14 0 Sr gt Video Settings T Audio Seltings Confere
145. show how to modify the workstation s networking parameters using the Windows New Connection Wizard For non Windows operating systems an equivalent procedure must be performed by the system administrator Before connecting directly you must modify the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway settings of the workstation to be compatible with either the Collaboration Server s Default Management Network or Alternate Management Network To modify the workstation s IP addresses 1 On the Windows Start menu select Settings gt Network Connections Polycom Inc F 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 3 4 5 Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qa DB Psh 5 Foes F Ade ss Network Connections Boles a Be Name S viatun E Create a new connection ba Change Windows Firewall Stee B any name R PassConnect See Also A LAN or High Speed Internet Vi Network Troubleshooter Local Area Connection 6 UP Wireless Network Connection Other m Local Area Connection Control Panel Virtual Private Network GQ My Network Places My Documents 012 I My Computer Wizard Details a New Connection wizard Network Connections System Folder s 2 objects Type Dial up Dial up Dial up Disconnected Disconnected Disconnected LAN or High Speed inter Lienen LAN or High Speed Inter LAN or High Speed Inter L
146. shut down Voltage The voltage threshold of the hardware component either Normal or Major Hardware Monitor Pane Tool bar The following buttons appear in the tool bar of the Hardware Monitor Table 21 2 Hardware Monitor Pane Tool Bar Buttons CE o System Reset Resets and restarts the system Resetting saves settings and information that you changed in the system i e IP Services etc System Shut Down Shuts down the system into a standby mode When the user in the RMX Manager Client presses the System Shut Down red button in the Hardware Monitor tool bar the system should enter a standby mode and the LED turns ON Turn the system OFF ON to exit the standby mode Active Diagnostic Activates Diagnostic mode The system restarts and enter the Mode Diagnostic mode and you can perform tests to detect malfunctions in the hardware componenf s performance Note Only Polycom Support can perform Diagnostic tests For more information contact your Polycom Support Viewing the Properties of RMX 1800 Hardware Components The properties displayed for the hardware components will vary according to the type of component viewed These component properties can be grouped as follows e MCU Properties RMX 1800 e Card Properties DSP cards e Supporting Hardware Components Properties FANS LAN PWR No properties are provided for Power Supply PWR For more information see the RMX 1800 Hardware Guide RealPresence Collaborat
147. standard conferencing Forcing is enabled at the Conference level only It applies only to the video layout viewed by the lecturer as all the other conference participants see only the lecturer in full screen If an asymmetrical video layout is selected for the lecturer i e 3 1 4 1 8 1 each video window contains a different participant i e one cannot be forced to a large frame and to a small frame simultaneously When Lecture Mode is enabled for the conference the lecturer is indicated by an icon 8 in the Role column of the Participants list GARR GS Bae w fe Name Status Role Jir Address Phone Alias Name Network Dialing Di Audio Video e Marc_59446123 2 participants fy Marc gt Connected 8 10 253 72 13 H 323 amp Dial o 28 fx HDX lt 4 Connected 10 253 72 24 SIP gt Dial o Participant designated as the Lecturer To control the Lecture Mode during an Ongoing Conference During the Ongoing Conference in the Conference Properties Video Settings dialog box you can e Enable or disable the Lecture Mode and designate the conference lecturer in the Lecturer list select None to disable the Lecture Mode or select a participant to become the lecturer to enable it 4 41 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e Designate a new lecturer gt General gt Advanced gt Video Quality Display Name Duration gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Customized Polling
148. system cfg file before it can be modified For more details on defining system flags see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Star Cascading Topology Polycom Inc In the Star topology as well as in the Basic topology the MCUs are usually installed at different locations states countries and participants connect to their local MCU to facilitate the connection and save long distance call costs Star Topology Cascading requires that all cascaded MCUs reside on the same network Although participants in Star Cascading conferences can connect to their local conference using H 323 SIP and ISDN the Cascading Links between conferences must connect via H 323 Content sharing is available to all conferences over the H 323 Cascading Link In this topology the MCUs are networked together using two modes e Master Slave Cascading e Cascading via Entry Queue 5 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Master Slave Cascading 5 6 It is similar to MIH Multi Hierarchy cascading with only two levels one Master MCU on level 1 and several Slave MCUs on level 2 The cascading hierarchy topology can extend to four levels Figure 5 5 and should be deployed according to the following guidelines If an Collaboration Server is deployed on level 1 Collaboration Server systems can be used on level 2 MGC with version 9 0 4 can be used on level 2 if Collaboration Server version 7 0 2 and higher is deployed in level
149. system displays the mute icon only for H 323 This icon is not displayed for SIP participant due to SIP standard limitation Block When checked the audio transmission from the conference to the participant s endpoint is blocked but the participant will still be heard by other participants 12 16 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring 2 Click the Connection Status tab to view the connection status and if disconnected the cause of the disconnection Marc Properties a gt General gt Advanced Name Mare Endpoint Website gt Information Endpoint Type Ec gt Media Sources gt H 245 gt Connection Status gt Channel Status Connection Time 3 gt Channel Status Adva O isconnection Time SSS gt Gatekeeper Status eae Connection Retries Left o Call Disconnection Cause ar Video Disconnection Cause Viewing Permissions Status 5 s e Possible Solution 2 ic gt o s Z B S g EPSE Tab O lt x Connection Status v v Add to Address Book The following parameters are displayed Table 12 8 Participant Properties Connection Status Parameters Fs cc Participant Status Indicates the connection status of the participant Connection Time The date and time the participant connected to the conference Note The time format is derived from the MCU s operating system time format Disconnection Time The date
150. the Full Intra Request FIR is sent as INFO and not RTCP Default YES RTCP_FLOW_CONTROL_T Enables disables the SIP RTCP flow control parameter MMBR_ENABLE Default YES RTCP_FLOW_CONTROL_T Modifies the interval in seconds of the TMMBR Temporary MMBR_INTERVAL Maximum Media Stream Bit Rate parameter for SIP RTCP flow control Range 5 999 seconds Default 180 RTCP_PLI_ENABLE When set to YES the Picture Loss Indication PLI is sent as INFO and not RTCP Default YES RTCP_QOS_IS_EQUAL_TO Range YES NO _RTP Default YES SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_R_ When set to YES it enables the Collaboration Server to send ESOURCE_THRESHOLD a busy notification to a SIP audio endpoint or a SIP device when dialing in to the Collaboration Server whose audio resource usage exceeded the Port Usage threshold When set to NO the system does limit the SIP audio endpoint connections to a certain capacity and will not send a busy notification when the resource capacity threshold is exceeded Default NO SET_DTMF_SOURCE_DIFF If the ACCEPT_VOIP_DTMF_TYPE flag is set to 0 Auto this _IN_SEC flag determines the interval in seconds after which the Collaboration Server will accept both DTMF tones inband and digits outband Default 120 20 18 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued ee ee SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MOD E SIP_ENABLE
151. the Local Area Connection that has Connected status In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box select Internet Protocol TCP IP gt Properties m Local Area Connection Properties 2 X p General Authentication In the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box select Use the following IP address Polycom Inc Appendix F Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration Server 6 Enter the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway for the workstation Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically CX Use the following IP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server The workstation s IP address should be in the same network neighborhood as the Collaboration Server s Control Unit IP address Example IP address near 192 168 1 nn None of the reserved IP addresses listed in Table F 1 should be used for the IP Address The Subnet mask and Default gateway addresses should be the same as those for the Collaboration Server s Management Network The addresses needed for connection to either the Collaboration Server s Default Management N
152. the MGC Manager are not supported by the Collaboration Server In addition for some fields the Collaboration Server has a fixed value whereas the MGC Manager supported multiple values For more information about the MGC Manager fields and values see the MGC Manager User s Guide Volume II Appendix A Table C 3 Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START i CS Dial Out Manually Auto Terminate Line Rate Line Rate cont Restrict Mode Audio Algorithm Video Session Video Format Indicates whether the conference was a dial out manually conference or not Currently the only value is 0 The conference was not a dial out manually conference that is the MCU initiates the communication with dial out participants and the user does not need to connect them manually Indicates whether the conference was set to end automatically if no participant joins the conference for a predefined time period after the conference starts or if all participants disconnect from the conference and the conference is empty for a predefined time period Possible values are 0 The conference was not set to end automatically 1 The conference was set to end automatically The conference line rate as follows 0 64 kbps 6 384 kbps 12 1920 kbps 13 128 kbps 15 256 kbps 23 512 kbps 24 768 kbps 26 1152 kbps 29 1472 kbps 32 96 kbps 33 1024 kbps 34 4096 kbps Not supported Always contains the value 0 The
153. the Port Gauge in the Status Bar of the Collaboration Server Web Client Setting the Port Usage Threshold To Set the Port Usage Threshold 1 Inthe Setup menu click Port Gauge to open the Port Gauge dialog box Port Gauge xX Slert when port usage exceeds Usage Threshold Status Bar P port Usage Voice 0750 Mf Video HD 4770 Enter the value for the percentage capacity usage threshold The value is applied to the Audio and video resources The high Port Usage threshold represents a percentage of the total number of video or voice ports available It is set to Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities indicate when resource usage is approaching its maximum resulting in no free resources to run additional conferences When port usage reaches or exceeds the threshold the red area of the gauge flashes The default port usage threshold is 80 2 Click OK SIP Dial in Busy Notification When the system flag SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_RESOURCE_THRESHOLD is set to YES NO is the default it enables the MCU to send a busy notification to a SIP audio endpoint or a SIP device when dialing in to the MCU whose audio resource usage exceeded the Port Usage threshold The Collaboration Server will send a SIP busy response to SIP audio endpoints when e The system flag SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_RESOURCE_THRESHOLD is set to YES NO is the default e The port usage threshold for
154. the conference and select from one of the following options Participants 5Y ee RR OB wae wt Ew Name Status Role IP Addre Alias Na Network Dialing Audio Video gfstics 5 participants Rex Recording gt Conn 172 22 Recordi H 323 amp Dial fe Biltyratse 172 22 H 323 amp Dial f amp Brad Peterson lt gt Conn 172 22 H 323 Dial fx Holly Bramson lt amp Conn eee H 323 amp Dial Ra Maria Vallance Conn 192 22 H 323 amp Dial 13 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 13 1 Recording Participant Right click Options ee ee Start Starts recording When recording has started this option toggles with the Pause option Pauses the recording of the conference without disconnecting When the Recording is Paused this option toggles with the Start option Resume Resumes the recording of the conference The Resume option toggles with the Pause option when it is used Stop Stops the recording Note The Stop button is only enabled when the Recording is Started or Paused Suspend Video The Suspend Video option prevents the incoming video of the recording link participant to be part of the conference layout The Recording Link participant is set by default to Suspend Video The Suspend Video option toggles with the Resume Video option Resume Video The Resume Video option enables the incoming video of the recording link participant to be part of the conference layout This feat
155. the given time frame given time frame SIP trans error TCP Invite A SIP Invite was sent via TCP but the endpoint was not found SIP transport error Unable to initiate connection with the endpoint SIP unauthorized The request requires user authentication SIP unsupported media type The server is refusing to service the request because the message body of the request is in a format not supported by the requested resource for the requested method Polycom Inc Appendix B Active Alarms Table B 1 Active Alarms Alarm Code Alarm Description The system upgrade requires that a valid activation key be entered If none is available resetting the Collaboration Server will cancel the upgrade and return the Collaboration Server to the previous version A new activation key was loaded Reset the MCU A new version was installed Reset the MCU A system alert was generated by a component of the Central Signaling A system alert was generated by an internal system component A matching activation key is required To cancel the upgrade process reset the Collaboration Server A new activation key was loaded Reset the system A new version was installed Reset the system Alarm generated by a Central Signaling component Alarm generated by an internal component Allocation mode was modified Automatic reset is unavailable in Safe Mode Backup of audit files is required Backup of CDR files is required Ba
156. the method for sending the Certificate to the Collaboration Server e CSR PEM PFX SIP Servers Primary Backup Server Parameter Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the preferred SIP server If a DNS is used you can enter the SIP server name Server Domain Name Enter the name of the domain that you are using for conferences for example user name domain name The domain name is used for identifying the SIP server in the appropriate domain according to the host part in the dialed string For example when a call to EQ1 polycom com reaches its outbound proxy this proxy looks for the SIP server in the polycom com domain to which it will forward the call When this call arrives at the SIP server in polycom com the server looks for the registered user EQ1 and forwards the call to this Entry Queue or conference Enter the number of the TCP or UDP port used for listening The port number must match the port number configured in the SIP server Default port is 5060 Outbound Proxy Servers Primary Alternate Server Parameter Server IP Address By default the Outbound Proxy Server is the same as the SIP Server If they differ modify the IP address of the Outbound Proxy and the listening port number if required Enter the port number the outbound proxy is listening to The default port is 5060 When updating the parameters of the SIP Server in the P Network Service SIP Servers dialog box the Collaboration Ser
157. the received streams into one video stream that includes the input from the other endpoints arranges in the selected video layout Participants do not see themselves in the video layout By Default the speaker is shown in the top left layout cell in symmetric layouts in the larger cell in asymmetric layouts or in full screen The speaker sees the previous speakers their number depends on the number of cells on the speaker s layout The Continuous Presence video session offers layouts to accommodate different numbers of participants and conference settings including support of the VUI annex to the H 264 protocol for endpoints that transmit wide video instead of 4CIF resolution Each participant can select his her layout for viewing during the conference as can be seen in Figure 2 1 For conferences with more participants than display squares the Collaboration Server dynamic video mix capability allows the viewed sites to be modified throughout the conference The displayed layout can be changed during an ongoing conference allowing a participant to view different screen layouts of the other conference participants These layout options allow conferences to have greater flexibility when displaying a large number of participants and maximizes the screen s effectiveness Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles AVC Endpoint RealPresence Collaboration Server AVC Endpoint AVC Endpoint Figure 2 1 AVC Continuo
158. to refresh intra the content A_SUPPRESSION_IN_SEC sent from the Collaboration Server system to the content ONDS sender as a result of refresh requests initiated by other conference participants Enter the interval in seconds between the Intra requests sent from the Collaboration Server to the endpoint sending the content to refresh the content display Refresh requests that will be received from endpoints within the defined interval will be postponed to the next interval Default setting 5 20 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued ee CPU_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_TI This flag indicates when to send the first KeepAlive indication ME_SECONDS to check the TCP connection Default value 7200 second 120 minutes Range 600 18000 seconds When there are NAT problems this default may be too long and the TCP connection is lost In such a case the default value should be changed to 3600 seconds 60 minutes or less CPU_TCP_KEEP_INTERVAL This flag indicates the interval in seconds between the _SECONDS KeepAlive requests Default value 75 second Range 10 720 seconds DISABLE_INACTIVE_USER Users can be automatically disabled by the system when they do not log into the Collaboration Server application for a predefined period Possible Values 0 90 days Default 0 disables this option ENABLE_ACCEPTING_ICM When set to YES allows the RMX to accept ICMP Redirect
159. using this service Note This field is displayed in all Default IP Service tabs Signaling Host IP Enter the address to be used by IP endpoints when dialing into Address the Collaboration Server using this Network Service Dial out calls of participants to whom this network service will be assigned are initiated from this address This address is used to register the Collaboration Server with a Gatekeeper or a SIP Proxy server residing on this network Note The Signaling network shares the same IP address with the Media 2 IP address and is not editable Media 1 IP Address Reserved for existing IP network Service Note DO NOT change this IP address here Media 2 IP Address Enter the IP address for media network of the new IP network service Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the Collaboration Server in that network service Default value 255 255 255 0 4 Optional Some system flags can be defined per Network Service depending on the network environment To modify these flags click the Service Configuration button 16 32 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services The Service Configuration dialog box opens gt MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER gt gt CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS Flag Name Value New Section Delete Section jew r All the flags must be manually added to this dialog box For a detailed description of the flags and how to add them see Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags
160. versions prior to 8 1 if YES sets conferences to automatically terminate if the Chairperson disconnects from the conference This takes effect only if the Conference Requires Chairperson check box in the Conference Profile Properties IVR Tab is selected Default YES Note In order for the Chairperson Exit message to be played this flag must be set to YES 3 To modify a flag value double click or select the flag and click the Edit Flag button 4 Inthe New Value field enter the flag s new value Update Flag Name i Flag Name New Value NO 5 Click OK to close the Update Flag dialog box 6 Repeat steps 2 4 to modify additional flags Polycom Inc 20 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 7 Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box For flag changes including deletion to take effect reset the MCU For more information see Resetting the Collaboration Server RMX on page 19 54 Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags To add a flag 1 Inthe System Flags dialog box click the New Flag ica button The New Flag dialog box is displayed New Flag x New Flag Value 2 Inthe New Flag field enter the flag name 3 In the Value field enter the flag value The following flags can be manually added to the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS ee a 802_1X_CERTIFICATE_MO_ Not Supported in RMX 1800
161. video slide used to automate the participants connection to a conference or Entry Queue It allows customization of menu driven scripts and voice prompts to meet different needs and languages The IVR module includes two types of services e Conference IVR Service that is used with conferences Entry Queue IVR Service that is used with Entry Queues The system is shipped with two default Conference IVR Services one for the conferences and the other for gateway calls and one default Entry Queue IVR Service The default services include voice messages and video slides in English To customize the IVR messages and video slide perform the following operations e Record the required voice messages and create a new video slide For more information see Creating a Welcome Video Slide on page 15 30 e Optional Add the language to the list of languages supported by the system e Upload the voice messages to the MCU This can be done as part of the language definition or during the IVR Service definition Create the Conference IVR Service and upload the video slide and if required any additional voice messages e Optional Create the Entry Queue IVR Service and upload the required video slide and voice messages IVR Services List You can view the currently defined Conference IVR and Entry Queue IVR Services in the IVR Services list pane To view the IVR Services list 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane expand the Rar
162. within a LAN or WAN faulty or incorrectly configured network equipment or faulty cabling are among the many causes of Packet Loss Effects of Packet Loss on Conferences Packet Loss affects the quality of e Video frozen images decreased frame rate flickering tiling distortion smearing loss of lip sync e Audio drop outs chirping audio distortion e Content frozen images blurring distortion slow screen refresh rate Lost Packet Recovery The Lost Packet Recovery LPR algorithm uses Forward Error Correction FEC to create additional packets that contain recovery information These additional packets are used to reconstruct packets that are lost for whatever reason during transmission Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation DBA is used to allocate the bandwidth needed to transmit the additional packets Lost Packet Recovery Guidelines e If packet loss is detected in the packet transmissions of either the video or Content streams LPR is applied to both the video and Content streams DBA allocates bandwidth from the video stream for the insertion of additional packets containing recovery information e LPR is supported in H 323 and SIP networking environments only e In LPR enabled Continuous Presence conferences Both LPR enabled and non LPR enabled endpoints are supported The LPR process is not applied to packet transmissions from non LPR enabled H 323 and SIP endpoints Non LPR enabled endpoints ca
163. 0 H 323 Q 931 call signaling Yes for outgoing incoming Each outgoing call has a calls only separate port It is configured in the 49152 The port for each outgoing call Fixed Ports section of 59999 is allocated dynamically the IP service outgoing H 323 H 245 49152 TCP H 245 control Yes for outgoing 59999 Each outgoing call has a calls only separate port It is configured in the The port for each outgoing call Fixed Ports section of is allocated dynamically Itcan the IP service be avoided by tunneling SIP server 5060 UDP Connection to the SIP Server Yes in the IP service 60000 TCP Sometimes port 60000 is used when the system cannot reuse the TCP port This port can be set in the Central signaling CS configuration file Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services Table 16 16 Collaboration Server Network Port Usage Summary Continued Connection Port ee Alternative 5060 UDP Connection to the alternate Yes in the IP service SIP server 60000 TCP SIP Server Sometimes port 60000 is used when the system cannot reuse the TCP port This port can be set in the Central signaling CS configuration file SIP Outbound 5060 UDP Connection to the SIP Yes in the IP service proxy 60000 TCP outbound proxy Sometimes port 60000 is used when the system cannot reuse the TCP port This port can be set in the Central signaling CS configuration file Alternative 5060 UDP Connection to the a
164. 0 2101 25 07 2006 21 55 32 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 TestParty 670304466 0 101 25 07 2006 21 55 33 0 POLYCOM TestParty 147079156 7 0 0 255 0 DeFault IP Figure 17 1 Unformatted CDR File e Formatted text Formatted CDR files contain multiple sections The first section in each file contains general conference data The remaining sections contain event data one section for each event Each field value is displayed in a separate line together with its name This data can be used to generate a summary report for a conference The field names and values in the formatted file will appear in the language being used for the Collaboration Server Web Client user interface at the time when the CDR information is retrieved The following is an example of a formatted CDR file P TestConf 838343740_ci00 txt Notepad 5 x File Edit Format View Help File version 675 ee Name TestConf 838343740 Internal Conference ID 110 General conference Reserved Duration 01 00 00 z Actual Start Time 25 07 2006 21 55 22 section Actual Duration 00 01 04 i Status Cause User Terminate File Name c100 GMT offset 0 jle Retrieved True Event heading ONFERENCE START 25 07 2006 21 55 22 Dial Out Manually False Auto Terminate True Line Rate 384 kbps Audio Algorithm auto Video Session Continuous Presence video Format auto CIF Frame Rate auto QCIF Frame Rate auto Event section CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 2
165. 0 10 226 105 13 SIP S Dial in Frequently Used Rex 10 226 105 lt D Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP S Dial in TE Rex 10 226 105 lt gt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP S Dial in ER Users Rex 10 226 105 lt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP S Dial in a ona Rex 10 226 105 lt gt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP f Dial in WF Hardware Monitor Rex 10 226 105 lt D Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP amp Dial in BE Medioa oom Rex 10 226 105 lt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP S Dial in BE Rerervation exe 10 226 105 lt B Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP f Dial in Rarely Used Rex 10 226 105 lt b Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP 8 Dial in eres Ac 49776 195 te Connect A iii anaana ero A nial in a ar X GuisystemiAlertsil Participant Alerts _ Port Usage Video 34740 _ MCU State MAJOR THISIS A DOD SYSTEM ANDIS SUBJECT TO MONITORING UNAUTHORIZED USE MAY SUBJECT YOU TO ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION OR CRIMINAL PROSECUTION AND PENALTIES System Alerts Participant Alerts indication bar indication bar The System Alerts indication bar blinks red prompting the user to view the active alarms Once viewed the System Alerts indication bar becomes statically red until the errors have been resolved in the MCU The Participants Alerts indication bar blinks red indicating participant connection difficulties in conferences Once viewed the Participant Alerts indication bar becomes statically red until the errors have
166. 0 characters Table C 30 Event Fields for Event 35 SVC SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED e e o Participant Name The name of the participant An empty field denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose name is unspecified C 27 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 28 Table C 30 Event Fields for Event 35 SVC SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED Continued ba ee Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Participant Status The participant status as follows 0 Idle 1 Connected 2 Disconnected 3 Waiting for dial in 4 Connecting 5 Disconnecting 6 Partially connected Party has completed H 221 capability exchange 7 Deleted by a user 8 Secondary The participant could not connect the video channels and is connected via audio only 10 Connected with problem 11 Redialing Receive line rate Negotiated reception line rate Transmit line rate Negotiated transmission line rate Uplink Video a Number of uplink streams Capabilities b Video stream multiple streams i Resolution width ii resolution height iii max frame rate iv max line rate Audio Codec SAC Other Secondary Cause Table C 31 Event Fields for Event 100 USER TERMINATE CONFERENCE fea ema Terminated By The login name of the user who terminated the conference Table C 32 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 USER DELETE PARTICIPANT USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT USER RECONNECT PARTICIPAN
167. 001 25 07 2006 21 55 22 0 0 0 0 0 S4 25 07 2006 21 55 22 0 05001 25 07 2006 21 55 22 0 61647 5 Event code ici 95 30 2006 21 55 as a POLYCOM TestParty 1904020434 0 0 255 befaurt IP 0 0 0 0 0 1 33 3101 25707 D008 21255298 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 TestParty 1904020434 0 101 25 07 2006 21 55 25 0 POLYCOM TestParty 1471911551 1 0 0 255 0 Default IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 5101 9507 2008 31 55239 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 TestParty 1471911551 0 Event records p01 35 07 2006 21 55 30 0 POLYCOM TestParty 932240319 2 0 0 255 0 befault IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 33 3101 95 07 3006 31255230 0 2 50 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 TestParty 932240319 0 101 25 07 2006 21 55 30 0 POLYCOM TestParty 1111 630138 3 0 0 255 0 Default IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 3101 95 07 3008 21255230 0 2 50 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 TestParty 1111630138 0 101 25 07 2006 21 55 31 0 POLYCOM TestParty 1986416118 4 0 0 255 0 Default IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 33 3101 95107 3008 31 255231 4002 10 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 TestParty 1986416118 0 01 25 07 2006 21 55 31 0 Polycom TestParty 654921264 5 0 0 255 0 befault IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 3101 25 07 3006 31255221 0 2 0 255 5 0 1 4294967295 0 1720 8 Testparty 654921264 0 101 25 07 2006 21 55 32 0 POLYCOM TestParty 670304466 6 0 0 255 0 Default IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 3
168. 0p30 Ray ene en E is a a HD 1080p30 EAA ali ate AU pe Ml po Near line a gO en Sh Ne ee yh 2088 kbps HD 1080p60 4 Mihi iS iat a air 1 1 4 3584 kbps Polycom Inc 3 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e High Profile Endpoints that support H 264 High Profile connect at these minimum threshold bit rates High Profile CIF 30 ii i ie ira i na an ira Ss OO Oo Ol 0020 SD 30 cg ee eT RS ee ceed ae er er ben 250 kbps a lS HD 720p30 ill iii Siti ii i aie re FC M HD 1080p30 HF she 9 gis ai ma I AT ics SNe e My ah A enn ee eo SS kbps A HD 1080p60 E E ie oy etc a eed A aie Bp Although the default minimum threshold bit rates provide acceptable video quality the use of higher bit rates usually results in better video quality but will require more resources The Base Profile and High Profile sliders operate in the same manner in Sharpness and in Motion Video Resource usage is affected by the Resolution Configuration settings The lower the line rate threshold set for a certain resolution the more resources will be used to connect that participant as a higher resolution will be used Moving the slider of a certain resolution to the left reduces the line rate threshold required for the endpoints to connect using that resolution resulting in higher video quality more video resources Moving the slider to the right increases the line rate required for the endpoint to connect using that resolution resulting in
169. 1 9 Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template o ccceesesseseseseseeseseeeeees 11 9 Deleting a Conference Template 0 2 ccccccesescceseesescscsesesesceceeseecesecsssnenesesesssanenetesanans 11 11 Exporting and Importing Conference Templates 000 cecsessssseseseseeneseseseneeseeeeeees 11 11 Exporting Conference Templates 0 0 0 cece ceseseececsseeseesecesseenesessseeeeeeneneeeeey 11 12 Exporting All Conference Templates from an MCU 0 eee 11 12 Exporting Selected Conference Templates 0 0 0 0 cece eeseseeeeteeeeeeeneneneees 11 14 Importing Conference Templates 0 cece csesesseeesessssesesesessseseseseseseseseseseseneaes 11 15 Conference and Participant Monitoring 0000 eee eens 12 1 General MOmitOnNE eriein EE E EEEE 12 2 Conference Leye l Monitoring isciiscscisesststeensvosestucnovass ceusnedsnsnsssstvenenssseesousesesuidesends isens 12 2 Viewing the Properties of an Ongoing CP Conference ss ssesssesiesissisreesresierresress 12 2 Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance CP COMEREMCES irere innn Tae A E EE EO E daean chases 12 12 Requesting Help cs eccsectesstacscstescessstseesadscs sven ce ctedsssiesevavesnsstevvecstisndedevensasteavestseseunves 12 12 REQUEST to Speak shsecsstsivndscesseheszedesstavesescetesbusgciecescunteseds coves Sess E EEEE NEEE 12 13 Participant Alerts Cist ss siccquiasnain Aside shai rene eaor e enio aera 12 14 Participant Level Monitoring scsi ides seve
170. 1480075 Properties SUPPORT_751480075 Duration 14 o0 I Permanent Conference Conferencing Mode ICP Continuous Presence v I Echo Suppression F Keyboard Noise Suppression I Audio Clarity V Mute participants except lecturer Speaker Change Threshold Seconds I Auto mute noisy endpoints 7 If needed you can enable or disable the Mute participants except lecturer setting 12 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring Click the Customized Polling tab to view and modify the customized polling for the conference All Conference Participants Scanning Order gt General Display Name SUPPORT_1 Piles isplay Name SUPPORTI gt Video Quality gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings Move gt Customized Polling 41 participants Scanning Order gt Skins participant up in Scanning Order Duration gt IVR Rex Heng_HDX_172 21 9 gt Information ex Heng_HDX_172 21 9 gt Recording fe emen hox 17 71 fy ccc gt stan fp one son 12 MEE gt Network Services x James_HOX_177 41 EA Rex Heng_csso_ 2 21 Move ex Heng_G 172 21 participant Rex Jamg G550_172 21 Rex yhres_6550_172 21 down in Jenny_G550_172 21 Scanning Order Rex Jenny_G550_172 21 Add x Guoxi_GS50_172 21 fx Guoxi_GS50_172 21 fax i_G550_ Delete Rex Guoxi_HDX_172 21 1 Add All Rex Guoxi_HDX_172 21 1 Delete All Rex Jenny_QDx_172 219 y
171. 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 16 Level 1 Conference A RMX 4000 Master of conferences B and C Cascading links Conference B Conference C Slave of conference A Slave of conference A Master of conferences D and E Master of conferences F and G Level 2 Cascading links Conference D Conference G Slave of conference B Slave of conference C Level 3 y J Z Figure 5 6 MIH Cascading Master Slave Relationship Video Session Mode Line Rate and Video Settings The types of MCUs their position in the cascade topology and the endpoint capabilities HD CIF and H 263 H 264 determine the Video Session Type of the MIH Cascading conference e When creating a cascading link between two RMXs The RMxXs operate in CP Continuous Presence mode DTMF codes should be defined with the same numeric codes in the IVR services assigned to the cascading conferences e When creating a cascading link between MGCs and RMXs If there are no MGCs on level 2 the MGCs can operate in either in CP or VSW Video Switching mode If there are MGCs on level 2 the MGCs can only operate in VSW mode MGC does not support H 264 High Profile therefore when MGC is part of the Cascading topology do not select High Profile on the RMX system DTMF codes should be defined with the same numeric codes in the IVR services assigned to the cascading conferences e When creating a cascading link between two MGCs
172. 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dia Ra 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rax 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia fle 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rax 172 22 187 13 172 22 187 13 H 323 Dia Rax 172 22 187 13 172 22 187 13 H 323 Dia Ra 172 22 187 13 172 22 187 13 H 323 Dia Re 172 22 187 12 172 22 187 12 H 323 Dia The Custom Filtering dialog box opens Custom Filtering Cat Column text matches Remove Condition Clear Conditions a f e 4 Inthe Condition Column text matches field enter the filtering pattern For example to list only endpoints that include the numerals 41 in their name enter 41 5 Optional Click the Add Condition button to define additional filtering patterns to further filter the list and fine tune your search To clear a filtering pattern click the Clear Condition button Polycom Inc 8 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 8 20 The filtered list is displayed with an active filter blue indicator P displayed in the selected column heading For example if the filtering pattern is 41 the participants list includes all the endpoints that contain the numerals 41 in their name Address BOO ee argano q Y Name YIP Address P Alias Name S1 Networl 172 21 41 104 172 21 41 105 ff Kere 172 21 41 106 172
173. 2 1117 39 General Major Insuficient resources 172 22 4 21 June 2012 14 13 49 21 June 2012 11 13 49 General Major RTM ISDN card not found Span E 172 22 3 21 iune 201214 11 21 21 June 2012 11 11 21 MPL Major Voltage problem com a nonexis sting RTM board board id 13 er supply Description Voltage problemin PWR1 For more information about Active Alarms and Faults List see System and Participant Alerts on page 19 1 Participant Alerts Lists the participants of all monitored MCUs that are experiencing connection problems The list is sorted by MCU and conference The Participant Alerts can be sorted by MCU by clicking the MCU header in the Participant Alerts table The Participant Alerts pane is opened and closed by clicking the Participant Alerts button in the left corner of the Status Bar Conference Name Status _ Disconne Role IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Di Audio Video _ Encryptio FECC Tok Content T 10 185 120 4 participants conf Rex H323 I Seco Monday 172 22 H323 Dial o wm 5 Conf1 fx ISDN lt 0 Disco Wednes 411811 ISDN PS amp amp Dial o o Confit fex SIP_ W Seco Monday 172 22 SIP amp Dial o I 3 Conf1 few H323 dD Disco Wednes 172 22 H 323 amp Dial o a 2 18 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Port Usage Gauges The Port Usage gauges display for the selected MCU e The to
174. 2 33 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Chinese Font Types You can select one of several Chinese fonts for use when sending text over video New fonts can be selected with the following features Site Names Message Overlay gt General gt Advanced gt Gathering Settings gt Video Quality gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Display Name Line Rate 384Kbps y Conferencing Mode CP Continuous Presence v Encryption No Encryption v IV Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA Auto Terminate Before First Joins 10 Minutes kk ke At the End 1 Fere After last participant quits C When last participant remains I Auto Redialing I Exclusive Content Mode TIP Compatibility None M Enable FECC 7 FW NAT Keep Alive Interval 0 Seconds New Chinese fonts available are Heiti Default Songti Kaiti Weibei This feature has the following restrictions 2 34 Available when either Simplified Chinese or Traditional Chinese is selected as an available language in Setup gt Customize Display Settings gt Multilingual Setting The feature is hidden if neither Simplified Chinese nor Traditional Chinese is selected Only be accessed when using the RMX Web Client or the RMX Manager in Chinese Font cannot be changed during an existing
175. 2 48K Siren22_32k Siren22_48K G7221C_48k Siren14_48k 4 45 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 4 14 Siren22 and SirenLPR Mono vs Bitrate Continued Audio Algorithm Minimum Bitrate kbps Siren22_32k 32k ee 7221C_32k a 14_32k Stereo The Siren 22Stereo G 719Stereo and SirenLPR audio algorithms are supported at the following bit rates Table 4 15 Siren22Stereo G719Stereo and SirenLPR vs Bitrate Audio Algorithm Minimum Bitrate kbps Siren22Stereo_128k SirenLPRStereo_128k 128k 1024 SirenLPRStereo_96k 96k Sansa 4Stero_96k Siren22Stereo_64k 64k senses 4Stereo_64k Monitoring Participant Audio Properties The audio algorithm used by the participant s endpoint can be verified in the Participant Properties Channel Status dialog box To view the participant s properties during a conference 1 Inthe Participants list right click the desired participant and select Participant Properties 2 Click the Channel Status Advanced tab The Participant Properties Channel Status Advanced dialog box is displayed 4 46 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Polycom Inc 3 Inthe Channel Info field select Audio In or Audio Out to display the audio parameters minott HDX4000 Properties 4 Click the OK button RMX IP Address Participant IP Address ICE RMX IP Address ICE Participant IP Address ICE Connection Type pozz 150
176. 20 28 May 2012 11 00 00 01 28 May 2012 14 20 168 00 00 Conference No E 2599 Default System 06 June 2012 15 14 06 June 2012 12 00 00 13 06 June 2012 15 14 168 00 00 Conference No x The following fields are displayed Table 17 1 Conference Record Fields Display Name The Display Name of the conference and an icon indicating whether or not the CDR record has been retrieved and saved to a formatted text file The following icons are used The CDR record has not been saved The CDR record has been saved Start Time The actual time the conference started GMT Start Time The actual time the conference started according to Greenwich Mean Time GMT Duration The actual conference duration Reserved Start Time The reserved start time of the conference If the conference started immediately this is the same as the Start Time Reserved Duration The time the conference was scheduled to last Discrepancy between the scheduled and the actual duration may indicate that the conference duration was prolonged or shortened 17 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 17 The Call Detail Record CDR Utility Table 17 1 Conference Record Fields Continued ee The conference status The following values may be displayed Ongoing Conference Terminated by User Terminated when end time passed Automatically terminated when conference was empty The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the conference for a predefined tim
177. 5 Customized PONE ssc soccussesecsseuees Si scdessuscssonsnovsvsstncteuens sossesdess Tosesaucis RAES 4 25 Media Emery ptm arrsa an ne e E E E anvatvauneadsetivaevsns cvs raaseas E 4 27 Media Encryption Guidelines 00 0 eeeecccessssesesesesesssesescsesesesescsesssesesescsraeseeseceeans 4 27 Mixing Encrypted and Non encrypted Endpoints in one Conference 4 28 Direct Connection to the Conference 0 0 ee ceeseeeeeeeeceneeeneeeseseeeeeneneteney 4 29 Connection to the Entry Queue cccccccessesssesseteeeseeesessesesssssseeseessseeseneneasseees 4 30 Moving from the Entry Queue to Conferences or Between Conferences 4 30 Recording Link Encryption ccccscscesesessesesssessesessensnsnessseeseseseecesesessseseeeneseeeees 4 31 Encryption Flag Settings ccccaccessccccsesvescsesevescscsesosevenevanasonctenssdeotenovendeosenovorsastonosorbavnenes 4 31 Enabling Encryption in the Profile ssssssessessssssersisersseerssseveiserssreressisrireesseerrsreessssrssees 4 32 Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level ssessssssesissessssrierisresressresrerresrssresres 4 33 Monitoring the Encryption Status ccccsessseseecesssesseeseseseseeneseseessnenessseeesssseseseneneey 4 34 Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA s sssssssssssesssssresissresrrsresnesresrisnesnnsnenrienesnesnnene 4 35 Packet LOSS scaisescscsetescuivestsescsvuesitesevedesdsesevevennsesassdeazisdascosastondeaseeseoeagssosevetonscavesenetinedeene 4 35 Causes Of Packe
178. 5 07 2006 21 55 22 Entry Tone OFF Exit Tone OFF End Time Alert Tone OFF Figure 17 2 Formatted CDR File Multi Part CDR Files By default the maximum CDR Call Data Record file size is limited to IMB When a CDR file reaches a size of 1MB the file is saved and further call data recording is stopped and the additional data is lost 17 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 17 The Call Detail Record CDR Utility The Collaboration Server can be configured to keep recording the data in multiple CDR file set of 1MB each Multi Part CDR ensures that conference call data from long duration or permanent conferences is recorded and not lost Guidelines e Multi Part CDR is enabled by setting the value of the ENABLE_MULTI_PART_CDR System Flag to YES The flag s default value is NO When the flag value is NO CDR file size is limited to one file of 1MB and further call data recording is stopped To modify the default setting the flag must be manually added to the System Configuration For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 e If the flag value is set to YES when a CDR file reaches 1MB an additional CDR file is created and added to the CDR file set for that conference e Ifthe flag value is changed from YES to NO or visa versa all existing CDR files are retained CDR File Contents The general conference section or record contains information such as the Routing Name and ID and the conference starting d
179. 5061 Outbound Proxy Servers Parameter Primary Server Server IPAddr crplyncfeprd01 polycom com Port 5061 13 Modify the following fields Table 16 9 Default IP Network Service SIP Servers Hi a SIP Server Refresh Registration Transport Type Polycom Inc Select e Specify to manually configure SIP servers e Off if SIP servers are not present in the network This defines the time in seconds in which the Collaboration Server refreshes it s registration on the SIP server For example if 3600 is entered the Collaboration Server will refresh it s registration on the SIP server every 3600 seconds Select the protocol that is used for signaling between the Collaboration Server and the SIP Server or the endpoints according to the protocol supported by the SIP Server UDP Select this option to use UDP for signaling TCP Select this option to use TCP for signaling TLS The Signaling Host listens on secured port 5061 only and all outgoing connections are established on secured connections Calls from SIP clients or servers to non secured ports are rejected The following protocols are supported TLS 1 0 SSL 2 0 and SSL 3 0 16 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 16 9 Default IP Network Service SIP Servers Continued a Create Certificate This button is used to create a Certificate Request to be sent toa Certification Authority Certificate Method Select
180. 6 Standard Security Mode If the default is used in non secured mode the system will automatically generate chairperson passwords that contain 6 characters NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_M_ The maximum number of digits that the user can enter when AX_LEN manually assigning a password to the chairperson Range Default 16 NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MI Defines the minimum length required for the Chairperson N_LEN password Value 0 16 Default NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN Defines the number of digits in the Conference ID that will be assigned by the MCU Enter 0 to disable the automatic assignment of IDs by the MCU and let the Collaboration Server user manually assign them Range 2 16 Default 4 NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MAX__ The maximum number of digits that the user can enter when LEN manually assigning an ID to a conference Range 2 16 Default 8 Note Selecting 2 limits the number of simultaneous ongoing conferences to 99 NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MIN_L The minimum number of digits that the user must enter when EN manually assigning an ID to a conference Range 2 16 Default 4 Note Selecting 2 limits the number of simultaneous ongoing conferences to 99 Polycom Inc 20 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued i NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DE This flag enables or disables the automatic generation of FAULT_LEN conference passwords and determines the number of digits in the conference pass
181. 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 16 10 Default IP Network Service Security SIP Digest Continued me eee H 323 Authentication Click this check box to enable H 323 server authentication Select this check box only if the authentication is enabled on the gatekeeper to enable the Collaboration Server to register with the gatekeeper If the authentication is enabled on the gatekeeper and disabled on the RMX calls will fail to connect to the conferences Leave this check box cleared if the authentication option is disabled on the gatekeeper User Name Enter the user name the Collaboration Server will use to authenticate itself with the gatekeeper This name must be defined in the gatekeeper These fields can contain up to 64 Password Enter the password the Collaboration Server ASCII characters will use to authenticate itself with the gatekeeper This password must be defined in the gatekeeper If the Authentication User Name and Authentication Password fields are left empty the SIP Digest authentication request is rejected For registration without authentication the Collaboration Server must be registered as a trusted entity on the SIP server 16 Click the OK button When updating the parameters of the SIP Server in the P Network Service SIP Servers dialog box the Collaboration Server must be reset to implement the change Ethernet Settings In the Polycom RMX 1800 the automat
182. 74 49176 17222184 153 49290 None Algorithm siren22S_128k Frame Per 2 4 47 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Permanent Conference A Permanent Conference is any ongoing conference with no pre determined End Time continuing until it is terminated by an administrator operator or chairperson Guidelines e Resources are reserved for a Permanent Conference only when the conference has become ongoing e Resources are allocated to a Permanent Conference according to the Reserve Resources for Video Participants field If the number of defined dial out participants exceeds the value of this field the Collaboration Server automatically replaces the number in the Reserve Resources for Video Participants field with the number of defined dial out participants in the Permanent Conference e Auto Terminate is disabled in Permanent Conferences e If participants disconnect from the Permanent Conference resources that were reserved for its video and audio participants are released e Entry Queues Conference Reservations and SIP Factories cannot be defined as Permanent Conferences e Additional participants can connect to the conference or be added by the operator if sufficient resources are available e The maximum size of the Call Detail Record CDR for a Permanent Conference is 1MB Enabling a Permanent Conference The Permanent Conference option is selected in the New Conference New Meeting Room or New Conference
183. 8 An unknown error occurred 9 The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes Note If the conference was terminated by an MCU reset this field will contain the value 1 ongoing conference The name of the conference log file GMT Offset Sign Indicates whether the GMT Offset is positive or negative The possible values are 0 Offset is negative GMT Offset will be subtracted from the GMT Time 1 Offset is positive GMT Offset will be added to the GMT Time Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 1 Conference Summary Record Fields Continued a GMT Offset The time zone difference between Greenwich and the Collaboration Server s physical location in hours and minutes Together with the GMT Offset Sign field the GMT Offset field is used to define the Collaboration Server local time For example if the GMT Offset Sign is 0 and GMT Offset is 3 hours then the time zone of the Collaboration Server s physical location is 3 which will be subtracted from the GMT time to determine the local time However if the GMT Offset Sign is 1 and GMT Offset is 4 hours then the time zone of the Collaboration Server s physical location is 4 which will be added to the GMT time to determine the local time File Retrieved Indicates if the file has been retrieved and saved to a formatted file as follows 0 No 1 Yes Event Records The event records that is all records in the unfor
184. 8175 Endpoint website gt E gt Information Endpoint Type ave isl 2 gt Media Sources Tab Oo 90 gt SDP Channel Info gt Connection Status Channel TESS RMX IP Address Status v gt Channel Status Ad Participant IP Address Advanced gt Call Admission Control Media Info Field value Add to Address Book Table 12 11 Participant Properties Channel Status Advanced Parameters a Channel Info Select a channel to view its information Signaling Audio in Audio out Video in Video out Content in Content Out SIP BFCP TCP RMX IP Address The IP address and the transport protocol TCP UDP of the MCU to which the participant is connected and the port number allocated to the participant incoming media stream on the MCU side Participant IP The IP address and the transport protocol TCP UDP of the Address participant and the port number allocated to the media stream on the participant side Media Info This table provides information about the audio and video parameters such as video algorithm resolution etc For more information see Appendix E Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information on page E 1 Polycom Inc 12 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 11 Participant Properties Channel Status Advanced Parameters Continued e E RTP Statistics This information may indicate problems with the network which can
185. A Audio Codec Possible values YES NO Default NO 20 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 20 14 Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued ee ee H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIE S H264_HD_GRAPHICS_MIN_ CONTENT_RATE H264_HD_HIGHRES_MIN_C ONTENT_RATE H264_HD_LIVEVIDEO_MIN_ CONTENT_RATE HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASS WORD IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT When the flag is set to NO the Collaboration Server only verifies that the endpoint supports the Content protocols Up to H 264 or H 263 When set to YES the Collaboration Server checks frame rate resolution and all other parameters of the Content mode as declared by an endpoint before receiving or transmitting Content Default NO Determines the minimum content rate in kbps required for endpoints to share H 264 high quality content via the Content channel When Content Setting is Graphics Range 0 1536 Default 128 Determines the minimum content rate in kbps required for endpoints to share H 264 high quality content via the Content channel When Content Setting is Hi Resolution Graphics Range 0 1536 Default 256 Determines the minimum content rate in kbps required for endpoints to share H 264 high quality content via the Content channel When Content Setting is Live Video Range 0 1536 Default 384 If set to YES e Conference and Chairperson Passwords that are displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager ar
186. AN or High Speed Inter Virtual Private Network Wizard Disabled Not connected Network cable unplugged Disconnected Device Name IBM Integrated 56K Modem IBM Integrated 56K Modem IBM Integrated 56K Modem Broadcom Netxtreme Gig Cisco Systems VPN Adapter Intel R PRO Wireless 22 Bluetooth LAN Access Se WAN Miniport PPTP Phone or Host Addre 253 251 9404 978 9711 212 199 26 28 gt Local Area Connection Status General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 6 days 18 14 32 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity S a Received ent Receive ad Ch Packets 789742 849 439 Amn Close Connect using E9 Intel PRO 100 VE Network Conne This connection uses the following items Eh Client for Microsoft Networks M El File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 7 3 Intetnet Protocol TCP IP Install Uninstall Propetties D Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected F Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity Cancel In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box click the Properties button In the Network Connections window double click
187. Add button to move the participant to the Scanning Order pane Optional Delete a participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned a Click on a participant s name in the Scanning Order list b Click the Delete button to move the participant back to the All Participants pane Optional Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned Click the Add All button Optional Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned Click the Delete All button Optional Move the participant up in the Scanning Order Click the Up button Optional Move the participant down in the Scanning Order Click the Down button Click the Apply button to confirm and keep the Conference Properties dialog box open or Click the OK the button to confirm and return to the Collaboration Server Web Client Main Screen Click the Skins tab to view the skin selected for the conference You cannot select another skin during an ongoing conference Click the IVR tab to view the IVR settings Click the Information tab to view general information defined for the conference Changes made to this information once the conference is running are not saved to the CDR Click the Recording tab to review the recording settings for the conference Click the Site Names tab to enable or disable the display of site names during the conference and adjust the display properties Click the Message Overlay tab to
188. B s tomMaxFS at 15 3840 MBs coni floor control s_only conid 1 useid 1 Local Communication Mode SrenLPR_ScalabletodoVideoCap H264 Transmit 0 bps Presentation O frame rate per second 264Mode standard BaseLine Profile Level 22 CustomMaxMBPS at 44 22000 MB s CustomMaxS at 15 2840 MBs Annex 6400 bps BFCP setup passive connection new X Add to Address Book E Table 12 9 Participant Properties H 245 SDP Parameters PEE Remote Capabilities Lists the participant s capabilities as declared by the endpoint Remote Displays the actual capabilities used by the endpoint when Communication Mode establishing the connection with the MCU Endpoint to MCU Local Communication Displays the actual capabilities used by the MCU when establishing Mode the connection with the participant s endpoint MCU to Endpoint Polycom Inc 12 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Viewing Permissions S 2 S amp O Operator Administrator 12 20 4 Click on the Channel Status tab to view the status of the various channels Marc Properties M Audio in Audio out al 0 00 0 00 A Video in 5 0 00 0 00 uw Video out 264 6 p 0 00 0 00 Rate Video Sync Loss LPR Tx 384000 1 Rx 384000 0 PE FECC Token IB Content Token Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring The following parameters are displayed
189. Bes Click Yes to replace the exported file or click No to cancel the export operation and return to the Conference Profiles list You can modify the export file name and restart the export operation Exporting Selected Conference Profiles You can select a single Conference Profile or multiple Conference Profiles and export them to a file to be imported to other MCUs in your environment Polycom Inc 2 37 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To export selected Conference Profiles 1 Inthe Conference Profiles pane select the profiles you want to export 2 Right click the selected Conference Profiles and then click Export Selected Conference Profiles DBA_Profile Auto Lavout 4096 Kbps _ Profile_ Factory_video Delete Profile tory Factory_GW_P Import Conference Profiles tory The Conference Profile Export dialog box is displayed oeeo o a sone Profiles file name _confProfiles xml 3 In the Export Path field click Browse to navigate to the location of the desired path where you want to save the exported file 4 Inthe Profiles file name field type the file name prefix The file name suffix _confProfiles xml is predefined by the system For example if you type Profiles01 the exported file name is defined as Profiles01_confProfiles xml 5 Click OK to export the Conference Profiles to a file If the export file with the same file name already exists a prompt is displayed
190. Causes If a participant was unable to connect to a conference or was disconnected from a conference the Connection Status tab in the Participant Properties dialog box indicates the call disconnection cause In some cases a possible solution may be displayed A video participant who is unable to connect the video channels but is able to connect as an audio only participant is referred to as a Secondary participant For Secondary participants the Connection Status tab in the Participant Properties dialog box indicates the video disconnection cause In some cases a possible solution may be indicated The table below lists the call disconnection causes that can be displayed in the Call Disconnection Cause field and provides an explanation of each message IP Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Call Disconnection Causes Disconnected by User The user disconnected the endpoint from the conference Remote device did not open the The endpoint did not open the encryption signaling encryption signaling channel channel Remote devices selected encryption The encryption algorithm selected by the endpoint does algorithm does not match the local not match the MCU s encryption algorithm selected encryption algorithm Resources deficiency Insufficient resources available Call close Call closed by MCU The MCU disconnected the call H323 call close No port left for audio Insufficient audio ports H323 call close No port left for video The required v
191. Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued GK_MANDATORY_FOR_CA If set to YES a gatekeeper is required to receive incoming LLS_IN H 323 calls If a gatekeeper is not configure in the Collaboration Server the calls will fail If set to NO default gatekeeper is not required to process H 323 incoming calls and H 323 participants can dial in with or without a gatekeeper GK_MANDATORY_FOR_CA If set to YES a gatekeeper is required to perform H 323 LLS_OUT outgoing calls If a gatekeeper is not configure on the Collaboration Server the calls will fail If set to NO default gatekeeper is not required to dial out to H 323 participants and calls can be dialed out with or without a gatekeeper H263_ANNEX_T Set to NO to send the content stream without Annex T and enable Aethra and Tandberg endpoints that do not support Annex T to process the content Default YES HD_THRESHOLD_BITRATE Sets the minimum bit rate required by endpoints to connect to an HD Conference Endpoints that cannot support this bit rate are connected as audio only Range 384kbps 4Mbs Default 768 MAX_CONF_PASSWORD_R Allows the administrator to configure the maximum number of EPEATED_CHAR consecutive repeating characters that are to be allowed ina conference password Range 1 4 Default 2 MAX_CP_RESOLUTION The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the system during First Time Power on and after a
192. Conferencing QoS Parameters eee Enable Select to enable the configuration and use of the QoS settings When un checked the values of the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point bits in the IP packet headers are zero Type DiffServ and Precedence are two methods for encoding packet priority The priority set here for audio video and IP Signaling packets should match the priority set in the router e DiffServ Select when the network router uses DiffServ for priority encoding The default priorities for both audio and video packets is 0x88 These values are determined by the QOS_IP_VIDEO and QOS_IP_AUDIO flags in the system cfg file The default priority for Signaling IP traffic is 0x00 and is determined by the QOS_IP_SIGNALING flag in the system cfg file For more information Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 e Precedence Select when the network router uses Precedence for priority encoding or when you are not sure which method is used by the router Precedence should be combined with None in the TOS field The default priority is 5 for audio and 4 for video packets Note Precedence is the default mode as it is capable of providing priority services to all types of routers as well as being currently the most common mechanism Audio Video You can prioritize audio and video IP packets to ensure that all participants in the conference hear and see each other clearly Select the desired priority The scale is from 0 to 5
193. Cut action has been implemented To drag a participant from an address book group to another group 1 Select the participant or participants you want to move 2 Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the selection to the new group The participants are moved to the new address book group Searching the Address Book You can search the Address Book for a participant s name or a group name only on the currently selected group level To search for participants or groups in the current selected level 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group level within to run the search 2 Inthe Address Book toolbar activate the search option by clicking the Find field The field clears and a cursor appears indicating that the field is active 3 Type all or part of the participant s name or group name and click the search button The closest matching participant entries are displayed and the Active Filter indicator turns on Filtering the Address Book The entries in an address book group can be filtered to display only the entries participants or groups that meet criteria that you specify and hides entries that you do not want displayed It enables you to select and work with a subset of Address Book entries You can filter by more than one column by adding additional filters columns The filter applies to the displayed group If All Participants option is selected it applies to all the listed participants Filtering
194. D HD 720p or HD 1080p When defining a gateway IVR Service the recommended default slide is Default_GW_Welcome_Slide Customized H 261 slides are not supported Invite Participant Not applicable Note The Invite Participant feature is not available in SVC conferences and for SVC participants in mixed CP and SVC conferences 20 If the video slide file was not uploaded to the MCU prior to the IVR Service definition click the Add Slide Low Resolution button to upload a Low Resolution Slide Add Slide High Resolution button to upload a High Resolution Slide Polycom Inc 15 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The Install File dialog box opens The uploading process is similar to the uploading of audio files For more information see step 6 on page 15 8 Welcome Video Slide on page 15 30 e The video slide must be in a jpg or bmp file format For more information see Creating a e Customized H 261 slides are not supported 21 Click the DTMF Codes tab The New Conference IVR Service DTMF Codes dialog box opens New Conference IVR Service gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name IVRENGLISH gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General DTMF Codes gt Video Services Name DTMF Code Permission gt DTMF Codes Cancel Mute All Except Me 5 Chairperson 2S IGE e Change Password 77 Chairperson Change To Chairperson 78 Everyone Mute A
195. Disconnect RMX 40 M MB 172 22 190 40 172 22 190 40 Normal RMX 20 V 0 96 0 66 Conferences Pane The Conferences pane lists all the ongoing conferences from all the MCUs that are connected and monitored along with their MCU Status Conference ID Start Time and End Time data The number of ongoing conferences is displayed in the pane s title The Conferences list toolbar contains the following buttons Monitoring conferences New conferences run on MCUs selected for Monitoring are automatically added to the Conferences list You can sort the conferences by MCU by clicking the MCU column heading in the Conferences table Conferences run on MCUs that are connected but not monitored are not listed Using Windows multiple selection methods to select conferences participants from several conferences running on different MCUs can be listed in the Participants list pane Starting a new conference When starting a new conference you must first select the MCU to run the conference in the MCUs pane Collaboration Server Management The Collaboration Server Management pane lists the entities of the selected MCU that need to be configured to enable the Collaboration Server to run conferences Only users with Administrators permission can modify these parameters The Collaboration Server Management pane is divided into two sections e Frequently Used parameters often configured monitored or modified Polycom Inc Polycom In
196. EERE EEA AEE E SEERE EEE EES 4 46 Monitoring Participant Audio Properties ssssssssssssssssiesressisresresreerisresressseresresnes 4 46 Permanent Conference lt 42 4 405 rainse Acid diac E EE E E a O EERE e iana 4 48 Gut SIMS cs sessiessctenscinsschavscasvesustscseeens eotuesteastede NE EAE EE A cus 4 48 Enabling a Permanent Conference cccccsecseseesesesssssiseeseeeneseseenseasseeeeeesseneneeneseey 4 48 Cascading Conferences 0200 cece eee teen eee 5 1 Video Layout in Cascading Conferences oo eee eeeseeeeecssseseesesssesseeeeseeseeeeeteeneees 5 1 Guidelines seuta resi a acd as sete ceettia eh Vie eee E EE 5 2 Flags Controlling Cascade Layouts ccccsssesssssssssssseisseeseessseesensseseseesesssesseess 5 2 DIME Forwarding mereset ine yitvaeiaas E OEE 5 3 Play Tone Upon Cascading Link Connection ccecscsesessssessessneesesesteneseeeseess 5 3 Polycom Inc TT Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Basic Cascading misiris ne E EEE E E AEN 5 3 Basic Cascading using IP Cascaded Link s ss ss ssssssessesissssrisresressirissrsntsnresrenresresresnes 5 4 Dialing Directly to a Conference 0 eecsssssseeeeeseessseseessessssseseeenensseseees 5 4 Dialing to an Entry Queue cccccsccsessssscsssssecseessnsestscestavesescvosseesevtsasosonensvedesesenessdsees 5 4 Automatic Identification of the Cascading Link ss sssessesisssessesiesesrssriesrerresrese 5 5 Suppression of DTMF Forwarding e ssssssessesssesi
197. EL CONNECTED Event 14 MPI CHANNEL DISCONNECTED Event 15 H323 CALL SETUP Event 16 H323 CLEAR INDICATION Event 24 SIP CALL SETUP Event 25 SIP CLEAR INDICATION Event 27 RECORDING SYSTEM LINK Event 110 OPERATOR ON HOLD PARTY Event 113 CONFERENCE REMARKS Event 2108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 1 Event 3001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 2 Event 3108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 2 Event 4001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 3 Event 4108 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE CONTINUE 3 C 37 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 38 Polycom Inc Appendix D Ad Hoc Conferencing The Polycom RMX 1800 Ad Hoc conferencing feature enables participants to start ongoing conferences on the fly without prior definition when dialing an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue The created conference parameters are taken from the Profile assigned to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue Ad Hoc Conferencing A participant dials in to an Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue and starts a new conference based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue In this configuration any participant connecting to the Entry Queue can start a new conference and no security mechanism is applied This mode is usually used in organizations where Ad Hoc conferences are started from within the network and without security breach A conference is started using one of the following method 1 The participant dials in to the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queu
198. ESERVED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event For more information about the fields see Table C 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 on page C 11 Additional information about a PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED event For more information about the fields see Table C 12 Event Fields for Event 2007 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 on page C 15 Additional information about a DEFINED PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 14 Event Fields for Events 2010 2011 2015 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 on page C 18 Additional information about a DEFINED PARTICIPANT event that includes the IPv6 addressing of the defined participant For more details see Event Fields for Events 2011 2012 and 2016 on page C 33 Additional information about a DEFINED PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 15 Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2012 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2016 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 on page C 19 Additional information about a USER ADD PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 14 Event Fields for Eve
199. Fig_Room 1004 1 00 Factory_Video_ OK Hiera x SUPPORT_1 Empty Maple_Room 1001 1 00 Factory_Video_ OK aw Oak_Room 1002 1 00 Factory_Video_ oK I Juniper_Roo 1003 1 00 Factory_Video_ oK GB Connections PR Users A Signaling Monitor W Hardware Monitor By Meeting Rooms m E Reservations Rarely Used IVR Services IP Network Services F Recording Links All Partici S Conference Profiles bd gt 4 r Port Usage Voice 0736 Mideo HD 0736 W MCU State NORMAL PPP PE PPP PPP PEE FEF Status Bar Port Usage Gauge The Port Usage gauges indicate The total number of Video or Voice ports in the system The number of Video and Voice ports in use The High Port Usage threshold Total Allocated Video Ports In System Video Ports In Use Video Port Usage Indicator Total Allocated Audio Ports In System Audio Ports In Use Audio Port Usage Indicator f Port Usage Yoice 20 70m Video 24 7 TOM Audio and Video Port Usage Threshold The basic unit used for reporting resource usage in the Port Gauges is HD720p30 Results are rounded to the nearest integer Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities System Information System Information includes License Information and general system information To view the System Information properties box gt gt On the Polycom RMX 1800 menu click Administration gt System Inform
200. Guide Table 20 3 Video 2 Video 1 Video Resource Type Video Resolution Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration Cards Cards Card Piaervesnene fa Resource Usage 19 6 From Version 8 1 only the MPMx Media Card and Card Configuration Mode are supported From Version 8 1 Fixed Resource Capacity Mode is not supported Only the Flexible Resource Capacity Mode is supported AVC Conferencing Continuous Presence Video resources usage varies according to the video resolution used by the endpoints The higher the video resolution quality the greater the amount of video resources consumed by the MCU Table 19 3 shows the number of video resources used for each resolution Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution From Version 8 1 Fixed Resource Capacity Mode is not supported Only the Flexible Resource Capacity Mode is supported From Version 8 1 MPM media cards are not supported From Version 8 1 Fixed Resource Capacity Mode is not supported Only the Flexible Resource Capacity Mode is supported Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities You can set the MCU to allocate one CIF video resource to an endpoint regardless of the resolution determined by the Conference Profile parameters This forcing saves resources and enables more endpoints to connect to conferences The forcing is done by modifying the system configuration and it applies to all
201. ICIPANT USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT USER RECONNECT PARTICIPANT Participants connect to the conferences as standard participants and they are designated as chairpersons either by entering the chairperson password during the IVR session upon connection or while participating in the conference using the appropriate DTM code For more information about the fields see see Event fields for Event 33 PARTY CHAIR UPDATE on page C 27 This event includes information of the maximum line rate maximum resolution and maximum frame rate used by H 323 or SIP participant during the conference A user terminated the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 31 Event Fields for Event 100 USER TERMINATE CONFERENCE on page C 28 A user added a participant to the conference during the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 13 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 DEFINED PARTICIPANT USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT on page C 16 A user deleted a participant from the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 32 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 USER DELETE PARTICIPANT USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT USER RECONNECT PARTICIPANT on page C 28 A user disconnected a participant For more information about the fields see Table C 32 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 USER DELETE PARTICIPANT USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPAN
202. IVR Services list click the Add Supported Languages 8 button The Supported Languages dialog box opens TwR services 3 Sexe om 7 Name Language Service Type Conf English Conference I R Service Ge English Conference IVR Service fg Entr English Enty Queue I R Service Upported Languages a English Add Language Add Message File 4 Click the Add Language button Polycom Inc 15 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The New Language dialog box opens New Tanguage New Language Po 5 Inthe New Language box enter the name of the new language The language name can be typed in Unicode and cannot start with a digit Maximum field length is 31 characters 6 Click OK The new language is added to the list of Supported Languages Uploading a Message File to the Collaboration Server 15 4 You can upload audio files for the new language or additional files for an existing language now or you can do it during the definition of the IVR Service In the latter case you can skip the next steps e Voice messages should not exceed 3 minutes e Itis not recommended to upload more than 1000 audio files to the MCU memory To upload messages to the MCU 1 To upload the files to the MCU in the Supported Languages dialog box click the Add Message File button 2 The Add Message File dialog box opens Add Messagerile IVR Messa
203. K GS SUPPORT OK Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template An ongoing conference can be started from any Template saved in the Conference Templates list To start an ongoing conference from a Template 1 Inthe Conference Templates list select the Template you want to start as an ongoing conference 2 Click the Start Conference from Template E button or Right click and select Start Conference from Template onterence Templates 6 S mn J support_1 pk E Marc_12693 OK New Conference Template SUPPORT OK Delete Conference Template G Start Conference from Template a3 Marc OK Schedule Reservation from Template Eg Duke_13626 OK Import Conference Templates Export Conference Templates Export Selected Conference Templates Template Properties The conference is started The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from the Conference Template Display Name Participants that are connected to other ongoing conferences when the template becomes an ongoing conference are not connected If an ongoing conference Meeting Room or Entry Queue with the same Display Name Routing Name or ID already exists in the system the conference will not be started 11 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 11 Conference Templates Starting an Operator Conference from a Template AVC Conferencing An ongoing Operator conference can be started from an Operator Template saved in the Conference Tem
204. Kbps B channels together to look like one large bandwidth channel Video Bit Rate The video bit rate in units of kilobits per second A value of 4294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU IP Address Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The IP address of the participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Signaling Port Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The signaling port used for participant connection A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU Polycom Inc C 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 24 Table C 18 Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT Continued C H 323 Participant Alias Type SIP Participant Address Type H 323 Participant Alias Name SIP Participant Address For H 323 participants the alias type as follows 7 E164 8 H 323 ID 13 Email ID 14 Participant number For SIP participants the address type as follows 1 SIP URI 2 Tel URL For H 323 participants The participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants The participant address The address may contain up to 80 characters Table C 19 Event Fields for Event 1001 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY CONTINUE 1 rem Encryption Indicates the participant s encrypt
205. LECTURER System Flag is set to 4 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide NO thefirst participant to send content becomes the Content Token holder and has to release the Content Token before any other participant can acquire the token and begin transmitting Content YES only the designated Lecturer can be the Content Token holder e In Exclusive Content Mode if an endpoint attempts to send Content a few seconds after another endpoint sent Content the Content stream it is receiving is momentarily interrupted by a slide which is displayed for a few seconds before the normal Content stream is resumed Stopping a Content Session In some cases when one participant ends the Content session from his her endpoint the Content token is not released and other participants cannot send Content The Collaboration Server User can withdraw the Content token from the current holder and to return it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints To end the current Content session gt gt Inthe Conferences list pane right click the conference icon and then click Abort H 239 Session Conferences 1 Wamu Participants amp X ct is a fa gt Display Name Status Name D SUPPORT 2077112072 d Sinal SUPPORT_2 Delete Conference Save Conference to Template Abort H 239 Session Conference Properties Content Broadcast Control Content Broadcast Control prevents the accidental interruption or terminatio
206. Link Layout 13 8 When the video layout of the conference is set to Auto Layout the recording of the conference will now include all the conference participants and not n 1 participants as in previous versions In the new Auto Layout algorithm the Recording Link is counted as a participant and therefore it is excluded from the layout display used for the recording The layout used for the other participants will behave as in the standard Auto Layout behavior The Recording Link Layout can be changed during an ongoing conference in the same manner as for any other conference participant For more information see the Participant Level Monitoring on page 12 15 Polycom Inc Chapter 13 Recording Conferences The default settings for Auto Layout for the conference and the Recording Link are summarized in the following table Table 14 Recording Link Default Layout Settings Auto Layout Mode Conference Auto Layout Recording Link Auto Default Settings Layout Settings Not applicable Not applicable Ea E ee Ce Participants 10 or more M The default settings for Auto Layout of the Recording Link cannot be changed and the Auto Layout flags do not apply to the Recording Link Auto Layout default settings Using the Collaboration Server Web Client to Manage the Recording Process Polycom Inc To manage the recording process using the right click menu gt gt Right click the Recording participant in
207. MCU C 20 Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 17 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED Continued eee Participant Status The participant status as follows 0 Idle 1 Connected 2 Disconnected 3 Waiting for dial in 4 Connecting 5 Disconnecting 6 Partially connected Party has completed H 221 capability exchange 7 Deleted by a user 8 Secondary The participant could not connect the video channels and is connected via audio only 10 Connected with problem 11 Redialing Capabilities Not supported Always contains the value 0 Remote Not supported Communication Always contains the value 0 Mode Secondary Cause Note This field is only relevant if the Participant Status is Secondary The cause for the secondary connection not being able to connect the video channels as follows 0 Default 11 The incoming video parameters are not compatible with the conference video parameters 13 The conference video settings are not compatible with the endpoint capabilities 14 The new conference settings are not compatible with the endpoint capabilities 15 Video stream violation due to incompatible annexes or other discrepancy 16 Inadequate video resources 17 When moved to a Transcoding or Video Switching conference the participant s video capabilities are not supported by the video cards 18 Video connection could
208. MCU Default value 255 255 255 0 16 20 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services 3 Click the H 323 tab gt RMX CSIP gt H 323 Service Name IP Network Service gt SIP Servers gt ICEServers Connection State GK_Non_Registered Registration Interval 0 Gatekeepers Role ID Name IP Address Active Backup Backup Backup Backup The H 323 tab displays the following fields Table 16 12 IP Network Services Properties H 323 2 Connection State The state of the connection between the Signaling Host and the gatekeeper Discovery The Signaling Host is attempting to locate the gatekeeper Registration The Signaling Host is in the process of registering with the gatekeeper Registered The Signaling Host is registered with the gatekeeper Not Registered The registration of the Signaling Host with the gatekeeper failed Registration Interval The interval in seconds between the Signaling Host s registration messages to the gatekeeper This value is taken from either the IP Network Service or from the gatekeeper during registration The lesser value of the two is chosen Active The active gatekeeper Backup The backup gatekeeper that can be used if the connection to the preferred gatekeeper fails ID The gatekeeper ID retrieved from the gatekeeper during the registration process The gatekeeper s host s name IP Address The gatekeeper s IP add
209. Monitor pane includes the status of the LAN ports Slot Port Type Status te Q o LAN 1 Active QQ o LAN 2 Inactive Signaling Monitor The Signaling Monitor pane includes the list of the IP Network Services defined in the system up to two in the Polycom RMX 1800 system Double clicking a Network Service displays it properties and status Multiple service Signaling Monitor Name IP Address Router Subnet Mask r IP Network 172 21 125 2 172 21 125 254 255 255 254 0 Oe IP Network 192 168 100 192 168 100 254 255 255 255 0 Conferencing 16 36 Each conference on the Collaboration Server can host participants from the different IP Network networks simultaneously Defining Dial Out Participants When defining dial out participants you can select the Network Service to place the call according to the network to which the endpoint pertains If the endpoint is located on a network other than the selected network the participant will not be able to connect If no Network is selected the system uses the IP Network Service selected for reserving the conference resources and if none is set for the conference it uses the Network Service set as default Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services The IP Network Service is selected in the New Participant Advanced dialog box gt General gt Advanced Name gt Information Endpoint w
210. Music Fil ssc ccvsvsccsscenscurssnsevaneteentasspeesents ss agenssvssocdssesvenstgcpesnapsddeessonste 15 26 Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides oo cece essessseseesseessseeeseeseeeeeenenees 15 27 vii Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide RECOrding an Audio Message sssrinin 15 27 Creating a Welcome Video Slide oo cece cceeseseecsceeseseeceescesaeseececenersnaeeseeenan 15 30 Default IVR Prompts and Messages 0 0 0 cssesesssssssesesescsesesesesescsenesesescsesesesesescseseseseeeaes 15 31 Volume Control of IVR Messages Roll Call and Music cccceee eee ee eeeeeneeeeees 15 34 IP Network Servies o 2 60600 es tesieni ns Ceacaees eae iesesnwen 16 1 TP Network Services seinri raan eE EE EEE EESE 16 1 Management Network Primary s ss ss ssssssessesissesssesieresstssresrerienrssrenienrerensrenesrenrenress 16 2 Default IP Service Conferencing Service Media and signaling 0 ee 16 2 Modifying the Management Network 0 cece cseseseseecesssssesesessseseseseseseseseseseneaeaes 16 2 Modifying the Default IP Network Service 0 eceeeee eee eeneeeeeceneneeeeeneeneees 16 7 Ethernet Settings cstiers erteni rene r EENE E ERER EREE E 16 18 IP Network Monitoring sasarmuserrencuniiienn aeaa i a ii 16 19 NAT Network Address Translation Traversal essseeesseeesseeeresrisesrrsrsrrsessrrsresrsseeee 16 23 Deployment Architectures ecesna anan a a 16 23 Remote Connection Using the Internet ssssssesessesssessesissr
211. NECT _TIMER contains the amount of time in seconds to wait for an RTCP or RTP message to be received from the endpoint When the time that was set in the system flag has elapsed and no RTCP or RTP audio or video message has been received on either the audio or the video channel the MCU disconnects the SIP endpoint from the conference A CDR event record is created with a Call Disconnection Cause of SIP remote stopped responding The Microsoft Lync add in endpoint opens audio and content channels Lync endpoints can send RTCP RTP messages and empty RTP audio messages When the time that was set in the system flag has elapsed and no RTCP or RTP message has been received on the audio channel the MCU disconnects the endpoint from the conference SIP audio only endpoints use the audio channel only When the time that was set in the system flag has elapsed and no RTCP or RTP message has been received on the audio channel the MCU disconnects the SIP audio endpoint from the conference Configuring the System Flag When you want to change the system default value of 20 seconds the system flag DETECT_SIP_EP_DISCONNECT_TIMER can be manually added to the System Flags configuration to detect the disconnection of SIP endpoints For more information see Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags on page 20 10 The value range is from 0 to 300 seconds When the value is set between 0 and 14 the feature is disabled and SIP endpoints are not detecte
212. Name Security Level Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol Privacy Password Accepted Host Community Name punic lt d _ Version 3 Versions 1 amp 2 RMX SNMP Properties Send Authentication Trap Accepted Host Community Name User Name Security Level No Authvization No Private x MOS Authentication Protocol Authentication Password Privacy Protocol DES Privacy Password I Accept SNMP Packets from all Hosts Accept SNMP Packets from the following Hosts Request Source This dialog box is used to define whether the query sent to the MCU is sent from an authorized source When the Accept SNMP packets from all Hosts is disabled a valid query must contain the appropriate community string and must be sent from one of the Manager terminals whose IP address is listed in this dialog box 19 27 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 19 28 15 Define the following parameters Table 19 15 SNMP Security CECS Een Send Authentication Select this check box to send a message to the SNMP Trap Manager when an unauthorized query is sent to the MCU When cleared no indication will be sent to the SNMP Manager Accept Host Enter the string added to queries that are sent from the SNMP Community Name Manager to indicate that they were sent from an authorized source Note Quer
213. OoOO O Confirm New Password 3 Enter the Old Password current New Password and Confirm the New Password 4 The Password must be in ASCII 4 Click OK The user s password is changed Disabling a User An administrator can disable an enabled user An indication is displayed in the Users List when the User is disabled An administrator can enable a disabled User To disable a user 1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users FRY button The Users pane is displayed 2 Inthe Users pane right click the user to be disabled and select Disable User in the menu amp X User Name Authorization Level Disabled G POLYCOM Administrator No Delete User Change User Password Rename User Disable User User Properties 14 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 14 Users Connections and Notes A confirmation box is displayed RMX 2000 0 w re you sure you want to disable marina 3 Click YES The User status in the Users list Disabled column changes to Yes Enabling a User An administrator can enable a User who was disabled manually by the administrator To enable a user 1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users button The Users pane is displayed 2 Right click the user to be enabled and select Enable User amp X User Name Authorization Level Disabled Am Operator No PoLycom Administrator No Delete User Chan
214. Permission Start or Resume Recording b In the Permission entry select whether this function can be used by all conference participants or only the chairperson 8 Click OK Pause Recording Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile Polycom Inc To be able to record a conference the recording options must be enabled in the Conference Profile assigned to it You can add recording to existing Profiles by modifying them To enable recording for a conference 1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane click the Conference Profiles 5 button The Conference Profiles list is displayed 2 Create a new profile by clicking the New Profile 4 button or modify an existing profile by double clicking or right clicking an existing profile and then selecting Profile Properties If creating a new profile complete the conference definition For more information on creating Profiles see on Defining New Profiles on page 2 9 3 Inthe Profile Properties dialog box click the Recording tab 13 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 Select the Enable Recording check box gt General Display Name gt Advanced vat gt Video Quality Line Rate WA Kops gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR I Enable Recording acl Recording Link gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Start Recording immediately
215. Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide required For example a 512 kbps call will have the video quality of a 1Mbps HD call while a 1Mbps HD call has higher video quality at the same 1Mbps bit rate A different decision matrix is used for Motion and Sharpness as the quality requirements are different By default the system shipped with three pre defined settings of the decision matrix for H 264 Base Profile and three pre defined settings of the decision matrix for H 264 High Profile with Motion and Sharpness video quality for each Resource Quality Balanced default A balance between video quality and resource usage This is the only available resolution configuration in version 6 0 x and earlier Resource Optimized System resource usage is optimized by allowing high resolution connections only at high line rates and may result in lower video resolutions in comparison to other resolution configurations for some line rates This option allows to save MCU resources and increase the number of participant connections Video Quality Optimized Video is optimized through higher resolution connections at lower line rates increasing the resource usage at lower line rates This may decrease the number of participant connections Video Resource Usage Video resource usage is dependent on the participant s line rate resolution and Video Quality settings H 264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison 3 4 The following illustration
216. Quality Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Display Name hy Line Rate 284 Kops I Presentation Mode I Same Layout T Lecturer View Switching I Auto Layout Auto Scan Interval s 70 X Cancel _overiay z BB 1 Standalone Endpoint 3 Standalone Endpoints zl z 2 Standalone Endpoints Single Overlay Cell 2 4 Screens Not supported Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Message Overlay for Text Messaging Polycom Inc Message Overlay allows the operator or administrator to send text messages to a single several or all participants during an ongoing conference The text message is seen as part of the in the participant s video layout on the endpoint screen or desktop display Message Overlay er Guidelines Message Overlay messaging is supported in in Same Layout mode in encrypted conferences Messages Overlay can be enabled or disabled during the ongoing conference Message Overlay text messages are supported in Unicode or ASCII characters The number of characters for each language can vary due to the type of font used for example the available number of characters for Chinese is 32 while for English and Russian it is 48 In some languages for example Russian when large fon
217. R session is completed the participant moved to the destination conference and the connection between the two conferences is established Automatic Identification of the Cascading Link In both dialing methods the system automatically identifies that the dial in participant is an Q MCU and creates a Cascading Link and displays the link icon for the participant The master slave relationship is randomly defined by the MCUs during the negotiation process of the connection phase Suppression of DTMF Forwarding Forwarding of the DTMF codes from one conference to another over an ISDN cascading link is not automatically suppressed as with IP cascading link and it can be limited to basic operations while suppressing all other operations by a system flag DTMF_FORWARD_ANY_DIGIT_TIMER_ SECONDS System Flag Settings The DIMF_FORWARD_ANY_DIGIT_TIMER_SECONDS flag determines the time period in seconds that MCU A will forward DTMF inputs from conference A participants to MCU B Once the timer expires most of the DTMF codes excluding five operations as for IP links entered in conference A will not be forwarded to conference B This is done to prevent an operation requested by a participant individually for example mute my line to be applied to all the participants in conference B Flag range in seconds 0 360000 This flag is defined on MCU A the calling MCU If a flag is not listed in the System Flags list it must be added to the
218. RI SIP client error 406 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 406 Not Acceptable resources The remote endpoint cannot accept the call because it does not have the necessary responses The resource identified by the request is only capable of generating response entities that have content characteristics not acceptable according to the Accept header field sent in the request Polycom Inc A 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table A 1 Call Disconnection Causes Continued Disconnection Cause Description SIP client error 407 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 407 Proxy Authentication Required response The client must first authenticate itself with the proxy SIP client error 409 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 409 Conflict response The request could not be completed due to a conflict with the current state of the resource SIP client error 411 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 411 Length Required response The server refuses to accept the request without a defined Content Length SIP client error 413 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 413 Request Entity Too Large response The server is refusing to process a request because the request entity is larger than the server is willing or able to process SIP client error 414 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 414 Request URI Too Long response The server is refusing to service the request because the Request URI is longer than the server is w
219. Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories with SIP servers is done per conferencing entity This allows better control on the number of entities that register with each SIP server by selecting for each of the conferencing entities whether it will register with the SIP server The registration is defined in the Conference Profile Network Services tab mmm gt General a Nane Display Name gt Video Quality Line Rate 384 Kbp v gt Video Settings F gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR IP Network Service gt Recording Service Name SIP Registratio Accept calls gt Site Names IP Network Se l v gt Message Overlay IP Network Se M gt Network Services 4 m r In the IP Network Services table the system lists all the defined Network Services one or two depending on the system configuration e To register the conferencing entity to which this profile is assigned to a Network Service in the Registration column click the check box of that Network Service e You can also prevent dial in participants from connecting to that conferencing entities when connecting via a Network Service In the Accept Calls column clear the check box of the Network Service from which calls cannot connect to the conference Polycom Inc 16 35 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Hardware Monitor The Hardware
220. Resolution is a fixed resolution and frame rate for Content sharing in a Cascaded Conference The Content Resolution that are available for selection are dependent on the Line Rate and Content Settings that have been selected for the conference gt General gt Advanced Quality Line Rate Display Name gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR a People Video Definition gt Recording gt Site Names Video Quality gt Message Overlay Maximum Resolution gt Network Services Content Video Definition Content Settings HiResGrephics Content Protocol 64 Cascade and SVC Optimized _v Content Resolution 720 Sips 720 Sips 720 30fps 1080 15fps a e The following table summarizes the interaction of these parameters Table 4 8 Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel by Line Rate Content Settings amp Content Resolution in AVC CP Conferencing Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps Content Cascade Cancano Aesan eae LEE OO O Resolution 1472 petting fps a Kes 1728 2048 4096 96 823 1920 wm a wos Polycom Inc 4 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Content Settings Hi Resolution Graphics 4 12 Table 4 8 Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel by Line Rate Content Settings amp Content Resolution in AVC CP Conferencing Continued Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps
221. Started Guide Procedure 1 First time Power up on page 2 8 Enter the number of the port used for communication and data transactions between the Collaboration Server unit and the RMX Manager For standard connection enter 80 For a Secured connection using TLS or SSL enter 443 Username Enter the user name with which you will login to the MCU A User with this name must be defined in the Collaboration Server Users list The system is shipped with a default User whose name is POLYCOM Password Enter the password as defined for the user name with which you will login to the MCU The system is shipped with a default User whose password is POLYCOM Secure Mode Optional Select this check box to connect to the Collaboration Server with SSL and work in Secure Mode Remember Login This check box is automatically selected and it enables the usage of the user name and password entered in this dialog box when connecting to the Collaboration Server If this check box is cleared the user is prompted for the user name and password when connecting to this Collaboration Server unit Auto Select this check box to automatically reconnect to the Collaboration Reconnection Server if the connection between the RMX Manager and the MCU is broken Polycom Inc 18 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 19 MCU Properties Continued Hs Interval Enter time in seconds between reconnect ion attempts to the Collaboration S
222. T we em o User Name The login name of the user who reconnected the participant to the conference or disconnected or deleted the participant from the conference Participant Name The name of the participant reconnected to the conference or disconnected or deleted from the conference Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 33 Event Fields for Event 106 USER SET END TIME ee oe eee New End Time The new conference end time set by the user in GMT time The login name of the user who changed the conference end time Table C 34 Event Fields for Events 107 and 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE and OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY a ee rs Operator Name The login name of the user who moved the participant Pary Name Pary Name The name of the participant who was moved name of the The name of the participant who was moved who was moved Party ID The identification number of the participant who was moved as assigned by the MCU Destination Conf The name of the conference to which the participant was moved Name Destination Conf ID The identification number of the conference to which the participant was moved Table C 35 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE O Operator Name Source Conf Name Conf Name Ke Conf ID
223. T USER RECONNECT PARTICIPANT on page C 28 A user reconnected a participant who was disconnected from the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 32 Event Fields for Events 102 103 104 USER DELETE PARTICIPANT USER DISCONNECT PARTICIPANT USER RECONNECT PARTICIPANT on page C 28 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 2 CDR Event Types Continued 106 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT USER SET END TIME OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 A user updated the properties of a participant during the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 13 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 DEFINED PARTICIPANT USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT on page C 16 A user modified the conference end time For more information about the fields see Table C 33 Event Fields for Event 106 USER SET END TIME on page C 29 The participant moved from an Entry Queue to the destination conference or between conferences For more information about the fields see Table C 34 Event Fields for Events 107 and 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE and OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY on page C 29 The Collaboration Server User moved the p
224. TICIPANT USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT Continued ca ce Bonding Mode Not supported Always contains the value 0 Number Of Channels Net Channel Width Not supported Always contains the value 0 Network Service The name of the Network Service Name An empty field indicates the default Network Service Restrict Not supported Always contains the value 0 Audio Only Indicates the participant s Audio Only setting as follows 0 The participant is not an Audio Only participant 1 The participant is an Audio Only participant 255 Unknown Default Number Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants Type The type of telephone number as follows 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Network specific 4 Subscriber 6 Abbreviated 255 Taken from Network Service default Note For dial in participants the only possible value is 255 Taken from Network Service Net Sub Service Not supported Name This field remains empty Number of Participant Phone Numbers Number of MCU Phone Numbers Party and MCU Phone Numbers Polycom Inc C 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 13 Event Fields for Events 10 101 105 DEFINED PARTICIPANT USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT Continued me e Identification Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants Method The method by which the destination conference is identified
225. Templates are added to the Conference Templates list When the Import includes conference profiles check box is selected the imported Conference Profiles are added to the Conference Profiles list Polycom Inc 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring You can monitor ongoing conferences and perform various operations while conferences are running S S JEN giles IS SJJ Tab Jo lt Skins viviv IVR viv Info viv v Polycom Inc Three levels of monitoring are available with the Collaboration Server General Monitoring You can monitor the general status of all ongoing conferences and their participants in the main window Conference Level Monitoring You can view additional information regarding a specific conference and modify its parameters if required using the Conference Properties option Participant Level Monitoring You can view detailed information on the participant s status using the Participant Properties option The maximum number of participants in a conference Polycom RMX 1800 with 3 video accelerators Up to 100 HD 720p 30 or 50 HD 1080p 25 30 fps Polycom RMX 1800 with 2 video accelerators Up to 70 HD 720p 30 or 35 HD 1080p 25 30 fps Polycom RMX 1800 with 1 video accelerators Up to 35 HD 720p 30 or 17 HD 1080p 25 30 fps 12 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide General Monitoring Users can monitor a conference or keep track of its part
226. The Answer is either OK or FAILED Notification Settings The Collaboration Server can display notifications when e Anew Collaboration Server user connects to the MCU e Anew conference is started e Not all defined participants are connected to the conference or when a single participant is connected e Achange in the MCU status occurs and an alarm is added to the alarm s list A welcome message is displayed to the Collaboration Server user upon connection Ke Welcome POLYCOM F5 ZIVN MCU State MINOR Running Conferences 1 Active Alarms 0 Polycom Inc 19 39 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To configure the notifications 1 On the Collaboration Server menu select Setup gt Notification Settings The Notification Settings dialog box is displayed Select the settings to be used for system Notifications C Enable all Notifications Disable all Notifications Custom New Connection Conference not Full New Conference Created Active Alarms Update Welcome Message Fault List Updated KIKI K The following notification options are displayed Table 19 20 Notification Settings Parameters C a eee New Connection Notification of a new user administrator connecting to the Collaboration Server New Conference New conference has been created Created Conference Not Full The conference is not full and additional participants are defined for the c
227. The passwords are automatically assigned to ongoing conferences Meeting Rooms and Reservations at the end of the creation process once they are added to the Collaboration Server e Automatically assigned passwords can be manually changed through the Conference Meeting Room Reservation Properties dialog boxes e Deleting an automatically created password will not cause the system to generate a new password and the new password must be added manually or the field can be left blank e Ifa password was assigned to the conference via Microsoft Outlook using the PCO add in the system does not change these passwords and additional passwords will not be generated for example if only the conference password was assigned a chairperson password will not be assigned e If the flag values i e the password lengths are changed passwords that were already assigned to conferences Meeting Rooms and Reservations will not change and they can be activated using the existing passwords Only new conferencing entities will be affected by the change 4 Do not enable this option in an environment that includes a Polycom DMA system Enabling the Automatic Generation of Passwords To enable the automatic generation of passwords the following flags have to be defined Table 20 6 Automatic Password Generation Flags Fc HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD NO default Conference and chairperson passwords are displayed when viewing the Conference Meeting Room
228. USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 on page C 19 The contents of the participant information fields For more information about the fields see Table C 38 Event Fields for Event 3010 PARTICIPANT INFORMATION on page C 33 Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event For more information about the fields see Table C 5 Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 on page C 13 Note An additional CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 event will be written to the CDR each time the value of one of the following conference fields is modified e Conference Password e Chairperson Password Info1 Info2 or Info3 e Billing Info These additional events will only contain the value of the modified field Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event For more information about the fields see Table C 6 Event Fields for Event 6001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5 on page C 14 Additional information about a CONFERENCE START event This event contains the Display Name For more information about the fields see Table C 7 Event Fields for Event 11001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 10 on page C 14 are not Supported by the Collaboration Server on page C 36 C 9 Polycom Inc Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Event Specific Fields The following tables describe the fields which are specific to each type of event Some fields that were supported by
229. VR Service Name gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General gt Video Services Message File p 13 4 gt DTMF Codes Password Changed Successfull Password_Changed_Successfully wav gt Operator Assistance Self Mute Self Unmute Chairperson Help Menu Participant Help Menu Recording In Progress Recording Failed Contere Conference is Unsecured Conference is Locked UMBer of participan Self_Mute wav Self_Unmute wav Chairperson_Help_Menu wav Participant_Help_Menu wav Max_Participants_Exceedeame Recording_in_Progress wav Recording_Failed wav Conference_Unsecured wav Conference_Locked wav z K2 Add Message File n an 4 Select the Recording In Progress message and then select the appropriate message file by default Recording_in_Progress wav from the file list to the right of the field 5 Select the Recording Failed message and then select the appropriate message file by default Recording Failed wav from the file list to the right of the field 6 To modify the default DTMF codes click the DTMF Codes tab Polycom Inc Chapter 13 Recording Conferences 7 To modify the DTMF code or permission for a recording function a Select the desired DTMF name Start Stop or Pause Recording click the DTMF code entry and type a new code Table 13 2 Default DTMF Codes assigned to the recording process Recording Operation DTMF Code
230. YOUT QOS_IP_AUDIO QOS_IP_VIDEO QOS_MANAGEMENT_NET WORK REDUCE_CAPS_FOR_RED COM_SIP REDIAL_INTERVAL_IN_SEC ONDS 20 16 Not Supported in RMX 1800 Determines the number of seconds the RMX is to wait for an OCSP response from the OCSP Responder before failing the connection Network latency or slow WAN links can cause login problems when logging in to the RMX s Management Network This System Flag s value determines the number of seconds the MCU is to wait for an OCSP response from the OCSP Responder before failing the connection Default 3 seconds Range 1 20 seconds When set to YES if system resource usage reaches the High Port Usage Threshold as defined for the Port Gauges System Alerts in the form of an Active Alarm and an SNMP trap are generated Used to prevent reassignment of cells in a forced layout that were assigned to endpoints that have disconnected paused their video or have been removed from the conference The cell will remain black until the endpoint reconnects or a new layout is used or the conference ends Range YES NO Default NO e NO Cells of dropped endpoints are reassigned Endpoints that reconnect will be treated as new endpoints e YES Cells of dropped endpoints are not reassigned but will be reserved until the endpoint reconnects For information see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide on page 3 48 Used to select the priority of audio packets when Di
231. _FECC SIP_TCP_PORT_ADDR_ST RATEGY SUPPORT_HIGH _PROFILE TCP_RETRANSMISSION_TI MEOUT V35_MULTIPLE_SERVICES Controls BFCP s use of UDP and TCP protocols for dial out SIP Client connections according to its value e AUTO Default If SIP Client supports UDP TCP or UDP and TCP BFCP UDP is selected as Content sharing protocol UDP If SIP Client supports UDP or UDP and TCP BFCP UDP selected as Content sharing protocol If SIP Client supports TCP Cannot share Content e TCP If SIP Client supports TCP or UDP and TCP BFCP TCP selected as Content sharing protocol If SIP Client supports UDP Cannot share Content By default FECC support for SIP endpoints is enabled at the MCU level You can disable it by manually adding this flag and setting it to NO Setting the flag to 1 prevents the use of two sockets for one SIP call one for inbound traffic one for outbound traffic This is done by inserting port 5060 5061 into the Route 0 header Possible values e 0 Inbound traffic on port 5060 5061 outbound traffic on port 60000 e 1 Both inbound and outbound traffic on port 5060 5061 Default 1 Enables or disables the support of High Profile video protocol in CP conferences This flag is specific to CP conferences and has no effect on VSW conferences Range YES NO Default YES The number of seconds the server will wait for a TCP client to answer a call before closing the connection Default 5 S
232. abilities and they are supported in Star cascading topologies For more details see Polycom Inc 4 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide SIP BFCP Content Capabilities 4 2 SIP Clients supporting BFCP over UDP when connected to conferences on the Collaboration Server can share Content with endpoints supporting the following Content sharing protocols e BFCP TCP e BFECP UDP e H 323 H 239 Guidelines For SIP Clients that support both BFCP TCP and BFCP UDP e The preferred protocol is BFCP UDP e When used in Cascading conferences the Cascade Link must be H 323 e BFCP UDP is supported in both Pv4 addressing modes e BFCP utilizes an unsecured channel port 60002 TCP even when SIP TLS is enabled BFCP capabilities are by default declared to all endpoints If however the endpoint identity is hidden by a proxy server these capabilities will not be declared by the Collaboration Server Capabilities declaration is controlled by the ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_ALL_USER_AGENT System Flag The default value of the ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_ALL_USER_AGENT System Flag is YES resulting in BFCP capability being declared with all vendors endpoints unless it is set to NO When set to NO the Collaboration Server will declare BFCP capabilities to Polycom and Avaya endpoints e The ENABLE_FLOW_CONTROL_REINVITE System Flag should be set to NO when SIP BFCP is enabled e If these System Flags don t exist in the system they must be manu
233. abilities of different MCUs for example different communication protocols such as serial connections ISDN etc e Significant call cost savings to be realized by having participants call local MCUs which in turn call remote MCUs long distance Although participants in MIH Cascading conferences can connect using H 323 SIP and ISDN the MIH Cascading Links must connect via H 323 MIH Cascading Levels The cascading hierarchy topology can extend to up to four levels Figure 5 5 where the most common configuration includes up to three levels I SS Level 1 for example Headquarters RMX 4000 Cascading links Level 2 for example Province Branch Cascading links Level 3 gt aS for example Ry gy gt te 3 ogN aw P NLA City Branch J AN MGC 100 MGC 100 a Di S xe Figure 5 4 MIH Cascade a Sample 3 Level Cascading Configuration 5 14 Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences Cascading Topologies The cascading hierarchy topology should be deployed according to the following guidelines Level 1 If an RMX is deployed on level 1 recommended deployment Any RMX can be used on level 2 3 and 4 recommended deployment MGC version 9 0 4 can be used on level 2 and level 3 DST MCS 4000 and other MCUs can be deployed on levels 3 and 4 If an MGC is deployed on level 1 MGC or RMX can be used on level 2 DST MCS 4000 and other MCUs can be deployed
234. aboration Server Web Client Login screen is displayed Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server User Name Password EMA V8 133 5 Inthe Collaboration Server Web Client Login screen enter the default Username POLYCOM and Password POLYCOM and click Login The Collaboration Server Web Client opens and the Product Activation dialog box appears with the serial number filled in 6 Inthe Activation Key field enter or paste the Product Activation Key 7 ClickOK A message indicating that the Product Activation Key was loaded successfully appears If the Product Activation Key fails to load please contact your vendor 8 Click OK If the Product Activation dialog box does not appear go to Setup gt Product Activation to display the dialog box 9 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Software Management gt Restore Configuration 10 Browse to the Restore Directory Path where the backed up configuration files are stored and then click Restore 19 56 Polycom Inc system Configuration Flags The system s overall behavior can be configured by modifying the default values of the System Flags For flag changes including deletion to take effect the MCU must be reset For more information see Resetting the Collaboration Server RMX on page 19 54 e ENABLE_SELECTIVE_MIXING Modifying System Flags To modify system flags 1 On the Collaborati
235. aes E EEEE 13 8 Using the Collaboration Server Web Client to Manage the Recording Process 13 9 Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process cccesseeeeseseeeteees 13 11 Users Connections and Notes 000 cece ene eens 14 1 OE e E EE EEEE EE TEE 14 1 User Types a E E R E E N E RA 14 1 Administr t f ies eee Bee EE E EEEE 14 1 Administrator Read only ssesisersisiieiesiinieini iiaa 14 1 OPeratOr aroraa E A A 14 1 ChaitperS o eei an ar e r E EE E TAE EEEE 14 1 Auditor soie na E E TE E 14 2 Machine AcCCOunnt suseni eie ariei EE aa ra E Tenia 14 2 Listing Uses acresisi cua n e i a estea E e T 14 2 Adding a New USET siseses orai eor ieaS TEn TE A E A EE 14 2 Deleting a Ser renerien n E EE A EE 14 3 Changing a User s Password yiiiescsctisseossiesdiveoesies stteseetosttacesetoeved ostabosossevenspsevevenduvay 14 3 Disabling a User sisiscssscesiscptsessicsessvensisss stbeassces sobensvisossbotovenesebenssdenspberstoenbisnastebe sobeebienss 14 4 Enabling a User a cccicecdecncgececs Gcties chitin gasctages sewers a a E E Ea E 14 5 Renaming a USET esc esis cecccecestcsesscstuidesevsitevesteessestavtvas exstecedbseesdaetesccbcstetacevasedsatotasevesieess 14 5 Machine Account riseire n etiss Gabe cdbsiies E E busca cvsns E 14 6 GUISES sneen aeaee aE e ESAE AEn 14 7 MOnitoring cesrincciahnis nium Oa TE VEETEE STERE ES EE ieee 14 7 Active Directory seroren anioien nin E a e 14 7 Connections urime e n A Ea E EE E Ea E 14 8 Viewing the C
236. age is played when the conference status changes to unsecured Unsecured as initiated by the conference chairperson or participant using DTMF code 71 Confirm Password Requests the participant to re enter the new password Change Enter Destination ID Prompts the calling participant for the destination number Default message prompts the participant for the conference ID same message as in the Entry Queue IVR Service First to Join Informs the participant that he or she is the first person to join the conference Incorrect Destination If the participant entered an incorrect conference ID in gateway calls ID it is the destination number requests the participant to enter the number again Maximum Number of Indicates the participant cannot join the destination conference as the Participants maximum allowed number of participants will be exceeded Exceeded Mute All Off This message is played to the conference to inform all participants that they are unmuted when Mute All is cancelled 15 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Table 15 6 Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages Continued Mute All On Informs all participants that they are muted with the exception of the conference chairperson Note This message is played only when the Mute All Except Me option is activated No Video Resources Informs the participant of the lack of Video Resources in the Audio Only Collaboration Server and that he
237. ages must be set in the Conference IVR Service to enable recording related voice messages to be played and to allow the conference chairperson to control the recording process using DTMF codes e Recording enabled Profile recording must be enabled in the Conference Profile assigned to the recorded conference If Multiple Recording Links are being defined for Virtual Recording Rooms VRRs created and saved on the Polycom RSS 4000 Version 8 5 the MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LINKS System Flag in system cfg can be modified to determine the number of Recording Links available for selection e Range 20 100 e Default 20 The flag value can be modified by selecting the System Configuration option from the Setup menu For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Defining the Recording Link The Recording Link is defined once and can be updated when the H 323 alias or the IP address of the recording system is changed Only one Recording Link can be defined in the Collaboration Server Its type must be H 323 conferences therefore the recording system must be defined on the default IP Network Service to In Multiple Networks Configuration Recording Links use the default Network Service to connect to enable the recording To define a Recording Link 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click Recording Links amp 2 Inthe Recording Links list click the New Recording Link 3 button 13 2
238. ailable Video Layouts Number of Video Windows 2 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 11 Click the Audio Settings tab The New Profile Audio Settings dialog box opens J7 Mute participants except lecturer Speaker Change Threshold Sec ato gt 2 20 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles 12 Define the following parameters Table 2 10 New AVC Profile Audio Settings Parameters Mute participant When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled the except lecturer audio of all participants in the conference except for the lecturer can be automatically muted upon connection to the conference This prevents other conference participants from accidentally interrupting the lecture or from a noisy participant affecting the audio quality of the entire conference Muted participants cannot unmute themselves unless they are unmuted from the Collaboration Server Web Client RMX Manager You can enable or disable this option during the ongoing conference Notes e When enabled the mute indicator on the participant endpoints are not visible because the mute participants was initiated by the MCU Therefore it is recommended to inform the participants that their audio is muted by using the Closed Caption or Message Overlay functions In the Collaboration Server Web Client RMX Manager the mute by MCU indicator is listed for each muted participant in the Audio column in the Participants pane T
239. airperson Leave this field empty when defining an Operator conference Password Maximum Number of Enter the maximum number of participants that can connect to an Participants Operator conference you can have more than two or leave the default selection Automatic Maximum number of participants that can connect to an Operator conference Click the Participants tab The New Conference Participants dialog box opens You must define or add the Operator participant to the Operator conference This participant must be defined as a dial out participant Define the parameters of the endpoint that will be used by the Collaboration Server User to connect to the Operator conference and to other conference to assist participants For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Participants Tab on page 3 16 Optional Click the Information tab The Information tab opens Enter the required information For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Information Tab on page 3 18 Click OK Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move The new Operator conference is added to the ongoing Conferences list with a special icon Tra an The Operator participant is displayed in the Participants list with an Operator participant icon T and the system automatically dials out to the Operator participant Saving an Operator Conference to a Template The Ope
240. alid A participant Change_ Password_ Failure enters an invalid Failure wav password Password The password has been successfully A participant has Password_ Changed_ Changed changed confirmed a Successfully wav Successfully password change Self Mute You are now muted A participant mutes Self_Mute wav his or her audio Self Unmute You are no longer muted A participant Self_Unmute wav unmutes his or her audio 15 32 Polycom Inc Table 15 12 Default IVR Messages Continued Message Type Message Text When Played FileName Chairperson Help Menu Participant Help Menu Maximum Participants Exceeded Request Conference NID Retry Conference NID Secured Conference Unsecured Conference Locked Conference Conference Recording Conference Recording Failed No Video Resources Audio Only Polycom Inc The available touch tone keypad actions are as follows e To exit this menu press any key e To request private assistance press star zero To request operator s assistance for the conference press zero zero To mute your line press star six To unmute your line press pound The available touch tone keypad actions are as follows To exit this menu press any key To request private assistance press star zero To mute your line press star six To unmute your line press pound six The conference is full You cannot join at this time
241. allow running Signed Activex If ActiveX installation is blocked please see Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide ActiveX Bypass on page 19 52 Collaboration Server Web Client does not support larger Windows text or font sizes It is recommended to set the text size to 100 default or Normal in the Display settings in Windows Control Panel on all workstations Otherwise some dialog boxes might not appear properly aligned To change the text size select Control Panel gt Display For Windows XP click the Appearance tab select Normal for the Font size and click OK For Windows 7 click the Smaller 100 option and click OK When installing the Collaboration Server Web Client Windows Explorer gt Internet Options gt Security Settings must be set to Medium or less It is not recommended to run Collaboration Server Web Client and Polycom CMAD applications simultaneously on the same workstation For Windows 7 Security Settings see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Microsoft Windows 7 Security Settings on page 1 10 For Internet Explorer 8 configuration see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Microsoft Windows 7 Security Settings on page 1 10 Polycom Inc 2 Conference Profiles Profiles stored on the MCU enable you to define all types of conferences Profiles include conference parameters such as Conference Line Rate People and Content resolution and set
242. ally added For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 e BFCP capabilities are not supported in Microsoft ICE environment Dial out Connections e For dial out connections to SIP Clients BFCP UDP protocol can be given priority by adding the adding the SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MODE System Flag to system cfg and setting its value to UDP The Collaboration Server s Content sharing determined by the System Flag s settings and SIP Client capabilities are summarized in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 System Flag SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MODE SIP Client BFCP Support AUTO BFCP TCP selected as Default Content sharing BFCP UDP selected as_ protocol BFCP UDP selected as Content sharing Content sharing protocol protocol Cannot share Content Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Table 4 1 System Flag SIP_BFCP_DIAL_OUT_MODE SIP Client BFCP Support Flag Value BFCP TCP selected as ror Canna share Content Content sharing protocol For more information see Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags on page 20 10 Dial in Connections e The Collaboration Server will share content with Dial in SIP Clients according to their preferred BFCP protocol e SIP Clients connected as Audio Only cannot share Content Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference Content can be shared using two main methods e Content Highest common parameters also known as Content V
243. ancy and Multiple Network Services at the same time That is if MULTIPLE_SERVICES is set as YES in the System Flags you must changes its value to NO before you can set LAN_REDUNDANCY as YES Media Signaling and Management Redundancy On the Polycom RMX 1800 for Media Signaling and Management Redundancy you must set LAN_REDUNDANCY system flag to YES To enable LAN redundancy 1 Make sure the LAN_REDUNDANCY system flag is set to YES LAN_REDUNDANCY is set as NO by default and is hidden in the System Flags list To make sure LAN_REDUNDANCY is set as YES do the following a On the RMX menu click Setup gt System Configuration gt System Configuration The System Flags dialog box opens b Select MULTIPLE_SERVICES and make sure it s value is NO If not click Edit Flag and change its value to NO a Select LAN_REDUNDANCY and make sure it s value is YES If not click Edit Flag and change its value to YES If you cannot find LAN_REDUNDANCY in System Flags dialog box click New Flag to add it and set its value as YES 2 Click Close to exit the System Flags window 3 When prompted to reset the MCU click Yes Hardware Monitor Indications When LAN Redundancy is enabled on the Collaboration Server LAN 1 port is Active With LAN redundancy when LAN LEDs are lit they indicate that a physical connection of the 16 28 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services cables is present but does not indicate their a
244. ange the value to YES and then click OK 4 Check the value of the flag LAN_REDUNDANCY If its value is YES click Edit Flag and change its value to NO If you cannot find the flag LAN_REDUNDANCY in the System Flags list do the following a Click New Flag b In the New Flag field enter LAN_REDUNDANCY c Inthe Value field enter NO d Click OK 16 31 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 Click Close to exit the System Flags window 6 When prompted to reset the MCU click Yes Defining New IP Network Service Use this procedure to define Network Services in addition to the Network Service already defined during first entry installation and configuration To add new additional Network Services 1 Inthe Device Management pane click IP Network Services 2 Inthe Network Services list toolbar click the Ea Add Network Service button The New IP Service Networking IP dialog box opens 3 Define the following fields Table 16 18 IP Network Service IP Parameters re ewe Network Service Enter the IP Network Service name Name Note This field is displayed in all IP Signaling dialog boxes and can contain character sets that use Unicode encoding IP Network Type Select the IP Network environment You can select H 323 For an H 323 only Network Service SIP For a SIP only Network Service H 323 amp SIP For an integrated IP Service Both H 323 and SIP participants can connect to the Collaboration Server
245. anner Configuration Description Restore Default Check Box Text Field Button Login Page Edit the text in this field to Click the button to Banner meet local requirements restore the default Select or clear the Banner content is text to the banner check box to multilingual and uses enable or disable Unicode UTF 8 encoding the display of the All text and special banner characters can be used Main Page Maximum banner size is Banner 100KB 3 Click the OK button 19 36 Polycom Inc Banner Display Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Login Screen Banner The Login screen banner can display any text for example the terms and conditions for system usage The user must acknowledge that the information was read and click the Accept button to proceed to the Login screen as shown in the following screen Main Screen Banner The Main Screen banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen as follows Software Management The Software Management menu is used to backup and restore the Collaboration Server s configuration files and to download MCU software Backup and Restore Guidelines Polycom Inc System Backup can only be performed by an administrator The System Backup procedure creates a single backup file that can be viewed or modified only by developers A System Backup file from one system can be restored on another system To ensure file system consistency do not perform a
246. anually 172 21 41 105 172 21 41 106 172 21 41 107 o S e Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Selecting a defined participant a Add participants to the conference either from the Address book or by defining new participants b In the Lecturer field select the lecturer from the list of the defined participants Automatic selection of the lecturer In the Lecturer field select Auto In this mode the conference speaker becomes the lecturer To select the lecturer and enable the Lecture Mode during the ongoing conference 1 Make sure that the participant you want to designate as the lecturer has connected to the conference 2 Inthe Conference Properties Video Settings dialog box in the Lecturer field select the lecturer from the list of the connected participants gt General Display Name SUPPORT_20 gt Advanced gt Video Quality gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings Duration 1 s q fo 0 I Presentation Mode c gt Customized Polling gt Skins gt IVR I Lecturer View Switching gt Information Lecturer None gt Recording gt Site Names Auto Scan Interval s gt Message Overlay I Auto Layout gt Network Services g Go even if they have the same IP address number Therefore if a defined dial out participant is added to the conference and the same pa
247. ap Inform Engine ID Security Level auth z Authentication Protocol MD5 a Authentication Password Privacy Protocol AES Privacy Password 12 Define the following parameters Table 19 14 SNMPv3 Traps me own OoOo e IP Address Enter the IP address of the SNMP trap recipient 1 2 3 Enable Trap An Inform is a Trap that requires receipt confirmation from the Inform entity receiving the Trap If the Engine ID field Version 3 is empty when Enable Trap Inform has been selected the Engine ID is set by the Client Community Enter the Community Name of the manager terminal used to 1 2 Name monitor the MCU activity Polycom Inc 19 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 19 14 SNMPv3 Traps Continued oem Enter the name of the user who is to have access to the trap Engine ID Enter an Engine ID to be used for the Trap This field is enabled when the Enable Trap Inform check box is selected If the Enable Trap Inform check box is cleared the Engine ID of the Agent is used The Engine ID is comprised of up to 64 Hexadecimal characters Default Empty Security Level Select a Security Level from the drop down menu Range No Auth No Priv Auth No Priv Auth Priv Default Auth Priv Authentication Enter the authentication protocol MD5 or SHA Protocol The availability of the MD5 Authentication Protocol as a 3 selectable option is controlled b
248. articipant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Incorrect Data The incorrect DTMF code entered by the participant or an empty field if the participant did not press any key Correct Data The correct DTMF code if known Failure Type The type of DTMF failure as follows 2 The participant did not enter the correct conference password 6 The participant did not enter the correct chairperson password 12 The participant did not enter the correct Conference ID Table C 23 Event fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK Ea Participant Name The name of the Recording Link participant name of the The name of the Recording Link participant Link participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the Recording Link participant by the MCU Recording The type of recording operation as follows Operation 0 Start recording 1 Stop recording 2 Pause recording 3 Resume recording 4 Recording ended 5 Recording failed Initiator Not supported C 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide C 26 Table C 23 Event fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK Continued Recording Link The name of the Recording Link Name Recording Link ID The Recording Link ID Start Recording The start recording policy as follows Policy 1 Start recording automatically as soon as the first participant connects to the conference 2 Start recording when requested by the conference chairp
249. articipant from an ongoing conference to another conference For more information see Table C 35 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE on page C 29 The Collaboration Server User moved the participant to the Operator conference For more information see Table C 34 Event Fields for Events 107 and 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM CONFERENCE and OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY on page C 29 The Collaboration Server User moved the participant back to his Home source conference For more information see Table C 36 Event Fields for Event 111 OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY on page C 33 The Collaboration Server User moved the participant from the Operator conference to another conference For more information see Table C 35 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE on page C 29 Additional information about a NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 19 Event Fields for Event 1001 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY CONTINUE 1 on page C 24 C 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 2 CDR Event Types Continued 2001 2007 2010 2011 2012 2101 2102 2105 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 RESERVED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE PV6 ADDRESS R
250. as follows 1 Called IP address or alias 2 Calling IP address or alias Meet Me Method Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The meet me per method Currently the only value is 3 Meet me per participant Table C 14 Event Fields for Events 2010 2011 2015 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 Ea Network Type The type of network between the participant and the MCU as follows 2 H 323 5 SIP H 243 Password Not supported This field remains empty Chair Not supported Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol used by the participant as follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 4 H 264 255 Auto Broadcasting The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant Volume The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume by 3 dB Undefined Indicates whether are not the participant is an undefined participant as Participant follows 0 The participant is not an undefined participant 2 The participant is an undefined participant Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal Bonding Phone Number Video Bit Rate The video bit rate in units of kilobits per second A value of 4294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 14 Event Fields for E
251. asabsbsadeaiavonsssedbesensesnodo ese 19 38 GUI ANE a Ter E E ROE tubvanebts uasenebeveutdeveddveseses tueves 19 38 LUES oTe a o E E E E E E E ch 19 39 x Polycom Inc Table of Contents Notification Seting Sesser obeva dete anova E A V AOE 19 39 Logger Diagnostic Files sists sesceisscdessetcsssdscwncussentesberts deans cottusbtenestannsibs ARE e 19 41 Informat On Collector as sxcsvscecesssetedetencvenbuetersevesves n A EN 19 42 Standard Security Mode 1 ci sites tasdevewessaevises asdtehoesca E EEE 19 42 Using the Information Collector ccc eee ee cesssseseesesssesesensseseseseseneneseees 19 43 Step 1 Creating the Information Collector Compressed File 0 0 19 44 Step 2 Saving the Compressed File cece cesesecseesee cece cesses ee eeseeeneteseseneneeeteney 19 45 Step 3 Viewing the Compressed File 0 eee eessseseseseeseesesescsesesesescsestseseeeseans 19 45 PUCILOD eener R E E T A E EE ES 19 45 PUGIGOL Files wc cas se Sales cstssassoncuenseioedveseds E EAEE E 19 45 Auditor Event History File Storage oo eee eseeeeeecesseseeseessneseeneseeeseseees 19 45 Retrieving Auditor Piles csc uccjctsciesvssseicescsesesinsestsdsesdetinsesndetaaveeetonienessandeveeieyes 19 46 Auditor Pile VIG WEL tess csssencsssesisondssnesssouesehasonsvorchevovasibebsvenbbesshyteu vives RRE 19 47 ATU Cit Events aiese cctsssiues cca vesevidestvesctesssssosenvszasseae sedenssevesecvasseveucesessunasecsighenies ETE EAEri 19 49 ALES ATG PALES cassc
252. ate When Chairperson Exits option is enabled and that participant is the only conference chairperson e When moving the Operator to any conference following assistance request the IVR messages and slide display are skipped e Participants cannot be moved from LPR enabled conferences to non LPR conferences Move from non LPR conferences to LPR enabled conferences is available e Move between encrypted and non encrypted conferences depends on the ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_COMF flag setting as described in Table 10 3 Table 10 3 Participant Move Capabilities vs ALLOW_NON_ ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONMF flag setting Fla Source Destination Beas Conference Conference Move Enabled EQ Encrypted Encrypted 10 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 10 3 Participant Move Capabilities vs ALLOW_NON_ ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_COMF flag setting Continued Source Destination Conference Conference Move Enabled EQ Encrypted Encrypted e When moving dial out participants who are disconnected to another conference the system automatically dials out to connect them to the destination conference e Cascaded links cannot be moved between conferences e Participants cannot be moved to a conference if the move will cause the number of participants to exceed the maximum number of participants allowed for the destination conference Moving Participants Options Collaboration Server users can assist participa
253. ate all user types Administrator Operator with the FQDN of a server Multiple application users can be configured the same FQDN name if multiple applications are hosted on the same server If the system is downgraded the application user s FQDN information is not deleted from the Collaboration Server s user records A System Flag PASS_EXP_DAYS_MACHINE enables the administrator to change the password expiration period of application user s independently of regular users The default flag value is 365 days The server hosting an application user whose password is about to expire will receive a login response stating the number of days until the application user s password expires This is determined by the value of the PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_WARNING_DAYS System Flag The earliest warning can be displayed 14 days before the password is due to expire and the latest warning can be displayed 7 days before passwords are due to expire An Active Alarm is created stating the number of days before the password is due to expire The MIN_PWD_CHANGE_FREQUENCY_IN_DAYS System Flag does not effect application user accounts Applications typically manage their own password change frequency If an application user identifies itself with an incorrect FQDN its account will not be locked however the event is written to the Auditor Event File If an application user identifies itself with a correct FQDN and an incorrect password its account will be lock
254. ate and time The event sections or records contain an event type heading or event type code followed by event data For example an event type may be that a participant connects to the conference and the event data will list the date and time the participant connects to the conference the participant name and ID and the participant capabilities used to connect to the conference To enable compatibility for applications that written for the MGC family the Collaboration Server CDR file structure is based on the MGC CDR file structure The unformatted and formatted text files contain basically the same information The following differences should be noted between the contents of the unformatted and formatted text files e Inmany cases a formatted text file field contains a textual value whereas the equivalent unformatted file field contains a numeric value that represents the textual value e For reading clarity in a few instances a single field in the unformatted file is converted to multiple fields in the formatted text file and in other cases multiple fields in the unformatted file are combined into one field in the formatted file e To enable compatibility between MGC CDR files and Collaboration Server CDR files the unformatted file contains fields that were applicable to the MGC MCUs but are not supported by the Collaboration Server MCUs These fields are omitted from the formatted text file and values that appear in the unfor
255. ation Detailed H 264 High Profile allows higher quality video to be transmitted at lower bit rates However setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the default may affect the video quality of endpoints that do not support the H 264 High Profile The Collaboration Server uses two decision matrices Base Profile High Profile to enable endpoints to connect according to their capabilities Sharpness and Motion Sharpness and Motion are Video Quality settings that are selected per conference and are defined in the conference Profile A conference with Sharpness selected in its Profile uses the Sharpness settings of the Resolution Configuration and a conference with Motion selected in its Profile uses the Motion settings of the Resolution Configuration dialog box The Sharpness and Motion tabs in the Resolution Configuration dialog box allow you to view and modify Resolution Configuration settings for conferences with either Video Quality setting Resolution Configuration Sliders The Detailed Configuration dialog box allows you to configure minimum connection threshold bit rates for endpoints that support H 264 High Profile and those that do not support H 264 High Profile by using the following slider panes e Base Profile Endpoints that do not support H 264 High Profile connect at these minimum threshold bit rates Base Profile CIF 30 Ges ge A sgt Pra O E mee a cr hea on Seve pT aa ie hee GADE SD 30 ait 256 kbps HD 72
256. ation The System Information properties box is displayed License Information Total Number of CP HD720p30 Resources 100 Total Number of Event Mode Resources o RMX Version fais21 Encryption True Serial Number 0025907AF92C Multiple Services Tue HD True svc Fas CS System Information System Information The System Information properties box displays the following information Table 19 7 System Information ice es ect Total Number of Displays the number of HD720p30 video participants licensed for CP HD720p30 the system Each HD720p30 resource represents one 3 CIF video Resources resources Total Number of Event Displays the number of video voice participants licensed for a Mode Resources system in Event Mode Licensing It also determines the sed ine type that is available on the system indicates that this Licensing mode is disabled for this system RMX Version Displays the System Software Version of the RMX Encryption Indicates whether Encryption is included in the MCU license Encryption is not available in all countries Range True False Serial Number Displays the Serial Number of the Collaboration Server unit Multiple Services A Multiple Services license is installed Polycom Inc 19 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 19 7 System Information Continued a HD Indicates if the MCU is licensed to connect endpoints at HD resolutions in Cont
257. ation Server menu click Administration gt Software Management gt Restore Configuration 2 Browse to the Restore Directory Path where the backed up configuration files are stored and then click Restore To download MCU software files 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Software Management gt Software Download 2 Browse to the Install Path and then click Install Ping Collaboration Server The Ping administration tool enables the Collaboration Server Signaling Host to test network connectivity by Pinging IP addresses Guidelines e Both explicit IP addresses and Host Names are supported 19 38 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities e The Collaboration Server Web Client blocks any attempt to issue another Ping command before the current Ping command has completed Multiple Ping commands issued simultaneously from multiple Collaboration Server Web Clients are also blocked Using Ping To Ping a network entity from the Collaboration Server 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Tools gt Ping The Ping dialog box is displayed IP Address Answer 2 Modify or complete the following field Table 19 19 Ping Ce Host Name or Address Enter the Host Name or IP Address of the network entity to be Pinged 3 Click the Ping button The Ping request is sent to the Host Name or IP Address of the Collaboration Server entity
258. ations Week View By default the Reservation Calendar is displayed in Week view with the current date highlighted in orange Tisi G 6gb S50 sean 2 15 2009 Su2 16 2009 Mo2 17 2009 T 2 19 2009 Th2 20 2009 Fr 2 21 2009 saa 08 09 10 ar 12 13 Day View 2723 2009 Monday 10 41 00 Today View The current date Today highlighted in orange can be viewed in both Week View and Day View ferervations EREEREER i Search Current Date Today Reservations List 0 Day View 200 2 19 200 2 20 200 2 21 7200 leek View Polycom Inc Polycom Inc List View Chapter 9 Reservations List View does not have a calendar based format Reservations List o m n SE W e Display Name jo Start Time End Time a internal 1 Status Conference Passw Profile SUPPORT_180 17989 07 11 2008 05 00 07 11 2008 SUPPORT_157 91272 06 11 2008 18 30 06 11 2008 c SUPPORT_108 97493 06 11 2008 18 30 06 11 2008 ce Logistics 00582 05 11 2008 15 00 05 11 2008 ceo Sales 12295 04 11 2008 12 00 04 11 2008 eo deb_template1 20940 02 11 2008 23 45 03 11 2008 All Reservations are listed by Display Name ID Internal ID Start Time 05 30 19 30 19 30 17 00 13 00 00 45 183 ok 987654 Factory_Video_Profile 169 ok Factory_Video_Profile 170 ok Factory_Video_Profile 168 ok Factory_Video_Profi
259. atted Retrieves the conference information as formatted text into a file whose extension is txt The Retrieve dialog box opens The dialog box displays the names of the destination CDR files 2 Select the destination folder for the CDR files and then click OK If the destination file already exists you will be asked if you want to overwrite the file or specify a new name for the destination file The files are saved to the selected folder CDR files are not included in the backup process and should be backed up manually by saving the CDR files to a destination device 17 6 Polycom Inc 1 RMX Manager Application The RMX Manager is the Windows version of the Web Client It can be used instead of the Web Client for routine Collaboration Server management and for Collaboration Server management via a modem connection For more information on using the RMX Manager via a modem connection see Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration Server on page F 1 Using the RMX Manager application a single user can control a single or multiple MCU units as well as conferences from multiple MCUs The Polycom RMX 1800 system can be managed and controlled by the RMX Manager application The RMX Manager can list and monitor e Up to 20 Collaboration Server systems in the MCUs pane e Up to 800 conferences in the Conferences pane e Up to 1600 participants in the Participants pane The RMX Manager is faster than the Web Client a
260. audio file that prompts the participant for the chairperson Password password Retry Chairperson Select the audio file that prompts participants to re enter the Password chairperson password if they enter it incorrectly Chairperson Identifier Enter the key to be used for identifying the participant as a Key chairperson Possible keys are pound key or star Billing Code The prompt requesting the chairperson billing code selected in the General tab 10 Click the Conference Password tab Polycom Inc 15 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The New Conference IVR Service Conference Password dialog box opens gt Global i Welcome Conference IVR Service Name IVR_ENGLISH gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General gt Video Services I Enable Password Messages gt DTMF Codes an gt Operator Assistance E Request Password zj 2 Add Message File c Retry Password x Add Message File Dial Out 2 E Request Digit 1B Add Message File e c 11 Select the Enable Password Messages check box to request the conference password before moving the participant from the conference IVR queue to the conference first plays the prompt Enter conference password However if the participant enters the chairperson password the participant becomes the chairperson To play the prompt requesting the Chairperson password For conference chairperson servic
261. available for conferencing while calls via the Network Service with no available resources will fail to connect Polycom Inc 17 The Call Detail Record CDR Utility The Call Detail Record CDR utility enables you to view summary information about conferences and retrieve full conference information and archive it to a file The file can be used to produce reports or can be exported to external billing programs The value of the fields that support Unicode values such as the info fields will be stored in the CDR file in UTF8 The application that reads the CDR must support Unicode The Collaboration Server can store details of up to 2000 conferences When this number is exceeded the system overwrites conferences starting with the earliest conference To save the conferences information their data must be retrieved and archived The frequency with which the archiving should be performed depends on the volume of conferences run by the MCU The Collaboration Server displays Active Alarms before overwriting the older files enabling the users to backup the older files before they are deleted The display of Active Alarms is controlled by the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS System Flag If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES default setting when ULTRA_SECURE_MODE System Flag is set to YES and a Cyclic File reaches a file storage capacity limit an Active Alarm is created Backup of CDR files is required
262. ayed ARQ Admission Request indicates that the participant has requested the gatekeeper to allocate the required bandwidth on the LAN Admitted indicates that the gatekeeper has allocated the required bandwidth to the participant DRQ Disengage Request the endpoint informs the gatekeeper that the connection to the conference is terminated and requests to disconnect the call and free the resources e None indicates that there is no connection to the gatekeeper 7 Optional for SIP AVC based participants Click the Call Admission Control tab to view its parameters gt General gt Advanced Name varda Endpoint Website gt Information Endpoint Type gt Media Sources gt SDP gt Connection Status gt Channel Status Allocated Bandwidth gt Channel Status Adva gt Call Admission Cont Requested Bandwidth Viewing Permissions Tab Gatekeeper Status Chairperson Administrator lt Operator Add to Address Book Table 12 13 Participant Properties Gatekeeper Status Parameters a Requested The bandwidth requested by the MCU from the SIP server Bandwidth Polycom Inc 12 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 13 Participant Properties Gatekeeper Status Parameters Continued Kis A Allocated Bandwidth The actual bandwidth allocated by the SIP server to the MCU Monitori
263. ayload type 103 BTP SER M 128 3 HMAC_SHA1_80 gt Channel Status G711Ulaw64k 20 milli packet duration H263 336008 gt Channel Status Adva Rfc2833D 1m a OF be F p LA TCIF at 30 fps RTP AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 Payload type 101 K SRTP A AES CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 180000 bps CIF a0 ACTF at 30 fps SATP AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 q r Local Communication Mode 4 221_24k 1 frame per packet ll eee CM_128 HMAC_SHA1_80 tor meti RTF aS TM 128_HMAC_SHA1_80 id K Add to Address Book An encrypted participant who is unable to join a conference is disconnected from the conference The disconnection cause is displayed in the Participant Properties Connection Status tab Security Failure indication and the Cause box identifies the encryption related situation For more information about monitoring see Conference and Participant Monitoring on page 12 1 4 34 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA Lost Packet Recovery LPR and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation DBA help minimize media quality degradation that can result from packet loss in the network Packet Loss Packet Loss refers to the failure of data packets transmitted over an IP network to arrive at their destination Packet Loss is described as a percentage of the total packets transmitted Causes of Packet Loss Network congestion
264. be entered is identical to the H 323 alias length If the information required to access the device conference is composed of several strings for example the conference ID and the conference password this information can be entered as one string where pauses p are added between the strings for the required delays as follows p p string p p string For example p23pp 34p4566 Extension Identifier The Collaboration Server automatically sends this information upon String continued connection to the destination device conference The information is sent by the Collaboration Server as DTMF code to the destination device conference simulating the standard IVR procedure 4 Usually additional definitions are not required and you can use the system defaults for the remaining parameters In such a case click OK To modify the default settings for advanced parameters click the Advanced tab Polycom Inc 8 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 Define the following Advanced parameters gt General gt Advanced Name gt Information Endpoint Website Call Bit Rate V Auto Automatic Kbits sec Resolution Auto hd Video Protocol Auto k Encryption Auto zi Cascade None jad a o cre Table 8 4 New Participant Advanced Properties CA Video Bit Rate Auto Video Protocol Resolution Encryption The Auto check box is automatically selected to use
265. be enabled Enter 0 to disable this flag and prevent HD Content from being used Click OK to confirm and exit the Update Flag dialog box Click Close to exit the System Flags dialog box Exclusive Content Mode Exclusive Content Mode allows you to limit Content broadcasting to one participant preventing other participants from interrupting the Content broadcasting while it is active Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Guidelines The Exclusive Content Mode is enabled or disabled by a check box in the in the Advanced tabs of the Conference Profile The check box is cleared feature is disabled by default Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA W Auto Terminate Before First Joins At the End After last participant quits When last participant remains J7 Auto Redialing TIP Compatibility Enable FECC J7 FW NAT Keep Alive Interval e Minutes e Exclusive Content Mode can be enabled or disabled during an ongoing conference using the Conference Properties Advanced dialog box SUPPORT 1089601797 Properties SUPPORT_10895017S7 Polycom Inc Encryption b W Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA T Auto Terminate Before First Joins At the End After last participant quits When last participant remains TIP Compatibility Enable FECC I FW NAT Keep Alive Interval In Exclusive Content Mode if the RESTRICT CONTENT BROADCAST _ TO_
266. be initiated from the Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue For more details see Conference Profiles on page 2 1 Entry Queue IVR Service with Conference ID Request Enabled The Entry Queue Service is used to route participants to their destination conferences or create a new conference with this ID For details see IVR Services on page 15 1 In Ad Hoc conferencing the Conference ID is used to check whether the destination conference is already running on the MCU and if not to start a new conference using this ID e Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue Ad Hoc conferencing must be enabled in the Entry Queue and a Profile must be assigned to the Entry Queue In addition an Entry Queue IVR Service supporting conference ID request For details see Entry Queues on page 7 1 D 2 Polycom Inc Appendix E Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information The following appendix details the properties connected with information about audio and video parameters as well as problems with the network which can affect the audio and video quality Table E 1 Participant Properties Channel Status Advanced Parameters i Media Info Algorithm Indicates the audio or video algorithm and protocol Frame per packet audio The number of audio frames per packet that are transferred between the only MCU and the endpoint If the actual Frame per Packets are higher than Frame per Packets declared during the capabilities exchange a Faulty flag is
267. been resolved in the MCU System Alerts System Alerts are activated when the system encounters errors such as a general or card error The system errors are recorded by the Collaboration Server and can be generated into a report that can be saved in txt format Polycom Inc 19 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 19 2 To view the System Alerts list 1 Click the red blinking System Alerts indication bar The Active Alarms pane opens This screen indicates what events have not been resolved Active Alarms T Category Level Code Process N Description neral Major SSHis e McuMng SSH is enabled The following columns appear in the Active Alarms pane Table 19 1 Active Alarms Pane Columns E es An identifying number assigned to the system alert Time Lists the local date and time that the error occurred This column also includes the icon indicating the error level as listed in the level column GMT Time Lists the date and time according to Greenwich Mean Time GMT that the error occurred Category Lists the type of error The following categories may be listed File indicates a problem in one of the files stored on the MCU s hard disk Card indicates problems with a card Exception indicates software errors General indicates a general error Assert indicates internal software errors that are reported by the software program Category cont Startup indicates
268. boration Server dials out to the participant 8 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 8 1 Docked Address Book List Columns Continued Encryption Displays whether the endpoint uses encryption for its media The default setting is Auto indicating that the endpoint must connect according to the conference encryption setting For information on adding and modifying participants in the Address Book see Managing the Address Book on page 8 7 Displaying and Hiding the Address Book The Address Book can be hidden it by clicking the anchor pin button in the pane header The Address Book pane closes and a tab is displayed at the right edge of the screen gt gt Click the tab to re open the Address Book Click tab to open Address a Name Status Role IP Address Phone Alias Name Network Dialing Dij Audio Video Encryptio Service N FECC Tok Content T 1D Marc_59446123 3 participants Rey Marc lt Connected 10 253 72 13 H 323 amp Dial o 88 IP Netw 1 Rex HDX lt Connected 10 253 72 24 SIP 4 Dial o IP Netw mAN 4Oog ELETTA fex XYZ dD Disconnected 10 253 72 24 H 323 Diao x IP Netw 3 N Adding Participants from the Address Book to Conferences You can add individual participants or a group of participants from the Address Book to a conference Adding Individual Participants from the Address Book to Conferences You can add
269. c Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application e Rarely Used parameters configured during initial system set up and rarely modified afterward List Pane The List pane displays details of the participants connected to the conferences selected in the Conferences pane or the item selected in Collaboration Server Management pane The title of the pane changes according to the selected item When selecting an item in the Collaboration Server Management pane it applies only to the MCU selected in the MCUs list In such a case the system displays the name of the selected MCU in the List pane title Status Bar The Status Bar at the bottom of the RMX Web Client contains System and Participant Alerts tabs as well as Port Usage Gauges and an MCU State indicator ec System Alerts cscs Participantalerts Port Usage Voice 0 72 Wi Video HD 0 72 Wi MCU State NORMAL System Alerts Lists system problems of all connected MCUs even if the MCU is not monitored The alert indicator flashes red when at least one system alert is active The flashing continues until a user with Operator or Administrator permission reviews the list The System Alerts can be sorted by MCU by clicking the MCU header in the System Alerts table The System Alerts pane is opened and closed by clicking the System Alerts button in the left corner of the Status Bar Active Alarms l af o im GMT Time category tevel code e D2 5 f 2 une 2012 164799 21 une 201
270. c Cascading using IP Cascaded Link on page 5 3 Precedence Domain Name Dial out SIP Only Precedence Level Dial out SIP Only AGC The Audio Gain Control AGC protocol that reduces noises is enabled by default for the participants Clear this check box to disable the AGC feature 6 To add general information about the participant such as e mail company name and so on click the Information tab and type the necessary details in the Info 1 4 fields Text in the info fields can be added in Unicode format length 31 characters 7 ClickOK The new participant is added to the selected group in the address book Substituting E 164 Number in Dial String Between the time a conference is scheduled and when it becomes active the IP of an endpoint may change especially in an environment that uses DHCP The MCU can be set to ignore the IP address of a participant when the conference starts Instead the alternative E 164 number will be used A new flag REMOVE_IP_IF_NUMBER_EXISTS has been added to control this option This flag must be manually added to change its value The values of this flag are e YES default The IP address of an endpoint will be ignored e NO The IP address of an endpoint will be used Guidelines e When this feature is enabled the IP address field of participants in scheduled conferences and conference templates will be empty Inorder for the MCU to ignore the IP of H 323 participants the following
271. can be configured on DURATION a system level by setting the flag to one of the following values in minutes 60 default 90 180 and 270 An ad hoc conference is automatically created when the participant dials into an Ad hoc Entry Queue and enters a conference ID that is not being used by any other conferencing entity It is based on the Conference Profile assigned to the EQ CONTENT_SLAVE_LINKS_ Defines the interval in seconds during which the NTRA_SUPPRESSION_IN_S Collaboration Server is allowed to forward an Intra Request ECONDS received from any of the Slave Cascading Links The Slave Cascading Link can be connected to the local Collaboration Server to an MCU on a higher cascade level or to the Content sharer The first Intra request that is received from any of the Slave MCUs connected to the Collaboration Server starts the interval counter and is forwarded to the next level MCU or to the Content sharer All other ntra requests that are received within this interval are registered but ignored After an interval of lt flag value gt seconds the system checks if during the last interval any additional ntra requests were registered If there is at least one Intra request it will be forwarded If there is no additional Intra request not no action is taken other than to wait for the next cycle This filtering process is repeated every lt flag value gt seconds Default 30 CONTENT_SPEAKER_INTR_ This flag controls the requests
272. can be done using Polycom Inc 8 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 8 18 e lt A predefined pattern e Customized pattern When you use the Find dialog box to search filtered data only the data that is displayed is searched data that is not displayed is not searched To search all the data clear all filters Filtering Address Book Data Using a Predefined Pattern To filter the data in an address book group 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group to filter 2 Inthe Address Book List pane in the column that you want to use for filtering click the filter T button A drop down menu is displayed containing all the matching patterns that can be applied to the selected field Filtering Options Selected Column Filter Button s P Address Ph Y Alias Name S1 Network Dial a Lg Main x Test fossa pe aerate seepage erection cp Keren 3 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dia Rex 172 21 41 105 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dia fe Soa dacaee 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia fx 172 22 186 22 172 22 186 22 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 187 13 172 22 187 13 H 323 Dia Rex 172 22 187 13 172 22 187 13 H 323 Dia Re 172 22 187 13 172 22 187 13 H 323 Dia Re 172 22 187 12 172 22 187 12 H 323 Dia Re 172 22 187 15 172 22 187 15 H 323 Dia Rax 172 22 187 18
273. cassececisetseseesuscudevenciscesisenavecsdgecesteesosstesaseslavencasensts 4 18 Content Broadcast Control soisissa ie ondiniia el aia inninid cine 4 18 Giving and Cancelling Token Ownership 0 ccceseeseseseseseseteeeeeeeeeeeeeene tetas 4 19 Managing Noisy Content Connections cccccecesseeesesesesessesesessseesecseeeseseeseeeees 4 20 Content Display Flags cccccsssscccsessssccnctosestuonctovetonsscnevorbscsetensepecndsenbeonsnenssdivectenesds 4 20 Forcing Other Content Capabilities oo cece eee cesssseeeeeeesesesesessseseseseneneans 4 21 Content Sharing via the Polycom CCS Plug in for Microsoft Lync Clients 4 21 Vid o Preview ossis mince ie cede aae e eoe ra obs eai ieser TEE RE Eo E a E RENEE 4 21 Video Preview Guidelines soupis an enraiar e da ia R EE EE aE EEEE EENEN 4 21 Workstation Requirements es esessessesessesersesersreettrettsrerisrtttertsesrttisttsrsttseeetsesersesrrnese 4 22 Testing your Workstation cisiicesssssscsesssscauctoensscenstorssvdesototeseceastotssvestonenstvsentess 4 22 Previewing the Participant Video 0 ccceessessseseessseessseseseseseseeseecesesesesesesnsesseeeeeseey 4 23 Auto Scan and Customized Polling in Video Layout 0 cc cece sesesesceseeeeeecseenetseees 4 24 G id lines sesen e a a a a a e a ia 4 24 Ii Polycom Inc Table of Contents Enabling Auto Scan and Customized Polling oo eee eeneneseseseeeeeseneee 4 25 Auto SCAM ensce inane Eaa e anD nnd REI SE EEA SEEN E EEE EnS 4 2
274. ce option is enabled and dial in participants can join the conference by dialing the dial in number Number of Network Not supported Services Always contains the value 0 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 Continued Co be Chairperson The chairperson password for the conference Password An empty field conference Chair Mode Not supported Always contains the value 0 Cascade Mode The cascading mode Currently the only value is 0 None Master Name Not supported This field remains empty Minimum Number The number of participants for which the system reserved resources of Participants Additional participants may join the conference without prior reservation until all the resources are utilized Currently the only value is 0 means that no chairperson password was assigned to the Allow Undefined Indicates whether or not undefined dial in participants can connect to the Participants conference Currently the only value is 1 Undefined participants can connect to the conference Time Before First Note This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate option is enabled Farioipan Joins Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse from the time the conference starts without any participant connecting to the conference before the conference is automatically terminated by the MCU Time After Last Note This field is only relevan
275. ching gt Recording gt Site Names Lecturer None x Message Overl gt a elad Auto Scan Interval s 10 sl gt Network Services Bd V Auto Layout i Auto Ed 4 9 10 verlay ee ee o Table 12 4 Conference Properties Video Settings Parameters Feta Deseripton O Presentation Mode When checked indicates that the Presentations Mode is active For more information see Presentation Mode on page 2 16 Lecturer View When checked the Lecturer View Switching enables automatic Switching random switching between the conference participants in the lecturer video window Same Layout When checked forces the selected layout on all conference participants and the Personal Layout option is disabled Auto Layout When enabled the system automatically selects the conference layout based on the number of participants in the conference Lecturer Indicates the name of the lecturer if one is selected Selecting a lecturer enables the Lecture Mode Auto Scan Interval s The time interval 10 300 seconds that Auto Scan uses to cycle the display of participants that are not in the conference layout in the selected cell Polycom Inc 12 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 4 Conference Properties Video Settings Parameters Continued T Video Layouts Indicates the currently selected video layout graphic 6 Click the Audio Settings tab to view the audio setting for the conference 75
276. cient resources are not available in the system and a scheduled Reservation cannot be activated the Reservation is deleted from the schedule e Resources are reserved for participants at the highest video resolution supported by the Line Rate specified in the conference Profile and up to the maximum system video resolution specified by the Resolution Configuration dialog box Polycom Inc 9 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide When anew Reservation is created in the Reservation Calendar the effect of the new Reservation including its recurrences on available resources is checked If resource deficiencies are found an error message is displayed Defined dial in or dial out participants Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and new connections to Ongoing conferences are not included in the resources calculation Reservations A Reservation that has been activated and becomes an ongoing conference is deleted from the Reservation Calendar list The maximum number of concurrent reservations is 80 Reservations with durations that overlap for any amount of time are considered to be concurrent System resource availability is partially checked when reservations are created Ifa conference duration extension request is received from an ongoing conference the request is rejected if it would cause a resource conflict If several reservations are scheduled to be activated at the same time and there are not enough resources for all pa
277. ckup of log files is required Card configuration event Cards wrong file s mode Polycom Inc The system switches to safe mode if many resets occur during startup To prevent additional resets and allow the system to complete the startup process the automatic system resets are blocked If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES and a Cyclic File reaches a file retention time or file storage capacity limit the user is alerted that audit files need to be backed up If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES and a Cyclic File reaches a file retention time or file storage capacity limit the user is alerted that CDR files need to be backed up If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES and a Cyclic File reaches a file retention time or file storage capacity limit the user is alerted that log files need to be backed up B 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table B 41 Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description Central signaling component failure Possible explanations Central signaling component failure unit type NonComponent CSMngnt CSH323 CSSIP Central signaling component failure unit type invalid NonComponent CSMngnt CSH323 CSSIP Central signaling component failure Invalid failure type Unit id id Type NonComponent CSMngnt CSH323 CSSIP Status Ok Failed Recovered Central signaling component failure Invalid failure type Central Signaling indica
278. conds Polycom Inc 2 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 Define the following parameters Table 2 5 New AVC CP Profile Advanced Parameters Encryption Select the Encryption option for the conference Encrypt All Encryption is enabled for the conference and all conference participants must be encrypted No Encryption Encryption is disabled for the conference Encrypt when Possible enables the negotiation between the MCU and the endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants according to their capabilities where encryption is the preferred setting For connection guidelines see Mixing Encrypted and Non encrypted Endpoints in one Conference on page 4 28 For more information see Media Encryption on page 4 27 When selected Lost Packet Recovery creates additional packets that contain recovery information used to reconstruct packets that are lost during transmission For more information see Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA on page 4 35 Auto Terminate When selected default the conference automatically ends when the termination conditions are met Before First Joins No participant has connected to a conference during the n minutes after it started Default idle time is 10 minutes At the End After Last Quits All the participants have disconnected from the conference and the conference is idle empty for the predefined time period Default idle time is 1 minu
279. conference It can only be modified in a conference profile A participant moved to another conference will be shown the font used by the new conference even if the conferences use different fonts Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Site Names Definition Polycom Inc Using the Site Name dialog box you can control the display of the site names by defining the font size color background color and transparency and position within the Video Window Site Name Eal A Site Name EA Site Name l Site Name et Site Names with Background Picture Skin Site Names without Background Plain Skin Guidelines e Site Names display is Off by default in a new profile e Site Names can be enabled to function in one of two modes Auto Site names are displayed for 10 seconds whenever the conference layout changes On Site names are displayed for the duration of the conference e During the display of the site names the video frame rate is slightly reduced e Site Names display characteristics position size color can by modified during an ongoing conference using the Conference Properties Site Names dialog box Changes are immediately visible to all participants e Site Names display text and background color is dependent on the Skin selected for the conference Plain Skins Site Names text is displayed without a background 2 35 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Gui
280. conferences running on the MCU You can specify the endpoint types for which resource allocation can be forced to CIF resource enabling other types of endpoints to use higher resolutions in the same conference For example you can force the system to allocate one CIF video resource to CMAD and VSX endpoints while HDX endpoints can connect using SD or HD video resources Once the endpoint connects to the conference its type is identified by the Collaboration Server and if applicable the Collaboration Server will connect it using one CIF resource even if a higher resolution can be used To force CIF resource 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt System Configuration The System Flags dialog box opens 2 Inthe MCMS_PARAMETERS tab click the New Flag button The New Flag dialog box is displayed New Flag i New Flag Value 3 In the New Flag field enter the flag name FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION 4 Inthe Value field enter the product type to which the CIF resource should be allocated Possible values are CMA Desktop for CMA desktop client VSX nnnn where nnnn represents the model number for example VSX 8000 You can define several endpoint types listing them one after the other separated by semicolon For example CMA Desktop VSX 8000 5 Click OK The new flag is added to the flags list Reset the MCU for changes to take effect For more details see t
281. cstscessveccescessdesolsiuveesessdevtvteselbevio senna E iT 19 49 Transactions essnee kerer EEE e E tn discs aie Seas ban vag aoe beets 19 51 ActiveX BY PASS is cvosesvsdeceyestveiccsi sasse nioe ree AEAEE rr E aTe EEEa E SOE STEE STEKENE ES E EEEE 19 52 T stalline ActiveX srren E R E ETS 19 52 Resetting the Collaboration Server RMX s ssssssssssissssssssieressrssresresiesrssnesresreseesnenresrenee 19 54 System Configuration Flags 0 0 cece ee eee eee 20 1 Modifying Systenn Flags c cccscccesssesecteeswtscvsenecdegtstine cocussnsnstosecnansacdedentasdcvivennscsediesnasbevesesdes 20 1 Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags occ cesessesescseeseeecseseeneees 20 10 Manually Adding Flags to the CO MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab 20 20 Deleting FLAG ccf seaces sis cdacek suscutssvelnces E E e E E 20 20 Auto Layout Configuration oes iire ei eers se nieka ra ieaS 20 21 Customizing the Default Auto Layout ss sssessssissesssesiesresrssiesrerresressesrerresress 20 21 Automatic Password Generation Flags 0 0 eeceessssesseseeesenseseseseessesesesenessseseees 20 23 G idelineS oiera ironin inr a AE cedvcta tol E ER E E E 20 23 Enabling the Automatic Generation of Passwords sssssssssesiesrsresrerreeeee 20 24 Collaboration Server Hardware Monitoring 0000000 21 1 Viewing the Status of the Hardware Components 00 0 0 cesses seeseseeeesessesseseneneneseeees 21 1 Hardware Monitor Pane Tool bar eee csesse sees c
282. ct a combination of endpoints to a conference For example if you frequently conduct conferences with the marketing department you can create a group called Marketing Team that contains the endpoints of all members of the marketing team Groups can contain participants and sub groups You can define up to ten levels in the Main group Managing Groups in the Address Book To manage the groups in the Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane right click the group you want to manage The Groups menu is displayed amp akxaann W mie Hierarchy Type Y Name il IP Address P Y Alias Name s1 Network a g Main ta a Row Vicki 172 22 184 11 H 323 cec A EP2 172 22 184 40 H 323 New Group EP1 172 22 186 23 H 323 New Participant EP3 172 22 186 23 H 323 Copy Grou Lit Maric EP4 172 22 186 24 H 323 Paste Group Paste Participant Paste Participant as Nev Rename Group ga Delete Group 2 Select one of the following actions Table 8 2 Groups Drop down Menu Actions Paste Group Places the copied group into the current group The group name of the copied group is defined with Copy at the end of the group name This action is only available after a Copy Group action has been implemented Paste Participant Places the copied participant into the current selected group This action is available after a Copy or Cut action was activated when selecting a single participant or
283. ct from specific servers This policy ensures that a regular user cannot impersonate an application user to gain access to the Collaboration Server in order to initiate an attack that would result in a Denial of Service DoS to the impersonated application The connection process for an application user connecting to the Collaboration Server is as follows 1 The application user sends a connection request including its TLS certificate to the Collaboration Server 2 The Collaboration Server searches its records to find the FQDN that is associated with the application user s name 3 If the FQDN in the received certificate matches that associated with application user and the password is correct the connection proceeds Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 14 Users Connections and Notes Guidelines Application users are only supported when TLS security is enabled and Request peer certificate is selected TLS security cannot be disabled until all application user accounts have been deleted from the system For Secure Communications an administrator must set up on the Collaboration Server system a machine account for the CMA DMA XMA system with which it interacts This machine account must include a fully qualified domain name FQDN for the CMA DMA XMA system Application user names are the same as regular user names Example the CMA application could have an application user name of CMA1 The FQDN can be used to associ
284. ctivity status In the Hardware Monitor pane the Lan List displays the Collaboration Server LAN ports together with their Status indication Slot Port Type Status 802 1x status 802 1xmethod 802 1x failure te R 0 LAN 1 Active Not Configure Off off 0 LAN 2 Inactive Not Configure Off off Table 16 17 RMX 1800 LAN LED Indications Status Deseription The LAN port cable is connected The LAN port cable is not connected Standby The LAN Redundancy option is enabled and this LAN port is the redundant and in standby mode In case of failure this port becomes active 16 29 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Multiple Network Services Media signaling and management networks can be logically separated on the Polycom RMX 1800 system to provide enhanced security This addresses the requirement in an organization that different groups of participants be supported on different networks For example some participants may be internal to the organization while others are external Maximum two IP network Services can be defined for a Polycom RMX 1800 system Each conference on the Collaboration Server can host participants from the different IP Network networks simultaneously The following figure shows the network topology with two different media and signaling networks and one Management network connected to the Polycom RMX 1800 system Management network 1 ee N Management HTTP HTTPS
285. d New Version installation Version Upgrade Restore Last Configuration etc When resetting the Collaboration Server from the Hardware Monitor sometimes SIP endpoints may remain connected although the conference ended 19 54 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities This procedure allows an administrator to update the MCU instance without requiring the administrator to reregister the product Updating the MCU instance requires the previously used activation key If you no longer have the activation key contact support before starting this procedure To update the MCU instance 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Software Management gt Backup Configuration The Backup Configuration dialog box opens Backup Directory Path E 2 Click the Browse button The Browse To File dialog box opens 3 Select the Backup Directory Path and then click Backup When the Collaboration Server backs up the current configuration if any changes occur immediately or during the request then additional changes are not registered After a few minutes the MCU turns on 4 Start the Collaboration Server Web Client application on the workstation a Inthe browser s address line enter the IP address of the Control Unit in the format http lt Control Unit IP Address gt b Click Enter Polycom Inc 19 55 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The Coll
286. d This field is relevant only during the connection stage and does not display faulty indications Fraction Loss Peak The ratio between the number of lost packets and the total number of transmitted packets since the last RTCP report Peak in parentheses indicates the highest ratio recorded since the channel was opened Number of Packets The number of received or transmitted packets since the channel has opened This field does not cause the display of the faulty indicator Jitter Peak Displays the network jitter the deviation in time between the packets as reported in the last RTCP report in milliseconds Peak in parentheses reflects the maximum network jitter since the channel was opened Latency Indicates the time it takes a packet to travel from one end to another in milliseconds derived from the RTCP report High latency value may indicate that there is a problem in the network or that the endpoint is sending an incorrect RTCP values Polycom Inc 12 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 10 Participant Properties Channel Status Parameters Continued e E Sync Status Channel The channel type Video or Content Source The name of the participant currently viewed by this participant Position The video layout position indicating the place of each participant as they appear in a conference Protocol Sync Loss Indicates whether the system was able to synchronize the bits
287. d MCU settings and modify them when required for example change the MCU name IP address or Secured mode Use this procedure to add the Username and Password to the properties of the MCU that was automatically added to the MCU list when installing the RMX Manager This enables automatic login when connecting the MCU to the RMX Manager You can modify the MCU properties when the MCU is connected or disconnected To view and or modify the MCU Properties 1 Use one of the following methods al a Select the MCU to disconnect and click the MCU Properties button Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application b Right click the MCU icon and then click MCU Properties Add MCU Disconnect MCU Remove MCU Stop Monitoring Export RMX Manager Configuration Import RMX Manager Configuration The MCU Properties dialog box opens 2 Define modify the required parameters For details see MCU Properties on page 11 3 Click OK Disconnecting an MCU An MCU can be disconnected from the RMX Manager without removing it from the MCUs list To disconnect an MCU 1 Use one of the following methods re a Select the MCU to disconnect and click the Disconnect MCU button b Right click the MCU icon and then click Disconnect MCU Add MCU Remove MCU Stop Monitoring Export RMX Manager Cc The MCU icon changes to disconnected and any ongoing conference running on that MCU will not be monitored in this RMX Manag
288. d Video Resource usage for each of the pre defined optimization settings for each Resolution H 264 Profile Video Quality setting Sharpness and Motion Table 3 2 Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Video Resource Usage Optimization Mode Seni 2048 1728 2560 2560 2048 1472 HD1080p60 7 ps 3584 3072 4096 4096 3584 1728 HD1080p30 rs High uproopen Defaut Hoh ao xia e a e a E Defaut Hoh 768 toe Ps Bass 1024 tome 88 petaut High 256 Ps Bass 26 oa oOo j oa petaut Hon e 3 ee Default jii e we pw we pew we The following table lists the resource capacity in various Polycom RMX 1800 configurations 3 Video 2 Video 1 Video Resource Type Video Resolution Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration Cards Cards Card Audio only 100 H 263 CIF p30 Polycom Inc 3 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 3 Video 2 Video 1 Video Resource Type Video Resolution Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration Cards Cards Card frases fm Resolution Configuration for CP Conferences The Resolution Configuration dialog box enables you to override the default video resolution decision matrix effectively creating your own decision matrix The minimum threshold line rates at which endpoints are connected at the various video resolutions can be optimized by adjusting the resolution sliders System resource usage is also affected by the Resolution Configuration se
289. d all conference participants must be encrypted No Encryption Encryption is disabled for the conference Encrypt when possible enables the negotiation between the MCU and the endpoints and let the MCU connect the participants according to their capabilities Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information where encryption is the preferred setting For connection guidelines see Mixing Encrypted and Non encrypted Endpoints in one Conference on page 4 28 For more information about recording encrypted conferences see Recording Link Encryption on page 13 7 Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level You can select the encryption mode for each of the defined participants Encryption options are affected by the settings of the flag in the system configuration Undefined participants are connected with the Participant Encryption option set to Auto inheriting the conference Entry Queue encryption setting To enable encryption at the participant level gt gt Inthe Participant Properties Advanced dialog box in the Encryption list select one of the following options Auto On or Off New Participant gt General Name gt Information Endpoint Website Call Bit Rate V Auto Automatic Kbits sec Resolution Auto be Video Protocol Auto x Encryption Cascade o oee Auto The participant inherits the conference Entry Queue encryption setting The participant co
290. d for disconnection When the value is set between 15 and 300 the feature is enabled Polycom Inc 12 27 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 12 28 Polycom Inc 13 Recording Conferences Polycom Inc Conferences running on the Collaboration Server can be recorded using a Polycom RSS Recording and Streaming Server RSS The recording system can be installed at the same site as the conferencing MCU or ata remote site Several MCU s can share the same recording system Recording conferences is enabled via a Recording Link which is a dial out connection from the conference to the recording system Recording can start automatically when the first participant connects to a conference or on request when the Collaboration Server user or conference chairperson initiates it Multiple Recording Links may be defined Each Recording Link defined on the Collaboration Server can be given a descriptive name and can be associated with one VRR saved on the Polycom RSS 4000 The following guidelines apply e A Recording Link that is being used by an ongoing conference cannot be deleted e A Recording Link that is assigned to a Profile cannot be deleted e While a Profile is being used in an ongoing conference it cannot have a different Recording Link assigned to it e Up to 100 Recording Links can be listed for selection in the Conference Profile e Multiple Recording Links are supported in Continuous Presence and Vi
291. d on the tab For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Conference Templates on page 3 9 Adding MCUs to the MCUs List 18 10 The RMX Manager can connect to one or several Collaboration Servers simultaneously If the site s configuration includes more than one MCU or when a new MCU is added to your configuration and you want to monitor and control all MCUs from within the same window you must add the MCU to the MCUs list The Collaboration Server must be installed and its IP addresses properly configured in the Management Network Service before defining its connection parameters in the RMX Manager application To add the MCU to the list of MCUs being managed define the MCU s connection parameters Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application To add a Collaboration Server unit r 1 Onthe MCUs toolbar click the Add MCU button to add an MCU to the MCU list The Add MCU dialog box opens 2 Define the following parameters MCU Name LOSS O MCU IP Port User Name i Password I Secure Mode Auto Reconnection V Remember Login T Auto Reconnection Interval Max Time Table 19 MCU Properties Enter the name of the MCU on the network Enter the IP address of the MCU s Control Unit The IP address must be identical to the one configured in the MCU during first entry Configuration For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting
292. da lt gt Connected 172 22 172 47 amp Single Participan 90496 al I gt You can view the properties of the Operator conference by double clicking the conference entry in the Conferences list or by right clicking the conference entry and selecting Conference Properties For more information see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Conference Level Monitoring on page 3 32 Requesting Help A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from his her touch tone telephone or the endpoint s DTMF input device The participant can request Individual Assistance default DTMF code 0 or Conference Assistance default DTMF code 00 Participants in Entry Queues who failed to enter the correct destination conference ID or the conference password will wait for operator assistance provided that an Operator conference is active When requiring or requesting operator assistance the Collaboration Server management application displays the following View Administration Setup Help RMX IP Address 172 22 191 95 Sig t ENCES OT Participants EP 7 L 0 T 2 l z _ n axe Ea a fo Rk OF Bae HF ie Display Name Status 1D Start Tir Name Status Role IP Addres Alias Na Ne E SUPPORT lt i Single Participant 37160 7 45 Pr sales 1 participant co sales dh Awaiting Operator Singl 43430 9 03 Pr ee Duke A Awaiting Individual assis
293. dar View and Reservations List Polycom Inc Chapter 11 Conference Templates If you create a recurring reservation all occurrences have the same ID The series number _0000n of each reservation is appended to its Display Name Example Conference Template name Sales Display Name for single scheduled occurrence Sales If 3 recurrences of the reservation are created Display Name for occurrence 1 Sales_00001 Sales 00002 Sales 00003 Display Name for occurrence 2 Display Name for occurrence 3 Deleting a Conference Template One or several Conference Templates can be deleted at a time To delete Conference Templates 1 2 In the Conference Templates list select the Template s you want to delete Click the Delete Conference Template RE button or Right click and select Delete Conference Template Conference Templates 6 F So qg Display4Mame Status o HIE SUPPORT Marc_12693 OK New Conference Template fot SUPPOR Delete Conference Template Ui Marc_20183 OK Start Conference from Template amp g Marc OK Schedule Reservation from Template g Duke_13626 OK Import Conference Templates Export Conference Templates Export Selected Conference Templates Template Properties A confirmation dialog box is displayed Click the OK button to delete the Conference Template s Exporting and Importing Conference Templates Conference Templates can be exported from
294. date Scheduling a conference reservation requires definition of conference parameters such as the date and time at which the conference is to start the participants and the duration of the conference Scheduled conferences Reservations can occur once or repeatedly and the recurrence pattern can vary The maximum number of reservations per Collaboration Server is 2000 Guidelines Resources Maximum number of participants voice and video in a CP reservation e Polycom RMX 1800 with 3 video accelerators Up to 100 HD 720p 30 or 50 HD 1080p 25 30 fps e Polycom RMX 1800 with 2 video accelerators Up to 70 HD 720p 30 or 35 HD 1080p 25 30 fps e Polycom RMX 1800 with 1 video accelerators Up to 100 HD 720p 35 or 17 HD 1080p 25 30 fps e System resources are calculated according to the Collaboration Server s license For more information see Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution on page 19 6 e System resource availability is partially checked when reservations are created Ifa conference duration extension request is received from an ongoing conference the request is rejected if it would cause a resource conflict If several reservations are scheduled to be activated at the same time and there are not enough resources for all participants to be connected e The conferences are activated e Participants are connected to all the ongoing conferences until all system resources are used up e If suffi
295. de Picture Skins Site Names text is displayed with a background Plain Skins Note When enabled Site Names text is displayed without a background eet Ci Note When enabled Site Names text is displayed with a background Exporting and Importing Conference Profiles Conference Profiles can be exported from one MCU and imported to multiple MCUs in your environment enabling you to copy the Conference Profiles definitions to other systems This can save configuration time and ensures that identical settings are used for conferences running on different MCUs This is especially important in environments using cascading conferences that are running on different MCUs Guidelines e Administrators can export and import Conference Profiles Operators are only allowed to export Conference Profiles e You can select a single multiple or all Conference Profiles to be exported e Conference Templates and their related Conference Profiles can be exported and imported simultaneously using the Conference Templates export and import function For more information see the Exporting and Importing Conference Templates section Exporting Conference Profiles Conference Profiles are exported to a single XML file that can be used to import the Conference Profiles on multiple MCUs Using the Export Conference Profile feature you can e Export all Conference Profiles from an MCU e Export selected Conference Profiles Expor
296. ded conferences all participants including the link participants except the lecturer are muted Only the lecturer is not muted 4 43 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Enabling the Mute Participants Except Lecturer Option The Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled or disabled default in the Conference Profile or in an ongoing conference in the Profile Properties Audio Settings tab Speaker Change Threshold Sec Auto z When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled and a conference has started the Mute by MCU icon is displayed in the Audio column in the Participants pane of each P that is muted yceE CC ee ere Name Status Role _ 1P Addr Alias N Networ Dialing Audio video _ Encrypt FECC 7 E Jeff1_1890201470 4 participants f amp Duk amp Con 10 25 H 323 Rex Var gt Con 10 25 H 323 x Jeff lt gt Con A 10 25 H323 Rex Bria lt gt Con 10 25 H 323 Lecturer 4 44 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Audio Algorithm Support Guidelines Polycom Inc The Collaboration Server supports the following audio algorithms G 711 G 722 G 722 1 G 722 1C G 729A Polycom Siren 7 in mono Siren14 Siren 22 in mono or stereo and SirenLPR Polycom s proprietary Siren 22 is supported for participants connecting with Polycom endpoints The Siren 22 audio algorithm provides CD quality audio for better clarity a
297. delines e The Recording Link connection type must be H 323 e The Recording Link uses the AES encryption format The RSS 4000 recorder must be set to support encryption For more information see the RSS 4000 User Manual e Encryption must be selected in the Conference Profile Recording Link Encryption Flag Setting Recording Links are treated as regular participants however if the ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF System Flag is set to YES a non encrypted Recording Link is to be allowed to connect to an encrypted conference Table 13 4 summarizes the connection possibilities for a Recording Link that is to be connected to a conference for each of the conference profile and Entry Queue encryption options Table 13 4 Connections by Recording Link and Conference Encryption Settings Recording Link Connection Status according to flag ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_ CELE LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF Profile Setting Connected encrypted if possible Connected only if encrypted otherwise disconnected Encrypt All otherwise connected non encrypted No Encryption Connected non encrypted Connected non encrypted Connected encrypted if possible Connected encrypted if possible Encrypt when possible otherwise connected non otherwise connected non encrypted encrypted Recording Link Settings The recording of encrypted conferences via an encrypted Recording Link is enabled in the Conference Profile by e Selectin
298. deo Switched conferences The number of Recording Links available for selection is determined by the value of the MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LINKS System Flag in system cfg Default value is 20 Recording Links e The recording link can be encrypted when recording from an encrypted conference to the RSS that is set to encryption For more details see Recording Link Encryption on page 13 7 13 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Creating Multiple Virtual Recording Rooms on the RSS If the environment includes a Polycom RSS 4000 Version 8 5 Recording and Streaming Server RSS and you want to associate Recording Links on the Collaboration Server with Virtual Recording Rooms VRR created and saved on the Polycom RSS 4000 Version 8 5 perform the following operations on the RSS 1 Modify the parameters of a recording Template to meet the recording requirements 2 Assign the modified recording Template to a VRR The recording and streaming server will assign a number to the VRR 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for each VRR to create additional VRRs For more information see the RSS 4000 User Guide Configuring the Collaboration Server to Enable Recording To make recording possible the following components you must be configured on the Collaboration Server e Recording Link defines the connection between the conference and the recording system e Recording enabled Conference IVR Service recording DTMF codes and mess
299. digetesavecaevdvanciavsdsevaet daieet and EEKE TEE EEE 18 13 Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a Template 0 0 0 18 14 Monitoring Conferences srein era E A EE NE ES 18 15 Grouping the Participants by MCU s sssssssssessssesssssresieriestssresrenresessnenrenrenrnsnenrenresee 18 15 Start Monitoring Stop Monitoring sssssessssessressesiesresresresresresrisrenrenresresnesnenresnens 18 16 Modifying the MCU Properties ssscsscsinaniimieiini iiin anii a 18 16 Disconnecting an MCU serrara r i or i ne e e E E T ANENE 18 17 Removing an MCU from the MCUs Pane sssssesssssssressesresresrisresrtsrenresrnsnesreeresnrsnenreen 18 17 Changing the RMX Manager Language cccsssssesssesssseessesesesssesseneneseeeeeseeseneneneseay 18 18 Import Export RMX Manager Configuration 0 0 cece ce ceseeeseeeeseeseeeseeenenene 18 18 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities 19 1 System and Participant Alerts 0 0 eee cs eseececseseseeeeeeseseesesssssesesesesssesesesessseseseeess 19 1 SY Stem Alerts cevscctovinsnivetevicvecsessvstecdecsevdsssctavessionctavessweterdvesunetseseveanevenstvenssrensrdentedieeedenes 19 1 Participant Alerts vsisssisccicesssscstssacssseveises s vsnevenssdvsnovensolessseendeivedsvensventissetsdesnissenssansessebes 19 3 RMX THe eaoaai a E E A E N EA 19 4 G ideliheS erreen ene i sscasestiecesseseves resis igesa d e aiai eS aenean SNE EES 19 4 Altering the clock sd sccscsecestesins s lose
300. e The generated slides are not deleted if the system is downgraded to a lower software version The first custom source file uploaded whatever its format is used to generate both high and low resolution custom slides High resolution source files uploaded after the first upload will be used to generate and replace high resolution custom slides Likewise low resolution source files uploaded after the first upload will be used to generate and replace low resolution custom slides If there are two custom source files in the folder one high resolution one low resolution and a new high resolution custom source file is uploaded new high resolution custom slides are created The existing low resolution custom slides are not deleted If there are two custom source files in the folder one high resolution one low resolution and a new low resolution custom source file is uploaded new low resolution custom slides are created The existing high resolution custom slides are not deleted 19 Define the following parameters Table 15 8 New Conference IVR Service Properties Video Services Parameters Video Welcome Slide Select the Low Resolution and High Resolution video slides to be displayed when participants connect to the conference To view any slide click the Preview Slide EJ button Notes e When using one of the default Polycom slides the slide will be displayed in the resolution defined in the profile i e CIF S
301. e StartUp e True file was created when the system was started Polycom Inc Auditor File V Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities e False file was created when previous audit event file reached a size of 2 MB or was more than 24 hours old File Retrieved e True file was previously retrieved e False file was never previously retrieved The order of the Auditor Files dialog box field header columns can be changed and the fields can be filtered to enable searching For more information see Auditor File Viewer on page 19 47 To retrieve files for storage on a workstation 1 Click Browse and select the folder on the workstation to receive the files and then click OK The folder name is displayed in the directory path field Select the file s to be retrieved by clicking their names in the file list or click Select All to retrieve all the files Windows multiple selection techniques can be used Click Retrieve Files The selected files are copied to the selected directory on the workstation To open the file in the Auditor File Viewer gt gt Double click the file iewer The Auditor File Viewer enables Auditors and Administrators to view the content of and perform detailed analysis on auditor event data in a selected Auditor Event File You can view an Auditor Event File directly from the Auditor Files list or by opening the file from the Auditor File V
302. e Exporting Selected Conference Templates You can export a single Conference Template or multiple Conference Templates to other MCUs in your environment To export selected Conference Templates 1 Inthe Conference Templates list select the templates you want to export 2 Right click the Conference Templates to be exported and then click Export Selected Conference Templates Onfrerence Templates 3 m ie 6 te BA Display Name Status f New Conference Template g 2222 Delete Conference Template Start Conference from Template Schedule Reservation from Template Import Conference Templates By onferencefemrptat Export Selected Conference Templates The Conference Templates Export dialog box is displayed Conference Templates por E Export Path l Templates file name _confTemplates xml _confProfiles xml I Export includes conference profiles Profiles file name Browse 3 In the Export Path field type the path name to the location where you want to save the exported file or click Browse to select the desired path 4 Optional Clear the Export includes conference profiles check box when you only want to export Conference Templates When this check box is cleared the Conference Templates Export dialog box is displayed without the Profiles file name field sws Templates file name _confTemplates xml 11 14 Conference Templates E
303. e 2 The Conference ID is requested by the system 3 The participant inputs a Conference ID via his her endpoint remote control using DTMF codes 4 The MCU checks whether a conference with the same Conference ID is running on the MCU If there is such a conference the participant is moved to that conference If there is no ongoing conference with that Conference ID the system creates a new conference based on the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue and connects this participant as the conference chairperson Polycom Inc D 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide IP Endpoint MCU ie z r x me Maple_Room 1D Conference ID 1001 MCU Prefix in IP Endpoint Gatekeeper 925 A 925DefaultEQ ta gt m 1007 centerence YES is ID O Entry P T EEEE V WV Queue Name DefaultEQ Numeric ID 1000 a AON E Profile Parameters IP Endpoint New Conference ID 1300 Figure D 1 Ad Hoc Conference Initiation without Authentication To enable this workflow the following components must be defined in the system e An Entry Queue IVR Service with the appropriate audio file requesting the Conference ID e An Ad Hoc enabled Entry Queue with an assigned Profile System Settings for Ad Hoc Conferencing Ad Hoc Settings Before a participant can initiate an Ad Hoc conference the following components must be defined e Profiles Defines the conference parameters for the conferences that will
304. e General Parameters on page 2 10 4 Click the Operator Conference check box 5 Click the Advanced tab Polycom Inc 10 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The New Profile Advanced dialog box opens gt General Display Name gt Advanced gt Video Quality Line Rate 384 Kbps x gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording i Encryption NoEneyption sw gt Site Names a I7 Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA gt Network Services r Before First Joins 10 i Minutes At the End 1 Z minutes Pe re I Auto Redialing I Exclusive Content Mode TIP Compatibility zj Enable FECC FW NAT Keep Alive Interval 0 seconds as cre 6 Define the Profile Advanced parameters For more details see Table 2 5 New AVC CP Profile Advanced Parameters Note that when Operator Conference is selected the Auto Terminate selection is automatically cleared and disabled and the Operator conference cannot automatically end unless it is terminated by the Collaboration Server User 7 Click the Video Quality tab The New Profile Video Quality dialog box opens 8 Define the Video Quality parameters For more details see Table 2 6 New AVC Profile Video Quality Parameters 9 Click the Video Settings tab The New Profile Video Settings dialog box opens 10 Define the video display mode and layout For more details see Table 2 7 New
305. e a Inthe User Properties dialog box select the Associate with a machine check box b Enter the FQDN of the server that hosts the application who s application user name is being added Example cmal polycom com 8 Click OK The User Properties dialog box closes and the new user is added to the system Deleting a User To delete a user you must have Administrator authorization The last remaining Administrator in the Users list cannot be deleted 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users RY button 2 Select the user and click the Delete 2 button or right click the user and then click Delete User The system displays a confirmation message 3 Inthe confirmation dialog box select Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation If you select Yes the user name and icon are removed from the system Changing a User s Password Users with Administrator authorization can change their own password and other users passwords Users with Operator authorization can change their own password Polycom Inc 14 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To change a user s password 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users FY option 2 Right click the user and click Change User Password The Change Password dialog box opens Delete User Change User Password Rename User Change Password Disable User User Properties Old Password OoOO O New Password
306. e SUPPORT_1238639244 Duration 1 Joo I Permanent Conference Infot Info2 Info3 PO Billing Info TO For a full description of the Information fields see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Information Tab on page 18 16 Click the OK button The New Conference Template is created and its name is added to the Conference Templates list Saving an Ongoing or AVC based CP Operator Conference as a Template Any ongoing or AVC based CP Operator Conference can be saved as a template To save an ongoing or AVC based CP Operator Conference as a template 1 Inthe Conferences List select the conference or Operator Conference to be saved as a Template 2 Click the Save Conference to Template HE button or Right click and select Save Conference to Template Conferences 2 Display N Status ID Start Tim Er 2a D m i manas Tone Mai 1 ae Delete Conference amp ma Save Conference to Template Start Recording Copy Conference Quick Search Conference Properties Polycom Inc Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the ongoing conference Display Name the Login name of the Collaboration Server User The Template is displayed with the Operator Conference icon Conference Templates O ee ARR Display Name Status EE SUPPORT_1 OK E Marc_12693 OK E Marce_20183 OK ho Marc OK E Duke_13626 O
307. e access point to the MCU For a detailed description of Ad Hoc Entry Queues see Entry Queues on page 7 1 e Start a Reservation Ifthe Start Time of the Reservation is past due the conference becomes ongoing immediately Ifthe Start Time of the Reservation is in the future the conference becomes ongoing at the specified time on the specified date For more information see Starting a Reservation on page 18 13 e Start any Conference Template saved in the Conference Templates list For more information see Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a Template on page 18 14 18 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane To start a conference from the Conference pane 1 Inthe MCUs pane select the MCU to run the conference 2 Inthe Conferences pane click the New Conference button The New Conference General dialog box opens View Administration Setup Help ee eee 3 gt OX Find Rew Conference Display Name IP Address GM 172 22 186 45 172 22 18 gt Participants Display Name SUPPORT_1676061673 B 172 22 190 40 172 2241 B Information Duration 1 3 00 I permanent Conference Profile AVC_ONLY z 172 22 190 40 Maximum Number of Participants Automatic The system displays the conference s default Name Duration and the default Profile whic
308. e Auto Layout you wish to modify must be added to the System Configuration file For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Table 20 4 Flags PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0 10 Flag Name PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_n n Number of Participants w Default Value Possible Values P cP_LAaYOUT_1X1 P cP_LavouT_1x2 P cP_LAaYOUT_1X1 EEC mE CP_LAYOUT_1x2VER CP_LAYOUT_2X2 H CP_LAYOUT_2X2 e Mi CP LAYOUT 1P5 ooo Mi cP_LAYOUT_1P5 boo ES AE cp_LayouT_1P7 al M CP_LAYOUT_1P7 kar M CP _LAYOUT_1P7 Eg BE CP_LAYOUT_2P8 ka aja CP_LAYOUT_1P12 ooon CP_LAYOUT_1X2HOR CP_LAYOUT_1X2VER CP_LAYOUT_2X1 CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR_UP CP_LAYOUT_1P2VER CP_LAYOUT_2X2 CP_LAYOUT_1P3HOR_UP CP_LAYOUT_1P3VER CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR_UP 20 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 20 22 Table 20 4 Flags PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0 10 Continued Flag Name PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_n n Number of Participants fn Default Value Possible Values CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER CP_LAYOUT_1P5 r O oooo CP_LAYOUT_1P7 CP_LAYOUT_1P8UP CP_LAYOUT_1P8CENT CP_LAYOUT_1P8HOR_UP CP_LAYOUT_3X3 CP_LAYOUT_2P8 CP_LAYOUT_1P12 CP_LAYOUT_4x4 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Example Table 20 5 illustrates the effect of modifying the PREDEFINED AUTO _LAYOUT_5 flagin conferences with fewer or more participants than the number of windows selected in the de
309. e C 16 Event fields for Event 15 H323 CALL SETUP ie Participant Name Participant Name The name of the participant name of the The name of the participant C 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 16 Event fields for Event 15 H323 CALL SETUP Continued beg ea Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Connect Initiator Indicates who initiated the connection as follows 0 MCU 1 Remote participant Any other number Unknown Min Rate The minimum line rate used by the participant The data in this field should be ignored For accurate rate information see CDR event 31 Max Rate The maximun line rate achieved by the participant The data in this field should be ignored For accurate rate information see CDR event 31 Source Party The IP address of the calling participant Address A string of up to 255 characters Destination Party The IP address of the called participant Address A string of up to 255 characters Endpoint Type The endpoint type as follows 0 Terminal 1 Gateway 2 MCU 3 Gatekeeper 4 Undefined Table C 17 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED e a Participant Name The name of the participant An empty field denotes an unidentified participant or a participant whose name is unspecified Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the
310. e Duplicate IP Or DHCP failure e VLAN failure Or Invalid status_Number Failed to configure the Users list in Linux The authentication process did not start Use the Restore to factory Defaults to recover Failed to connect to application server Possible reasons for the failure e Failed to connect to application server e Failed to establish connection to server url url Failed to connect to recording device The MCU could not connect to the defined recording device due to configuration error or network error Failed to connect to SIP registrar Cannot establish connection with SIP registrar Polycom Inc B 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table B 1_ Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description Failed to create Default Profile Possible reasons for the failure e Failed to validate the default Profile e Failed to add the default Profile Possible action e Restore the Collaboration Server configuration from the Backup e Use the Non Comprehensive Restore To Factory Defaults operation Failed to initialize system base mode Failed to initialize the file system Possible reasons for the failure e Failed to initialize the file system e Failed to initialize the file system and create the CDR index Reset the MCU Failed to open Users list file Restore the MCU configuration or re define the user Failed to register with DNS server Check the DNS configuration Failed to subscribe with the OCS t
311. e Enable Chairperson Messages check box and select the appropriate voice messages For more information see Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages on page 15 9 e When starting a new conference or defining a new Meeting Room define the Chairperson Password in the conference General dialog box For more information see Creating a New Meeting Room on page 6 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Entry Queue IVR Service An Entry Queue EQ is a routing lobby for conferences Participants are routed to the appropriate conference according to the conference ID they enter An Entry Queue IVR Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to enable the voice prompts and video slide guiding the participants through the connection process An Entry Queue IVR Service is a subset of an IVR Service You can create different Entry Queue Services for different languages and personalized voice messages The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default Entry Queue IVR Service and all its audio messages and video slide You can define new Entry Queue IVR Services or modify the default Entry Queue IVR Service Defining a New Entry Queue IVR Service To set up a new Entry Queue I VR Service 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click IVR Services gj 2 Inthe IVR Services list click the New Entry Queue IVR Service 3 but
312. e MAX_CP_RESOLUTION System Flag The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the system during First Time Power on and after a system upgrade The default flag value is HD1080 setting the Maximum CP Resolution value in the Resolution Configuration dialog box to 1080p60 All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of the system are made by selections in this pane The Maximum Resolution can further be limited per conference or per participant endpoint The Maximum Conference Resolution can be limited via the Profile Video Quality dialog box For more information see Defining New Profiles on page 2 9 The Maximum Resolution can further be limited per participant endpoint via the Participant Properties dialog box For more information see Managing the Address Book on page 8 7 Resolution Configuration Pane The user can select from 3 pre defined Resolution Configurations or select a manual Resolution Slider adjustment mode The pre defined settings can be accepted without modification or be used as the basis for manual fine tuning of resolution settings by the administrator The Manual radio button is automatically selected if any changes are made to the Resolution Sliders The Resolution Configurations are e Resource Quality Balanced default A balance between the optimized video quality and optimized resource usage Use this option e When the priority is to maintain a balance between resource usage and video qual
313. e No hese 1449 Default System 13 February 20121 13 February 2012 00 09 51 13 February 201217 168 00 00 Conferenc No festa 1449 Default System 23 March 2012 22 0 23 March 2012 20 00 00 15 23 March 2012 22 0 168 00 00 Conferenc No feds 1449 Default System 14 February 20121 14 February 2012 00 04 31 14 February 201217 168 00 00 Conferenc No E 1449 Default System 31 March 2012 16 0 31 March 201213 00 00 41 31 March 2012 16 0 168 00 00 Conferenc No Be 2599 Default System 08 May 2012 17 46 O08 May 2012 14 00 08 01 08 May 2012 17 46 168 00 00 Conferenc No amp 1449 Default System 09 February 20121 09 February 2012 05 24 55 09 February 201214 168 00 00 Conferenc No E 1449 Default System 07 March 2012 19 3 07 March 201217 00 05 11 07 March 2012 19 3 168 00 00 Conferenc No hes 2599 Default System 10 May 2012 14 02 10 May 2012 11 00 02 50 10 May 2012 14 02 168 00 00 Conferenc No E 2599 Default System 30 May 2012 19 51 30 May 2012 16 00 04 48 30 May 2012 19 51 168 00 00 Conferenc No aA 2599 Default System 08 May 2012 19 09 08 May 2012 16 00 00 41 08 May 2012 19 09 168 00 00 Conference No fae 1449 Default System 13 February 20121 13 February 2012 00 02 39 13 February 201213 168 00 00 Conferenc No fez 1449 Default System 22 March 2012 17 1 22 March 201215 00 13 05 22 March 2012 17 1 168 00 00 Conferenc No E 2599 Default System 01 May 2012 15 16 01 May 2012 12 00 00 58 01 May 2012 15 16 168 00 00 Conference No 3 2599 Default System 28 May 2012 14
314. e Participants list of the Entry Queues or ongoing conference where they are awaiting assistance The participants are automatically removed from the Participant Alerts list when moved to any conference including the Operator conference 12 14 Polycom Inc Participant Level Monitoring In addition to conference information you can view detailed information regarding the status and parameters of each listed participant using the Participant Properties dialog box Participant properties can be displayed for all participants currently connected to a conference and for defined participants that have been disconnected Displaying Participants Properties Viewing Permissions To display the participant Properties 1 Inthe Participant List pane double click the participant entry Alternatively right click a participant and then click Participant Properties Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring The Participant Properties Media Sources dialog box opens ie amp gt lie GO Bo we w fe Mare Properties Se Name Status Role IP Address Phone Alias e S P fo T a ee cae ater gt General 3 5 B 72 gt Advanced Name Merc Endpoint Website Q E Disconnect Participant F 3 o Delete Participant Bp Information Endpoint Type AVE x Q 5 gt Media Sources Tab O fe Xd Mute
315. e administrator or service personnel to connect to the Control Unit should the MCU become corrupted or inaccessible During First Time Power up the Management Network parameters can be set either via a USB memory stick or by using a cable to create a private network For more information see theRMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Installing the RMX 1800 on page 2 3 and Appendix G of this manual Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration Server on page F 1 Default IP Service Conferencing Service Media and signaling The Default IP Service media and signaling is used to configure and manage communications between the Collaboration Server and conferencing devices such as endpoints gatekeepers SIP servers etc The Default IP Service contains parameters for Signaling Host IP Address e External conferencing devices Calls from all external IP entities are made to the Signaling Host which initiates call set up Conferencing related definitions such as environment H 323 or SIP are also defined in this service Most of the Default IP Service is configured by the Fast Configuration Wizard which runs automatically should the following occur e First time power up e Deletion of the Default IP Service followed by a system reset For more information see the RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Procedure 1 First time Power up on page 2 8 Changes made to any of these parameters only take effect when the Co
316. e can be saved to a Conference Template An ongoing Operator conference can be started from a Conference Template e The Operator participant cannot be deleted from the Operator conference or from any other conference to which she he was moved to but it can be disconnected from the conference e When deleting or terminating the Operator conference the operator participant is automatically disconnected from the MCU even if participating in a conference other than the Operator conference e Moving participants from to an Operator conference follows the same guidelines as moving participants between conferences For move guidelines see Move Guidelines on page 10 15 e When a participant is moved from the Entry Queue to the Operator conference the option to move back to the source Home conference is disabled as the Entry Queue is not considered as a source conference e The conference chairperson cannot be moved to the Operator conference following the individual help request if the Auto Terminate When Chairperson Exits option is enabled to prevent the conference from automatically ending prematurely In such a case the assistance request is treated by the system as a conference assistance request and the operator can join the conference Defining the Components Enabling Operator Assistance To enable operator assistance for conferences the following conferencing entities must be adjusted or created e IVR Service Entry Queue and
317. e conference ID Number of User Input Enter the number of times the participant is able to respond to each Retries menu prompt before the participant is disconnected from the MCU Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for input from the Input Sec participant before it is considered as an input error DTMF Delimiter The interaction between the caller and the system is done via touch tone signals DTMF codes Enter the key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command sent by the participant or the conference chairperson Possible keys are the pound key or star 4 Click the Welcome tab The New Entry Queue IVR Service Welcome dialog box opens Global Welcome Entry Queue IVR Service Name Conference ID gt gt gt gt General gt Video Services gt Operator Assistance Enable Welcome Messages General Welcome Message l z g Add Message File If the files were not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server 5 Define the appropriate parameters This dialog box contains options that are identical to those in the Conference IVR Service Welcome Message dialog box For more information about these parameters see Table 15 4 on page 15 9 15 20 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services 6 Click the Conference ID tab
318. e date field or by clicking the arrow buttons or using the calendar The start time of all the reservations can be manually adjusted in one operation For more information see Adjusting the Start Times of all End Time Select the End Time of Resa uns Ompage aS the Reservation End Time settings are initially calculated as Start Time Duration End Time settings are recalculated if Start Time settings are changed Changes to End Time settings do not affect Start Time settings However the Duration of the Reservation is recalculated Recurring Select this option to set up a Recurring Reservation a series of Reservations Meeting to be repeated on a regular basis To create a recurring reservation you must define a time period and a recurrence pattern of how often the Reservation should occur Daily Weekly or Monthly Polycom Inc 9 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 9 2 New Reservation Schedule Tab Continued His ca Recurrence If Daily is selected the system automatically selects all the days of Pattern the week To de select days for example weekends clear their check boxes If Weekly is selected the system automatically selects the day of the week for the Reservation from the day selected in the Reservation Calendar You can also define the recurrence interval in weeks For example if you want the reservation to occur every second week enter 2 in the Recur every _ week s field To def
319. e first click the appropriate column and enter the required value Router IP Enter the IP address of the router Address Remote IP Enter the IP address of the entity to be reached Address outside the local network The Remote Type determines whether this entity is a specific component Host or a network e If Host is selected in the Remote Type field enter the IP address of the endpoint e If Network is selected in the Remote Type field enter of the segment of the other network Remote Enter the subnet mask of the remote network Subnet Mask Remote Type Select the type of router connection e Network defines a connection to a router segment in another network Host defines a direct connection to an endpoint found on another network Polycom Inc 16 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 6 Click the DNS tab Management Network Properties lt gt IP gt Routers Network Service Name Management Network gt DNS gt Security MCU Host Name PolycomMCU DNS or pai r Local Domain Name DNS Servers Addresses Primary Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary Server 0 0 0 0 Tertiary Server 0 0 0 0 7 Modify the following fields Table 16 3 Default Management Network Service DNS MCU Host Name Enter the name of the MCU on the network Default name is PolycomMCU DNS Select e Off if DNS servers are not used in the network e Specify to enter the IP addresses of the DNS
320. e hidden when viewing the properties of the conference Automatic generation of passwords both conference and chairperson passwords is disabled regardless of the settings of the flags e NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT _LEN e NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN For more information see Automatic Password Generation Flags on page 20 23 Default NO In H 239 enabled MIH Cascading when MGC is on level 1 setting this flag to YES will adjust the line rate of HD Video Switching conferences run on the Polycom RMX 1800 from 1920Kbps to 18432 100bits sec to match the actual rate of the IP Only HD Video Switching conference running on the MGC Note If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT is set to NO the IP_ENVIRONMENT_LINK flag must be set to YES Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued C LAN_REDUNDANCY MAX_TRACE_LEVEL MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LI NKS MINIMUM_FRAME_RATE_T HRESHOLD_FOR_SD MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT NUM_OF_INITIATE_HELLO _MESSAGE_IN_CALL_EST ABLISHMENT NUMBER_OF_REDIAL Polycom Inc Enables Local Area Network port redundancy Default NO Range YES NO Note If the flag value is set to YES and either of the LAN connections LAN1 or LAN2 experiences a problem an active alarm is raised stating that there is no LAN connection specifying both the card and port number This flag indicates the debugging level for system support
321. e information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Alias Type Select E 164 digits 0 9 Polycom Inc 5 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 Click the Advanced tab New Participant Video Bit Rate V Auto Automatic Kbits sec Resolution Video Protocol Broadcasting Volume Listening Volume Encryption 4dd to Address Book 5 Inthe Cascade field select Slave if the participant is defined in a conference running on a Slave MCU Master if the participant is defined in a conference running on the Master MCU 6 Click OK 5 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences To define a Dial in Participant as the cascade link This participant is added to the ongoing conference on the Slave MCU 1 Inthe Participants list click the New Participant button 4 The New Participant General dialog box opens gt General gt Advanced gt Information Name Cascade_Dial in Endpoint Website Dialing Direction Dial in zl Type H33 Yd IP Address 172 22 3 242 784858824006 E164 z Alias Name Type Website IP Address I Audio Only Extension Identifier String Add to Address Book 2 Define the following parameters Table 5 1 New Participant Dial in Cascade Link Fe Display Name Enter the participant s name This field may not be left blank Duplicate participant names comma and se
322. e of Network Service used for the participant s connection Polycom Inc 16 37 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Resource Report 16 38 The Resource Report displays the resource usage in total and per Network Service in a table format The Resources per Service table provides the actual information on resource usage and availability per network Service and provides an accurate snapshot of resources usage in the system You can select the graph to display select either Totals default or the Network Service Show Graph Totals X Resources Graph 2 ee Hoccupied a 80 Free a is Unit 50 HD 720P30 40 30 20 10 00 Video Voice Occunied 0 Occunied 0 Resources Type Occupied Free Total Voice 0 100 100 Video 0 100 100 Resources per Service Service Type Occupied Free Total IP Network Service 1 audio 0 100 100 100 100 IP Network Service 1 video 0 1P Network Service 2 audio 0 100 100 0 IP Network Service 2 video Port Gauge Indications The port Gauges displays the total resource usage for the Collaboration Server and not per Network Service Therefore it may not be an accurate representation of the availability of resources for conferencing as one Network Service may run out of available resources while another Network Service may have all of it resources available In such a case the port gauges may show that half of the system resources are
323. e of a conference In this mode endpoints that do not support the content capabilities set for the conference will receive the content over the video people channel Legacy content Content parameters are defined in the Conference Profiles Video Quality dialog box Polycom Inc 4 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide gt General Display Name gt Advanced eld j gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR 7 i i People Video Definition gt Recording gt Site Names Video Quality Sharpness x gt Message Overlay Maximum Resolution Auto z gt Network Services Content Video Definition Content Settings HiResGraphics Content Protocol H 264 HD o f ce 1 Inthe Content Video Definition section select the Content Settings and Protocol as follows Table 4 2 H 239 Content Options C ne Content Settings Select the transmission mode for the Content channel Graphics basic mode intended for normal graphics Hi res Graphics a higher bit rate intended for high resolution graphic display Live Video Content channel displays live video Customized Content Rate manual definition of the Conference Content Rate mainly for cascading conferences Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in a lower bit rate for the people channel For a detailed description of each of these op
324. e period or all the participants disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty for a predefined time period Conference never became ongoing due to a problem Unknown error Note If the conference was terminated by an MCU reset the status Ongoing Conference will be displayed File Retrieved Indicates if the conference record was downloaded using any of the file retrieval buttons in the CDR List pane or the API Yes when the conference record was retrieved to any file or using the API No when the conference record was not retrieved at all The File Retrieved field is updated whenever the record is downloaded Multi part CDR File display When the Multi Part CDR is configured on the Collaboration Server an additional column Part Index is added to the CDR list 6 ia Display Name 7 Part Index ViStart x Durati F Reser Reser x Status File R v 2 Confs Thursd 00 00 Thursd 02 00 Confer No Single Flle CDRs 2 Conf6 Thursd 00 00 Thursd 02 00 Confer No Conf7 Thursd 00 00 Thursd 02 00 Confer No undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No E undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No E undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No Multi Part CDR F undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No E undefConf Thursd 01 00 Thursd 01 00 Ongoin No The Par
325. e stamps of Audit Events are GMT Auditor Event History File Storage All audit events are saved to a buffer file on hard disk in real time and then written to a file on hard disk in XML in an uncompressed format 19 45 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 19 46 A new current auditor event file is created when e the system is started e the size of the current auditor event file exceeds 2 MB e the current auditor event file s age exceeds 24 hours Up to 1000 auditor event files are stored per Collaboration Server These files are retained for at least one year and require 1 05 GB of disk space The files are automatically deleted by the system oldest first when the system reaches the auditor event file limit of 1000 A System Alert is displayed with Can t store data displayed in its Description field if e the system cannot store 1000 files the Collaboration Server does not have available disk space to retain files for one year Audit Event Files are retained by the Collaboration Server for at least 1 year Any attempt to delete an audit event file that is less than one year old raises a System Alert with File was removed listed in the Description field Using the Restore Factory Defaults of the System Restore procedure erases Audit Files Retrieving Auditor Files You can open the Auditor file directly from the Auditor Files list or you can retrieve the files and save them to a local workstation To access Auditor Fi
326. e stored in the CDR file in UTF8 The application that reads the CDR file must support Unicode The field names and values in the formatted file will appear in the language being used for the The MCU sends the entire CDR file via API or HTTP and the Collaboration Server or external application does the processing and sorting The Collaboration Server ignores events that it does not recognize that is events written in a higher version that do not exist in the current version Therefore to enable compatibility between versions instead of adding new fields to existing events new fields are added as separate events so as not to affect the events from older versions This allows users with lower versions to retrieve CDR files that were created in higher versions Although the formatted files contain basically the same information in a few instances a single field in the unformatted file is converted to multiple lines in the formatted file and in other cases multiple fields in the unformatted file are combined into one line in the formatted file In addition to enable compatibility for applications that were written for the MGC family the unformatted file contains fields that were supported by the MGC family but are not supported by the Collaboration Server whereas these fields are omitted from the formatted file This appendix describes the fields and values in the unformatted CDR records Polycom Inc C 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Admini
327. e when the cascading link is established is enabled by setting the System Flag CASCADE_LINK_PLAY_TONE_ON_CONNECTION to YES Default value NO The tone volume is controlled by the same flag as the IVR messages and tones IVR_MESSAGE_ VOLUME Basic Cascading Polycom Inc In this topology a link is created between two conferences usually running on two different MCUs The MCUs are usually installed at different locations states countries to save long distance charges by connecting each participant to their local MCU while only the link between the two conferences is billed as long distance call e When linking two conferences using an IP cascading link The destination MCU can be indicated by e IP address e H 323 Alias Both MCUs must be located in the same network e One MCU can be used as a gateway 5 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Basic Cascading using IP Cascaded Link 5 4 In this topology both MCUs can be registered with the same gatekeeper or the IP addresses of both MCUs can be used for the cascading link Content can be sent across the Cascading Link Conference A Conference B ID 12345 RMX MCU A RMX MCU B MCU Prefix in GK 75 MCU Prefix in GK 76 Figure 5 2 Basic Cascading Topology IP Cascading Link For example MCU B is registered with the gatekeeper using 76 as the MCU prefix The connection between the two conferences is created when a dial out IP participant is defined add
328. ebsite Call Bit Rate IV Auto Automatic j Kbits sec Resolution Auto Video Protocol Auto Encryption Auto Cascade None IP Network Service IP Network Servicii Add to Address Book Reserving Video Resources for a Conference When defining a new ongoing conference or a conference reservation you can select the Network Service that will be used to reserve the required resources If no Network Service is selected the default Network Service is used Therefore make sure that not all conferences are reserving resources from the same Network Service otherwise you may run out of resources for that Network Service The IP Network Service is selected in the New Conference New Meeting Room New Reservation General dialog box New Meeting Room gt General gt Palipat Display Name LSG_598168971 gt Information Duration 14 Joo Permanent Conference Routing Name Profile Factory_Video_Profile x ID Conference Password Chairperson Password Maximum Number of Participants daus z IP Network Service Default Service z 4 m Monitoring Conferences The Conference Properties Network Services dialog box shows for each Network Service with which Network Service s SIP proxy the conference should be registered and if the dial in call will be connected to the conference In the Participant pane a new column Service Name was added indicating the nam
329. econd Half Duplex Note To maximize conferencing performance especially in high bit rate call environments a 1Gb connection is recommended 3 Click the OK button The Signaling Monitor is the Collaboration Server entity used for monitoring the status of external network entities such as the gatekeeper DNS SIP proxy and Outbound proxy and their interaction with the MCU To monitor signaling status 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click Signaling Monitor F 2 Inthe Signaling Monitor pane double click Default IP Service 16 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The IP Network Services Properties RMX CS IP tab opens gt RMX CS IP gt 4 323 Service Name IP Network Service gt SIP Servers gt ICEServers IPv4 IP Address 172 22 186 134 Default Router IP Address 172 22 184 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 248 0 The RMX CS IP tab displays the following fields Table 16 11 IP Network Services Properties RMX CS IP Le es Service Name The name assigned to the P Network Service by the Fast Configuration Wizard Note This field is displayed in all tabs IP Address Default The IP address of the default router The default Router IP router is used whenever the defined static routers Address are not able to route packets to their destination The default router is also used when host access is restricted to one default router Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the
330. econds Not Supported in RMX 1800 If the connection of multiple Serial Gateways to RTM LAN cards is required The V35_MULTIPLE_SERVICES System Flag must be set to YES The default value of the V35_MULTIPLE_SERVICES System Flag is NO enabling only one Serial Gateway to be supported per RTM LAN card 20 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued ee ee WRONG_NUMBER_DIAL_ The number of re dial attempts for a wrong destination RETRIES number or a wrong destination number time out Range 0 5 Default 3 A flag value of 0 means that no redials are attempted 4 Click OK to close the New Flag dialog box The new flag is added to the flags list 5 Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box For flag changes including deletion to take effect reset the MCU For more information see Resetting the Collaboration Server RMX on page 19 54 Manually Adding Flags to the CS MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab Using the procedure to manually add flags to the System Configuration the following flags can be manually added to the CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS tab Table 20 3 Manually Added Flags CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS Tab D H323_TIMERS_SE Enables or disables H 323 index timer according to standard or proprietary T_INDEX H 323 protocol Possible values 0 Default Sets the H 323 index timer to Polycom proprietary 1 Sets the H 323 index timer based on the H 323 S
331. ected Connect encrypted Endpoints with encryption capabilities Connect non encrypted endpoints without encryption capabilities Connection Status Flag YES Connected non encrypted Encryption is not declared by the Collaboration Server therefore the endpoint does not use encryption Connect only if encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are disconnected Connect only if encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are disconnected System Flag FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE 4 29 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 30 Connection to the Entry Queue An undefined participant connecting to an Entry Queue inherits the encryption characteristics of the Entry Queue as defined in the Entry Queue s profile Table 4 11 summarizes the connection possibilities for a participant that is to be moved from an Entry Queue to a destination conference for each of the conference Profile and Entry Queue encryption options Table 4 11 Connection of Undefined Participants to the Entry Queue Based on the Encryption Settings Eng cueus Undefined Participant Connection to the Entry Queue No Encryption Connected non encrypted Connected non encrypted Encryption is not declared by the Encryption is not declared by the Collaboration Server therefore Collaboration Server therefore endpoint does not use encryption endpoint does not use encryption Encrypt All Connected only i
332. ected GRQ due to unsupported feature Gatekeeper rejected GRQ Reason 18 Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Discovery Required Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to duplicate alias Check duplicate in aliases or in prefixes Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Generic Data Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid alias Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid call signaling address Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid endpoint ID Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid RAS address Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid revision Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid state Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid terminal alias Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to resource unavailability Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Security Denial Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to terminal type Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported Additive Registration Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported feature Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported QOS transport Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported transport Gatekeeper rejected RRQ Full registration required Gatekeeper rejected RRQ Reason 18 Gatekeeper Unregistration State e Registration succeeded Check the Gatekeeper configuration GUI System configuration file is invalid The XML format of the system configuration file that contains the user interface xml file settings is invalid Hard disk error Hard disk not responding Hot Backup Master Slave configuration Possible reasons conflict e When both t
333. ed Set Default Entry Queue Sets the selected Entry Queue IVR Service as Service default When creating a new Entry Queue the default Entry Queue IVR Service is automatically selected 15 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Table 15 1 IVR Toolbar buttons COC Add Supported Adds languages to the IVR module enabling you to Languages download voice prompts and messages for various languages Replace Change Music File To replace the currently loaded music file that is used to play background music the MCU is shipped with a default music file Adding Languages You can define different sets of audio prompts in different languages allowing the participants to hear the messages in their preferred language The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default language English and all the prompts and messages required for the default IVR Services conference and Entry Queues shipped with the system You can add languages to the list of languages for which different messages are downloaded to the MCU and IVR Services are created This step is required before the creation of additional IVR messages using languages that are different from English or if you want to download additional voice files to existing files in one operation and not during the IVR service definition To add a language 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane expand the Rarely Used list 2 Click the IVR Services gj entry 3 In the Conference
334. ed to conference A whose dial out number is the dial in number of the conference or Entry Queue running on MCU B Dialing Directly to a Conference Dial out IP participant in conference A dials out to the conference running on MCU B entering the number in the format MCU B Prefix IP address conference B ID For example if MCU B prefix is 76 and the conference ID is 12345 the dial number is 7612345 Dialing to an Entry Queue When dialing to an Entry Queue the dial out participant dials the MCU B prefix or IP address of MCU B and the Entry Queue ID in the format MCU B Prefix IP address EQ B ID For example if MCU B prefix is 76 and the Entry Queue ID is 22558 the dial number is 7622558 When the participant from conference A connects to the Entry Queue the system plays to all the participants in Conference A the IVR message requesting the participant to enter the destination conference ID At this point the Conference A organizer or any other participant in the conference can enter the required information for the IVR session using DTMF codes For example the meeting organizer enters the destination conference ID 12345 Any DTMF input from conference A is forwarded to the Entry Queue on MCU B to complete the IVR session and enable the move of the participant to the destination conference B Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences Once the DTMF codes are entered and forwarded to the Entry Queue on MCU B the IV
335. ed MCUs can reside on different networks System configuration and feature availability change according to the selected cascading topology Video Layout in Cascading conferences Polycom Inc Cascade links are treated as endpoints in CP conferences and are allocated resources according to Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary on page 3 9 Cascaded links in 1x1 video layout are in SD resolution When cascading two conferences the video layout displayed in the cascaded conference is determined by the selected layout in each of the two conferences Each of the two conferences will inherit the video layout of the other conference in one of their windows In order to avoid cluttering in the cascaded window it is advised to select appropriate video layouts in each conference before cascading them Without Cascade 5 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 2 During Cascading Video layout of Conf B in Video layout of Conf A in window of Conf A window of Conf B Figure 5 1 Video Layouts in Cascaded Conferences Guidelines To ensure that conferences can be cascaded and video can be viewed in all conferences the following guidelines are recommended The same version installed on all MCUs participating the cascading topology The same license installed on all MCUs participating the cascading topology Same Conference Parameters are defined in the Profile of the conferences partici
336. ed and the event written to the Auditor Event File An application user cannot be the last administrator in the system The last administrator must be regular user User names are not case sensitive Monitoring An application user and its connection is represented by a specific icon Active Directory When working with Active Directory CMA DMA and XMA cannot be registered within Active Directory as regular users CMA and DMA application users must be manually The only restriction is that TLS mode is enabled together with client certificate validation If the above configuration are set off it will not be possible to add machine accounts 14 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide When setting the TLS mode off the system should check the existence of a machine account and block this operation until all machine accounts are removed Connections The Collaboration Server enables you to list all connections that are currently logged into the MCU e g users servers or API users The MCU issues an ID number for each login The ID numbers are reset whenever the MCU is reset A maximum of 50 users can be concurrently logged in to the MCU Viewing the Connections List 14 8 To list the users who are currently connected to the MCU 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the Connections 33 button A list of connected users is displayed in the Connections pane onnections p l Login Name
337. ed in files in the SNMP MIBS sub directory of the Collaboration Server root directory The files should be loaded to the SNMP external system and compiled within that application Only then can the SNMP external application perform the required monitoring tasks The MULTI MEDIA_MIB_TC must be compiled before compiling the other MIBs Private MIBs e RMX MIB RMX MIB MIB Contains the statuses of the Collaboration Server Startup Normal and Major Contains all the Alarms of the Collaboration Server that are sent to the SNMP Manager 19 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 19 16 Support for MIB II Sections The following table details the MIB II sections that are supported Table 19 8 Supported MIB II Sections The Alarm MIB MIB used to send alarms When a trap is sent the Alarm MIB is used to send it H 341 MIB H 341 H 323 e Gives the address of the gatekeeper e Supports H 341 MIB of SNMP events of H 323 Standard MIBs This section describes the MIBs that are included with the Collaboration Server These MIBs define the various parameters that can be monitored and their acceptable values Table 19 9 Standard MIBs MULTI MEDIA MIB TC Defines a set of textual conventions used within the set of Multi Media MULTIMTC MIB MIB modules H 320ENTITY MIB This is a collection of common objects which can be used in an H 320 H320 ENT MIB terminal an H 320 MCU and an H 320 H 323 gateway These objec
338. ed will start with this option enabled All participants except for the designated lecturer are muted The Mute Participants Except Lecturer option can be enabled or disabled at any time after the start of the conference When enabled it allows all the conference participants to converse before the lecturer joins the conference or before they are muted When disabled it unmutes all the participants in the conference If the endpoint of the designated lecturer is muted when the lecturer connects to the conference the lecturer remains muted until the endpoint has been unmuted When you replace a lecturer the MCU automatically mutes the previous lecturer and unmutes the new lecturer When you disconnect a lecturer from the conference or the lecturer leaves the conference all participants remain muted but are able to view participants in regular video layout until the you disable the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option A participant can override the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option by activating the Mute All Except Me option using the appropriate DTMF code provided the participant has authorization for this operation in the IVR Services properties The lecturer audio is muted and the participant audio is unmuted You can reactivate the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option after a participant has previously activated the Mute All Except Me option The participant is muted and the lecturer if designated is unmuted In casca
339. eds to be interpreted and processed by the outbound proxy in the airport and not by the user s home domain In this case tel 411 is the correct choice Endpoint Website IP Enter the IP address of the endpoint s internal site to enable Address connection to it for management and configuration purposes This field is automatically completed the first time that the endpoint connects to the Collaboration Server If the field is blank it can be manually completed by the system administrator The field can be modified while the endpoint is connected Audio Only Select this check box to define the participant as a voice participant with no video capabilities 8 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Table 8 3 New Participant General Properties Continued eee oe ao Extension Identifier Dial out participants that connect to an external device such as String Cascaded Links or Recording Links may be required to enter a conference password or an identifying string to connect Enter the required string as follows p p string For example pp4566 p optional indicates a pause of one second before sending the DTMF string Enter several concatenated p s to increase the delay before sending the string The required delay depends on the configuration of the external device or conference IVR system String enter the required string using the digits 0 9 and the characters and The maximum number of characters that can
340. eh esa E E een detetesh NEA 19 15 MIB FHES riepen a eeo ietie aeae as e e aeaea ra E e a i 19 15 Private MIBS issih A AR EA E ENEN 19 15 Support for MIB Sections sversi pisses sass s oeoo aer a araras 19 16 The Alarm MIDB sisessscsisiccsssssiesessssssessecsestsssscsesedssencvesidsassevestiaduasvev asdeasaesteasesnianes 19 16 H341 MIB F341 323 aeae aiii ias aee e acinteh intra 19 16 Standatrd MIBS vscississesececctssevvecusts serberactoiecnaeastoasehad iaa 19 16 Unified MIB os cscssccitsiscitenstathettastaterstcnsestevunststacessedevcscctutsenegesaneaeyebevasosencytvesaues ctewes 19 17 Traps visssssssvsssdsddssvsssscaissussescsteesaseteibsstasssssacheveesadaleasevasdasasaevsasdestosssasgossbansessestaasseaestbseves 19 19 Status Trap uenn ia A AE dates dusecussccusssieveessususducscsbsvesuessnewesaeeas 19 20 RMX MIB entities that do not generate traps s ss esessesserissisrrereesierrsressresees 19 20 Defining the SNMP Parameters in the Collaboration Server ou eee 19 22 A dible Alarms iner e a iavebesaveneberusedh eet cnpvades eee areire 19 29 Using Audible Alarms nasan ien a E EAEEREN 19 29 Audible Alarm Permissions neniesa ene pea eesi 19 30 Stop Repeating Messages pircis vere t eioen E kaako ir Ea ianea SE aaa 19 30 Configuring the Audible Alarms ss sssssssssssissessissesresresieresnesneerieresnrsnrenreneenresrene 19 30 User Customization sist tctcicaciescscdese ata en an sa ed nasa EE EE aaa 19 30 Replacing the Audible Alarm
341. ely Used list 2 Click the IVR Services jg entry Polycom Inc 15 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The list pane displays the Conference IVR Services list and the total number of IVR services currently defined in the system IVR Toolbar IVR Services List Pane Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 RMX IP Address 172 21 125 89 S Language Service Type Display Name Status 1D 3 Entry Queu English Entry Queue IVR Service SUPPORT_1 56856 GWIVRSer English Conference IVR Service Conference English Conference IVR Service RMX Management R Users A Signaling Monitor W Hardware Monitor H Meeting Rooms E Reservations m Rarely Used fi IVR Services a IF Network Services RE Hecording Links amp donference Profiles Access to IVR Services list and customization IVR Services Toolbar The IVR Services toolbar provides quick access to the IVR Service definitions as follows Table 15 1 IVR Toolbar buttons New Conference IVR Service To create a new Conference IVR Service New Entry Queue IVR Service To create a new Entry Queue IVR Service Delete Service Deletes the selected IVR service s Set Default Conference IVR Sets the selected Conference IVR Service as default Service When creating a new conference Profile the default IVR Service is automatically selected for the Profile but can be modifi
342. emplate Template Opens the Scheduler dialog box enabling you to modify the fields required to create a single or recurring Reservation based on the template For more information see Reservations on page 9 1 The Conferences List toolbar includes the following button Table 2 Conferences List Toolbar Button BESSE gi Save Conference to Template Saves the selected ongoing conference as a Conference Template 11 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Creating a New Conference Template There are two methods to create a Conference Template e From scratch defining the conference parameters and participants e Saving an ongoing conference as Template Creating a new Conference Template from Scratch To create a new Conference Template 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Web Client click the Conference Templates tab 2 Click the New Conference Template 4 button The New Conference Template General dialog box opens 3 The fields of the New Template General dialog box are identical to those of the New Conference General dialog box For a full description of the fields see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide General Tab on page 3 14 4 Modify the fields of the General tab Templates can be assigned dial in numbers that are already assigned to other conferencing entities but when the template is used to start an ongoing conference or schedule a reservation it will not start if another ongoing c
343. empty for a predefined time period 5 The conference never started 6 The conference could not start due to a problem 8 An unknown error occurred 9 The conference was terminated by a participant using DTMF codes Table C 11 Event Fields for Event 7 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED ae Participant Name Participant Name The name of the participant name of the The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Call Disconnection The disconnection cause For more information about possible values see Cause Table C 39 Disconnection Cause Values on page C 33 Q931 Disconnect If the disconnection cause is No Network Connection or Participant Hang Cause Up then this field indicates the Q931 disconnect cause Table C 12 Event Fields for Event 2007 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED CONTINUE 1 e ee O Rx Synchronization The number of times that the general synchronization of the MCU was lost Loss Tx Synchronization The number of times that the general synchronization of the participant was Loss lost Rx Video The number of times that the synchronization of the MCU video unit was Synchronization lost Loss Tx Video The number of times that the synchronization of the participant video was Synchronization lost Loss Mux Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 0 C 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C
344. enabled Content Settings Indicates the Content channel resolution set for the conference Possible resolutions are Graphics default modePolycom RMX 1800 e Hi res Graphics requiring a higher bit rate e Live Video content channel is live video e Customized Content Rate resolution is manually defined Content Protocol Indicates the Content Protocol used for content sharing in Highest Common Content Sharing Mode For more information see Content Protocols on page 4 7 Content Resolution Indicates the Content Resolution and frame rate according to the selected Content Sharing Mode Highest common Content or Multiple Resolution Contents and the video protocol For more information see Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference on page 4 3 Send Content to This Content Sharing option is not supported with Polycom RMX Legacy Endpoints 1800 CP only 12 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring 5 Click the Video Settings tab to list the video parameters Viewing Permissions c Ss gt General 9 Display Name SORT 1446028347 a I gt Advanced isplay Name SUPPORT_14460383 g 2 7 S E S paS Duration ijo 4 Sje gt Video Settings Tab o o x gt Audio Settings Video gt Customized Polling Settings Y Y v gt Skins I Presentation Mode D gt IVR r gt Information I Lecturer View Swit
345. ence Password gt General gt Video Services gt DTMF Codes gt Operator Assistance Video Welcome Slide zi TIS Add Slide High Resolution CESE Delete Slide i Invite Participant Dial out protocols order DTMF forward duration sec 60 1 joff L Ld Ld be 2 off 3 Jof 4 off In addition to the low and high resolution slides included in the default slide set customized low and high resolution slides are supported The following guidelines apply Two customized slides can be loaded per IVR Service e A low resolution slide to be used with low resolution endpoints e A high resolution slide to be used with high resolution endpoints Table 15 7 summarizes the recommended input slide formats and the resulting slides that are generated Table 15 7 IVR Slide Input Output Formats HD1080p 16 9 HD1080p or HD720p HD720p 16 9 ACIF 4 3 or CIF 4 3 The source images for the high resolution slides must be in bmp or jpg format Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Ifthe uploaded slides are not of the exact SD or HD resolution an error message is displayed and the slides are automatically cropped or enlarged to the right size Ifaslide that is selected in an IVR Service is deleted a warning is displayed listing the IVR Services in which it is selected If deleted it will be replaced with a default Collaboration Server slid
346. encing it is used to define the new conference properties Enter a unique number identifying this conferencing entity for dial in Default string length is 4 digits If you do not manually assign the ID the MCU assigns one after the completion of the definition The ID String Length is defined by the flag NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN in the System Configuration Entry Queue Mode Select the mode for the Entry Queue Standard Lobby default When selected the Entry Queue is used as a routing lobby to access conferences Participants connect to a single dial lobby and are routed to their destination conference according to the Conference ID they enter Ad Hoc Select this option to enable the Ad Hoc option for this Entry Queue In this mode when the participant enters the target conference ID the system checks whether a conference with that ID is already running on the MCU If not the system automatically creates a new ongoing conference with that ID IVR Service Provider Only Not Supported with Polycom RMX 1800 External IVR Control Not Supported with Polycom RMX 1800 Entry Queue IVR The default Entry Queue IVR Service is selected If required select Service an alternate Entry Queue IVR Service which includes the required voice prompts to guide participants during their connection to the Entry Queue 4 Click OK The new Entry Queue is added to the Entry Queues list 7 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 7 Entry Queues Ad Hoc Confere
347. endpoint s alias H 323 ID alphanumeric ID E 164 digits 0 9 and Email ID email address format e g abc example com Participant Number digits 0 9 and Notes Although all types are supported the type of alias is dependent on the gatekeeper s capabilities The most commonly supported alias types are H 323 ID and E 164 This field is used to enter the Entry Queue ID target Conference ID and Conference Password when defining a cascaded link Use of the E 164 Number is dependent on the setting of the REMOVE_IP_IF_NUMBER_EXISTS System Flag For more information see Substituting E 164 Number in Dial String on page 8 13 SIP Address Type Select the format in which the SIP address is written SIP Only e SIP URI Uses the format of an E mail address typically containing a user name and a host name sip user host For example sip dan polycom com Note If the S P Address field contains an Pv6 address it must be surrounded by square brackets for example 1 TEL URI Used when the endpoint does not specify the domain that should interpret a telephone number that has been input by the user Rather each domain through which the request passes would be given that opportunity For example a user in an airport might log in and send requests through an outbound proxy in the airport If the users enters 411 this is the phone number for local directory assistance in the United States this number ne
348. endpoints that do not support other protocols 2 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide H 263 a video compression algorithm that provides a better video quality than H 261 This standard is not supported by all endpoints H 264 Base Profile a video compression standard that offers improved video quality especially at line rates lower than 384 Kbps H 264 High Profile allows higher quality video to be transmitted at lower line rates AVC Conferencing Parameters Basic Conferencing Parameters When defining a new video Profile you select the parameters that determine the video display on the participant s endpoint and the quality of the video When defining a new conference Profile the system uses default values for Continuous Presence CP standard conferencing Continuous Presence conferencing enables several participants to be viewed simultaneously and each connected endpoint uses its highest video audio and data capabilities up to the maximum line rate set for the conference The main parameters that define the quality of a video conference are 2 4 Line Bit Rate The transfer rate of video and audio streams The higher the line bit rate the better the video quality Audio Algorithm The audio compression algorithm determines the quality of the conference audio Video protocol video format frame rate annexes and interlaced video mode These parameters define the quality of the video images The Co
349. ent Line Rate is 66 of the Conference Line Rate If the Conference Line Rate is 64kbps or 96kbps the only available Conference Content Rate is 0 indicating that Content is not supported at these rates Select the required content rate When selecting a Conference Line Rate after selecting Customized Content Rate that is too low for the selected Customized Content Rate the following error message is displayed The selected Conference Line Rate is too low to support the selected Content Line Rate Click Cancel and reconfigure either of the Line Rates or click OK to return to the default Content Setting You can then modify either the Content Line Rate or the Conference Line Rate or select another Content Setting option Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information 3 If H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized is the selected Content Protocol a Content Resolution must be selected Content Video Definition Content Settings CustomizedContentRate I AS SIP content Multiple Content Resolutions Transcode to wa ca i Content Protocol H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized v Content Resolution 720 ps Send Content to Legacy Endpoints 7 S 1152 Kbps Table 4 9 lists the Cascade Resolutions available for the various Conference Content Rates Table 4 9 H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized Cascade Resolutions H 264 Cascade Optimized Conference Content Rate Available Resolutions
350. eo Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing 22426445655 50 446e6 cece nnee e a 3 1 Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing s ssssssessssreesisresresreerisresresrenresrrres 3 1 Video Display with CIF SD and HD Video Connections cccccseeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Polycom Inc I Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide H 264 High Profile Support in CP Conferences eee eeeeseeseeereneneeeeteeeeneees 3 2 G idelin s irasai iena Nek acie Baie Baa AA a eas 3 2 CP Conferencing with H203 ACIE sss ccrssusccesevesssdeonscssnsecstessensesbevectntssscesventeedbusneseseh tases 3 3 H269 4CIF Guidelines pieren ta r E EORR EATE 3 3 The CP Resolution Decision Matrix sasessnsirrisiesiiiissersesersiienesirireererinierinreriisii ii 3 3 H 264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison ccccsssssesesssseeseeeeseteseesenenesees 3 4 H 264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison Sharpness 00 3 5 H 264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison Motion ccseeseeees 3 7 Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary 3 9 Resolution Configuration for CP Conferences 00 0 cc ccc cecseseseesecseseenesesesesseeeenenene 3 10 Accessing the Resolution Configuration Dialog BOX 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Modifying the Resolution Configuration cccceeessseseseseeeseseseseseneseseseseseseneees 3 11 Resolution Configuration Basic cesses escsceesesceeseseececenenaesne
351. er they are removed from the Conferences pane This MCU can still be monitored and controlled by other users Removing an MCU from the MCUs Pane An MCU can be removed from the RMX Manager This function should be used if the MCU hardware was disconnected and removed from the network To Remove an MCU from the list 1 Use one of the following methods a Select the MCU to disconnect and click the Delete x button b Right click the MCU icon and then click Remove MCU Add MCU Disconnect MCU Remove MCU Stop Monitoring Export RMX Manager Cc A confirmation message is displayed Polycom Inc 18 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation The MCU icon is removed from the MCUs pane Changing the RMX Manager Language You can change the language of the RMX Manager menus and dialog boxes Only one language can be selected at a time and the RMX Manager application must be restarted after changing the display language To select a language 1 Onthe RMX Manager menu click Setup gt Customize Display Settings gt Multilingual Settings The Multilingual Settings dialog box opens displaying the current language selection Select the languages to be available in the Login screen Name English French German Italian Russian Norwegian Spanish South American Portuguese Brazilian Japanese Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean Turki
352. erence participants in the Participants pane 2 Right click the participant whose video you want to preview and then click one of the following options fe Polycom Inc 922 MMe Conn OK iTia Disconnect Participant Delete Participant Mute Audio Suspend Video Block Audio Change to Regular Participant Change To Content Token Owner Add Participant to Address Book Connect to Website View Participant Sent Video View Participant Received Video Request Intra for Received Video Request Intra for Sent Video Request Intra for Received Sent Video Copy Participant Cut Participant Participant Properties 4 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide View Participant Sent Video to display the video sent from the participant to the conference View Participant Received Video to display the video sent from the conference to the participant The Video Preview window opens Sj http 172 22 189 134 Site Monitoring Microsoft Internet Explorer Ei Done PTE TT O internet 4 If the video card installed in the PC does not support DirectDraw Acceleration a black window may be viewed Auto Scan and Customized Polling in Video Layout Auto Scan enables a user to define a single cell in the conference layout to cycle the display of participants that are not in the conference layout Customized Polling allows the cyclic display to be set to a predefined order for a predefined
353. erencing modes conferencing parameters by assigning different Profiles and prompts in different languages by assigning different Entry Queue IVR Services For more information see IVR Services List on page 15 1 The Entry Queue can also be used for Ad Hoc conferencing If the Ad Hoc option is enabled for the Entry Queue when the participant enters the target conference ID the system checks whether a conference with that ID is already running on the MCU If not the system automatically creates a new ongoing conference with that ID For more information about Ad Hoc conferencing see Ad Hoc Conferencing on page 7 9 An Entry Queue can be designated as Transit Entry Queue to which calls with dial strings containing incomplete or incorrect conference routing information are transferred For more information see Transit Entry Queue on page 7 5 Polycom Inc 7 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Default Entry Queue properties The system is shipped with a default Entry Queue whose properties are Table 7 1 Default Entry Queue Properties Display Name DefaultEQ The user can change the name if required Routing Name DefaultEQ The default Routing Name cannot be changed Factory_Video_Profile Profile Bit Rate is set to 384 Kbps Entry Queue Service Entry Queue IVR Service This is default Entry Queue IVR Service shipped with the system and includes default voice messages and prompts in English Defining a N
354. erencing modes and video features require additional settings such as system flag settings conference parameters and other settings In depth explanations of these additional settings are described in the following sections e Content Sharing on page 4 1 e Video Preview on page 4 21 e Auto Scan and Customized Polling in Video Layout on page 4 24 e Media Encryption on page 4 27 e Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA on page 4 35 e Lecture Mode on page 4 38 e JAudio Algorithm Support on page 4 45 e Permanent Conference on page 4 48 Content Sharing Content such as graphics presentations documents or live video can be shared with conference participants using the H 239 H 323 or BFCP SIP protocol which is the standard protocols for content sharing H 239 Protocol The H 239 protocol allows compliant endpoints to transmit and receive two simultaneous video streams e People video stream video is displayed in Continuous Presence conferences e Content video stream Video Switching mode for content sharing By default all conferences Entry Queues and Meeting Rooms launched on the Collaboration Server have H 239 capabilities To view Content endpoints must use the same Bit Rate Protocol and Resolution Endpoints may not send Content while connecting to an Entry Queue Endpoints without H 239 capability can connect to the video conference without Content Cascade links declare H 239 cap
355. eressesresiesresrssresresreseenrenrenresress 5 5 Stat Cascading Topology sissscscsssscversesecsensertseceivecsinestevecsspsstunecavesnete N R E Ei 5 5 Master Slave Cascading sisssvesssissiscesssiseaseenssisniovenasian cisenssiansienessiensisag sdeansisos sadanivenssso 5 6 Monitoring Star Cascaded Conferences 0 0 eee ceeseseeeecesseseeeecesensseeeeeeeneseees 5 13 Cascading Conferences H 239 enabled MIH Topology 0 cccccsessssesseesssesesesesenesesees 5 14 MIF Cascading Levels ire EE E E E ETAN 5 14 Cascading Topologies esaesa e E EEE EA 5 15 MIH Cascading Guidelines in CP Licensing s ssessesssesessisresrierierrsrrerterenrese 5 15 Video Layout in Cascading CP Conferences ssssssessessssissesrsesieresrrssresrerrere 5 17 Meeting ROOMS lt cccs sscan iwani aeiee e a E aa a oia 6 1 Meeting Rooms List sicc2s wise unt dorian annie E EE ISEE 6 1 Meeting Room Toolbar amp Right click Menu eee ceesesseseeeesesesescseseneseseseneanaeees 6 3 Creating a New Meeting ROOM cccccccscssesssesesereensescsesesenesescscsesesenescscseseseececssseseseeseeseas 6 4 Entry Queues Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories 7 1 Entry QUEUES srecne e re E e EE E OE E E EEE EREE 7 1 Defining a New Entry Queue sssrinin iraani 7 2 Lasting Entry Queues sibs ccscecseccese ccksdeceecacvstecstasseuseseseseccsscecacenseshsdedhugesceedeursesseieeccesbuseses 7 5 Modifying the EO Properties sieners Ere E E E EE 7 5 Transit Entity Queue c cs
356. errors that occurred during system startup Unit indicates problems with a unit Indicates the severity of the problem or the type of event There are three fault level indicators Major Error H System Message a Startup Event Indicates the problem as indicated by the error category Lists the type of functional process involved Description When applicable displays a more detailed explanation of the cause of the problem For more information about the Active Alarms see Appendix B Active Alarms on page B 1 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities 2 Click one of the following two buttons to view its report in the System Alerts pane Active Alarms default this is the default reports list that is displayed when clicking the System Alerts indication bar It displays the current system errors and is a quick indicator of the MCU status Faults Full List A list of all system faults Note Viewed when logged in as a special support user Faults List a list of faults that occurred previously whether they were solved or not for support or debugging purposes 3 To save the Active Alarms Faults Full List or Faults report toa text file click the Save to Text ka button toan XML file click the Save to XML button 4 The Save to XML button is only available when logged in as a special support user The Save dialog window opens
357. erson password Password An empty field means that no chairperson password was assigned to the conference The contents of the conference information fields These fields enable users to enter general information for the conference such as the company name and the contact person s name and telephone number The maximum length of each field is 80 characters Billing Info The billing code Table C 6 Event Fields for Event 6001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5 a ee Encryption Indicates the conference encryption setting as follows 0 The conference is not encrypted 1 The conference is encrypted Table C 7 Event Fields for Event 11001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 10 C Display Name Display Name The The Display Name of the conference The Display Name of the conference of the conference Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 8 Event Fields for Event 2 CONFERENCE END ic eee Conference End Indicates the reason for the termination of the conference as follows Cause 1 The conference is an ongoing conference or the conference was terminated by an MCU reset 2 The conference was terminated by a user 3 The conference ended at the scheduled end time 4 The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the conference for a predefined time period or all the participants disconnected from the conference and the conference was
358. erson via DTMF codes or from the Collaboration Server Web Client or when the operator starts recording from the Collaboration Server Web Client Table C 24 Event Fields for Event 28 SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS Fs am Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The participant s identification number as assigned by the system Called Participant The called participant ID ID Asserted Identity The identity of the user sending a SIP message as it was verified by authentication Charging Vector A collection of charging information Preferred Identity The identity the user sending the SIP message wishes to be used for the P Asserted Header field that the trusted element will insert Table C 25 Event Fields for Event 30 GATEKEEPER INFORMATION w e o Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Gatekeeper Caller The caller ID in the gatekeeper records This value makes it possible to ID match the CDR in the gatekeeper and in the MCU Table C 26 Event fields for Event 31 PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE r ee Participant Name The participant name Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 26 Event fields for Event 31 PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE Continued e Participant ID Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU identification n
359. erver For example if you enter 10 the system will wait 10 seconds between the connection attempts Max Time Enter the maximum amount of time in seconds that the Collaboration Server is allowed to try to reconnect If the Collaboration Server reconnects before the allotted time frame the count down timer is halted For example if you enter 100 the system will stop trying to reconnect if it has failed to do so within 100 seconds 3 Click OK The MCU is added to the MCUs pane 4 If required repeat steps 1 3 to define additional Collaboration Server units The MCUs pane contains the list of all defined MCUs COS Seax M _j A3e5 Display Name 1P Address Status Product T Monitored Voice Video 172 22 186 45 172 22 186 45 Disconnect RMX 40 V 172 22 190 40 172 22 190 40 Normal RMX 20 V 0 96 0 66 Starting a Conference There are several ways to start a conference e Clicking the New Conference button in the Conferences pane For more information see Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane on page 13 e Dialing in to a Meeting Room defined on any of the MCUs A Meeting Room is a conference that is saved on the MCU It remains in passive mode until it is activated by the first participant or the meeting organizer dialing in For more information about Meeting Rooms see Meeting Rooms on page 6 1 e Dialing in to an Ad Hoc Entry Queue defined on one of the MCUs which is used as th
360. es do not select the Enable Password Messages option When both Conference Password and Chairperson Password are enabled and defined the system 12 Select the MCU behavior for password request for Dial in and Dial out participant connections Select the required system behavior as follows Request password The system requests the participant to enter the conference password None The participant is moved to the conference without any password request Request Digit The system requests the participant to enter any key This option is used mainly for dial out participants and to prevent an answering machine from entering the conference 13 Select the various audio messages that will be played in each case Table 15 5 New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Password Parameters a Request Password Select the audio file that prompts the participant for the conference password Retry Password Select the audio file that requests the participant to enter the conference password again when failing to enter the correct password 15 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Table 15 5 New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Password Parameters when the Request Digit option is selected Request Digit Select the audio file that prompts the participant to press any key 14 Click the General tab The New Conference IVR Service General dialog box opens gt Global gt Welc
361. es D 2 Ad Hoc Settings rosiner siii riea ee KE E e S E D 2 Appendix E Participant Properties Advanced Channel IRIOFINGUON fainted doo ceweendacs chee ee dee nce ERE E 1 Appendix F Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration BEIVE saccscisetnekandeteseteccdeeetdeeade eres EERE F 1 Management Network Primary cccecssssesesesescsesesescscsesesesesceeanseececssenanesesessnanetessneanes F 1 Configuring the Workstation iesenii eeii F 1 Connecting to the Management Network ss s sssssssssssserissiesrsssssiesrerisresnesrenreenesnrsnrest F 3 Appendix G SIP RFC Support 0000 cece eee G 1 Polycom Inc Polycom RMX 1800 Overview About the Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The product names Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 and RMX 1800 are used interchangeably throughout this Guide The Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide provides instructions for configuring deploying and administering Polycom Multipoint Control Units MCUs for video conferencing This guide will help you understand the Polycom video conferencing components and provides descriptions of all available conferencing features This guide will help you perform the following tasks Customize the Collaboration Server conferencing entities such as conference Profiles IVR Services Meeting Rooms Entry Queues etc to your organization s needs Define Collaboration Server Users Advanced conference Manageme
362. es and are allocated resources according to Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary on page 3 9 Cascaded links in 1x1 video layout are in SD resolution When cascading two conferences the video layout displayed in the cascaded conference is determined by the selected layout in each of the two conferences Each of the two conferences will inherit the video layout of the other conference in one of their windows 5 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 18 In order to avoid cluttering in the cascaded window it is advised to select appropriate video layouts in each conference before cascading them Without Cascade During Cascading IL Video layout of Conf B in Video layout of Conf A in window of Conf A window of Conf B Figure 5 7 Video Layouts in Cascaded Conferences Guidelines To ensure that conferences can be cascaded and video can be viewed in all conferences the following guidelines are recommended The same version installed on all MCUs participating the cascading topology The same license installed on all MCUs participating the cascading topology Same Conference Parameters are defined in the Profile of the conferences participating in the cascading topology Conference line rates should be identical Content rate should be identical Same encryption settings DTMF codes should be defined with the same numeric codes in the IVR services assigned to the
363. es are listed in the Conference Profiles list pane To list Conference Profiles 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane expand the Rarely Used list 2 Click the Conference Profiles button The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane The number of the currently defined Conference Profiles appears in the title of the list pane The following Conference Profile properties are displayed in the List pane Table 2 2 Conference Profiles Pane Columns pou The name of the Conference Profile Layout Displays either Auto Layout or an icon of the layout selected for the profile For information about video layouts see Table 2 9 Video Layout Options on page 2 19 Line Rate The maximum bit rate in kbps at which endpoints can connect to the conference Routing Name Displays the Routing Name defined by the user or automatically generated by the system Encryption Displays if media encryption is enabled for the Profile For more information see Media Encryption on page 4 27 The Profile toolbar provides quick access to the Profile functions Profile Toolbar Table 2 3 Profile Tool bar buttons Button Name Description New Profile To create a new Profile Delete Profile To delete a Profile click the Profile name and then click this button Import Profile To import Conference Profiles from another MCU in your environment Export Profile To export Conference Profiles to a single XML file that can be
364. es that were previously uploaded to the MCU memory 11 Click the Operator Assistance tab The Operator Assistance dialog box opens gt Global gt Welcome Entry Queue IVR Service Name EQ Assistance gt Conference ID gt Video Services gt Operator Assistance M Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message ha Add Message File d 12 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant requires or requests help during the connection process 13 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field select the audio message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for operator s assistance If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server 14 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue IVR Service definition The new Entry Queue IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list Defining a Conference Profile for an Operator Conference 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click Conference Profiles 10 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move 2 Inthe Conference Profiles pane click the New Profile button The New Profile General dialog box opens 3 Define the Profile name and if required the Profile general parameters For more details see New AVC CP Profil
365. eseseeseeeeenes 8 6 Managing the Address BOOK ccscsssssstesesssssnsesesvesesturecvevssastvsbevevanessvevesassiesesossuesenossionesenons 8 7 GUideliNES oozes csc sescdescssestasvotsist stand excuse cen eenean EnEn E Eo EEE E EE E SaR a 8 7 Adding a Participant to the Address Book ssssssssssssssessesssssiesissessresiesresrrsnesnsnreeresresses 8 7 Adding a New participant to the Address Book Directly oer 8 8 Substituting E 164 Number in Dial String cceeeeseseeeeseeeeeeeesessseeneeeeseeeess 8 13 Adding a Participant from an Ongoing Conference to the Address Book 8 14 iv Polycom Inc Table of Contents Modifying Participants in the Address Book eee esssssseseeeneseseseseseseseseees 8 15 Deleting Participants from the Address Book cceeseeescssssseeeeeetenseseeeeeneseneees 8 15 Copying or Moving a Participant 0 0 ccsssesseseececneeessceeesesseesscessessseseesenseenees 8 16 Searching the Address BOOk sicsisiscadsvessiscesssescsssevssenstbassousestoaves enasinaaives obeadtenssdenndeseess 8 17 Filtering the Address Book a iiss si csscssesssssenesctsscsonsvsntussuscechenssanosecevosaassengeonssosenervepeesenes 8 17 Filtering Address Book Data Using a Predefined Pattern csccsseseseees 8 18 Filtering Address Book Data Using a Custom Pattern 0 cee eceeeeeeeeees 8 19 Clearing the Filter sugiere eena e eee E Raa eiae ENE NES 8 20 Obtaining the Display Name from the Address Book sssssssssssssss
366. eseseesensseseseseseneneseseees 21 2 Viewing the Properties of RMX 1800 Hardware Components cceeeseeeeseneeeeees 21 2 Resetting the RMX 1800 DSP cards 00 ecceeeseeeseseneseeseesesesesesesesessseseseseseseneseeeees 21 7 Temperature Thresholds csi seni ei tintin in EE 21 8 Appendix A Disconnection Causes 00 cece eens A 1 IP Disconnection Causes 222208 dave die re neee ee aes dpa tonnes A 1 Appendix B Active Alarms 000200 cece eee eee B 1 Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File C 1 The Conference Summary Record oo eee neris norit irei Tra ES C 2 Event RECOrdS peenise se aE E EE E EEEE EE ER C 3 Standard Event Record Fields s csisccsissssisssevescctosenvessssotossensesosvsveeessonsss sntoioaitaeesbensisigness C 3 Event Types sendun a E E S E ET ETE EE Eai AEE EE C 4 Eve t Specific Fields aruer ioii n E E E AENEON C 10 Disconnection Cause V al les sv sccsis svaceesssisvossentunsesoversscsesesedsestvessuivestsenese tocsuesedonesenuneye toasts C 33 Polycom Inc xi Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide xii MGC Manager Events that are not Supported by the Collaboration Server C 36 Appendix D Ad Hoc Conferencing 222000 eee eeee D 1 Ad Hoc Conferencing sicsisiess siescsssscesescoussonsedeonssenseoeoe cours spsbsctenycaesedtondconsednstothapncners E D 1 System Settings for Ad Hoc Conferencing oo eeseseeeecssesseeeesesssseseseseeesseeseeseseee
367. esresresresresrisresenreeresresnes 16 23 Business to Business Connections ccceccccsseecscsesesessesescsssseesecsesesssessesssseeseeseees 16 24 FW Firewall NAT Keep Alive ccc ccsscscssenssscvessesssetveseraunscievestenscvevtensancseveszessenesee 16 25 System Configuration in SBC environments ccc ceeeeseseeeseeeseeeee 16 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Network Port Usage oo ccccccesssesesseteseseeeeseseeseseneseseeseneeeseesenenenes 16 26 LAN Redundancy sisisseesciscisestssenssssstscenkiosossdes sovsetevoentstnaitessisevbvionssasevipnasioiuteenastanaveentscuaieas 16 28 REQUITCMECMIS S se cicisssccesesesdeiceepestuaselarseiasteiquiutestiacescasus E EEEE E ER 16 28 Media Signaling and Management Redundancy ss sssessesisresresrserieresrsreesrereeses 16 28 Hardware Monitor Indications ccc ceeesssseeeeeeesesseeeeeessseeeesssseseeeseeneneees 16 28 Multiple Network Services oo cceeecsesseecscsesessesesescsseeeeceesescsseaeecsenseececaesenseaeeseenaeeeesaeaes 16 30 GUI SIIMES sosirii iirin i a ATENEA E EEE 16 30 Resource Allocation and Capacity s ss sssssssssesieereerisrisresrerisrrseeneerrsrrresnrerees 16 31 Using Multiple Network Service s sssessesisesssessesiesresrrsstsressrerisrrsntentesrenienrntesrerrenes 16 31 Enabling Multiple Network Service cccccssssesssesseseseeeeneseeeeseneseseseseesseeeenenss 16 31 Defining New IP Network Service oo ccc cece eens ceeseeeenetesesseeneeeseneees 16 32 Setting a Networ
368. eters between the time the Reservation or Meeting Room was created and the time that it is activated and becomes an ongoing conference will be applied to the conference If the user wants to save the current parameters a different Profile with these parameters must be assigned or a different Profile with the new parameters must be created When a Conference Profile is assigned to a Meeting Room or a Reservation the Profile s 4 Click the Schedule tab gt General gt Particinants Display Name SUPPORT252032045 gt Information Start Time 13 Jan 11 EZ 1 H o H End Time 13 Feb 11 I Recurring Meeting currence Patterr Pattern Recwrevery f week s on I Sunday I Monday TF Tuesday M Wednesday I Thursday FF Friday PF Saturday End after occurrences End by Date 13 Jan 11 z KI February 2011 gt 6 7 kp 14 Calendar Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations 5 Adjust the new reservation s schedule by modifying the fields as described in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 New Reservation Schedule Tab ce ase ier td Start Time Select the Start Time The Start End Times of the Reservation are of the Reservation initially taken from the time slot selected in the Reservation Calendar The Start End Times can be adjusted by typing in the hours and minutes fields or by clicking the arrow buttons The Start End dates can be adjusted by typing in th
369. etwork or Alternate Management Network are listed in Table F 1 For more information about connecting to the Alternate Management Network see Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration Server on page F 1 Table F 1 Reserved IP Addresses IP Address Network Entity Management Alternate Network Network Factory Default Control Unit IP Address 192 168 1 254 169 254 192 10 Control Unit Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 240 0 Default Router IP Address 192 168 1 1 169 254 192 1 7 Click the OK button Connecting to the Management Network To connect directly to the Collaboration Server 1 Connect the power cable and power the Collaboration Server On Polycom Inc F 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 3 Start the Collaboration Server Web Client application on the workstation by entering the factory setting Management IP address in the browser s address line and pressing Enter In the Collaboration Server Web Client Login screen enter the default Username POLYCOM and Password POLYCOM and click the Login button The Fast Configuration Wizard starts astContiguration wizard lt IP Manageme IP Signalin r Sn Network Service Name Routers DNS Network Type Control Unit IP Address 0 0 0 0 Gatekeeper Shelf Management IP 0 0 0 0 Address SIP Server ney Subnet Mask 255 255 248 0 Security Default Router IP Address 0 09 00 ISDN PSTN PRI Settings Span Definition Ph
370. ew Conference IVR Service Video Services dialog box opens Define the Video Services parameters For more information see Table 15 8 New Conference IVR Service Properties Video Services Parameters on page 15 15 Click the DTMF Codes tab The New Conference IVR Service DTMF Codes dialog box opens gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name Operator Assistance gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General M DTMF Codes gt Roll Call Notifications Name DTMF Code Permission EI gt Video Services Change To Chairperson 78 Everyone gt DTMF Codes gt Operator Assistance Increase Listening Volume 76 Everyone Decrease Listening Volume 76 Everyone Override Mute All Everyone Start Resume Recording s74 Chairperson Stop Recording 74 Chairperson Pause Recording 75 Chairperson Secure Conference 71 Chairperson Unsecured Conference 71 Chairperson Show number of participants 88 Everyone Request private assistance 0 Everyone Request assistancefor confer 00 Chairperson a ee The default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be performed during the conference by all participants or by the chairperson are listed For the full list of the available DTMF codes see Table 15 9 New Conference IVR Service Properties DTMF Codes on page 15 16 If required modify the default DTMF codes and the permissions for various operations
371. ew Entry Queue You can modify the properties of the default Entry Queue and define additional Entry Queues to suit different conferencing requirements To define a new Entry Queue 1 Inthe RMX Management Rarely Used pane click Entry Queues Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 x Display Name 1D Profile Dial in Number SIP Registration S DefaultEQ 1000 Factory_Vide Not Configured A Signaling Monitor W Hardware Monitor B Meeting Rooms E Reservations Rarely Used NR Services EB IP Network Services Recording Links A SIP Factories E topher Polycom Inc Chapter 7 Entry Queues Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories 2 Inthe Entry Queues list pane click the New Entry Queue button The New Entry Queue dialog box opens Display Name ISUPPORT_244948618 Routing Name Profile Factory_Video_Profile l4 ID Entry Queue Mode Standard Lobby Entry Queue IVR Service Entry Queue IVR Service Ja lls Cascade None 3 Define the following parameters Table 7 2 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters C Display Name The Display Name is the conferencing entity name in native language character sets to be displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client In conferences Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP factories the system automatically generate
372. ew calls in the last minute calls in the last minute PctScsfilNewCalls Integer Percentage of new calls in the last minute which were successful CallsEndedScsflPerMin Integer Number of calls in the last minute which ended with a success code CallsEndedFailedPerMin Integer Number of calls in the last minute which ended with a failure code CallsEndedScsfl Integer Number of calls in the last minute which ended with a success code CallsEndedFailed Integer Number of calls in the last minute which ended with a failure code NumActvCnfrncs Number of active conferences of active conferences 19 18 Polycom Inc Traps Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Three types of traps are sent as follows 1 ColdStart trap This is a standard trap which is sent when the MCU is reset coldStart notification received from 172 22 189 154 at 5 20 2007 7 03 12 PM Time stamp 0 days 00h 00m 00s 00th Agent address 172 22 189 154 Port 32774 Transport IP UDP Protocol SNMPv2c Notification Manager address 172 22 172 34 Port 162 Transport IP UDP Community public Enterprise enterprises 8072 3 2 10 Bindings 3 Binding 1 sysUpTime 0 timeticks 0 days 00h 00m 00s 00th Binding 2 snmpTrapOID 0 oid coldStart Figure 1 An Example of a ColdStart Trap 2 Authentication failure trap This is a standard trap which is sent when an unauthorized community tries to enter authenticat
373. ey oR eo Do Bo CH a Name Status Role Jir Address Phone Alias Name Network Dialing di Audio Video Encryptio Ser Marc_59446123 3 partici muz ij Name Rh o Endpoint Website Rex HDX M Connected Rex XYZ JB Disconnecte Dal ox l Haz z 4 32310 z IP Address fio 253 7221 pooo b Click the Add to Address Book button If the participant name is already listed in the All Participants list an error message is displayed In such a case change the name of the participant before adding the participant to the address book Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Modifying Participants in the Address Book When required you can modify the participant s properties To modify participant properties in the Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group to where the participant to modify is listed 2 Inthe Address Book List pane double click the participant s icon The Participant s Properties window is displayed ak A eae E _ e Hierarchy a Type Y Name IP Address Ph Y Alias Name S1 Y Network Dialing Directi Y Encryptid B f Main e Test Roe EPL 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dial out auto cec f EP2 172 22 184 40 H 323 Dial out auto E Keren os ow ers 172 22 200 gt gt fe SRR zE Papere a Sl Rax 172 22 T Vicki 172 23 General gt Advanced name mooo gt Information Endpoint Website Dialin
374. f encrypted Connected only if encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are Non encrypted endpoints are disconnected disconnected Encrypt When Connected encrypted Endpoints Connected only if encrypted Possible with encryption capabilities Non encrypted endpoints are Connected non encrypted disconnected endpoints without encryption capabilities System Flag FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE Moving from the Entry Queue to Conferences or Between Conferences When moving participants from the Entry Queue to the destination conference or when the Collaboration Server user moves AVC participants from one conference to another the connection rules are similar and they are summarized in Table 4 12 Table 4 12 Moving Participants from the Entry Queue to the Destination conference or between conferences Based on the Encryption Settings arrene Destination Encryption Setting ramno races Wane races No Encryption Move succeeds connected Move succeeds connected non encrypted encrypted Encrypt All Move succeeds connected Move fails disconnected encrypted Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Table 4 12 Moving Participants from the Entry Queue to the Destination conference or between conferences Based on the Encryption Settings Continued Current Participant Encryption Status Si Destination Conference Encrypted Non Encrypted Encryption Setting Encryp
375. fault layout Table 20 5 Example Modifying PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_5 Flag Sette Number of Possible Participant s View Value Participants CP_LAYOUT 1x2VER Voice activated switching displays the current speaker in the left window of the 20 video layout and only the two last speakers are displayed PREDEFINED _AUTO_LAYOUT_5 20 Default oo Voice activated switching displays the current speaker in the large top left etal window of the video layout 1P5 Voice activated switching displays the current speaker in the top left window of the video layout Automatic Password Generation Flags The Collaboration Server can be configured to automatically generate conference and chairperson passwords when the Conference Password and Chairperson Password fields are left blank Guidelines e If the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to YES the automatic generation of passwords both conference and chairperson passwords is disabled regardless of the settings of the flags NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN and NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN e The automatic generation of conference passwords is enabled disabled by the flag NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN Polycom Inc 20 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e The automatic generation of chairperson passwords is enabled disabled by the flag NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN e The automatically generated passwords will be numeric and random e
376. ffServ is the is the selected method for packet priority encoding Default 0x31 Used to select the priority of video packets when DiffServ is the is the selected method for packet priority encoding Default 0x31 Enter the DSCP value for the RMX Management Network Default 0x10 Range 0x00 Ox3F To accommodate Redcom s SDP size limit when the flag value YES the SDP size is less than 2kb and includes only one audio and one video media line Default NO Enter the number of seconds that the Collaboration Server should wait before successive re dialing attempts Range 0 30 Default 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued ee ey Polycom Inc REDUCE_CAPS_FOR_RED COM_SIP REJECT_INCORRECT_PRE CEDENCE_DOMAIN_NAME REMOVE_H323_EPC_CAP_ TO_NON_POLYCOM_VEND OR REMOVE_H323_HIGH_PRO FILE_CAP_TO_NON_POLY COM_VENDOR REMOVE_H323_HIGH_QUA LITY_AUDIO_CAP_TO_NON _POLYCOM_VENDOR REMOVE_H323_LPR_CAP_ TO_NON_POLYCOM_VEND OR REMOVE _IP_IF_NUMBER_ EXISTS RMX_MANAGEMENT_SEC URITY_PROTOCOL To accommodate Redcom s SDP size limit when the flag value YES the SDP size is less than 2kb and includes only one audio and one video media line Default NO When set to YES when the Precedence Domain of a SIP dial in call does not match the Precedence Domain of the RMX the call is rejected For more information see MLPP M
377. g jEEKLY MEETING All Partici Toolbar Buttons The toolbar buttons functions are described in Table 9 1 Table 9 1 Reservations Toolbar EER E New Reservation Create a new reservation The date and time of the new reservation is set according to the highlighted blocks on the Reservation Calendar X Delete Reservation Click to delete the selected reservation a Back Click to show the previous day or week depending on whether Show Day or Show Week is the selected 3 Next Click to show the next day or week depending on whether Show Day i or Show Week is the selected ffm Today Click to show the current date in the Reservation Calendar in either Show Day or Show Week view E Show Week Change the calendar view to weekly display showing a calendar week Sunday through Saturday Show Da Click this button to show the day containing the selected time slot y Reservations List Click to change to List View and display a list of all reservations Used to search for reservations by Display Name Available in Reservations List view only Polycom Inc 9 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Reservations Views The Reservation Calendar list has the following views available e Week e Day e Today e List In all views the Main Window List Pane header displays the total number of reservations in the system Reservations Listto I Total number of reserv
378. g Direction Paot Type E z 1P Address AI Alias Name Type EZT 2 Website TP Address CAPA E i 3 Modify the necessary properties in the window such as dialing direction communication protocol type and so on You can modify any property in any of the three tabs General Advanced and Info 4 ClickOK The changes to the participant s properties are updated Deleting Participants from the Address Book To delete participants from the Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book Navigation pane select the group where the participant to delete is listed 2 Inthe Address Book List pane either select the participant to delete and then click the Delete Participant button or right click the participant icon and then click the Delete Participant option akxaeann mW a Hierarchy amp Type Y Name V 1P Address Ph Y Alias Name SIP A Y Network Y Dialing Directi Encrypt B A Main fea Test fe EP1 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dial out auto icac ri g Keren EP2 172 22 184 40 H 323 Dial out auto Rex EP3 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dial out auto Rex EP4 172 22 186 24 H 323 Dial out auto Rex Vicki 1722712411 H 323 Dial out auto New Participant Copy Participant Cut Participant Paste As Nev Delete Participant 3 A confirmation message is displayed depending on the participant s assignment to groups in the address book Polycom Inc 8 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide
379. g Operator conference with the same name or any other conference with the same ID is already running you cannot start another Operator conference with the same login name Click the Start Conference from Template E button or Right click and select Start Conference from Template Conference Templates 6 CERERE Ai Status EE SUPPORT_1 OK UE Marc_12 93 OK AS SUPPOR oK a ae New Conference Template Lg Marc_20183 OK Delete Conference Template as Marc K Start Conference from Template E Duke_13626 OK Import Conference Templates Export Conference Templates Export Selected Conference Templates Template Properties The conference is started The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from the Conference Template Display Name Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance Operator conferences are monitored in the same way as standard ongoing conferences Each Operator conference includes at least one participant the Operator RMX IP Address 172 22 19 1 95 Signaling H Host 17 D Oo mam o HE Display Name Status Start Tim End Ti Name Status Role IP Address Phone Alias Na co sre 67385 5 56PM 6 46 SUPPORT 2 participants S ddd 75548 4 15PM 6 45 a Brian lt gt Connected 172 22 172 97 fe Wan
380. g Room Select this button to create a new Meeting Room Polycom Inc 6 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 6 3 Meeting Room Toolbar and Right click Menus Toolbar N 5 an Delete Meeting Room Select any Meeting Room and then click this button to delete the Meeting Room Dial out to AVC participants assigned to a Meeting Room will only start when the dial in participant 4 who has activated it has completed the connection process and the Meeting Room has become an ongoing conference Creating a New Meeting Room To create a new meeting room gt gt Inthe Meeting Rooms pane click the New Meeting Room button or right click an empty area in the pane and then click New Meeting Room The New Meeting Room dialog box is displayed New Meeting Room gt General gt Participants Display Name Marc 674773333 umid Name j Duration za normai Duration a o E D Permanent Conference IP E Oak_Room 1002 1 00 E 1 eh Juniper_Room 1003 1 00 Profile Factory_GW_Profile X pa a ID fe Maple_Room Haus te Conference Password EN Fig_Room 1004 1 00 Chairperson Password pia ex Meeting Room Properties Maximum Number of Participants Automatic a e e OF Oe Be nm nm H The definition procedure is the same as for the new conference If SIP Factories are being used do not assign a Meeting Room the ID 7001 This ID is reserved for the default SIP Factory For more information
381. g conditions The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS for purposes including but not limited to penetration testing COMSEC monitoring network operations and defense personnel misconduct PM law enforcement LE and counterintelligence CI investigations At any time the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS Communications using or data stored on this IS are not private are subject to routine monitoring interception and search and may be disclosed or used for any USG authorized purpose This IS includes security measures e g authentication and access controls to protect USG interests not for your personal benefit or privacy Notwithstanding the above using this IS does not constitute consent to PM LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of privileged communications or work product related to personal representation or services by attorneys psychotherapists or clergy and their assistants Such communications and work product are private and confidential S User Agreement for details Sample 2 Banner This system is for the use of authorized users only Individuals using this computer system without authority or in excess of their authority are subject to having all of their activities on this system monitored and recorded by systems personnel In the course of monitoring individuals improperly using this system or i
382. g the Encryption option Encrypt All or Encrypt when Possible in the Advanced tab For more details see Media Encryption on page 4 27 e Setting the Recording options in the Recording tab For more details see Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile on page 13 5 13 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Managing the Recording Process When a conference is started and recording is enabled in its Profile the system will automatically start the recording if the Start Recording parameter is set to immediately If it is set to Upon Request the system waits for the chairperson or Collaboration Server user s request Once the recording is initiated for a conference the MCU connects to the recording device RSS 2000 4000 using the default Recording Link The connection that is created between the conference and the recording device is represented as a special participant Recording whose name is the Recording Link Once the recording has started the recording process can be stopped and restarted from the Chairperson s endpoint using DTMF codes or from the Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Web Client After the recording process has finished the recording can be identified in the RSS 2000 4000 by its Collaboration Server conference name A conference participant and the Recording Link cannot have identical names otherwise the recording process will fail Recording
383. g you select the name of the destination conference sn sew Display Name Y ID Back to Home Conference if the participant was moved to another conference or to the Operator conference this options moves the participant back to his her source conference This option is not available if the participant was moved from the Entry Queue to the Operator conference or the destination conference Moving a Participant Interactively You can drag and drop a participant from the Entry Queue or ongoing conference to the Operator or destination Home conference 1 Display the participants list of the Entry Queue or the source conference by clicking its entry in the Conferences list 2 Inthe Participants list drag the icon of the participant to the Conferences List pane and drop it on the Operator Conference icon or another ongoing conference Polycom Inc 10 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 10 18 Polycom Inc Conference Templates Polycom Inc Conference Templates enable administrators and operators to create save schedule and activate identical conferences A Conference Template e Saves the conference Profile e Saves all participant parameters including their Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings Guidelines e The maximum number of templates is 100 Trying to start a Conference Template that exceeds the allowed maximum number of participants will result in participants
384. ge Language z IVR Message Category Conference Password X Message Type Request Conference Password X Upload File Audio files are uploaded to the MCU one by one 3 Inthe IVR Message Language list select the language for which the audio file will be uploaded to the MCU 4 Inthe IVR Message Category list select the category for which the audio file is uploaded 5 Inthe Message Type list select the message type for which the uploaded message is to be played You can upload several audio files for each Message Type Each file is downloaded separately Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Table 15 2 lists the Message Types for each category Table 15 2 IVR Message Types by Message Category Message Conference Request Conference Requests the participant to enter the conference Password Password password Request Conference A participant who enters an incorrect password is Password Retry requested to enter it again Request Digit Requests the participant to enter any digit in order to connect to the conference Used for dial out participants to avoid answering machines in the conference Welcome Welcome Message The first message played when the participant Message connects to the conference or Entry Queue Conference Request Chairperson Requests the participants to enter the chairperson Chairperson Identifier identifier key Request Chairperson Requests the participant to enter the chairperson Password passw
385. ge User Password Rename User Enable User User Properties A confirmation box is displayed 3 Click YES The User status in the Users list Disabled column changes to NO Renaming a User To rename a user 1 In the Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users j button The Users pane is displayed Polycom Inc 14 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 Right click the user to be renamed and select Rename User Users amp X User Name Authorization Level Disabled P POLYCOM Administrator No Delete User Change User Password Disable User User Properties The Rename User dialog box is displayed e Lee 3 Enter the user s new name in the New User Name field and click OK The user is renamed and is forced to change his her password Machine Account 14 6 User names can be associated with servers machines to ensure that all users are subject to the same account and password policies For enhanced security reasons it is necessary for the Collaboration Server to process user connection requests in the same manner whether they be from regular users accessing the Collaboration Server via the Collaboration Server Web Browser RMX Manager or from application users representing applications such as CMA and DMA Regular users can connect from any workstation having a valid certificate while application users representing applications can only conne
386. h G0 QCIF at 30 fps Annex T XGA Standard MPI 4 SVGA Standard MPI 3 VGA Standard MPI 2 AnnexQ 6400 bp 6cal Communication Mode CIF at 30 fps G7221C_48k 1 frame per packet QCIF at 30 fps H264 Transmit 336000 bps H263 384000 bps BaseLine Profile 4CIF at 15 fps Level 2 CIF at 30 fps istomMaxMBPS at 40 20000 MB s QCIF at 30 fps CrctomMaxFS at 7 1792 MBs SOCIF at 30 fps H263 Trsasqit 0 bps Annex F H 239 Role Presentatia Annex T 4CIF at 15 fps VGA Standard MPI 2 CIF at 30 fps GenericVideo 100 bps Generic Video QCIF at 30 fps Algorithm Annex T VGA Standard MPI 2 xl Add to Address Book 4 36 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information In the Participant Properties Channel Status tab check box indicators show LPR activation in the local and remote transmit and receive channels Wanda Properties o 1 31747 19 19 31280 8 8 37468 0 o a o aca Sync Status ate Video Sync Loss 384000 Oo o 4 384000 o 0 og Polycom Inc 4 37 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Lecture Mode Lecture Mode enables all participants to view the lecturer in full screen while the conference lecturer sees all the other conference participants in the selected layout while he she is speaking When the number of sites endpoints exceeds the number of video windows in the layo
387. h contains the conference parameters and media settings The Collaboration Server automatically allocates the conference ID when the conference starts In most cases the default conference ID can be used and you can just click OK to launch the conference If required you can enter a conference ID before clicking OK to launch the conference If you are the meeting chairperson or organizer using the RMX Web Client to start your own meeting you need to communicate the default conference ID or the one you created to the other conference participants so they can dial in You can use the New Conference General dialog box to modify the conference parameters If no defined participants are to be added to the conference or you do not want to add additional information click OK For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane on page 3 12 Starting a Reservation To start a conference from the Reservation Calendar 1 Inthe MCUs pane select the MCU to run the conference 2 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the Reservation Calendar button _ Polycom Inc 18 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The Reservation Calendar is displayed Name of selected MCU View Administration Setup Help iss lt x M AS Ss Display Name IP Address Status Product T Monit GHB 172 22 186 45 172 22 186 45 Major RMX 40 F Wednesday 28
388. hange a password Chairperson A Chairperson can only manage ongoing conferences and participants The Chairperson does not have access to the Collaboration Server configurations and utilities 14 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Auditor An Auditor can only view Auditor Files and audit the system Machine Account User names can be associated with servers machines to ensure that all users are subject to the same account and password policies For more details see Machine Account on page 14 6 Listing Users The Users pane lists the currently defined users in the system and their authorization levels The pane also enables the administrators to add and delete users The system is shipped with a default Administrator user called POLYCOM whose password is POLYCOM However once you have defined other authorized Administrator users it is recommended to remove the default user You can view the list of users that are currently defined in the system To view the users currently defined in the system 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users FY button The Users pane is displayed ses eee amp X User Name Authorization Level Disabled Locked POLYcom Administrator No No Ph chair Chairperson No No A SUPPORT Administrator No No The list includes three columns User Name Authorization Level and Disabled The User Name is the login name used by the user to con
389. have defined the Username and Password for the connecting MCU the system connects to the Collaboration Server and the RMX Manager Main Screen is displayed Polycom RMX Manager e r a Eo aa 137x M asz TIREI a amp aagang W X ja Display Name IP Address Status Product T Monitored voice Video he Hija Pan s me Y Name mcu 172 22 190 40 Disconnect RMX 20 7 mcu Name Status Efe Main fe RPX Sim i EE Sales 172 25 104 120 4 Major RMX15 M 0 48 24 78 721290 Niv Wagner 3 participants fe Vineyard 3 Sales fex Jesus lt gt Connected op TAA 7 Sales f DWB lt Connected op NorthChurch Sales fex Austi lt gt Connected op Support_ok fe Tew z fe auto_demo eJ Support_400_ a Lex E ga Broadway_NY a anaa H a o m E _ 9 MCU Display N Status ID Start Tim End Ti SIP Regis Internal ID Dial in Numt g Sales By 7212 36803 16 00 16 00 Not Conf 10148 g ny Sales 7213 50304 16 00 16 00 Not Conf 10149 g Righty a Kira ie Hercules ie SimbaLab fe Vineyard OTX a CastleIsland O SSS SSS j ow Aloha REMC HSToD EITC a oO WOOD aiiin m ei Pratyaksh_Indi Frequently Used e PSD OTX dij Connections g SHELLY_HDX8 PR Users fe Andover Conf F A Signaling Monitor ei 111111500 test NB Hardware Monitor ei ISR LAB TPX S Meeting Rooms Re Eng400_1 E Reservations Rex Eng400_2 All Participants io Eng400_3 mi
390. he Collaboration Server User can abort the H 239 Session of the lecturer Content Broadcasting is not implemented in conferences that do not include a designated lecturer and the lecturer is automatically selected by the system for example in Presentation Mode Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Muting Participants Except the Lecturer When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option in the Conference Profile is enabled the audio of all participants in the conference except for the lecturer can be automatically muted upon connection to the conference This prevents other conference participants from accidentally interrupting the lecture or from a noisy participant affecting the audio quality of the entire conference Muted participants cannot unmute themselves unless they are unmuted from the Collaboration Server Web Client RMX Manager Guidelines Polycom Inc Both administrators and operators users are allowed to set the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled the mute indicator on the participant endpoints are not visible because the mute participants was initiated by the MCU Therefore it is recommended to inform the participants that their audio is muted by using the Message Overlay functions When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled in the Conference Profile settings all conferences to which this profile is assign
391. he MCUs are configured as Master or as Slave e The slave Collaboration Server is defined with the same IP as the Master Hot backup Network issue Polycom Inc B 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table B 41 Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm NS Hot Backup Paired MCU is unreachable Hot Backup Paired MCU is unreachable Paired MCU is unreachable Insufficient resources The number of resources in the license is higher than the actual system resources Check the media cards or insert a media card Insufficient UDP Ports When defining fixed port the number of defined UDP ports is lower than the required ports Configure additional ports Internal System configuration during System configuration during startup startup Wait until Collaboration Server P is completed Invalid System Configuration Invalid System Configuration Configuration IP addresses of Signaling Host and IP addresses of a Host and Control Unit are identical Control Unit are the same an different IP addresses to the Signaling Host and Control Unit IP IP Network Service added Service added IP Network Service SS modified a Network Service was modified Reset the MCU IP Network Service deleted IP Network Service was deleted Reset the MCU IP Network Service not found IP Service not found in the Network Services list Confi es the IP Network Service _IPMC software upgrade in component software _IPMC software u
392. he Mute Participants Except Lecturer option can be disabled during an ongoing conference thereby unmuting all the participants in the conference e If the endpoint of the designated lecturer is muted when the lecturer connects to the conference the lecturer remains muted until the endpoint has been unmuted e When you replace a lecturer the MCU automatically mutes the previous lecturer and unmutes the new lecturer e When you disconnect a lecturer from the conference or the lecturer leaves the conference all participants remain muted but are able to view participants in regular video layout until the you disable the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option e A participant can override the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option by activating the Mute All Except Me option using the appropriate DTMF code provided the participant has authorization for this operation in the VR Services The lecturer audio is muted and the participant audio is unmuted You can reactivate the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option after a participant has previously activated the Mute All Except Me option The participant is muted and the lecturer if designated is unmuted e In cascaded conferences all participants including the link participants are muted Only the lecturer is not muted Polycom Inc 2 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 2 10 New AVC Profile Audio Settings Parameters Continued Speaker Change The Speaker
393. he Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Resetting the Collaboration Server RMX on page 19 54 To cancel the forcing of CIF resource 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt System Configuration The System Flags dialog box opens 2 Inthe MCMS_PARAMETERS tab double click or select the flag FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION and click the Edit Flag button 3 Inthe New Value field clear the value entries 4 Click OK 19 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Reset the MCU for changes to take effect For more details see the RMX Administrator s Guide on page 19 54 Resource Report When viewing the Collaboration Server resource report the resource allocations are described in AVC HD units The Resource Report displays the real time resource usage The Resource Report includes a graphic representation of the resource usage One resource report is available for all resource usage Displaying the Resource Report 1 Inthe main toolbar click Administration gt Resource Report Administration Setup Help i Tools ay j Software Management gt Display Resource Report CDR Notes System Information For each resource type the Resource Report includes the following columns Table 19 4 Resource Report Fields Parameters eat Been The type of audio video resources available Occupied The number of MCU resources that are used by connected
394. herefore the A V Edge Server URI was not received Fallback version is being used Fallback version is being used Restore current version Version being used running version Current version current version File error Possible reasons for the file error e XML file does not exist file name Error no error number Not authorized to open XML file file name Error no error number Unknown problem in opening XML file file name Error no error number Failed to parse XML file file name File system scan failure File system scan failure Failed to scan file system path Multiple occurrences may point to a hardware problem System is functioning File system space shortage File system space shortage Out of file system space in file system path Free space free space percentage free space Blocks Minimum free space required minimum free space percentage minimum free space Blocks B 4 Polycom Inc Appendix B Active Alarms Table B 1_ Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description Gatekeeper failure Possible reasons for the Gatekeeper failure e Failed to register to alternate Gatekeeper Gatekeeper discovery state Check GK IP address GUI ping Gatekeeper DNS Host name not found Gatekeeper Registration Timeout Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to invalid revision Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to resource unavailability Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to Terminal Exclusion Gatekeeper rej
395. ht group list pane You can drill down the sub group to view address book entities in the sub group To move up to the next level and view the members in the upper level gt gt Double click the navigation arrow button in the group members pane To collapse a group gt gt Double click the group name or click the Collapse E button Participants List Pane Information Polycom Inc The Participants List pane displays the following information for each participant azaan MW a Hierarchy R Type Name V IP Address Phone v Alias Name SIP x Network Dialing Direction Y Encryption Y B Main Jn amp 9 et s Gp G1 1 Ra P1 0 0 0 1 H 323 lt Dial out auto g G2 fe P2 0 0 0 2 H 323 amp Dial out auto Ra 172 21 41 1 172 21 41 104 H 323 amp Dial out auto Table 8 1 Docked Address Book List Columns Indicates whether the participant is a video 9 or voice p Name Name Displays the name of the participant Displays the name of the participant name of the participant IP Address Phone Enter the IP address of the participant s endpoint e For H 323 participant define either the endpoint IP address or alias For SIP participant define either the endpoint IP address or the SIP address Network The network communication protocol used by the endpoint to connect to the conference H 323 or SIP Dialing Direction Dial in The participant dials in to the conference Dial out The Colla
396. ialog box opens Polycom Inc 4 31 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 Set the FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_ WHEN_AVAILA BLE_MODE flag to YES or NO 3 If recording will be used in encrypted conferences set the ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag to YES or NO 4 Click OK For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 5 Reset the MCU for flag changes to take effect Enabling Encryption in the Profile Encryption for the conference is in the Profile and cannot be changed once the conference is running To enable encryption at the conference level gt gt Inthe Conference Profile Properties Advanced dialog box select one of the following Encryption options gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 4 32 General Display Name Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v Video Settings Audio Settings Skins IVR Recording Encryption No Encryption Site Names Encrypt All yp Message Overlay IV Packet Loss Compensa Encrypt when possible Network Services IV Auto Terminate Before First Joins 10 I minutes At the End 1 Ejo C After last participant quits C When last participant remains J Auto Redialing I Exclusive Content Mode TIP Compatibility Ne gt SYS MV Enable FECC J7 FW NAT Keep Alive Interval 0 Seconds Encrypt All Encryption is enabled for the conference an
397. ically identified speed and transmit receive mode of each LAN port used by the system can be manually modified if the specific switch requires it 4 Only the Management LAN interface is configurable 16 18 Polycom Inc IP Network Monitoring Polycom Inc To modify the automatic LAN port configuration 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt Ethernet Settings The Ethernet Settings dialog box opens You can change the speed of each entry Slot Port Port Type Speed 802 1x authentic User Name Password 1 1 1 2 Management_i Auto yi Off Management_1 Auto Off 4 Chapter 16 IP Network Services The Collaboration Server has 2 LAN ports You can select the speed and transmit receive mode manually for these ports the speed and the transmit receive mode for each port Ethernet Settings n You can change the speed of each entry Slot Port Port Type 802 1x authentic User Name Password 1 1 ik 2 Management_1 Management_1 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex 1000 Full Duplex off 4 E In the Speed column click the drop down arrow of the table entry to modify and select When Auto default is selected the negotiation of speed and transmit receive mode starts at 1000 Mbits second Full Duplex proceeding downward to 100 Mbits s
398. icccsccosseecccusavnseavscvevscuestectanecucvssestadtiiectsascscaves EAE ERESI EANET ER 7 5 Setting a Transit Entry Queue seseinsniensieseiis eioi eriein oinera 7 5 DIP FAGOT E Sieisen i a E E E EN ENE A EEEE EEEE AE E E 7 7 Creating SIP Factories is ccssiscstsasscsacssneeseaseveutes avs vetovenshuvessoratsvvsheasshid SEE a E iE 7 7 Monitoring Registration Status ses errseesrsserrsseereseotoneeroentoveneerertevevrerentesenteresrereseerereere 7 9 Ad Hoe Conferencing s cece cusesccndesvseeseeece cod scnesesvssneteavesdestses exseasutcesssseeitesueds cupevevecsesedespesestatvets 7 9 Address BOOK 6 ic cicn cs teweieaennekeeeas dbase PARAF E ER RERRE 8 1 Viewing the Address BOOK ssissicsoscstsestavessessoneversescstuvepbesvaususbesessusaedevevadnipvevesnasecsessvonsbenans 8 2 Displaying and Hiding the Group Members in the Navigation Pane 000 8 3 Participants List Pane Information eeceeccssseseseseseseseesesesesesesesescscseaeseseecseananseess 8 3 Displaying and Hiding the Address Book occ eeeeeessesesssesseseeseneseseseseeseneneseseees 8 4 Adding Participants from the Address Book to Conferences 0 cece eeeeeeneteteees 8 4 Adding Individual Participants from the Address Book to Conferences 8 4 Adding a Group from the Address Book to Conferences c cccccsesseeseseeteteeeeens 8 5 Participant Groups esseri erenn A E A AKE NEE A 8 6 Managing Groups in the Address Book ccccccscssessesesesteteseeeeeescesenenenes
399. icipants and progress For more information see Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Monitoring Ongoing Conferences on page 3 31 Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 Display Name IP Address Phone Alias Name SIP Dialing Directior S Marc_45306 d Connections R Users A Signaling Monitor W Hardware Monitor E Meeting Rooms E Reservations Rarely Used Marc_45306 51 participants fex Administrato lt i gt Connected Rex 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rax 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected Rex Administrato 45 Connected fx 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rax 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 fx 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rex 10 226 105 Rax 10 226 105 fx 10 226 105 A anain lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt gt Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt T Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected lt Connected 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Administrator SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP Administra
400. ideo Switching e Multiple Content Resolutions In Content Video Switching mode the content is negotiated to highest common capabilities supported by the endpoints connected to the conference If the conference includes participants that support lower content capabilities such as H 263 and higher content capabilities H 264 content will be sent at the lower capabilities supported by all endpoints resulting in lower content quality seen by all endpoints In this mode the content is set according to the capabilities of all the participants currently connected to the conference If the all the connected participant support the H 264 protocol the Content will be started with H 264 capabilities If then an endpoint supporting only H 263 protocol connects the content is stopped in order to switch to H 263 and has to be resent If the H 263 participant leaves the conference and only H 264 capable endpoints remain connected content is stopped in order to switch back to H 264 and has to be resent In Multiple Content Resolutions mode content is shared in multiple streams one for each video protocol H 263 and H 264 A separate video resource is used to process the Content shared with H 264 capable endpoints and another for content shared with H 263 capable endpoints with each endpoint receiving its highest possible quality This allows endpoints with different protocols to connect and disconnect without having to restart Content sharing in the middl
401. ideo layout Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences This option is supported with InH 323 SIP environments For Basic Cascading of Continuous Presence aconferences If a Master MCU has two slave MCUs participants connected to the slave MCUs will not receive video from each other Video resolution will be according to the Resolution Configuration For more details on defining system flags see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 DTMF Forwarding When two conferences are connected over an IP link DTMF codes from one conference are not forwarded to the second conference with the exception of the following operations that are available throughout the conference and the forwarding of their DTMF codes is not suppressed i e they will apply to both conferences e Terminate conference e Mute all but me e Unmute all but me e Secure conference e Unsecure conference During cascading between a gateway and a conference all DTMF codes are forwarded from the gateway to the conference and vice versa Play Tone Upon Cascading Link Connection The Collaboration Server can be configured to play a tone when a cascading link between conferences is established The tone is played in both conferences This tone is not played when the cascading link disconnects from the conferences The tone used to notify that the cascading link connection has been established cannot be customized The option to play a ton
402. ideo layout without switching For more information about Profile definition see Defining AVC CP Conferencing Profiles on page 2 10 gt gt Once the conference is running in the Conference Properties Video Settings dialog box select the Lecturer View Switching check box Lecture Mode Monitoring A conference in which the Lecture Mode is enabled is started as any other conference The conference runs as an audio activated Continuous Presence conference until the lecturer connects to the conference The selected video layout is the one that is activated when the conference starts Once the lecturer is connected the conference switches to the Lecture Mode 4 40 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information When Lecturer View Switching is activated it enables automatic switching between the conference participants in the lecturer s video window The switching in this mode is not determined by voice activation and is initiated when the number of participants exceeds the number of windows in the selected video layout In this case when the switching is performed the system refreshes the display and replaces the last active speaker with the current speaker When one of the participants is talking the automatic switching is suspended showing the current speaker and it is resumed when the lecturer resumes talking If the lecturer is disconnected during an Ongoing Conference the conference resumes
403. ideo ports exceed the number of ports allocated to video in fixed ports H323 call close No port left for FECC The required data ports exceed the number of ports allocated to data in fixed ports H323 call close No control port left The required control ports exceed the number of ports allocated to control data in fixed ports H323 call close No port left for videocont The required video content ports exceed the number of ports allocated to video content in fixed ports Polycom Inc A 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table A 1 Call Disconnection Causes Continued Disconnection Cause Description H323 call closed Small bandwidth The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth to the connection with the endpoint H323 call closed No port left There are no free ports left in the IP card Caller not registered The calling endpoint is not registered in the gatekeeper H323 call closed ARQ timeout The endpoint sent an ARQ message to the gatekeeper but the gatekeeper did not respond before timeout H323 call closed DRQ timeout The endpoint sent a DRQ message to the gatekeeper but the gatekeeper did not respond before timeout H323 call closed Alt Gatekeeper failure An alternate gatekeeper failure occurred H323 call closed Gatekeeper failure A gatekeeper failure occurred H323 call closed Remote busy The endpoint was busy Applicable only to dial out H323 call closed Normal The call ended normally for e
404. ies sent with different strings will be regarded as a violation of security and if the Send Authentication Trap Versions check box is selected an appropriate message will be sent to 1 amp 2 the SNMP Manager Accept SNMP Select this option if a query sent from any Manager terminal is Packets from all Host valid When selected the Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts option is disabled Accept SNMP Lists specific Manager terminals whose queries will be Packets from the considered as valid This option is enabled when the Accept following Hosts SNMP Packets from any Host option is cleared User Name Enter a User Name of up to 48 characters Default Empty Security Level Select a Security Level from the drop down menu Range No Auth No Priv Auth No Priv Auth Priv Default Auth Priv Authentication Select the authentication Protocol protocol Range MD5 SHA Default MD5 These fields are enabled if Authentication is selected Authentication Enter an Authentication in the Security Level field Password Password Version Range 8 48 characters 3 Default Empty Privacy Protocol Select a Privacy Protocol Range DES AES Default DES Privacy Password Enter a Privacy Password These fields are enabled if Range 8 48 characters Privacy is selected in the Default Empty Security Level field Engine ID Enter an Engine ID to be used for both the Agent and the Trap Default Empty Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Se
405. iewer To open the Auditor File Viewer from the Administration Menu 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Tools gt Auditor File Viewer The Auditor File Viewer is displayed If you previously double clicked an Auditor Event File in the Auditor Files list that file is automatically opened Local File Find a Event 1 Y Date amp Time Y user Na Y Reportin Workstation F 1P Addr Event V Event Process Completed 7 Description F Additional infor 7 2809 6 3 2007 1 21 PM SUPPORT Mems 172 22 169 51 172 22 API Yes 2822 6 3 2007 1 31 PM POLYCOM Mems EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Login No A user logged into the RMX 2823 6 3 2007 1 31 PM SUPPORT Mems EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Login Yes A user logged into the RMX 2824 6 3 2007 1 31 PM SUPPORT Mems EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Logout Yes A user logged out of the RMX 2885 6 3 2007 2 31 PM POLYCOM Mems EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Login No A user logged into the RMX 2886 6 3 2007 2 31 PM SUPPORT Mems EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Login Yes A user logged into the RMX 6 3 2007 2 31 PM SUPPORT Moms EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Logout Yes A user logged out of the RMX 2948 6 3 2007 3 31 PM POLYCOM Mems EASY_TRACKER 172 22 API Login No A user logged into the RMX TYPE xml TYPE xml DATA S DATA E TRANS_MCU RESPONSE_TRANS_MCU E TRANS_COMMON_PARAMS RETURN_STATUS Event Request Transaction Response Transaction List ID Tree Tree 19 47 Polycom RMX 1800 Administ
406. ile Figure 3 4 Resolution usage for H 264 High Profile and H 264 Base Profile for Motion at various line rates when Resolution Configuration is set to Resource Quality Balanced Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Resource vs Quality Quality Optimized H 264 High Profile vs H 264 Base Profile Motion Resolution 1080p 60 fps b amp High Profile 720 60 fps NSN MOON H 264 H 264 SD 60 fps NS H 264 CIF 60 fps Base amp High Profile H 264 Base amp High Profile CIF 30 fps H 264 Base Profile 64 128 256 512 768 832 1024 1280 1728 8M Dai Vx Profile Profile Figure 3 5 Resolution usage for H 264 High Profile and H 264 Base Profile for Motion at various line rates when Resolution Configuration is set to Video Quality Optimized Line Rate Resource vs Quality Resource Optimized Resolution H 264 High Profile vs H 264 Base Profile Motion 1080p 60 fps 720 60 fps SD 60 fps CIF 60 fps CIF 30 fps 64 128 256 384 768 1024 1280 1920 4M 8M Base I High Profile Profile Figure 3 6 Resolution usage for H 264 High Profile and H 264 Base Profile for Motion at various line rates when Resolution Configuration is set to Resource Optimized Line Rate 3 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary The following Table summarizes the Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates an
407. ile IVR dialog box Polycom Inc 15 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 15 6 Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages Continued Chairperson Help A voice menu is played upon a request from the chairperson listing Menu the operations and their respective DTMF codes that can be performed by the chairperson The playback can be stopped any time Note If you modify the default DTMF codes used to perform various operations the default voice files for the help menus must be replaced Change Chairperson Requests the participant to enter a new chairperson password when Password the participant is attempting to modify the chairperson password Change Conference Requests the participant to enter a new conference password when Password the participant is attempting to modify the conference password Change Password A message played when the participant enters an invalid password Failure for example when a password is already in use Change Passwords This voice menu is played when the participants requests to change Menu the conference password This message details the steps required to complete the procedure Conference is Locked This message is played to participants attempting to join a Secured conference Conference is This message is played when the conference status changes to Secured Secure as initiated by the conference chairperson or participant using DTMF code 71 Conference is This mess
408. illing to interpret SIP client error 420 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 420 Bad Extension response The server did not understand the protocol extension specified in a Require header field SIP client error 481 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 481 Call Transaction Does Not Exist response SIP client error 482 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 482 Loop Detected response SIP client error 483 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 483 Too Many Hops response SIP client error 484 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 484 Address Incomplete response The server received a request with a To address or Request URI that was incomplete SIP client error 485 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 485 Ambiguous response The address provided in the request Request URI was ambiguous SIP client error 488 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 488 Not Acceptable Here response A 4 Polycom Inc Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Call Disconnection Causes Continued Disconnection Cause Description SIP forbidden The SIP server rejected the request The server understood the request but is refusing to fulfill it SIP global failure 603 A SIP Global Failure 603 Decline response was returned The participant s endpoint was successfully contacted but the participant explicitly does not wish to or cannot participate SIP global failure 604 A SIP Global Failure 604 Does Not Exist Anywhere respon
409. imum field Service Name length is 20 characters and may be typed in Unicode Language For IVR Select the language of the audio messages and prompts from the list of languages defined in the Supported languages The default language is English For more information see Adding Languages on page 15 3 External Server This option is not supported with RMX 1800 Authentication Number of User Input Enter the number of times the participant will be able to respond to Retries each menu prompt before being disconnected from the conference Range is between 1 4 and the default is 3 Timeout for User Enter the duration in seconds that the system will wait for the Input Sec participant s input before prompting for another input Range is between 1 10 and the default value is 5 seconds DTMF Delimiter Enter the key that indicates the last input key Possible values are the pound and star keys The default is 3 Click the Welcome tab The New Conference IVR Service Welcome dialog box opens Conference IVR Service Name IVR_ENGLISH gt Video Services T Enable Welcome Messages gt DTMF Codes S operaer Kasianes General Welcome Message 1B Add Message File Pox con 4 Select the Enable Welcome Messages check box to define the system behavior when the participant enters the Conference IVR queue When participants access a conference through an Entry Queue they hear messages included in b
410. including Operator Assistance options 0 for individual help the participant requested help for himself or herself In such a case the participant requesting help is moved to the Operator conference for one on one conversation By default all participants can use this code 00 for conference help the conference chairperson default can request help for the conference In such a case the operator joins the conference 17 Click the Operator Assistance tab Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move The Operator Assistance dialog box opens gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General gt Roll Call Notifications I Enable Operator Assistance gt Video Services eee ae operatorAssistance IndicationMessage P A gt Operator Assistance 18 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant requires or requests help during the connection process to the conference or during the conference 19 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field select the audio message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for the operator s assistance If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the C
411. ine a twice weekly recurring Reservation select the check box of the additional day of the week on which the Reservation is to be scheduled and set the recurrence interval to 1 Monthly If Monthly is selected the system automatically selects the day of the month as selected in the Reservation Calendar You are required to choose a recurrence pattern Day 1 31 of every 1 12 month s Repeats a conference on a specified day of the month at a specified monthly interval For example if the first Reservation is scheduled for the 6th day of the current month and the monthly interval is set to 1 the monthly Reservation will occur on the 6th day of each of the following months The first second last Sun Sat of x month s Repeats a Reservation in a particular week on a specified day of the week at the specified monthly interval For example a recurrent meeting on the third Monday every second month A series of Reservations can be set to end after a specified number of occurrences or by a specific date Select one of the following methods of terminating the series of Reservations End After End After x Occurrences Ends a recurring series of Reservations after a specific number x of occurrences Default 1 Leaving the field blank defaults to 1 occurrence End by Date End By Date mm ddlyyyy Specifies a date for the last occurrence of the recurring series of Reservations The End By Date value can be adjusted by typi
412. information is displayed with the following details Accumulated N total number of packets that were fragmented since the channel opened Accumulated percentage of fragmented packets out of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened Interval N number of fragmented packets received in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Interval percentage of fragmented packets out of the total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of fragmented packets in a report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span Polycom Inc E 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Polycom Inc Appendix F Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration Server Direct connection to the Collaboration Server is necessary if you want to e Modify the Collaboration Server s Factory Default Management Network settings without using the USB memory stick e Connect to the Collaboration Server s Alternate Management Network for support purposes e Connect to the Collaboration Server via a modem Management Network Primary If you do not want to use the USB memory stick method of modifying the Collaboration Server s Management Network parameters it is necessary to establish a direct connection between a workstation and the Collaboration Server Configuring the Workstation The following procedures
413. inuous Presence conferences Polycom Partners Indicates that the System Software contains features for the support of specific Polycom Partner environments 19 14 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP enables managing and monitoring of the MCU status by external managing systems such as HP OpenView or through web applications The Collaboration Server s implementation of SNMPv3 is FIPS 140 compliant MIBs Management Information Base Traps MIB Files Polycom Inc MIBs are a collection of definitions which define the properties of the managed object within the device to be managed Every managed device keeps a database of values for each of the definitions written in the MIB The SNMP systems poll the MCU according to the MIB definitions The MCU is able to send Traps to different managers Traps are messages that are sent by the MCU to the SNMP Manager when an event such as MCU Reset occurs Guidelines e Version 1 Version 2 and Version 3 traps are supported e When SNMPv3 is selected only SNMPv3 Queries and Traps receive responses e A mixture of Version 1 Version 2 and Version 3 traps is not permitted The H 341 standard defines the MIBs that H 320 and H 323 MCUs must comply with In addition other MIBs should also be supported such as MIB II and the ENTITY MIB which are common to all network entities The MIBs are contain
414. ion Failure notification received from 172 22 189 154 at 5 20 2007 7 33 38 PM Time stamp 0 days 00h 30m 27s 64th Agent address 172 22 189 154 Port 32777 Transport IP UDP Protocol SNMPv2c Notification Manager address 172 22 172 34 Port 162 Transport IP UDP Community public Enterprise enterprises 8072 3 2 10 Bindings 3 Binding 1 sysUpTime 0 timeticks 0 days 00h 30m 27s 64th Binding 2 snmpTrapOID 0 oid authenticationFailure Figure 2 An Example of an Authentication Failure Trap 19 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 3 Alarm Fault trap The third trap type is a family of traps defined in the POLYCOM RMX MIB file these traps are associated with the Collaboration Server active alarm and clearance proprietary SNMP trap rmxFailedConfigUserListInLinuxAlarmFault notification received from 172 22 189 154 at 5 20 2007 7 04 22 PM Time stamp 0 days 00h 01m 11s 71th Agent address 172 22 189 154 Port 32777 Transport IP UDP Protocol SNMPv2c Notification Manager address 172 22 172 34 Port 162 Transport IP UDP Community public Bindings 6 Binding 1 sysUpTime 0 timeticks 0 days 00h 01m 11s 71th Binding 2 snmpTrapOID 0 oid rmxFailedConfigUserListInLinuxAlarmFault Binding 3 rmxAlarmDescription octets Insufficient resources Binding 4 rmxActiveAlarmDateAndTime octets 2007 6 19 16 7 15 0 0 0 Binding 5 rmxActiveAlarmIndex gauge32 2 6 rmxActiveA
415. ion Server 1800 Specifications on page 2 21 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 21 Collaboration Server Hardware Monitoring To view the MCU properties 1 Inthe Hardware Monitor pane either double click or right click and select Properties for Polycom RMX 1800 slot 0 gt General Info a gt Active Alarms Hardware Version 1 01A Firmware Version 2 00 S Serial Number f Card Type RMX Card Part Number 002590A2B7E2 Card MAC Address 1 00 25 90 A2 B7 E2 Card MAC Address 2 00 25 90 A2 B7 E3 lt m gt The following information is displayed Card Type Displays the type of card that occupies the slot Card Part Number The part number of this card Card MAC Address 1 Specific hardware address of the component This address is burnt onto the component and is automatically identified by the system Card MAC Address 2 If applicable second MAC address Polycom Inc 21 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the Collaboration Server i e temperatures and main power sensors gt General Info gt Active Alarms SensorNumb Description Current Sensor Status Nominal Value SensorType Lower Critical LowerMajor UpperMajor Uppe 4 PCH Temp 45 50 Temperature 8 5 90 95 10 VT 1 03 1i Voltage 0 86 0 91 1 34 1 39 u Vcore 0 83 0 8 Voltage 0 51 0 54 1 48 151 12 VDIMM
416. ion Server sends video at the best possible resolution supported by the endpoint regardless of the resolution received from the endpoint The video resolution is also defined by the Video Quality settings in the Profile e Motion when selected results in lower video resolution at higher frame rates 30 fps to 60 fps Sharpness when selected results in higher video resolution at lower frame rate 30 fps and lower However it can also be sent in 1080P 60fps The combination of frame rate and resolution affects the number of video resources required on the MCU to support the call The following resolutions are supported e CIF 352 x 288 pixels at 30 or 60 fps e SD 720 x 576 pixels at 30 or 60 fps e HD 720p 1280 x 720 pixels at 30 or 60 fps e HD 1080p 1920 x 1080 pixels at 30 fps e HD 1080p 1920 x 1080 pixels at 60 fps Symmetric in Motion and Sharpness Video Display with CIF SD and HD Video Connections Although any combination of CIF SD and HD connections is supported in all CP conferences the following rules apply e Ina1X1 Video Layout SD If the speaker transmits CIF the MCU will send CIF to all participants including the SD participants In any other layout the MCU will transmit to each participant at the participant s sending resolution 3 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide HD The MCU transmits speaker resolution including input from HD participants at up to SD resolution If 1x1 i
417. ion setting as follows 0 The participant is not encrypted 1 The participant is encrypted 2 Auto The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Table C 20 Event Fields for Event 20 BILLING CODE Fo Participant Name The name of the participant who added the billing code Participant ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant who added the billing code Billing Info The numeric billing code that was added 32 characters Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 21 Event Fields for Event 21 SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME C o Participant Name The original name of the participant for example the name automatically assigned to an undefined participant such as lt conference name gt _ 000 Participant ID Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU identification number The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU to the participant by the MCU Display Name The new name assigned to the participant by the user or the name sent by the end point Table C 22 Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF CODE FAILURE eS Eee Participant Name Participant Name The name The name ofthe participant the The name of the participant P
418. is displayed in the video layout For more details about endpoint site names see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Audio and Visual Indications on page 3 25 Note This field is displayed in all tabs Endpoint Website Click the Endpoint Website hyperlink to connect to the internal website of the participant s endpoint It enables you to perform administrative configuration and troubleshooting activities on the endpoint The connection is available only if the IP address of the endpoint s internal site is defined in the Website IP Address field Dialing Direction Select the dialing direction e Dial in The participant dials in to the conference This field applies to IP participants only e Dial out The MCU dials out to the participant Type The network communication protocol used by the endpoint to connect to the conference H 323 or SIP The fields in the dialog box change according to the selected network type IP Address Enter the IP address of the participant s endpoint e For H 323 participant define either the endpoint IP address or alias For SIP participant define either the endpoint IP address or the SIP address Polycom Inc 8 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 8 3 New Participant General Properties Continued His I Ec Alias Name Type If you are using the endpoint s alias and not the IP address first H 323 Only select the type of alias and then enter the
419. isconnected RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s connected e IP Address of the MCU s control unit e Status The status of the MCU Connected the MCU is connected to the RMX Manager and can be managed by the RMX Manager user Disconnected The MCU is disconnected from the RMX Manager Major The MCU has a major problem MCU behavior could be affected and attention is required 18 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 18 8 e Product Type The MCU type RMX 1800 RealPresence Collaboration Server 1500 2000 4000 Before connecting to the MCU for the first time the Collaboration Server type is unknown so Collaboration Server is displayed instead as a general indication e Monitored When checked indicates that the conferences running on this MCU are automatically added to the Conferences list and monitored To stop monitoring the conferences running on this MCU and their participants clear the Monitored check box Video Resources The number of video resources that are available for conferencing e Audio Resources The number of audio resources that are available for conferencing MCUs Toolbar The MCUs toolbar contains the following buttons Add MCU Connect MCU Export Configuration Disconnect MCU Import Configuration Delete MCU MCU Properties 7csx M IQ Gl Display Name IP Address Status Product T Monitored Voice Video E9 172 22 186 45 172 22 186 45
420. itional audio file to be uploaded to the MCU 12 Once all the audio files are uploaded to the MCU close the Add Message File dialog box and return to the Add Language dialog box 13 Click OK Defining a New Conference IVR Service The Collaboration Server is shipped with two default Conference IVR Services and all its audio messages and video slide You can define new Conference IVR Services or modify the default Conference IVR Service Up to 40 IVR Services Conference IVR Services and Entry Queue IVR Services can be defined for a single Collaboration Server unit Defining a New Conference IVR Service 15 6 To define a new Conference IVR Service 1 On the IVR Services toolbar click the New Conference IVR Service EF button The New Conference IVR Service Global dialog box opens New Conference IVR Service gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name IVR_ENGLISH gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General gt Video Services Language English gt DTMF Codes La Ls External Server Authentication Never gt Operator Assistance Number of User Input Retries 13 Timeout for User Input Sec 5 DTMF Delimiter X o e Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services 2 Define the following parameters Table 15 3 Conference IVR Service Properties Global Parameters Conference IVR Enter the name of the Conference IVR Service The max
421. ity e When it is necessary to maintain backward compatibility with previous versions e When working with Polycom DMA RealPresence Resource Manager The Balanced settings are described in the section Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary on page 3 9 e Resource Optimized System resource usage is optimized by allowing high resolution connections only at high line rates and may result in lower video resolutions in comparison to other resolution configurations for some line rates Use this option when the priority is to save MCU resources and increase the number of participant connections The Resource Optimized settings are described in the section Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary on page 3 9 Polycom Inc Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing e Video Quality Optimized Video is optimized through higher resolution connections at lower line rates increasing the resource usage at lower line rates This may decrease the number of participant connections Use this option when the priority is to use higher video resolutions while decreasing the number of participant connections The Video Quality Optimized settings are described in the section Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary on page 3 9 e Manual Manually adjusting the sliders to accommodate local conferencing requirements Resolution Configur
422. iving data from to network Check the cables B 10 Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File The CDR Call Detail Records utility is used to retrieve conference information to a file The CDR utility can retrieve conference information to a file in both formatted and unformatted formats Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records The first record in each file contains information about the conference in general such as the conference name and start time The remaining records each contain information about one event that occurred during the conference such as a participant connecting to the conference or a user extending the length of the conference The first field in each record identifies the event type and this is followed by values containing information about the event The fields are separated by commas Formatted files contain basically the same information as unformatted files but with the field values replaced by descriptions Formatted files are divided into sections each containing information about one conference event The first line in each section is a title describing the type of event and this is followed by multiple lines each containing information about the event in the form of a descriptive field name and value Collaboration Server Web Client user interface at the time when the CDR information is retrieved The value of the fields that support Unicode values such as the info fields will b
423. k Service as Default oo cece ee cesseseeeeeesseseeseneneneees 16 34 Ethernet Setting S anesson a e EE reis ea EEEE euen 16 35 Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK Indications 16 35 Conference Prole soeone senie eana oie E ae at 16 35 Hardware Monitor nesciente nennen A E EES 16 36 Signaling Monitor vassere ereire ienie EE R D REE edeees 16 36 Conferencing asriseciirer i Rie ae E e e E E E E eA IENE ESE Eaa S ia 16 36 Defining Dial Out Participants ics ccscciicectiessiesitueasicaidesssetensssesndsestenseteese 16 36 Reserving Video Resources for a Conference 0 0 0 cesses ee eeseneeeneeeeneseees 16 37 Monitoring Conferences sisanra a a a 16 37 RESOULCE KOPO roa aani NE A IOE TAE 16 38 Port Gauge Indications siirsi n a E E E 16 38 The Call Detail Record CDR Utility 0 0000e eee 17 1 The CDR Fale ies esac is cate cass telus sacah ct aai a teensd atutenspsaisndesesavanstgies EA eee eaastareionss 17 1 CDR File Formats arnesa raen o Ca eed eisai Re eee 17 1 Multi Par CDR Paes osacsscenstessinscns teenete SoL RSET AE atonal AEE EAEE 17 2 viii Polycom Inc Table of Contents GUI SLIME resene eeen e geia eri ia EnEn EE 17 3 GDR File Contents n aroei eect rE EEEE EEE Ae ian aie 17 3 Viewing Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information s se sssssssssssssereeresrerree 17 4 Viewing the Conference Records ssssssesessiserersesiesresessrestestesresrestenresresresnssresresresses 17 4 Multi par
424. k to the All Participants pane Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Up in the Scanning Order Select a participant and click this button to move the participant Down in the Scanning Order 4 26 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Optional Add a participant to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned Click on the participant s name in the All Participants list and then click the Add button to move the participant to the Scanning Order pane Optional Delete a participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned Click ona participant s name in the Scanning Order list and then click the Delete button to move the participant back to the All Participants pane Optional Add all participants to the list of participants to be Auto Scanned by clicking the Add All button Optional Delete all participant from the list of participants to be Auto Scanned by clicking the Delete All button Optional Move the participant up in the Scanning Order by clicking the Up button Optional Move the participant down in the Scanning Order by clicking the Down button Click the Apply button to confirm and keep the Conference Properties dialog box open or click the OK the button to confirm and return to the Collaboration Server Web Client Main Screen Media Encryption Encryption is available at the conference and participant levels based on AES 128 Advanced Encryptio
425. keeper in your environment Default NO GRQ Gatekeeper Request Gatekeeper discovery is the process an endpoint uses to determine which gatekeeper to register with RRQ registration request sent to the gatekeeper 20 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued i ee SESSION_TIMEOUT_IN_MI If there is no input from the user or if the connection is idle for NUTES longer than the number of minutes specified by this flag the connection to the Collaboration Server is terminated Value 0 999 0 Session Timeout is disabled Default 0 SIP_AUTO_SUFFIX_EXTEN Used to automatically add a suffix to a SIP address To SION Address instead of adding it manually in the Collaboration Server Web Client SIP address when the SIP call is direct dial and not through a Proxy Example Participant Name john smith Company Domain maincorp com SIP_AUTO_SUFFIX_EXTENSION flag value maincorp com Entering john smith will generate a SIP URI john smith maincorp com STAR_DELIMITER_ALLOWE When set to YES an asterisk can be used as a delimiter in D Conference and Meeting Room dial strings The dial string is first searched for first followed by Default NO TERMINATE_CONF_AFTER_ From Version 8 1 this flag s functionality is replaced by the _CHAIR_DROPPED Terminate Conference after Chairperson Drops check box in the Profile IVR dialog box In
426. l other IVR messages The message is called No Video Resources Audio Only and the message file wav is called No video resources audio only wav The audio message must be added to the Conference and Entry Queue IVR Services separately The IVR message can be enabled disabled by the administrator using the ENABLE_NO_VIDEO_RESOURCES_ AUDIO_ONLY_MESSAGE System Flag in system cfg Possible values YES NO default YES If you wish to modify the flag value the flag must be added to the System Configuration file For more information see the Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Enter the message Name and Message File name for the Audio Only message Message Name No Video Resources Audio Only Message File name No_Video_Resources_Audio_Only wav Click the Video Services tab The New Entry Queue IVR Service Video Services dialog box opens gt Global gt Welcome Entry Queue IVR Service Name gt Conference ID gt General gt Video Services gt Operator Assistance video Welcome Slide z b EES b Add Slide Low Resolution In the Video Welcome Slide list select the video slide that will be displayed to participants connecting to the Entry Queue The slide list includes the video slides that were previously uploaded to the MCU memory To view any slide click the Preview Slide button Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services 14 If the video slide file was
427. larmListName octets Active le 7 rmxActiveAlarmRmxStatus rmxStatus major Binding Alarm Tab Binding Figure 3 An Example of an Alarm Fault Trap Each trap is sent with a time stamp the agent address and the manager address Status Trap The MCU sends status traps for the status MAJOR a trap is sent when the card MCU status is MAJOR All traps are considered MAJOR RMX MIB entities that do not generate traps The following table lists the entities that appear in the RMX MIB of the SNMP that do not generate traps These traps will be displayed as Faults in the System Alerts pane at the bottom of the Collaboration Server RMX Web Client screen Table 19 11 SNMP MIB entities that do not generate traps 5002 Resource process did not receive the Meeting Room list during a startup 5004 Task terminated Po 5008 Low Processing Memory P 5010 High system CPU usage L 5014 High CPU utilization Po 5009 Low system Memory o 19 20 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Table 19 11 SNMP MIB entities that do not generate traps Continued Key Description 5016 Process idle 5107 Failed to open Apache server configuration file 5108 Failed to save Apache server configuration file 5110 A private version is loaded 5111 NTP synchronization failure 5112 Invalid date and time 5116 Incorrect Ethernet Settings 5117 Smart Report found errors on hard disk
428. late 00 0 cece eeneneeeees 10 11 Starting an Operator Conference from a Template cee eens 10 12 Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance 10 13 Requesting Help rresiaren ienen n E E E ARR 10 13 Participant Alerts List n eesereeesresenreseereseereseeresteresteventesenresenreeenresenresenresesrenes 10 14 A dible Alarmna E E AE E E TER 10 14 Using Audible Alaris i cissseccscscsssscsseatsasesssensvasnepsacbasnstesteaansdsesensatuensvestupsivens 10 14 Moving Participants Between Conferences o c cceeesescsesssesesesesesesesesescaeseseecseenananeees 10 15 Moving Participants Options ceccccsececseseeseseseecesecesseseeseeeeesessesesesesseeeeeeseeees 10 16 Conference Templates sss seen cases Hee cre ews wanes cere eeern ts 11 1 GUT CLM S assess sess aa e n a A Gahan desausctanee bese ested E E seis ait 11 1 Using Conference Templates serieren ear n r EEEE EREE ENES 11 2 Toolbar BUON i sssssses desi ts cas snsestecaeeecestedssenste tein a E E 11 2 Creating a New Conference Template 0 0 0 0 ccseeseesescesseseesessssseeeesessssesesensseseeseeenenees 11 4 Creating a new Conference Template from Scratch ceceesesesseeseseeeseseeneneees 11 4 Saving an Ongoing or AVC based CP Operator Conference as a Template 11 7 Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template cece cesses ee eeseeeeeeeneeneees 11 8 Starting an Operator Conference from a Template AVC Conferencing 1
429. lates Exporting All Conference Templates from an MCU To export all Conference Templates from an MCU 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Web Client main window click the Conference Templates tab The Conference Templates list pane is displayed Miew Administration Setup Help RMX IP Address 10 226 105 24 Signaling Host 10 226 105 25 Logout FF e A K uime ja PrE EET MAM ERS Display Name Status 1D Start Time Name Status Role IP A Display Name Status H manager_32 Single Partici 99864 13 35 manager_327113350 1 participant ci SUPPORT_1 OK s Rex Wand lt gt Connected 10 Marc_12693 OK pad lz support oK E Bg nu oK E marc_20183 Ok ge mare oK I Duke_13626 OK IVR Services GB IP Network Services GH Recording Links Conference Profiles sp Factories EENI Participant Alerts nooo ooo Usages Video 07 40 WE y MCU State NORMAL THISIS ADOD SYSTEM AND IS SUBJECT TO MONITORING UNAUTHORIZED USE MAY SUBJECT YOU TO ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION OR CRIMINAL PROSECUTION AND PENALTIES 11 12 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc 3 Chapter 11 Conference Templates Click the Export Conference Templates E button or right click the Conference Templates list and then click Export Conference Templates Fae Display Name Status be L1 OK g 1111 New Conference Template B 2222 Delete Conference Template Start Co
430. le 167 ok Factory_Video_Profile 127 ok Factory_Video_Profile End Time Status Conference Password Profile The Reservations can be sorted searched and browsed by any of the listed fields Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Changing the Calendar View 9 6 To change between Week and Day views gt gt In Week View In the Reservation Calendar toolbar click Show Day 59 to change to Day View or In Day View In the Reservation Calendar toolbar click Show Week to change to Week View Week View Day View Back l View Previous Week Next TE View Next Week xeu ead Search 215 2009 su2v16 2008 Wigl2 17 2009 T 2719 2008 72 20 2003 Fr 2 2 2003 sa 4 03 l 09 T rrent Date 13 l l 1 l Show Day Y Back Z View Previous Day Next Gj View Next Day Today pm View Current Date in Day View Today E View Current Date in Week View ER Show Week Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations To view Today the current date gt gt In Week View or Day View in the Reservation Calendar toolbar click the Today button to have the current date displayed within the selected view Week View 2rssv2009 su2 16 2009 Mo2 17 2008 Ti 2is 2008Th220 2009 Frx2u2009 sal Current Date Today To change to List View 1 Inthe Reservation Calendar toolbar click the Reservations List E button The Reservation
431. lections of files are enabled using standard Windows conventions 2 Inthe Logger Diagnostic Files dialog box click the Browse button In the Browse for Folder window select the directory location to save the Logger files and click OK You will return to the Logger Diagnostic Files dialog box 4 Click the Retrieve Files button The log files in txt format are saved to the defined directory and a confirmation caption box is displayed indicating a successful retrieval of the log files Viewing the Logger Files To analyze the log files generated by the system open the retrieved txt files in any text editor application i e Notepad Textpad or MS Word 1 Using Windows Explorer browse to the directory containing the retrieved log files 2 Use any text editor application to open the log file s Information Collector Standard Security Mode 19 42 The Information Collector comprehensively attains all information from all the MCU internal entities for data analysis That data stored in a central repository is logged from the following system components e System Log Files e Full faults e CDR e Apache logs Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities e OS Core dumps CFG DNS DHCP CFG directory without IVR NTP kernal state event logs Signaling Trace files H 323 amp SIP e Cards info HW version state and status e Central Signaling logs e SW version number e Processe
432. les gt gt On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Tools gt Auditor Files The Auditor Files dialog box is displayed Auditor Files Select the files to be retrieved and then click the Retrieve Files button Name V Y Size Bytes Y First Message Y Last Message Y StartUp V File Retrieved Y Audit00000562_27 348447 27 June 2012 09 59 27 June 2012 10 3 True False Audit00000561_27 1116921 27 June 2012 03 00 27 June 2012 09 5 False False Audit00000560_26 1204694 26 June 2012 17 57 27 June 2012 02 5 False False Audit00000559_26 1941455 26 June 2012 13 26 26 June 2012 17 5 True False Audit00000558_26 270493 26 June 2012 13 15 26 June 2012 13 2 True False File List Audit00000557_26 198192 26 June 2012 13 10 26 June 2012 13 1 True False Audit00000556_26 643724 26 June 2012 10 08 26 June 2012 13 0 True False Audit00000555_26 1031899 26 June 2012 03 00 26 June 2012 10 0 False False Audit00000554_25 1095885 25 June 2012 19 01 26 June 2012 02 5 False False la Andinnnnnecco ac l an2nann AE Tuna 9099 99604 AC Wine I1 ANA l Calen Ealen ba Directory Path The Auditor Files dialogue box displays a file list containing the following file information Name Size Bytes First Message date and time of the first audit event in the file Last Message date and time of the last audit event in the fil
433. ll Except Me 5 Chairperson Mute Incoming Participants 86 Chairperson Mute My Line everyone Override Mute All Everyone Pause Recording 1 Chairperson Play Help Menu 83 Everyone Polycom Touch Control kgd Everyone Requestassistance for conference 00 Chairperson Request private assistance 0 Everyone m g e This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be performed during the conference by all participants or by the chairperson Table 15 9 New Conference IVR Service Properties DTMF Codes s 2 15 16 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Table 15 9 New Conference IVR Service Properties DTMF Codes See RP Secure Conference Chairperson Unsecured Conference Conference a Chairperson Request individual assistance ae Everyone Request assistance for conference o Chairperson 22 To modify the DTMF code or permission a Inthe DTMF Code column in the appropriate entry enter the new code b Inthe Permission column select from the list who can use this feature Everyone or just the Chairperson in the Conference IVR Service These options can be disabled by removing their codes from the Conference IVR Service e To disable the Secure Conference options in the DTMF Code column clear the DTMF codes of both Secured Conference 71 and Unsecured Conference 71 from the table By default the Secure Unsecure Conference and Show Number of Participa
434. ll description of the Advanced tab fields see New Participant Advanced Properties on page 8 12 10 Modify the fields of the Advanced tab 11 Click the Media Sources tab The Media Sources tab opens The Media Sources tab enables you to set up and save Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings for each participant For a full description of Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Changing the Video Layout of a Conference on page 3 46 and Video Forcing AVC Based CP Conferences on page 3 47 12 Modify the Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings for the participant 13 Optional Click the Information tab Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 11 6 The New Participant Information tab opens New Parucipant For a full description of the Information fields see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Information Tab on page 3 18 14 Click the OK button The participant you have defined is added to the Participants List The New Participant dialog box closes and you are returned to the New Template Participant dialog box which has remained open since Step 7 15 Optional In the New Conference Template dialog box click the Information tab Polycom Inc Chapter 11 Conference Templates The New Conference Template Information tab opens Newtonterence Template gt General gt Participants Display Nam
435. llaboration Server is reset 4 An Active Alarm is created when changes made to the system have not yet been implemented and the MCU must be reset Modifying the Management Network The Management Network parameters need to be modified if you want to e Connect directly to the Collaboration Server from a workstation e Modify routes e Modify DNS information To view or modify the Management Network Service 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click the IP Network Services button 2 Inthe IP Network Services list pane double click the Management Network H entry 16 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services The Management Network Properties IP dialog box opens janiagemient Network Properties i E gt IP gt Routers Network Service Name Management Network gt DNS gt Security Control Unit IP Address IPv4 72 21 125 89 Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 3 Modify the following fields Table 16 1 Default Management Network Service IP a Network Service Displays the name of the Management Network This name cannot be Name modified Note This field is displayed in all Management Network Properties tabs Control Unit IP The IPv4 address of the Collaboration Server Address This IP address is used by the Collaboration Server Web Client to connect to the Collaboration Server Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the Control Unit Polycom Inc 16 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Ad
436. llaboration Server will send video at the best possible resolution supported by endpoints regardless of the resolution received from the endpoints When Sharpness is selected as the Video Quality setting in the Conference Profile the Collaboration Server will send 4CIF H 263 at 15fps instead of CIF H 264 at 30fps H 264 High Profile protocol provides better compression of video images in line rates lower than 384 Kbps and it will be automatically selected for the endpoint if it supports H 264 High Profile If the endpoint does not support H 264 High Profile the Collaboration Server will try H 264 Base Profile which provides good compression of video images in line rates lower than 384 Kbps better than H 263 and not as good as H 264 High Profile When working with Collaboration Servers at low bit rates 128 256 or 384Kbps HDX endpoints will transmit SD15 resolution instead of 2CIF resolution When using a full screen 1x1 conference layout the Collaboration Server transmits the same resolution it receives from the endpoint Lost Packet Recovery LPR LPR creates additional packets that contain recovery information used to reconstruct packets that are lost during transmission Supported resolutions H 261 CIF QCIF Is supported in Continuous Presence CP conferences at resolutions of 288 x 352 pixels CIF and 144 x 176 pixels QCIF Both resolutions are supported at frame rates of up to 30 frames per second
437. lternate Yes in the IP service S P Outbound 60000 TCP SIP outbound proxy proxy Sometimes port 60000 is used when the system cannot reuse the TCP port This port can be set in the Central signaling CS configuration file Required for Binary Floor No port is not Control Protocol BFCP opened if SIP functionality for SIP People Content is People Content content disabled SIP TLS 60002 TCP sharing RTP 49152 UDP RTP media packets Yes It is configured 59999 The ports are dynamically in the Fixed Ports allocated section of the IP service CP allocated section of the IP service RTCP 49152 RTP control Yes It is configured 59999 The ports are dynamically in the Fixed Ports SIP TLS 5061 T SIP TLS for SIP server alternate SIP server outbound proxy and alternate outbound proxy Polycom Inc 16 27 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide LAN Redundancy LAN redundancy enables the redundant LAN port connection to automatically replace the failed port by using another physical connection and NIC Network Interface Card When a LAN port fails IP network traffic failure is averted and network or endpoints disconnections do not occur When LAN redundancy is enabled by default LAN 1 is the active port and LAN 2 is its backup Requirements LAN redundancy is disabled by default However you can change its availability by setting the LAN_REDUNDANCY system flag 4 You cannot enable LAN Redund
438. ltilingual Setting dialog box is displayed Murtiingual setting Select the languages to be available in the Login screen Name Selected Languages Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional 2 Click the check boxes of the languages to be available for selection 3 Click OK 4 Log out from the Collaboration Server Web Client and Log in for the customization to take effect Polycom Inc 19 33 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Banner Display and Customization The Login Screen and Main Screen of the Collaboration Server Web Client and the Collaboration Server Manager can display informative or warning text banners These banners can include general information or they can be cautioning users to the terms and conditions under which they may log into and access the system as required in many secured environments Banner display is enabled in the Setup gt Customize Display Settings gt Banners Configuration The administrator can choose one of four alternative login banners to be displayed The four alternative banners cannot be modified A Custom banner default can also be defined The Main Page Banner is blank and can be defined The Banner Configuration dialog box allows the administrator to select a Login Banner froma drop down menu Banner configuration You are accessing a U S Government USG Information System IS that is provided for USG authorized use only a Il
439. matted file This appendix can be referred to for information regarding the contents of fields in the unformatted text file but does not reflect the exact contents of the formatted text file Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File on page C 1 contains a full list of the events fields Polycom Inc 17 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Viewing Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information Viewing the Conference Records To open the CDR utility On the Collaboration Server Menu click Administration gt CDR The CDR List pane opens displaying a list of the conference CDR records stored in the MCU memory COR gt ee Start Time W GMT Start Time YW Duratio gt Reserved Start Tim W Reserved Duration W Status W File Retrieved 2 za a 1449 Default System 23 August 2007 20 23 August 20071 00 01 12 23 August 2007 20 0 168 00 00 Conferenc No i E 1449 Default System 29 January 201219 29 January 2012 00 00 03 29 January 201219 168 00 00 7 Conference No i E 1449 Default System 29 January 201219 29 January 2012 00 00 02 29 January 201219 168 00 00 Conferenc No el EQ 22 March 2012 17 0 22 March 2012 15 00 01 06 22 March 2012 17 0 01 00 00 Conference No aA 2599 Default System 30 April 2012 14 44 30 April 2012 11 00 02 21 30 April 2012 14 44 168 00 00 Conference No E 2599 Default System 24 May 2012 17 16 24 May 2012 14 00 19 57 24 May 2012 17 16 168 00 00 Conferenc
440. matted file except the first record contain standard fields such as the event type code and the time stamp followed by fields that are event specific The event fields are separated by commas Two consecutive commas with nothing between them or acomma followed immediately by a semi colon indicates an empty field as in the example below FY SUPPORT_1422547546_c151 cdr WordPad 10 x File Edit View Insert Format Help Dist all al lele l 11001 22 07 2007 13 00 54 0 SUPPORT_1422547546 101 22 p7 2007 13 00 56 0 SUPPORT igal pyx 0 0 0 1 0 Default IP Service 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 2101 22 07 2007 13 00 56 0 2 0 2 5 0 1 294967295 2887167150 1720 3010 22 07 2007 13 00 56 0 0 17 22 07 2007 13 01 02 0 igal pvx 0 1 0 0 0 7 22 07 2007 13 01 11 0 igal pvx 0 192 0 7 22 07 2007 14 00 49 0 igal pvx 0 14 0 2 22 07 2007 14 00 49 0 3 For Help press F1 Standard Event Record Fields Polycom Inc All event records start with the following fields e The CDR event type code For a list of event type codes and descriptions refer to Table C 2 CDR Event Types on page C 4 e The event date e The event time The structure length This field is required for compatibility purposes and always contains the value 0 C 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Event Types The table below contains a list of the events that can be logged in the CDR file and indicates where to
441. maximum of 168 hours Therefore the default duration can be used e This field is displayed in all tabs Polycom Inc 10 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 10 10 Table 10 1 New Conference General Options Continued C Routing Name Routing Name is the name with which ongoing conferences Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP Factories register with various devices on the network such as gatekeepers and SIP servers This name must be defined using ASCII characters Comma colon and semicolon characters cannot be used in the Routing Name The Routing Name can be defined by the user or automatically generated by the system if no Routing Name is entered as follows e If ASCII characters are entered as the Display Name it is used also as the Routing Name e Ifa combination of Unicode and ASCII characters or full Unicode text is entered as the Display Name the ID such as Conference ID is used as the Routing Name If the same name is already used by another conference Meeting Room or Entry Queue the Collaboration Server displays an error message and requests that you to enter a different name ID Enter the unique per MCU conference ID If left blank the MCU automatically assigns a number once the conference is launched This ID must be communicated to conference participants to enable them to dial in to the conference Conference Leave this field empty when defining an Operator conference Password Ch
442. me a conference is scheduled and when it becomes active the IP of an endpoint may 8 Optional Add information to the reservation Information entered in the Information tab is written to the Call Detail Record CDR when the reservation is activated Changes made to this information before it becomes an ongoing conference will be saved to the CDR For more information see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Information Tab on page 3 18 9 Click OK The New Reservation is created and is displayed in the Reservation Calendar Polycom Inc 9 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide If you create a recurring reservation all occurrences have the same ID The series number _0000n of each reservation is appended to its Display Name Example Conference Template name Sales Display Name for single scheduled occurrence Sales If 3 recurrences of the reservation are created Display Name for occurrence 1 Sales_00001 Display Name for occurrence 2 Sales 00002 Display Name for occurrence 3 Sales _ 00003 Managing Reservations Reservations can be accessed and managed via all the views of the Reservations List Guidelines e The Recurrence Pattern fields in the Schedule tab that are used to create multiple occurrences of a Reservation are only displayed when the Reservation and its multiple occurrences are initially created e As with single occurrence Reservations only the Duration Start Time and End Time parameter
443. mi colon characters may not be used in this field Dialing Direction Select Dial in IP Address If a gatekeeper is used This field is left empty If a gatekeeper is not used Enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of the MCU running the other conference Alias Name If a gatekeeper is used Enter the name of the other second conference If a gatekeeper is not used Enter the ID of the MCU running the other second conference Polycom Inc 5 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 5 1 New Participant Dial in Cascade Link Continued Alias Type If a gatekeeper is used H 323 ID If a gatekeeper is not used Select E 164 digits 0 9 3 Click the Advanced tab The Advanced tab opens gt General gt Advanced Name Shelley gt Information Endpoint Website Video Bit Rate V Auto Kbits sec Resolution Auto X Video Protocol Auto x Broadcasting Volume Listening Volume a AO Encryption Auto Cascade None 7 Master Slave V AGC Add to Address Book 4 Inthe Cascaded Link field select Slave if the participant is defined in a conference running on a Slave MCU Master if the participant is defined in a conference running on the Master MCU 5 Click the OK button 5 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 5 Cascading Conferences Monitoring Star Cascaded Conferences To monitor both conferences at the same time two instances of the Collaboration Serve
444. ministrator s Guide 4 Click the Routers tab janagement Network Properties am IP gt gt Routers Network Service Name Management Network gt DNS gt Security Default Router IP Address 1Pv4 172 21 125 254 Static Routes Router IP Addreg Remote IP Addrd Subnet Mask Remote Type 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network 5 Modify the following fields Table 16 2 Default Management Network Service Routers a ee Default Router IPv4 Enter the IP address of the default router The IP Address default router is used whenever the defined static routers are not able to route packets to their destination The default router is also used when host access is restricted to one default router 16 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services Table 16 2 Default Management Network Service Routers Continued Sn Static Routes The system uses Static Routes to search other networks for endpoint addresses that are not found on the local LAN Up to five routers can be defined in addition to the Default Router The order in which the routers appear in the list determines the order in which the system looks for the endpoints on the various networks If the address is in the local subnet no router is used To define a static route starting with th
445. monitored Use of this system authorized or unauthorized constitutes consent to monitoring of this system Unauthorized use may subject you to criminal prosecution Evidence of any such unauthorized use collected during monitoring may be used for administrative criminal or other adverse action Use of this system constitutes consent to monitoring for these purposes Customizing Banners The Login and Main Screen banners can be customized to display conference information assistance information or warning text as required in the Ultra Secure Mode To customize the banners 1 Inthe Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt Customize Display Settings gt Banners Configuration The Banners Configuration dialog box opens ErariFver CONFIGUPSEION nN Login Page Banner You are accessing a U S Govemment USG Information System IS that is provided for USG authorized use only a By using this IS which includes any device attached to this IS you consent to the following conditions Sample 1 X The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS for purposes including but not limited to Sane penetration testing COMSEC monitoring network operations and defense personnel misconduct PM law enforcement x Sample 3 Sample 4 Custom IV Main Page Banner Restore Default 2 Customize the banners by modifying the following fields Table 19 18 B
446. n Flag to to Value Content Content Channel Channel Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Participant 1 Participant and entire conference share content at 192Kbps 384 192 Participant will not receive content 1024 384 E a Participant and entire conference share content at 384Kbps Participant and entire conference share content at 384Kbps Participant 2 1024 H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized The H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized option maintains content quality and minimizes the amount of content refreshes that occur in large cascading conferences when participants connect or disconnect from the conference In AVC CP conferences each content Line Rate and Content Setting has its own resolution and frame rate In AVC CP conferences endpoints that do not support the required content parameters Content line rate H 264 protocol and Content Resolution will not receive content Endpoints that do not support the required content parameters Content line rate and Content Resolution cannot share content Guidelines e In Cascading conferences the cascade link must be H 323 e H 264 High Profile is not supported Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Enabling H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized Content Sharing in AVC CP Conferences When H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized is selected as the Content Protocol an additional field Content Resolution is displayed in the Content Video Definition pane The Content
447. n Standard and is fully H 233 H 234 compliant and the Encryption Key exchange DH 1024 bit Diffie Hellman standards Media Encryption Guidelines Polycom Inc Encryption is not available in all countries and it is enabled in the MCU license Contact Polycom Support to enable it Endpoints must support both AES 128 encryption and DH 1024 key exchange standards which are compliant with H 235 H 323 to encrypt and to join an encrypted conference The encryption mode of the endpoints is not automatically recognized therefore the encryption mode must be set for the conference or the participants when defined Conference level encryption must be set in the Profile and cannot be changed once the conference is running If an endpoint connected to an encrypted conference stops encrypting its media it is disconnected from the conference In Cascaded conferences the link between the cascaded conferences must be encrypted in order to encrypt the conferences The recording link can be encrypted when recording from an encrypted conference to the RSS that is set to encryption For more information see Recording Link Encryption on page 13 7 Encryption of SIP Media is supported using SRTP Secured Real time Transport Protocol and the AES key exchange method Encryption of SIP Media requires the encryption of SIP signaling TLS Transport Layer must be used Encryption of SIP Media is supported in conferences as follows 4 27 Polycom
448. n be implemented when a Conference Content Rate that is automatically calculated by the Collaboration Server may not be suitable in a Cascaded Environment where conference line rates may vary widely between the cascaded conferences For example one conference may have a line rate of 2 Mbps and the other a line rate of is 512kbps Guidelines e Cascaded conferences may have different Conference Line Rates e The Customized Content Rate must be the same for all cascaded conferences Polycom Inc 4 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To Select the Customized Content Rate Customized Content Rate is enabled in the Profile Video Quality dialog box gt General gt Advanced gt Video Quality gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Display Name Line Rate People Video Definition Video Quality Maximum Resolution Content Video Definition Content Settings Content Protocol 4096 Kops gt Motion Ld Le Auto CustomizedContentRate H 264 HD v o e In the Content Settings list select Customized Content Rate When selected a drop down menu of the available Conference Content Rates is displayed These Content Line Rates are based on and will vary according to the selected Conference Line Rate The largest selectable Cont
449. n be moved to LPR enabled conferences LPR enabled endpoints cannot be moved to non LPR enabled conferences e When connecting via an Entry Queue A participant using an LPR enabled endpoint can be moved to a non LPR enabled conference The participant is connected with LPR enabled Polycom Inc 4 35 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Enabling Lost Packet Recovery LPR is enabled or disabled in the Conference Profile dialog box e CP Conferences LPR is enabled by default in the New Profile Advanced dialog box For more information see Defining New Profiles on page 2 9 Monitoring Lost Packet Recovery In the Participant Properties H 245 tab LPR activity is displayed in all three panes gt General gt Advanced Name Endpoint Website gt Information Endpoint Type AVC X gt Media Sources R mote Communication Mode gt Connection Status S eee er per packet gt Channel Status z eae B aseline Profi minProtectionPeri Level Channel Status Adva N ryasPiotectionPeriod 150 CustomMaxMBPS at 40 20000 MB s gt Gatekeeper Status maxRecoverySet 24 CustomMaxFS at 7 1792 MBs W263 128000 by ecoveryPackets 5 maxPacketsize G7221C 2 frames per packet Supported Rates are 48K 32K 24K Siren 4_48k 2 frames per packet Siren 4_32k 2 frames per packet Siren14_24k 2 frames per packet G7221_32k 2 frames per packet 24k 2 frames per packet c
450. n can be enabled for all participants connecting to the MCU if the name of the participants are defined in the Address Book To enable or disable the Obtain Display Name from Address Book option 1 On the Collaboration Server main menu bar click Setup gt Customize Display Settings gt Ongoing Conferences The Ongoing Conferences dialog box is displayed Ongoing Conferences Obtain display name from address book 2 Select the Obtain display name from address book check box to enable the feature or clear the check box to disable the feature 8 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 3 Click OK 8 22 Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Importing and Exporting Address Books Address Books are proprietary Polycom data files that can only be distributed among Collaboration Server units The Address Books are exported in XML format which are editable offline If no name is assigned to the exported Address Book the default file name is EMA DataObjects OfflineTemplates Addr ssbookContent_ xml Exporting an Address Book To Export an Address Book 1 Inthe Address Book pane click the Export Address Book E button or right click an empty area in the pane and click Export Address Book The Export Address Book dialog box is displayed Export Address Book xj Export Address Book Path 2 Enter the desired path or click the Browse button 3 In the Save Address
451. n native language character sets to be displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client In conferences Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and SIP factories the system automatically generates an ASCII name for the Display Name field that can be modified using Unicode encoding e English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most characters length varies according to the field European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of the maximum Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the maximum The maximum length of text fields also varies according to the mixture of character sets Unicode and ASCII Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters If the same name is already used by another conference Meeting Room or Entry Queue the Collaboration Server displays an error message requesting you to enter a different name Routing Name The Routing Name is defined by the user however if no Routing Name is entered the system will automatically assign a new name when the Profile is saved as follows e Ifan all ASCII text is entered in Display Name it is used also as the Routing Name If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text or full Unicode text is entered in Display Name the ID such as Conference ID is used as the Routing Name Profile The default Profile is selected by default If required select the conference Profile from the list of Profiles defined in the MCU A new conference is created u
452. n of H 239 Content that is being shared in a conference Content Broadcast Control achieves this by giving Content Token ownership to a specific endpoint via the Collaboration Server Web Client Other endpoints are not able to send content until Content Token ownership has been transferred to another endpoint via the Collaboration Server Web Client Guidelines e Content Broadcast Control is supported in CP conferences e Content Broadcast Control is supported in H 323 environments Only the selected Content Token owner may send content and Content Token requests from other endpoints are rejected e Content Token ownership is valid until Itis canceled by the Collaboration Server User via the Collaboration Server Web Client The owner releases it The endpoint of the Content Token owner disconnects from the conference e The Collaboration Server User can cancel Content Token ownership Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information e n cascaded conferences a participant functioning as the cascade link cannot be given token ownership Giving and Cancelling Token Ownership To give token ownership 1 Inthe Participants list right click the AVC enabled endpoint that is to receive Content Token ownership BIS k amp o Ba uw GF Name Status Role IP Address Phc Marc_59446123 2 participants Rex Mar on Disconnect Participant fey HDX Delete Participant Mute Audio Sus
453. n page 15 6 Click the Conference Chairperson tab The New Conference IVR Service Conference Chairperson dialog box opens If required enable the chairperson functionality and select the various voice messages and options for the chairperson connection For more information see Table 15 4 New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages on page 15 9 Click the Conference Password tab The New Conference IVR Service Conference Password dialog box opens If required enable the request for conference password before moving the participant from the conference IVR queue to the conference and set the MCU behavior for password request for Dial in and Dial out participant connections For more information see Table 15 5 New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Password Parameters on page 15 10 Select the various audio messages that will be played in each case For more information see Table 15 5 New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Password Parameters on page 15 10 10 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 10 4 11 12 13 14 15 16 Click the General tab The New Conference IVR Service General dialog box opens Select the messages that will be played during the conference For more information see Table 15 6 Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages on page 15 11 Click the Video Services tab The N
454. n page 20 1 5 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 5 20 Polycom Inc Meeting Rooms A Meeting Room is a conference saved on the MCU in passive mode without using any of the system resources A Meeting Room is automatically activated when the first participant dials into it Meeting Rooms can be activated as many times as required Once activated a Meeting Room functions as any ongoing conference In AVC CP Conferences dial out participants can be connected to the conference automatically or manually In the automatic mode the system calls all the participants one after the other In the manual mode the Collaboration Server user or meeting organizer instructs the conferencing system to call the participant Dial out participants must be defined mainly their name and added to the conference This mode can only be selected at the conference Meeting Room definition stage and cannot be changed once the conference is ongoing A Meeting Room can be designated as a Permanent Conference For more information see Audio Algorithm Support on page 4 45 The maximum of number of Meeting Rooms that can be defined is 1000 The system is shipped with four default Meeting Rooms as shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Default Meeting Rooms List Meeting Room Name Do Default Line Rate Maple_Room 1001 384 Kbps Meeting Rooms List Polycom Inc Meeting Rooms are listed in the Meeting Room list pane To list Meeting Rooms gt
455. n set to NO the Content channel is closed In such a case H 239 Content is sent via the video channel people video enabling endpoints that do not support H 239 Content sharing to receive the Content in their video channel Default YES ENABLE_H239_ANNEX_T In H 239 enabled MIH Cascading when MGC is on level 1 enables sending Content using Annex T ENABLE_SELECTIVE_MIXI Enables default or disables the Automatic muting of noisy NG AVC endpoints For more details see Permanent Conference on page 4 48 When set to YES the automatic muting of noisy endpoints can be enabled or disabled at the conference level in the Conference Profile Audio Settings dialog box When set to NO the automatic muting of noisy endpoints is disabled at the conference level and cannot be enabled in the Conference Profile Audio Settings dialog box Default YES Note MCU reset is not required when changing the flag value 20 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued i ee ENABLE_SIP_PEOPLE_PLU S_CONTENT ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_AL L USER_AGENT ENABLE_SIRENLPR ENABLE_SIRENLPR_SIP_E NCRYPTION ENABLE_VIDEO_PREVIEW FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_ CASCADED_LINK_CONNE CTION FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FO R_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPA NT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_ MODE FORCE_G711A If security is of higher priority than SIP Content sharing SIP People Content can be disabled by se
456. n the course of system maintenance the activities of authorized users also may be monitored Anyone using this system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised that if such monitoring reveals possible criminal activity system personnel may provide the evidence of such monitoring to law enforcement officials Sample 3 Banner You are about to access a system that is intended for authorized users only You should have no expectation of privacy in your use of this system Use of this system constitutes consent to monitoring retrieval and disclosure of any information stored within the system for any purpose including criminal prosecution Sample 4 Banner This computer system including all related equipment network devices specifically including Internet access is provided only for authorized use All computer systems may be monitored for all lawful purposes including ensuring that their use is authorized for management of the system to facilitate protection against unauthorized access and to verify security procedures survivability and operational security Monitoring 19 35 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide includes active attacks by authorized personnel and their entities to test or verify the security of the system During monitoring information may be xamined recorded copied and used for authorized purposes All information including personal information placed on or sent over this system may be
457. naling Montor W Hardware Monitor E Meeting Rooms muy 1500 test ISR LAB TPX S Eng400_1 E Reservations Eng400_2 Peer eaeageaeagaeageeaeaeaegageaagaaageaaaag All Participants Eng400_3 i eenaa am m SAS Participant Alerts Port Usage Voice 0 48 Wi Video Z6 75Wi MCU State MAJOR Only one MCU can be selected in the MCUs pane If only one MCU is connected it is automatically selected The selected MCU is highlighted The menu items the Collaboration Server Management features the Address Book and the Conference Templates are all properties of the selected MCU and apply to it 18 6 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application MCUs Pane The MCUs pane includes a list of MCUs and a toolbar Sex M ASS 5 Display Name IP Address Status Product T Monitored voice video E 172 22 186 45 172 22 186 45 Disconnect RMX 40 V For each listed MCU the system displays the following information e MCU Display Name the name of the MCU and its icon according to its type and connection status The following icons are available Table 18 1 MCU Icons and Statuses C RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1500 disconnected m eeo e reo e o RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 4000 connected RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 disconnected RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 connected RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s d
458. nces and SIP Factories Listing Entry Queues To view the list of Entry Queues gt gt Inthe RMX Management Rarely Used pane click Entry Queues The Entry Queues are listed in the Entry Queues pane entry Queues 1 el ta iP Name ID Profile Dial in Number 1 i DefaultEQ 1000 Factory You can double click an Entry Queue to view its properties Modifying the EQ Properties To modify the EQ gt gt Inthe Entry Queues pane either double click or right click and select Entry Queue Properties of the selected Entry Queue in the list The Entry Queue Properties dialog box is displayed All the fields may be modified except Routing Name Transit Entry Queue Polycom Inc A Transit Entry Queue is an Entry Queue to which calls with dial strings containing incomplete or incorrect conference routing information are transferred IP Calls are routed to the Transit Entry Queue when e A gatekeeper is not used or where calls are made directly to the Collaboration Server s Signaling IP Address with incorrect or without a Conference ID e When a gatekeeper is used and only the prefix of the Collaboration Server is dialed with incorrect or without a Conference ID e When the dialed prefix is followed by an incorrect conference ID When no Transit Entry Queue is defined all calls containing incomplete or incorrect conference routing information are rejected by the Collaboration Server In the Transit Entry Queue
459. ncing Mode SVC Only z gt IVR gt Information gt Network Services r r Speaker Change Threshold Seconds r In SVC conferences all Audio Settings options are disabled Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring Assistance CP Conferences 12 12 Operator conferences are monitored in the same way as standard ongoing conferences Each Operator conference includes at least one participant the Operator View Administration Setup Help axe Hi BR oe ke OG Oo S a eC H fa Display Name Status ID V Start Time End Time Name Status Role IP Address Phone Alias Name Network Dialing Dil S Marc 59286 12 40 15 30 Marc 2 participants 1 Marc_as306 Empty 26644 10 20 13 00 Marc gt Connected 10 253 72 13 H323 amp Dial of Rex HDX lt Connected 10 253 72 24 SIP amp Dial o You can view the properties of the Operator conference by double clicking the conference entry in the Conferences list or by right clicking the conference entry and selecting Conference Properties For more information see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Conference Level Monitoring on page 3 32 Requesting Help A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from his her touch tone telephone or the endpoint s DTMF input device The participant can request Individual Assistance default DTMF code 0 or Conference Assistance
460. nd can give added efficiency to Collaboration Server management tasks especially when deployed on workstations affected by e Lack of performance due to bandwidth constraints within the LAN WAN environment e Slow operation and disconnections that can be caused by the anti phishing component of various antivirus applications Users with Auditor authorization level cannot connect to the RMX via the RMX Manager application and must use the Web Client The RMX Manager application can be installed in your local workstation or accessed directly on the RMX system without installing it in your workstation Installing the RMX Manager Polycom Inc The RMX Manager application can be downloaded from one of the RMX systems installed in your site or from Polycom web site at http www polycom com support New RMX Installation Note The Collaboration Server Installation and First Entry Configuration must be completed before installing the RMX Manager application For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Installing the RMX 1800 on page 2 3 Once the connection to the Collaboration Server unit is established and the Login window is displayed the RMX Manager application can be installed 18 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To install RMX Manager downloading the application from the RMX 1 Start Internet Explorer and connect to one of the Collaboration Server units in your site It is rec
461. nd less listener fatigue with audio and visual communication applications Siren 22 requires less computing power and has much lower latency than alternative wideband audio technologies The SirenLPR audio algorithm provides CD quality audio for better clarity and less listener fatigue with audio and visual communication applications e Siren 22 and G 719 are supported in both mono and stereo e Stereo is supported in H 323 calls only e Siren 22 is supported by Polycom HDX and Group series endpoints e SirenLPR is enabled by default and can be disabled by setting the system flag ENABLE_SIRENLPR to NO e SirenLPR is supported In IP H 323 SIP calls only With Polycom CMAD and HDX Canyon and Group series endpoints For mono audio at audio line rates of 32Kbps 48Kbps and 64Kbps For stereo audio at audio line rates of 64Kbps 96Kbps and 128Kbps SIP Encryption The ENABLE_SIRENLPR_SIP_ENCRYPTION System Flag enables the SirenLPR audio algorithm when using encryption with the SIP protocol The default value of this flag is NO meaning SirenLPR is disabled by default for SIP participants in an encrypted conference To enable SirenLPR the System Flag must be added to system cfg and its value set to YES Mono The Siren 22and SirenLPR mono audio algorithms are supported at the following bit rates Table 4 14 Siren22 and SirenLPR Mono vs Bitrate Audio Algorithm Minimum Bitrate kbps Siren22 64k Siren2
462. nd video multi processing operation MIB II RFC1213 MIB Holds basic network information and statistics about the following RFC1213 MIB protocols TCP UDP IP ICMP and SNMP In addition it holds a table of interfaces that the Agent has MIB II also contains basic identification information for the system such as Product Name Description Location and Contact Person ENTITY MIB Describes the unit physically Number of slots type of board in each ENTITY MIB slot and number of ports in each slot Unified MIB The Collaboration Server uses the Polycom Unified MIB in addition to the RMX specific MIB The Polycom Unified MIB is an MIB that is used by many Polycom products The following table describes the information provided by the Collaboration Server in the Unified MIB Table 19 10 Unified MIB SNMP Fields eee Indicates whether the unit is in a debugging state whether the unit is ina Indicates whether the unit is in a debugging state state IncomingCallsReqrGK Boolean Indicates whether a gatekeeper is required to receive incoming H 323 calls OutgoingCallsReqrGK Boolean Indicates whether a gatekeeper is required to make outgoing H 323 calls HDBitrate Thrshid Integer The minimum bit rate required by endpoints in order to connect to an HD conference MaxCPRstin Maximum resolution of a CP conference resolution of Maximum resolution of a CP conference CP conference MaxCPRstinCfg Configured resolution for a
463. ndicates that the certificate files required for SIP TLS could not be files loaded to the Collaboration Server Possible causes are e Incorrect certificate file name Only files with the following names can be loaded to the system rootCA pem pkey pem cert pem and certPassword txt Wrong certificate file type Only files of the following types can be loaded to the system rootCA pem pkey pem and cert pem and certPassword txt The contents of the certificate file does not match the system parameters SIP TLS Registration handshake failure This alarm indicates a mismatch between the security protocols of the OCS and the Collaboration Server preventing the Registration of the Collaboration Server to the OCS SIP TLS Registration server not This alarm is displayed when the Collaboration Server does not receive a responding response from the OCS to the registration request in the expected time frame Possible causes are e The Collaboration Server FQDN name is not defined in the OCS pool or is defined incorrectly The time frame for the expected response was too short and it will be updated with the next data refresh The alarm may be cleared automatically the next time the data is refreshed The Collaboration Server FQDN name is not defined in the DNS server Ping the DNS using the Collaboration Server FQDN name to ensure that the Collaboration Server is correctly registered to the DNS SIP TLS Registration transport error This alarm indicate
464. ne Rate Select the conference bit rate The line rate represents the combined video audio and Content rate The default setting is 384 Kbps Notes e This field is displayed in all tabs Routing Name Enter the Profile name using ASCII characters set The Routing Name can be defined by the user or automatically generated by the system if no Routing Name is entered as follows e Ifan all ASCII text is entered in Display Name it is used also as the Routing Name If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text or full Unicode text is entered in Display Name the ID such as Conference ID is used as the Routing Name Operator Conference Select this option to define the profile of an Operator conference For more information see Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move on page 10 1 4 Click the Advanced tab The New Profile Advanced dialog box opens gt General pee Display Name j gt Video Quality Line Rate s4 kops gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR gt Recording z gt Site Names oe eran gt Message Overlay IV Packet Loss Compensation LPR and DBA gt Network Services IV Auto Terminate Before First Joins 10 i Minutes At the End 1 I Minutes C After last participant quits C When last participant remains Auto Redialing I Exclusive Content Mode TIP Compatibility None IV Enable FECC FW NAT Keep Alive Interval 0 Se
465. nect to the MCU The Authorization indicates the Authorization Level assigned to the User Administrator Administrator Read only Operator Chairperson or Auditor Disabled indicates whether the user is disabled and cannot access the system unless enabled by the administrator For more details see Disabling a User on page 14 4 Locked indicates whether the user has been locked out and cannot access the system unless enabled by the administrator Adding a New User Administrators can add new users to the system 4 The User Name and Password must be in ASCII To add a new user to the system 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click the Users FY button 2 The Users pane is displayed 14 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 14 Users Connections and Notes 3 Click the New User R button or right click anywhere in the pane and then click New User The User Properties dialog box opens User Name Password Authorization Level Operator I Associate with a machine FQDN 4 Inthe User Name text box enter the name of the new user This is the login name used by the user when logging into the system 5 Inthe Password text box enter the new user s password This will be the user s password when logging into the system 6 Inthe Authorization Level list select the user type Administrator Administrator Read Only Operator Chairperson or Auditor 7 Optional To associate a user with a machin
466. neral gt Video Services I Enable Chairperson Messages gt DTMF Codes Oparalpr Assistance Chairperson Identifier Request Request Chairperson Password Retry Chairperson Password Chairperson Identifier Key r 15 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services 8 Select the Enable Chairperson Messages check box to enable the chairperson functionality If this feature is disabled participants are not able to connect as the chairperson system first plays the prompt Enter conference password However if the participant enters the chairperson password the participant becomes the chairperson To play the prompt requesting the Chairperson password For conference chairperson services do not select the Enable Password Messages option When both Conference Password and Chairperson Password options are enabled and defined the 9 Select the various voice messages and options for the chairperson connection If the files were not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server Table 15 4 New Conference IVR Service Properties Conference Chairperson Options and Messages Chairperson Identifier Select the audio file that requests the participants to enter the key Request that identifies them as the conference chairperson Request Chairperson Select the
467. nference Template you want to schedule as a Reservation 11 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 11 10 Click the Schedule Reservation from Template 25 button or Right click and select Schedule Reservation from Template onterence Templates 6 n aj New Conference Template Delete Conference Template Start Conference from Template 2 10 o bg Duke_13626 OK Import Conference Templates Export Conference Templates Export Selected Conference Templates Template Properties The Reservation Properties dialog box is displayed The Display Name of the Reservation is taken from the Conference Template Display Name Conference Template and Reservation Name New Reservation Display Name Duration Ca Sj Start Time 2 18 2009 z 22 B foo B End Time 2 18 2009 z 23 fl foo A J Recurring Meeting currence Pattern Pattern Weekly z Recur every 1 week s on I sunday IT Monday I Tuesday IZ Wednesday I Thursday D Friday I Saturday End after occurrences End by Date 2 18 2009 E For a full description of the Reservation Properties fields see Table 9 2 New Reservation Schedule Tab on page 9 11 Modify the fields of the Reservation Properties Click the OK button A Reservation is created based on the Conference Template The Reservation can be viewed and modified along with all other Reservations using the Reservations Calen
468. nference from Template Schedule Reservation from Template Template Properties The Conference Templates Export dialog box is displayed Conference Templates Export OOOO fe Export Path Templates file name confTemplates xml Profiles file name coniProbles xmi IV Export includes conference profiles In the Export Path field type the path name to the location where you want to save the exported file or click Browse to select the desired path Optional Clear the Export includes conference profiles check box when you only want to export Conference Templates When this check box is cleared the Conference Templates Export dialog box is displayed without the Profiles file name field cones Tepes po Se Templates file name _confTemplates xml In the Templates file name field type the file name prefix The file name suffix _confTemplates xml is predefined by the system For example if you type Templates01 the exported file name is defined as TemplatesO1_confTemplates xml The system automatically defines the Profiles file name field with the same file name prefix as the Templates file name field For example if you type Templates01 in the Templates file name field the exported profiles file name is defined as Templates01_confProfiles xml 11 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 6 Click OK to export the Conference Templates and Conference Profiles to a fil
469. nferences by defining the dialing direction e Create the Master and Slave conferences defining the appropriate line rate e Create a cascade enabled Dial out Participant link in the Master conference e Create a cascade enabled Dial in Participant link in the Slave conference Creating a Cascade Enabled Dial out Dial in Participant Link The connection between two cascaded conferences is established by a cascade enabled dial out and dial in participants acting as a cascades link The dialing direction determines whether the dial out participant is defined in the conference running on the Master MCU or the Slave MCU For example if the dialing direction is from the Master conference on level 1 to the Slave conference on level 2 the dial out participant is defined in the Master conference on level 1 and a dial in participant is defined in the Slave conference running on the MCU on level 2 If the cascade enabled dial out participant always connects to the same destination conference on the other second MCU the participant properties can be saved in the Address Book of the MCU for future repeated use of the cascaded link To define the dial out cascade participant link 1 Inthe Conferences pane select the conference 2 Inthe Participants pane click New Participant 4 5 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The New Participant General dialog box is displayed New Participant Dialing Direction Type IP Address
470. nferencing entity that enables SIP endpoints to create Ad Hoc conferences The system is shipped with a default SIP Factory named DefaultFactory The default SIP Factory uses the conferencing ID 7001 If a SIP Factory is being used do not assign this ID to any conferencing entity including conferences reservations and meeting rooms When a SIP endpoint calls the SIP Factory URI a new conference is automatically created based on the Profile parameters and the endpoint joins the conference The SIP Factory URI must be registered with the SIP server to enable routing of calls to the SIP Factory To ensure that the SIP factory is registered the option to register Factories must be selected in the Default IP Network Service The maximum of number of SIP Factories that can be defined is 40 Creating SIP Factories To create a new SIP Factory 1 Inthe RMX Management Rarely Used pane click SIP Factories 2 Inthe SIP Factories list pane click the New SIP Factory t button The New Factory dialog box opens New SIP Factory p Display Name SUPPORT_1023356869 Duration ij 00 Routing Name Profile I Factory_Video_Profile xl I Automatic Connection Polycom Inc 7 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 3 Define the following parameters Table 7 3 New Factory Properties er Display Name Enter the SIP Factory name that will be displayed The Display Name is the conferencing entity name i
471. ng SIP BFCP Content In the SIP Participant Properties dialog box BFCP status information appears in e All three panes of the SDP tab e The Channel Status tab The Channel Status Advanced tab 4 SDP Name Pao SCS Endon Write Endpoint Type Remote Capabilities gt Channel Status Adva gt Call Admission Control Channel Status Custome MBPS at 44 2000 MB s CastomMaxF Sat 15 3840 MBs 800 bos Channel Status Advanced 2 Custo MaxMEPS at 44 22000 MB s CustornMax3 at 15 2840 MBs gt General gt Advanced Nome Teor Endpoint website aeaa EndpointType E gt Medi Sources gt SDP gt Connection Status _chonnets usea Channel Eeu oiaue Packat Lo Fracton liter ee Pocket 3 oon 00 o oon 00 o Content in gt Channel Status Adva Content out oo A 0 00 oo 4 FECCin oo o 2 rece out oo o 0 00 ofo Le 2E Source Fontan protocol Synetass Video 10ra Syne video video suppor Il o Lal Rate T 344000 ta IE ew 5 face Fao Endpoint Website gt Informati Endpoint Type F gt Media so gt SDP Channel Info LIEF BrcP TCP gt gt Connection Status RMX IP Address pozaz gt Channel Status gt Call Admission Control Participant IP Address ICE RMX IP Addr ICE Participant idress ICE Connection Type Media Info Feld valve
472. ng SIP Endpoint Disconnection on page 12 27 20 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued fot ep aes Bee DISABLE_DUMMY_REGIST Enables or disables SIP dummy registration on the domain RATION Possible Values NO Default Disables SIP dummy registration YES Enables SIP dummy registration Note For homologation and certification testing the flag must be set to YES DTMF_FORWARD_ANY_DI Used for DTMF code suppression in cascading conferences GIT_TIMER_SECONDS Determines the time period in seconds that MCU A will forward DTMF inputs from conference A participants to MCU B Flag range in seconds 0 360000 This flag is defined on MCU A the calling MCU For more information see Video Layout in Cascading conferences CP and mixed CP and SVC on page 5 1 ENABLE_EPC When set to YES default enables Polycom proprietary People When set to NO disables this feature for all conferences and participants ENABLE_FLOW_CONTROL Used to enable or disable sending a re INVITE to endpoints to _REINVITE adjust their data rate When set to YES re INVITE is used for endpoints that do not support flow control in SIP using either the Information or RTCP Feedback mechanisms Default NO ENABLE_H239 When set to YES Content is sent via a separate Content channel Endpoints that do not support H 239 Content sharing will not be able to receive Whe
473. ng in the date field or by clicking the arrow button and using the calendar utility Default Current date 9 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations 6 Click the Participants tab New Reservation gt General Display Name SUPPORT_252032045 Ee See Duration 168 30 gt Information Name IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Di Encryption Participants List Lecturer v Dial Out Manually The fields are the same as for the New Conference Participants tab described in the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Participants Tab on page 3 16 properties are modified in the Address Book or Meeting Rooms after the Reservation has been Participant properties are embedded in the conferencing entity and therefore if the participant created they are not applied to the participant when the Reservation is activated 7 Optional Add participants from the Participants Address Book For more information see Meeting Rooms on page 6 1 and the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guidee To add participants from the Address Book on page 3 18 change especially in an environment that uses DHCP The MCU can be set to ignore the IP address of a participant when the conference starts Instead the alternative E 164 number will be used instead of the IP address For more information see Substituting E 164 Number in Dial String on page 8 13 Between the ti
474. ng of H 263 4CIF information The H 245 or SDP tab includes the additional information The creation of a new H 263 4CIF slide is supported in the IVR Service in addition to the current H 263 IVR slide If users utilize the default Polycom slides that are delivered with the Collaboration Server the slide s resolution will be as defined in the profile i e SD HD CIF etc For more information see High Resolution Slides on page 15 13 H 263 4CIF Guidelines e H 263 4CIF is supported with H 323 and SIP connection endpoints e H 263 4CIF is supported in CP mode only e AES encryption is supported with H 263 4CIF e Recording of H 263 4CIF conferences is supported by the RSS 4000 and other devices e All video layouts are supported in H 263 4CIF except 1x1 layout In a 1x1 layout the resolution will be CIF e H 239 is supported in H 263 4CIF and is based on the same bandwidth decision matrix as for HD The CP Resolution Decision Matrix Polycom Inc All the CP resolution options and settings are based on a decision matrix which matches video resolutions to connection line rates with the aim of providing the best balance between resource usage and video quality at any given line rate The following factors affect the decision matrices The used video protocol H 264 base Profile or H 264 High Profile The H 264 High Profile maintains the Video quality at bit rates that are up to 50 lower than previously 3 3
475. nnection is available only if the IP address of the endpoint s internal site is filled in the Website IP Address field in the Participant Properties General dialog box Note This field is displayed in all tabs Endpoint Type Indicates whether the participant is using an AVC based endpoint Note This field is displayed in all tabs Layout Type Indicates whether the video layout currently viewed by the participant is the Conference or Personal Layout If Personal Layout is selected you can select a Video Layout that will be viewed only by this participant Video Layout Indicates the video layout currently viewed by the participant When Personal Layout is selected in the Layout Type you can force participants to the video windows in a layout that is specific to the participant For more information see Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Changing the Video Layout of a Conference on page 3 46 Mute Suspend Indicates if the endpoint s audio and or video channels have been muted suspended The entity that initiated audio mute or video suspend is also indicated MCU Audio or Video channel has been muted suspended by the MCU User Channels have been muted suspended by the Collaboration Server user Participant Channels have been muted suspended by the participant from the endpoint You can also cancel or perform mute and suspend operation using these check boxes Note If the participant muted his her audio channel the
476. nnects as encrypted only if the conference is defined as encrypted Yes The participant joins the conference Entry Queue as encrypted No The participant joins the conference Entry Queue as non encrypted Polycom Inc 4 33 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Monitoring the Encryption Status The conference encryption status is indicated in the Conference Properties General dialog box The participant encryption status is indicated by a check mark in the Encryption column in the Participants list pane Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 View Administration Setup Help T Ta no he Name Status Role IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Dij Audio Video Eneryptio FECC Tok Content T ID ot N Status 1D Start Tim End Time 2222 1 participant D S w oH ey 2222 Singl 2222 18 37 19 37 The participant encryption status is also indicated in the Participant Properties SDP tab where SRTP indication is listed for each encrypted channel for example audio and video Moc Boris Properties gt General gt Advanced Name int ite gt Information Endpoint Type AVC gt Media Sources gt SDP Remote Capabilities _ Remote Communication Mode gt Connection Status G7221_24k frame pet packet 7221 _24k 1 frame per packet z RTP p
477. nning on the MCU The Operator conference offers additional conference management capabilities to the Collaboration Server users enabling them to attend to participants with special requirements and acquire participant details for billing and statistics This service is designed usually for large conferences that require the personal touch Operator Conferences Polycom Inc An Operator conference is a special conference that enables the Collaboration Server user acting as an operator to assist participants without disturbing the ongoing conferences and without being heard by other conference participants The operator can move a participant from the Entry Queue or ongoing conference to a private one on one conversation in the Operator conference In attended mode the Collaboration Server user operator can perform one of the following actions e Participants connected to the Entry Queue who fail to enter the correct destination ID or conference password can be moved by the user to the Operator conference for assistance e After a short conversation the operator can move the participant from the Operator conference to the appropriate destination conference Home conference e The operator can connect participants belonging to the same destination conference to their conference simultaneously by selecting the appropriate participants and moving them to the Home conference interactively or using the right click menu e The operat
478. not uploaded to the MCU prior to the IVR Service definition click the Add Slide Low Resolution button to upload a Low Resolution Slide Add Slide High Resolution button to upload a High Resolution Slide The Install File dialog box opens The uploading process is similar to the uploading of audio files For more information see step 6 on page 15 8 The video slide must be in a jpg or bmp file format For more information see Creating a Welcome Video Slide on page 15 30 15 Click the Operator Assistance tab The Operator Assistance dialog box opens New Entry Queue TVR Service pmm x gt Global gt Welcome Entry Queue IVR Service Name EQ Assistance gt Conference ID gt General gt Video Services gt Operator Assistance I Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message EA 2 Add Message File L oe lee 16 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant requires or requests help during the connection process 17 Inthe Operator Assistance Indication Message field select the audio message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for operator s assistance If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server 18 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue Service definition The new E
479. ns List navigate to the reservation you want to delete using the Show Day Show Week Today Back Next or List buttons Click to select the reservation to be deleted Click the Delete Reservation X button or Place the mouse pointer within the Reservation block right click and select Delete Reservation Click OK in the confirmation dialog box The Reservation is deleted To delete all recurrences of a reservation 1 Polycom Inc In the Reservations List navigate to the Reservation or any of its recurrences using the Show Day Show Week Today Back Next or List buttons Click the Delete Reservation X button or Place the mouse pointer within the Reservation or any of its recurrences right click and select Delete Reservation A confirmation dialog box is displayed Select Delete the series Click OK All occurrences of the Reservation are deleted 9 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Searching for Reservations using Quick Search 9 18 Quick Search is available only in List View It enables you to search for Reservations by Display Name To search for reservations 1 Inthe Reservation Calendar toolbar click in the Quick Search field The field clears and a cursor is displayed indicating that the field is active Find a ___ _ gt Find 2 Type all or part of the reservation s Display Name into the field and click Search The closest matching Reservation entries are
480. nt Define Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing Configure Templates the Address Book and schedule Reservations Record Conferences Configure the Collaboration Server to support special call flows and conferencing requirements such as Cascading Conferences Configure the Collaboration Server for special applications and needs by setting various system flags Manage and troubleshoot the Collaboration Server s performance The Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide provides description of basic conferencing operations It will help you perform the following tasks Polycom Inc Unpack the Collaboration Server system and install it on a rack Connect the required cables to the Collaboration Server Perform basic configuration procedures Start a new conference and connect participants endpoints to it Monitor ongoing conferences Perform basic operations and monitoring tasks Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Who Should Read This Guide System administrators and network engineers should read this guide to learn how to properly set up Polycom Collaboration Server systems This guide describes administration level tasks For detailed description of first time installation and configuration description of the Collaboration Server Web Client and basic operation of your Collaboration Server system see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Prerequisites This guide assumes the user has the
481. nt changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of the system are made by selections in the Max CP Resolution pane of the Resolution Configuration dialog box Minimum Frame Rate Threshold for SD Resolution The MINIMUM_FRAME_RATE_THRESHOLD_FOR_SD System Flag can be added and set to prevent low quality low frame rate video from being sent to endpoints by ensuring that an SD channel is not opened at frame rates below the specified value For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Additional Video Resolutions Polycom Inc The following higher video quality resolutions are available with the Collaboration Server e CIF 352 x 288 pixels at 50 fps e WCIF 512 x 288 pixels at 50 fps e WSD 848 x 480 pixels at 50 fps e W4CIF 1024 x 576 pixels at 30 fps e HD 720p 1280 x 720 pixels at 60 fps e HD 1080p 1920 x 1080 pixels at 30 fps e HD 1080p 1920 x 1080 pixels at 60 fps Two higher quality intermediate video resolutions replace the transmission of CIF 352 x 288 pixels or SIF 352 x 240 pixels resolutions to endpoints that have capabilities between e CIF 352 x 288 pixels and 4CIF 704 x 576 pixels the resolution transmitted to these endpoints is 432 x 336 pixels e SIF 352 x 240 pixels and 4SIF 704 x 480 pixels the resolution transmitted to these endpoints is 480 x 352 pixels 3 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Polycom Inc 4 Additional Conferencing Information Various conf
482. ntry Queue IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list For more information see IVR Services List on page 15 1 Setting a Conference IVR Service or Entry Queue IVR Service as the Default Service The first Conference IVR Service and Entry Queue IVR Service are automatically selected by default The IVR Services Conference and Entry Queue shipped with the system are also set as default If additional Conference IVR Services and Entry Queue IVR Services are defined you can set another service as the default for each service type To select the default Conference IVR Service gt gt Inthe IVR Services list select the Conference IVR Service to be defined as the default and then click the Set Default Conference IVR Service E button Polycom Inc 15 23 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Alternatively in the IVR Services list right click the Conference IVR Service and then select Set Default scl IVR Service Conferences 3 mmm a X gt ei j ca Baek a OH n By SUPPORT D Marketing S Logistics 99466 46630 43974 1 02 PM 3 52 PM 3 51 PM RAZ T Management F Signaling Monitor WB Hardware Monitor Meeting Rooms J Conference I RServ j x Delete Service ag Entry Queue IVR Ser pet Default Conference IVR Service Vice Language Service Type Add Supported Languages Replace Change Music File Properties The IVR Service is displayed in
483. nts 2010 2011 2015 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 on page C 18 Additional information about a USER ADD PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 15 Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2012 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2016 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 on page C 19 Additional information about a USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 14 Event Fields for Events 2010 2011 2015 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 on page C 18 Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 2 CDR Event Types Continued 2106 3010 5001 6001 11001 This list only includes events that are supported by the Collaboration Server For a list of MGC Manager events that are not supported by the Collaboration Server see MGC Manager Events that USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 PARTICIPANT INFORMATION CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 10 Additional information about a USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT event For more information about the fields see Table C 15 Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2012 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2016
484. nts by performing the following operations e Move a participant to an Operator conference Attend a participant e Move a participant to the Home destination conference e Move participant from one ongoing conference to another A move can be performed using the following methods e Using the participant right click menu e Using drag and drop To move a participant from the ongoing conference using the right click menu options 1 Inthe Conferences list click the conference where there are participants waiting for Operator s Assistance to display the list of participants 2 Inthe Participants list right click the icon of the participant to move and select one of the following options Disconnect Participant Delete Participant Mute Audio Suspend Video Block Audio Change to Chairperson Change Te Content Token Owner Add Participant to Address Book pant Sent Video View Participant Received Video Request Intra for Received Video Request Intra for Sent Video Request Intra for Received Sent Video Copy Participant Cut Participant Participant Debug Info Send Text Message To Participant Participant Properties Move to Operator Conference to move the participant to the Operator conference Move to Conference to move the participant to any ongoing conference 10 16 Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move When selected the Move to Conference dialog box opens lettin
485. nts options are enabled Polycom Inc 15 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 15 18 23 Click the Operator Assistance tab The Operator Assistance dialog box opens Conference IVR Service Name IVR_ENGLISH I Enable Operator Assistance Operator Assistance Indication Message 1B Add Message File 24 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance when the participant requires or requests help during the connection process to the conference or during the conference 25 Inthe Operator Assistance Indication Message field select the audio message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for the operator s assistance If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you want to add new audio files click Add Message File to upload the appropriate audio file to the Collaboration Server 26 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list Change to Chairperson Regular participants can request to become the conference chairperson using the appropriate DTMF code default 78 which enabled them to perform operations designated for chairpersons only The Change to Chairperson via the DTMF code default 78 is executed only if the following settings were configured for the MCU and the conference e Inthe Conference IVR Service Conference Chairperson dialog box select th
486. ny configuration changes as the system does not suspended them during the backup procedure The following parameters settings and files are backed up MCMS configuration files mcms Cfg Network and service configurations Rooms Profiles Reservations System Flags Resource Allocation IVR messages music Collaboration Server Web Client user setting fonts windows Collaboration Server Web Client global settings notes address book language Private keys and certificates TLS Conference participant settings Operation DB administrator list SNMP settings Time configuration 19 37 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e CDR files are not included in the backup process and should be backed up manually by saving the CDR files to a destination device Using Software Management To backup configuration files 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Software Management gt Backup Configuration The Backup Configuration dialog box opens Backup Directory Path 2 Click the Browse button The Browse To File dialog box opens 3 Select the Backup Directory Path and then click Backup When the Collaboration Server system backs up the current configuration if any changes occur immediately or during the request then additional changes are not registered To restore configuration files 1 On the Collabor
487. o YES the current speaker s image is not sent back through the participant link in cascaded conferences with conference layouts other than 1x1 Default YES Range YES NO This flag is used to control the system behavior in an environment where some Lync clients use the Polycom CCS plug in and some do not When set to NO default Content is sent to all Lync clients over the video channel including those with the plug in installed even when the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints is disabled Other non Lync legacy endpoints will not be affected by this flag and will receive content according to the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints settings in the conference Profile When set to YES Content is not sent to Lync clients over the video channel including those with the Polycom CCS plug in installed even when the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints is enabled Other non Lync legacy endpoints will not be affected by this flag and will receive content according to the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints settings in the conference Profile The flag value indicates the amount of time in seconds to wait for an RTCP or RTP message to be received from the endpoint When the time that was set in the system flag has elapsed and no RTCP or RTP audio or video message has been received on either the audio or the video channel the MCU disconnects the SIP endpoint from the conference Default 20 seconds Range 0 300 For more information see Detecti
488. o a conference with Content Protocol set to H 263 amp H 264 Auto Selection e Content is shared using H 263 even if H 264 supporting endpoints are connected e Content is shared using H 264 if all connected endpoints have H 264 capability e Ifthe first endpoint to connect to the conference only supports H 263 the H 263 protocol is used for Content for all conference participants If Content is already being shared using the H 264 protocol when a H 263 endpoint connects Content sharing is stopped and must be manually restarted using H 263 i e the endpoint using H 263 Content Protocol must connect first for all participants to receive content If the H 263 endpoint disconnects Content sharing must be manually stopped and restarted and will automatically upgrade to the H 264 protocol e Endpoints that do not have at least H 263 capability can connect to the conference but cannot share Content H 263 Select this option when most of the endpoints support H 263 and some endpoints support H 264 In such a case all endpoints will share content using the H 263 protocol and this protocol will not change throughout the conference fixed mode Bit rate allocation to the Content channel by the Collaboration Server is dynamic according to the conference line rate and Content Settings selected for the conference For more information see Content Sharing Parameters in Content Highest Common Content Video Switching Mode on page 4 5 H
489. of Content Resolutions see Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference on page 4 3 Note This field is displayed only when H 264 Cascade is selected for Multiple Content Resolution or when H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized option is selected as the Content Protocol in the Highest Common Content Mode and is enabled for selection in CP conferences Send Content to This Content Sharing option is not supported with Polycom RMX Legacy Endpoints 1800 2 ClickOK Content Sharing Parameters in Content Highest Common Content Video Switching Mode This section describes the possible content sharing parameters when content Highest Common mode is used e Content Settings e Content Protocol Polycom Inc 4 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e Content Resolution Content Settings The Content channel can transmit one of the following modes e Graphics for standard graphics e Hi res Graphics requiring a higher bit rate for high quality display or highly detailed graphics e Live Video highest bit rate for video clips or live video display e Customized Content Rate that allows manual definition of the Conference Content Rate Content Setting For Graphics Hi res Graphics and Live Video the highest common Content bit rate is calculated for the conference each time an endpoint connects Therefore if an endpoint connects to an ongoing conference at a lower bit rate than the current bit rate the Con
490. of Lecture Mode as follows 0 None 1 Lecture Mode 3 Presentation Mode Lecturer Note This field is only relevant if the Lecture Mode Type is Lecture Mode The name of the participant selected as the conference lecturer Time Interval Note This field is only relevant if Lecturer View Switching is enabled The number of seconds a participant is to be displayed in the lecturer window before switching to the next participant Currently the only value is 15 Lecturer View Note This field is only relevant when Lecture Mode is enabled FWN Indicates the lecturer view switching setting as follows 0 Automatic switching between participants is disabled 1 Automatic switching between participants is enabled Audio Activated Not supported Always contains the value 0 Lecturer ID Not supported Always contains the value 4294967295 Table C 5 Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 BESS Note When this event occurs as the result of a change to the value of one of the event fields the event will only contain the value of the modified field All other fields will be empty Conference ID The conference ID C 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 5 Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4 Continued PED Conference The conference password Password An empty field means that no conference password was assigned to the conference Chairperson The chairp
491. of the endpoint display and are supported on endpoints of both 16 9 and 4 3 aspect ratios Overlay Layouts are recommended for use with high resolution endpoints Message Overlay is not affected by the use of Overlay Layouts and is displayed as the top level overlay Vertical Position for Site Name display Site Names are displayed for all cells Because the smaller cells are located at the bottom of the large cell when enabling Site Names it is advisable not to locate the Site Name at the bottom of the cells Standalone Endpoint Cells are displayed each with a border For all Overlay Layouts border color is dependent on the selected Skin For more information see Skins on page 2 22 System behavior for Video Forcing and Personal Layout Control using the Overlay Layouts during an ongoing conference is the same as for other video layouts Overlay Layouts are only available for selection for the Conference Layout and are not available for selection for Personal Layout Overlay Layouts are not available for selection when using PCM or Click amp View PCM menus are available when the Overlay Layouts are active and they are displayed as the top level overlay 2 31 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 2 32 Selecting the Overlay Layouts The Overlay Layouts are selected in the New Profile Video Settings dialog box in the Overlay tab of the Video Layout tree New Profile gt General gt Advanced gt Video
492. ollaboration Server 20 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list Defining an Entry Queue IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click IVR Services Rj 2 Inthe IVR Services list click the New Entry Queue IVR Service 3 button The New Entry Queue IVR Service Global dialog box opens 3 Define the Entry Queue Service Name 4 Define the Entry Queue IVR Service Global parameters For more information see Table 15 10 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Global Parameters on page 15 19 5 Click the Welcome tab The New Entry Queue IVR Service Welcome dialog box opens 6 Define the system behavior when the participant enters the Entry Queue This dialog box contains options that are identical to those in the Conference IVR Service Welcome Message dialog box 7 Click the Conference ID tab The New Entry Queue IVR Service Conference ID dialog box opens 8 Select the required voice messages For more information see Table 15 11 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Conference ID on page 15 21 10 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 9 Click the Video Services tab The New Entry Queue IVR Service Video Services dialog box opens 10 Inthe Video Welcome Slide list select the video slide that will be displayed to participants connecting to the Entry Queue The slide list includes the video slid
493. ome Conference IVR Service Name VRENGLISH gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password gt General gt Video Services Name Message File gt DTMF Codes Request Billing gt Operator Assistance Requires Chairp First to Join Mute All On Mute All Off Chairperson Exi End Time Alert Change Passwo Change Confere Change Chairpe Confirm Passwo bal K2 Add Message File p e The General dialog box lists messages that are played during the conference These messages are played when participants or the conference chairperson perform various operations or when a change occurs 15 To assign the appropriate audio file to the message type click the appropriate table entry in the Message File column A drop down list is enabled 16 From the list select the audio file to be assigned to the event indication 17 Repeat steps 15 and 16 to select the audio files for the required messages The following types of messages and prompts can be enabled Table 15 6 Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages Blip on Cascade Link Indicates that the link to the cascaded conference connected successfully Chairperson Exit Informs all the conference participants that the chairperson has left the conference causing the conference to automatically terminate after a short interval Note This message is played only when the Requires Chairperson option is selected in the Conference Prof
494. ommended to connect to the Collaboration Server installed with the latest software version The Login screen is displayed There is a link to the RMX Manager Installer at the top of the right edge of the screen Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 ears Link to RMX Manager Polycom Installer Welcome to Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 User Name Password m RMX_8 1 4 53 25_root 2013 04 24 10 41 1 Click the Install RMX Manager link The installer verifies the application s requirements on the workstation Launching Application Verifying application requirements This may take a few moments The Install dialog box is displayed 2 Click Install The installation proceeds 18 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application The installation completes the application loads and the RMX Manager MCUs screen is displayed MCUs Toolbar MCUs Pane C RMX Mahager 7 Polycom RMX View Adrfinstation Setup Help Wx Find asses Display Name IP Address Product Type The first time you start the RMX Manager application the MCUs pane is empty Starting the RMX Manager Application Once installed the RMX Manager can be run using the http non secured or https secured command in the browser s address line or the Windows Start menu To use the browser 1 Inthe browser s command line enter h
495. on Server recommended values width x height in pixels 640 x 480 704 x 480 848 x 480 720 x 576 704 x 576 1024 x 576 960 x 720 1280 x 720 1440 x 1088 1920 x 1088 The Collaboration Server can accommodate small deviations from the recommended slide resolutions 3 Save your file CIF Customized H 261 slides are not supported If using a default Polycom slide the slide s resolution will be as defined in the profile i e SD HD or If the display of the Welcome slide is cut in the upper area of the screen change the settings of the endpoint s monitor to People Stretch instead of Zoom 15 30 To upload your video slide to the Collaboration Server see step 12 on page 15 22 Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services Default IVR Prompts and Messages The system is shipped with the following audio prompts and messages Table 15 12 Default IVR Messages Message Type Message Text When Played FileName General Welcome Message Chairperson Identifier Request Request Chairperson Password Retry Chairperson Password Request Password Retry Password Request Digit Request Billing Code Requires Chairperson Chairperson Exit Polycom Inc Welcome to unified conferencing For conference Chairperson Services Press the Pound Key All other participants please wait Please enter the Conference Chairperson Password Press the pound key when complete
496. on Server menu click Setup gt System Configuration The System Flags dialog box opens nn gt MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER gt CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS fig Name Naive ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINKI NO BONDING_CHANNEL_DELAY 50 I CHANGE_AD_HOC_CONF_DURATION 60 CONTENT_SPEAKER_INTRA_SUPPRESSIONI 5 CPU_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_TIME_SECONDS 7200 CPU_TCP_KEEP_INTERVAL_SECONDS 75 DISABLE_INACTIVE_USER o DISABLE_IPMC_USAGE NO ENABLE_AGC YES ENABLE_AUTO_EXTENSION YES ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_WITHO NO ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS NO ENABLE_MULTI_PART_CDR YES LENFORCE SAFE UPGRADE NO xi isen 2 Inthe MCMS_PARAMETERS tab the following flags can be modified Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS eee ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_P If YES allows non encrypted participants to connect to ARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF encrypted conferences Default No Polycom Inc 20 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued cc ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_R_ When set to NO default the Recording Link inherits the ECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCR encryption settings of the conference If the conference is YPT_CONF encrypted the recording link will be encrypted When set to YES it disables the encryption of the recording link regardless of the Encryption settings of the conference and RSS recorder CHANGE_AD_HOC_CONF__ The duration of an ad hoc conference
497. on levels 3 and 4 DST MCS 4000 MCUs connect as endpoints to the RMXs or MGCs on higher levels naaal SRS a Si Seta aa n et MCU DST MCS 4000 For more information about this configuration see the relevant MGC documentation Figure 5 5 MIH Cascade Levels MIH Cascading Guidelines in CP Licensing Master Slave Conferences Polycom Inc It is recommended to have RMX systems at all levels to leverage the high quality video and content offered by the RMX In MIH Cascading conferences although there are multiple levels of Master and Slave relationships between conferences the conference that runs on the MCU on level 1 of the hierarchy must be the Master for the entire cascading session When an MGC is part of the cascading topology it can be configured at any level if MGC Version 9 0 4 is installed otherwise it must be set as Level 1 MCU Conferences running on MCUs on levels 2 and 3 and can be both Masters and Slaves to conferences running on MCUs on levels above and below them All conferences running on MCUs on the lowest level in the configuration for example level 3 in a 3 level hierarchy configuration are Slave conferences When the DST MCS 4000 is on level 3 and acting as slave to level 2 the RMX on level 2 must dial out to it in order for the DST MCS 4000 to be identified as slave The link between the two MCU dial out participant is defined as a standard participant and not as a cascading link 5
498. on or right click and select New Reservation 9 8 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations Example The following click amp drag sequence would select a reservation for Tuesday August 12 2008 starting at 01 00 with a duration of 4 hours Date Tuesday August 12 2008 v 8 10 20085un 8 11 8713 200 Start 00 Click roo a 02 Drag Duration 030 4 Hours 04 05 Release The duration of reservations created by any of the above methods can be modified in the Scheduler tab of the New Reservation dialog box To create a new reservation 1 2 3 Open the Reservation Calendar Select a starting time slot Create the reservation using one of the three methods described above The New Reservation General tab dialog box opens New Reservation gt General gt Participants Display Name gt Schedule purseere gt Information Routing Name awa Profile Factoy GW Profile ID 7 Conference Password Chairperson Password EEE Maximum Number of Participants automatic ae ere All the fields are the same as for the New Conference General tab described in the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide General Tab on page 3 14 9 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide parameters are not embedded in the Reservation and are taken from the Profile when the reservation becomes an ongoing conference Therefore any changes to the Profile param
499. on the encryption settings in the conference Profile the Defined Participant s encryption settings or the System Flag setting for undefined participants and the connecting endpoint s Media Encryption capabilities Table 4 10 Connection of Defined and Undefined H 323 SiPParticipants to the Conference Based on the Encryption Settings Polycom Inc No Encryption Encrypt All Encrypt When Possible Defined Participant Undefined Participant Conference Encryption Setting Encryption Setting Connection status Connected non encrypted Connected non encrypted Connected only if encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are disconnected as encryption is forced for the participant Connected encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are disconnected Disconnected eee be added to the eee Yes Connected encrypted Connected encrypted encrypted All defined participants except dial out SIP participants Connect encrypted Endpoints with encryption capabilities Connect non encrypted endpoints without encryption capabilities Defined dial out SIP participant Connect only if encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are disconnected Connected non encrypted Connected encrypted Connection Status Flag No Connected non encrypted Encryption is not declared by the Collaboration Server therefore the endpoint does not use encryption Connect only if encrypted Non encrypted endpoints are disconn
500. on to automatically update the MCU s GMT Date Time and Offset to match that of the workstation Use NTP Server Select this check box to synchronize the time with up to three NTP servers When selected the manual GMT Date and GMT Time setting options are disabled The GMT Offset fields are still active To implement this mode an external connection to an NTP server must be enabled Enter the IP addresses of the required NTP servers in order of precedence The Status field indicates whether registration with the NTP Server failed or succeeded Note TheCollaboration Server will not use a time source such as a Windows based W32Time service SNTP time service Only full featured below Stratum 16 NTP Servers are considered sufficiently reliable for high accuracy timing environments Adjust Reservations Use this button to adjust the start time of all the reservations in one Time operation For more information see Adjusting the Start Times of all Button Reservations on page 9 16 After resetting the MCU a delay may occur when synchronizing with the external NTP server Resource Management Resource Capacity The following table lists the resource capacity in various RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1500 2000 4000 configurations Table 20 3 Video 2 Video 1 Video Resource Type Video Resolution Acceleration Acceleration Acceleration Cards Cards Card Polycom Inc 19 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s
501. on using Internet Explorer installed on the user s workstation or the RMX Manager application The RMX Manager can control several Collaboration Server units For more information about the RMX Manager see RMX Manager Application on page 18 1 1 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Network Services Guidelines IP Networks In the Polycom RMX 1800 system management and IP conferencing are performed on separate LAN ports Management uses Lan1 and IP network Services use Lan2 When enabling multiple services management and the IP network service 1 share Lan1 the second IP network service 2 uses Lan2 The networks can be separated in Maximum Security Environments Workstation Requirements 00 08 1 4 The Collaboration Server Web Client and RMX Manager applications can be installed in an environment that meets the following requirements e Minimum Hardware Intel Pentium III 1 GHz or higher 1024 MB RAM 500 MB free disk space e Workstation Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Vista Windows 7 e Network Card 10 100 Mbps e Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 7 8 and 9 e Collaboration Server Web client and RMX Manager are optimized for display at a resolution of 1280 x 800 pixels and a magnification of 100 RMX 1800 users need to download Net Framework 2 0 SP1 or above from the official Microsoft website and install the software Internet Explorer must be enabled to
502. onal Click the Recording tab to enable conference recording with Polycom RSS 4000 The New Profile Recording tab opens PEW POF gt General Display Name gt Advanced gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR IT Enable Recording gt Recording Recording Link gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Start Recording immediately 18 Define the following parameters Table 2 12 New AVC Profile Recording Parameters Enable Recording Select this check box to enable the Recording settings If no Recording Links are found an error message is displayed 2 24 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Table 2 12 New AVC Profile Recording Parameters Continued Recording Link Select the Recording Link to be used for conference recording Recording Links defined on the Collaboration Server can be given a descriptive name and can be associated with a Virtual Recording Room VRR saved on the Polycom RSS 4000 Version 8 5 Recording and Streaming Server RSS For more information see Recording Conferences on page 13 1 Start Recording Select one of the following e Immediately conference recording is automatically started upon connection of the first participant Upon Request the operator or chairperson must initiate the recording manual Audio Only Select this
503. ones Spans Rmx Time Administrator User gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt System Flags Back Save amp Close If no USB memory stick is detected and either this is the First Time Power up or the Default IP Service has been deleted and the Collaboration Server has been reset the following dialog box is displayed For more information about First time Power up and the Fast Configuration Wizard see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Procedure 1 First time Power up on page 2 8 Enter the following parameters using the information supplied by your network administrator Control Unit IP Address Shelf Management IP Address Control Unit Subnet Mask Default Router IP Address Click the Save amp Close button The system prompts you to sign in with the new Control Unit IP Address RMX 2000 o A Please login to the new IP address Web Site Disconnect the LAN cable between the workstation and the LAN Port on the Collaboration Server s back panel Connect LAN Port on the Collaboration Server s back panel to the local network using a LAN cable Polycom Inc Appendix F Configuring Direct Connections to the Collaboration Server 8 Enter the new Control Unit IP Address in the browser s address line using a workstation on the local network and press Enter to start the Collaboration Server Web Client application
504. onference Welcome Message A welcome message after user administrator logon Active Alarms Update Updates you of any new alarm that occurred Fault List Updated Updates you when the faults list is updated new faults are added or existing faults are removed 2 Enable Disable All Notifications or Custom to select specific notifications to display 3 Click OK 19 40 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Logger Diagnostic Files The Logger utility is a troubleshooting tool that continually records MCU system messages and saves them to files in the MCU hard drive For each time interval defined in the system a different data file is created The files may be retrieved from the hard drive for off line analysis and debugging purposes The Logger utility is activated at the MCU startup The Logger is disabled when the MCU is reset manually or when there is a problem with the Logger utility e g errors on the hard drive where files are saved In such cases data cannot be retrieved When the MCU is reset via the Collaboration Server the files are saved on the MCU hard drive To access the Logger Diagnostic Files gt gt On the Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Tools gt Logger Diagnostic Files Logger Diagnostic Files Select the files to be retrieved and then click the Retrieve Files button Name Vv Y Size Bytes
505. onference The automatic switching is enabled when the number of participants exceeds the number of video windows displayed on the Lecturer s screen Note Lecture Mode is enabled in the Conference Properties Participants tab For more information see Lecture Mode on page 4 38 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Table 2 7 New AVC CP Profile Video Settings Parameters Continued Auto Scan Interval s Select the time interval 5 300 seconds that Auto Scan uses to cycle the display of participants that are not in the conference layout in the selected cell Auto Scan is often used in conjunction with Customized Polling which allows the cyclic display to be set to a predefined order for a predefined time period Auto Layout When selected default the system automatically selects the conference layout based on the number of participants currently connected to the conference When a new video participant connects or disconnects the conference layout automatically changes to reflect the new number of video participants For more information see Table 2 8 Auto Layout Default Layouts in CP Conferences on page 2 17 Clear this selection to manually select a layout for the conference The default Auto Layout settings can be customized by modifying default Auto Layout system flags in the System Configuration file For more information see Auto Layout Configuration on page 20 21 Note In some cases
506. onference Meeting Room or Entry Queue is using this number 4 A unique dial in number must be assigned to each conferencing entity However Conference 5 Click the Participants tab The New Template Participants dialog box opens New Conference Template gt General Display Name SUPPORT_1621445132 gt Information Duration 1 44 o0 I Permanent Conference Name IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Di Encryption Lecturer Dial Out Manually a cre The fields of the New Template Participants dialog box are the same as those of the New Conference Participant dialog box For a full description of these fields see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Participants Tab on page 3 16 6 Optional Add participants to the template from the Address Book 7 Click the New button Polycom Inc Chapter 11 Conference Templates The New Participant General tab opens The New Template Participant dialog box remains open in the background New Participant Dialing Direction Type IP Address Alias Name Type Website IP Address T audio Only Extension Identifier String For a full description of the General tab fields see Adding a New participant to the Address Book Directly on page 8 8 8 Modify the fields of the General tab 9 Click the Advanced tab The New Participant Advanced tab opens For a fu
507. onnections List icsciceissaisecsssnecssisecasessoovssseeasectenatsrnesecvesersdvesranstuenecers 14 8 INOGCS E E T T O E E A A E A A O ood 14 9 Using Not s issn cceve case setae A AEAEE EEEE S E EE E E 14 9 IVR SQIViGGS cc ces oeedddetbcdececed sini es dies 2etekewdeses 15 1 IVR Services List errena nienn EEE ann ade nee ten ioe ei ea elas 15 1 IVR Services TOO Dat ccciscscssccicsesssevescvedeunscscsessavssuevensegecnensdstpeensvesuacectenstedscstsvechaseetss 15 2 Adding ain Sa SOS ievanenienr nr n teense etbonse T T EEA 15 3 Uploading a Message File to the Collaboration Server s ssssssesissesrssrsesiesierrssresses 15 4 Defining a New Conference IVR Service oo cece sseseseesesessseeeesesessseseseseseseseseseneneseseees 15 6 Defining a New Conference IVR Service ceceeccesesesseeeseeeeeesesessseseseseneseseseseees 15 6 Chiat Se to Chairperson cid ccsivsccsess usseccssentendvasnupedsvnecouotanevesenvtceonedeapedacnsvonveds 15 18 Entry Queue IVR Services 2 2020 nasi ad neui eiri ao a NE Eire Bann Rade 15 19 Defining a New Entry Queue IVR Service oo eee eeesesseseseeeesesesesesesesesescseseaeaeees 15 19 Setting a Conference IVR Service or Entry Queue IVR Service as the Default DOE VICE else E A T A E EE A A E E E 15 23 Modifying the Conference or Entry Queue IVR Service Properties 15 25 Replacing the Musi File osiscs scsciscseatsssevivestevetviees daseteneatenesbenevadncutsntptvnecSeuansetetedmaybiiudecters 15 26 Adding a
508. ons When utilizing GMT offset for example Daylight Saving Time change the start time of the reoccurring reservations scheduled before the Collaboration Server time change are not updated accordingly although their start times appear correctly in the Reservations list when checking the reservation properties the start time is incorrect Following the Collaboration Server time change the start time of all reoccurring reservations must be manually adjusted in one operation Using this option the start times of all reservations currently scheduled on the Collaboration Server are adjusted with the same offset To adjust the reoccurring reservations start time after the GMT Offset has been changed for Daylight Saving Time DST or a physical move Adjustment of Reservation Time should only be performed after adjustment of Collaboration Server Time is completed as a separate procedure 1 On the Collaboration Server menu click Setup gt RMX Time The RMX Time dialog box opens 2 Click the Adjust Reservations Time button GMT Date 9 15 2011 hd Local Time GMT Time GMT Offset 29 02 4 z po a Retrieve Client Time M Use NTP Server Status Status Status Adjust Reservations Time The Adjust Reservations Time dialog box opens AdjustReservation TIME Click the arrows to adjust the start time by hours Range is between 12 hours and 12 hours A positive value indicates adding to the start time A
509. ontinued Message Type Message Text When Played FileName First to Join You are the first person to join the The first participant First to Join wav conference joins a conference Mute All On All conference participants are now When all Mute_All_On wav muted participants are muted by the operator or chairperson Mute All Off All conference participants are now When all Mute_All_Off wav unmuted participants are unmuted by the operator or chairperson End Time Alert The conference is about to end The conference is End_Time_Alert wav about it end Change Password Press one to change conference A participant Change_Password_ Menu wav Menu password requests a Press two to change chairperson conference password password change Press nine to exit the menu Change Please enter the new conference A participant Change_ Conference_ Conference password Press the pound key when presses two in the Password wav Password complete Change Password IVR menu Change Please enter the new chairperson A participant Change_ Chairperson_ Chairperson password Press the pound key when presses one inthe Password wav Password complete Change Password IVR menu Confirm Password Please re enter the new password A participant Confirm_ Password_ Change wav Change Press the pound key when complete enters a new conference or chairperson password Change Password The new password is inv
510. op down menu ean R M ja Hierarchy R Type Y Name V IP Address Ph V Alias Name SIP A V Network V Dialing Directi Y agf Main te aim g cec Keren Encrypt EP1 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dial out EP2 172 22 184 40 H 323 Dial out auto 172 22 186 23 H 323 Dial out a o 3 3 s S 5 3 8 4 z 3 a a a F EP4 172 22 186 24 H 323 Dial out PPP re 3 H 323 Dial out auto New Participant Copy Participant Cut Participant Paste Participant Paste Participant As Ne Delete Participant Table 8 5 Copy Cut Functions EE Copy Participant Copies the participant to be pasted into an additional group Cut Participant Moves the participant from the current group to a different group Alternatively you can move a participant to another location by dragging the participant to the new location Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book 4 Inthe Address Book navigation pane navigate and select the group in which you want to paste the participant 5 Right click the selected group and click one of the following Paste functions from the drop down menu Table 8 6 Paste functions FO Paste Participant Creates a link to the participant entity in the pasted location Paste Participant as Pastes as a new participant into the selected group This paste action New adds Copy to the end of the participant name 4 The Paste functions are only available after a Copy or
511. option to record only the audio channel of the conference Note This option can be used only if there are Voice ports configured in the Video Voice Port Configuration For more information see Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution on page 19 6 Display Recording This option is automatically selected to display a Recording Indication Icon to all conference participants informing them that the conference is being recorded 19 Click the Site Names tab to display the Site Names dialog box lew Profile ma gt General Display Name gt Advanced j gt Video Quality Line Rate 384kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR Display Mode of zi gt Recording Font Size fz sf gt Site Names gt Message Overlay Text Color gt Network Services Preview Polycom Inc 2 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Using the Site Name dialog box you can control the display of the site names by defining the font size color background color and transparency and position within the Video Window For a detailed description of the site names options see Site Names Definition on page 2 35 20 Define the following parameters Table 2 13 New AVC CP Profile Site Names Parameters w o pO E Display Mode Font Size Background Color 2 26 Select the display mode for the site names e Auto Display the Site Names for 10 second
512. or can move one or several participants from an ongoing conference to the Operator conference for a private conversation 10 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e The operator can move participants between ongoing Continuous Presence conferences Operator Conference Guidelines e An Operator conference can only run in Continuous Presence mode e Operator conference is defined in the Conference Profile When enabled in Conference Profile High Definition Video Switching option is disabled e An Operator conference can only be created by a User with Operator or Administrator Authorization level e Operator conference name is derived from the User Login Name and it cannot be modified Only one Operator conference per User Login Name can be created e When created the Operator conference must include one and only one participant the Operator participant e Only a defined dial out participant can be added to an Operator conference as an Operator participant e Once running the Collaboration Server user can add new participants or move participants from other conferences to this conference The maximum number of participants in an Operator conference is the same as in standard conferences e Special icons are used to indicate an Operator conference in the Ongoing Conferences list and the operator participant in the Participants list e An Operator conference cannot be defined as a Reservation e An Operator conferenc
513. or more information about the fields see Table C 22 Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF CODE FAILURE on page C 25 A SIP participant connected to the conference For more information about the fields see Table C 17 Event Fields for Events 17 23 H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED on page C 20 A recording event such as recording started or recording resumed occurred For more information about the fields see Table C 23 Event fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK on page C 25 Contains SIP Private Extensions information For more information about the fields see Table C 24 Event Fields for Event 28 SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS on page C 26 Contains the gatekeeper caller ID which makes it possible to match the CDR in the gatekeeper and in the MCU For more information about the fields see Table C 25 Event Fields for Event 30 GATEKEEPER INFORMATION on page C 26 Information about the line rate of the participant connection This event is added to the CDR file each time the endpoint changes its connection bit rate For more information about the fields see Table C 26 Event fields for Event 31 PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE on page C 26 C 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 2 CDR Event Types Continued PARTY CHAIR UPDATE PARTICIPANT MAXIMUM USAGE INFORMATION USER TERMINATE CONFERENCE USER ADD PARTICIPANT USER DELETE PART
514. oration Server 1800 Name IP Address Network Type MCU Prefix in Gal Service Type la Management 172 21 125 89 Hiera 2 Type xa a4 IP Network 172 21 125 9 H 323 amp SIP Default H 323 Service a Main Status 0 Seqejduie a2u 434JU0J RMX Management 2 ox Q Ex 2 x A Ex 2 ex fel c Frequently Used t E Rx 2 Ga Connections ex PR Users fx O Signaling Monitor Rox WH Hardware Monitor Rox 2 Meeting Rooms pa 2 x Q ex fel om Q ex 2 x Q m E Reservations Rarely Used a ij IVR Services IP Network Services Recording Links Conference Profiles Et Entry Queues IP Network Services Two IP Services are defined for the Collaboration Server e Management Network e Default IP Service Conferencing Service Dial in dial out connections and Collaboration Server management are supported within IPv4 addressing environments Polycom Inc 16 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Management Network Primary The Management Network is used to control the Collaboration Server mainly via the RP Collaboration Server Web Client application The Management Network contains the network parameters such as the IP address of the Control Unit needed for connection between the Collaboration Server unit and the RP Collaboration Server Web Client This IP address can be used by th
515. ord Request Chairperson When the participant enters an incorrect chairperson Password Retry password requests the participant to enter it again General Messages played for system related event notifications for example notification that the conference is locked Upload the files for the voice messages that are played when an event occurs during the conference For more information see Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages on page 15 11 Billing Code Requests the chairperson to enter the conference Billing Code Roll Call Not applicable Conference Requests the participant to enter the required Conference ID to be routed to ID the destination conference 6 Click Upload File to upload the appropriate audio file to the MCU The Install File dialog box opens Install File N oO Install File 2 Proceed 7 Enter the file name or click the Browse button to select the audio file to upload The Select Source File dialog box opens Polycom Inc 15 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 8 Select the appropriate wav audio file and then click the Open button The name of the selected file is displayed in the Install field in the Install File dialog box 9 Optional You can play a wav file by selecting the Play button 10 Click Yes to upload the file to the MCU The system returns to the Add Message File dialog box 11 Repeat step 6 to 10 for each add
516. ost packets out of the total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of lost packets in a report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span Out of Order The number of packets arriving out of order The following details are displayed Accumulated N total number of packets that arrived out of order since the channel opened Accumulated percentage of packets that arrived out of order out of the total number of packets transmitted since the channel opened Interval N number of packets that arrived out of order in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Interval percentage of packets that arrived out of order out of the total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP report interval default interval is 5 minutes Peak the highest number of packets that arrived out of order ina report interval from the beginning of the channel s life span E 2 Polycom Inc Appendix E Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information Table E 1 Participant Properties Channel Status Advanced Parameters Continued a Ce Fragmented Indicates the number of packets that arrived to the IP card fragmented i e a single packet broken by the network into multiple packets This value can indicate the delay and reordering of fragmented packets that require additional processing but is not considered a fault The Fragmented
517. ote 3 In the Note dialog box type the required text and click OK The new note is saved and closed The Notes list is updated listing the new note and its properties Note The beginning of the note s text Last Modified The date of creation or last modification Modified By The Login Name of the user who last modified the note Modified From The Client Application and Workstation from which the note was created or modified Y Last Modified Y Modified By VW Modified From 7 13 2006 8 38 AM POLYCOM EM4 F3 HAGAIGE Toolbar Handle User Name _ Client Workstation Application gai 483 is using 191 95 To open or edit a note 4 Double click the entry to edit or right click the entry and select Note Properties The note opens for viewing or editing Polycom Inc 14 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To delete a note 1 Inthe Notes list select the entry for the note to delete and click the Delete Note button or right click the entry and select Delete Note A delete confirmation dialog box is displayed 2 Click OK to delete the note or click Cancel to keep the note 14 10 Polycom Inc 15 IVR Services Interactive Voice Response IVR is an application that allows participants to communicate with the conferencing system via their endpoint s input device such as a remote control The IVR Service includes a set of voice prompts and a
518. oth the Entry Queue Service and Conference IVR Service To avoid playing the Welcome Message twice disable the Welcome Message in the Conference IVR Service 5 Select the General Welcome Message to be played when the participant enters the conference IVR queue Polycom Inc 15 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 6 To upload an audio file for an IVR message click Add Message File The Install File dialog box opens Install File N c i Install File Proceed The Collaboration Server unit is bundled with default audio IVR message files To upload a customized audio file see Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides on page 15 27 a Click the Browse button to select the audio file wav to upload The Select Source File dialog box opens b Select the appropriate wav audio file and then click the Open button c Optional You can play a wav file by selecting the Play button d Inthe Install File dialog box click Yes to upload the file to the MCU memory The Done dialog box opens e Once the upload is complete click OK and return to the IVR dialog box The new audio file can now be selected from the list of audio messages 7 Click the Conference Chairperson tab The New Conference IVR Service Conference Chairperson dialog box opens gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name IVR_ENGLISH gt Conference Chairper gt Conference Password gt Ge
519. oups defined in the Address Book help facilitate the creation of conferences Participants can be added to the Address Book individually or in Groups The maximum of number of Address Book entries that can be defined on the Collaboration Server is 4000 The Address Book can be organized into a multi level hierarchical structure It can be used to mirror the organizational layout of the enterprises and it is especially suitable for large scale enterprises with a considerable number of conference participants and organizational departments and divisions Groups in the Address Book can contain sub groups or sub trees and individual address book participant entities The Address Book provides flexibility in arranging conference participants into groups in multiple levels and the capabilities to add groups or participants move or copy participants to multiple groups within the address book and use the address book to add groups and participants to a conference or Conference Template Importing and exporting of Address Books enables organizations to seamlessly distribute up to date Address Books to multiple Collaboration Server units Polycom Inc 8 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Viewing the Address Book You can view the participants currently defined in the Address Book The first time the Collaboration Server Web Client is accessed the Address Book pane is displayed Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800
520. pacity Allocation Per Port Type Port Type Non Mixed Conferences Mixed CP and SVC Conferences Resources are consumed at this rate only after the conference contains mixed endpoints Table 19 6 Resource Capacity Utilization Per Port Type per MPMx Card Port T Maximum Ports in Non mixed Maximum Ports in Mixed CP eyes Conferences and SVC Conferences Maximum number of 30 licences wes woe eo The Resource Capacity Utilization table indicates the total amount of ports used for each port type for one MPMx media board in full capacity 19 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The following diagram displays the RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX Resource Report displaying a resource graph that indicates the number of voice and video ports that are available or occupied in the MCU r Resources Graph F 50 Video Occupied 0 occupied DiFree Video Unit HD 720P30 Voice Occupied 0 Type r Occupied Total Voice Video o o Port Usage Threshold 19 10 The Collaboration Server can be set to alert the administrator to potential port capacity shortages A capacity usage threshold can be set as a percentage of the total number of licensed ports in the system When the threshold is exceeded a System Alert is generated The default port capacity usage threshold is 80 The administrator can monitor the MCU s port capacity usage via
521. pating in the cascading topology Conference line rates should be identical Content rate should be identical Same encryption settings DTMF codes should be defined with the same numeric codes in the IVR services assigned to the cascading conferences DTMF forwarding is suppressed The video layout of the link is set to 1x1 by the appropriate system flag When the Mute Participants Except Lecturer option is enabled in the Conference Profile all participants including the link participants except the lecturer are muted Only the lecturer is not muted Gathering is not supported in Cascading Conferences Flags Controlling Cascade Layouts Setting the FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_CASCADED_LINK _CONNECTION System Flag to YES default automatically forces the cascading link to Full Screen 1x1 in CP conferences hence displaying the speaker of one conference to a full window in the video layout of the other conference Set this flag to NO when cascading between an Collaboration Server and an MGC that is functioning as a Gateway if the participant layouts on the MGC are not to be forced to 1X1 Setting the AVOID_VIDEO_LOOP_BACK_IN_CASCADE System Flag to YES default prevents the speaker s image from being sent back through the participant link from the cascaded conference This can occur in cascaded conferences with conference layouts other than 1x1 It results in the speaker s own video image being displayed in the speaker s v
522. pend Video Block Audio Change to Chairperson Add Participantto Address Book View Participant Sent Video View Participant Received Video Request Intra for Received Video Request Intra for Sent Video 2 Select Change To Content Token Owner in the drop down menu The endpoint receives ownership of the Content Token and an indication icon is displayed in the Role column of the participant s entry in the Participants list Participants EP 1 LO T 2 a G o k DG Bw a wo WH fy Name Staus Role iP Aaresa Phone ais Name Network Dialing Daudi Video Marc_59446123 2 participants i HDX dD Disconnected A 10 253 72 24 SIP ce Dial o Polycom Inc 4 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide To cancel token ownership 1 In the Participants list right click the endpoint that currently has Content Token ownership P 0 RIoexRrRO E ohi Name Status Role 1P Address Phone A Marc_59446123 2 participants fey Marc pif Cannactad Om _1n 2627212 Q Disconnect Participant f HX Delete Participant Mute Audio Suspend Video Block Audio Change to Chairperson Cancel Content Token Owner Add Participantto Address Book View Participant Sent Video View Participant Received Video Select Cancel Content Token Owner in the drop down menu Content Token ownership is cancelled for the endpoint Managing Noisy Content Connections 4 20 The system can identify participant
523. perator s assistance i Assistance for himself herself Awaiting Conference The participant has requested the operator s assistance Assistance for the conference Usually this means that the operator is requested to join the conference When the Operator moves the participant to the Operator conference for individual assistance the participant Status indications are cleared Request to Speak Participants that were muted by the conference organizer system operator can indicate that they want to be unmuted by entering the appropriate DTMF code An icon is displayed in the Role column of the Participants list for 30 seconds AROARO OG wm a Name Status Role IP Ad Marc_611916714 2 participants 4 Marc lt Connected 2 Request to Speak fe HDX W Connected 10 2 Request to Speak is 12 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide e Activated when the participant enters the appropriate DTMF code default 99 The DTMF code can be modified in the conference IVR Service Properties DTMF Codes dialog box New Conferenice IVR SCPVICE gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name gt Conference Chairperson gt Conference Password 2 General M DTMF Codes gt Video Services Name DTMF Code Permission gt DTMF Codes Change To Chairperson 78 Everyone PROP Bieta es tance Override Mute All Everyone Start Resume Recording 2 Chairperson Stop Recording 3 Chairpe
524. pgrade in component in component IPS 140 test result not received 140 test result not received Aa TLS Failed to connect to OSCP responder License not found Possible causes e The Central Signaling component could not find the IP Services after startup e During Startup the resources did not get the License required to utilize their Units Possible action e Configure IP service if not configure e Reset the MCU e Change the license Management Network not configured Configure the Management Network Missing Central Signaling configuration Configure the central signaling B 6 Polycom Inc Appendix B Active Alarms Table B 1 Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description MPL startup failure Authentication not Authentication was not received from Switch received Check the switch card MPL startup failure Management Management Network message was not received Network configuration not received Check the Switch card Network interface is not configured New interface need to be chosen New certificate for CS need Collaboration Server reset to take effect No default IVR Service in IVR Services No default IVR Service in IVR Services list list Ensure that one conference IVR Service and one EQ IVR Service are set as default No IP Network Services defined IP Network Service parameters missing Configure the IP Network Service No response from Central Signaling No connection with central signaling No
525. plates list To start an ongoing Operator conference from an Operator Template 1 In the Conference Templates list select the Operator Template to start as an ongoing Operator conference You can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is identical to your Login Name For example if your Login name is Polycom you can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is Polycom If an ongoing Operator conference with the same name or any other conference with the same ID is already running you cannot start another Operator conference with the same login name Click the Start Conference from Template E button or Right click and select Start Conference from Template paa Display Na Status tg sore 1 OK G Mare_12693 OK New Conference Template Marc_20183 OK Delete Conference Template a3 Marc OK Start Conference from Template EE Duke_13626 OK Import Conference Templates Export Conference Templates Export Selected Conference Templates Template Properties The conference is started The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from the Conference Template Display Name Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template A Conference Template can be used to schedule a single or recurring Reservation Polycom Inc To schedule a Reservation from a Conference Template 1 In the Conference Templates list select the Co
526. port Kathy O Brian 1 2 3 20 dial_out Julia Fiorini 1 23 17 dial_out Debbie_H323_Out 192 205 74 1 dial_out Debbie_SIP_Out 153 22 147 6 dial_out Debbie_ISDN_In 7775959 dial_out The Navigation pane of the Address Book contains the following types of lists e Hierarchical displays a multi level hierarchical tree of groups and participants Double clicking a group on the navigation pane displays the group participants and sub groups in the List pane e All Participants double clicking this selection displays the single unique entity of all the participants in a single level When adding a participant to a group the system adds a link to the participant s unique entity that is stored in the All Participants list The same participant may be added to many groups at different levels and all these Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book participant links are associated with the same definition of the participant in the All Participants list If the participant properties are changed in one group they will be changed in all the groups accordingly Displaying and Hiding the Group Members in the Navigation Pane The currently selected group whose group members are displayed in the Address Book List pane is identified by a special icon i To expand the group to view the group members gt gt Double click the group name or click the Expand button The address book entities and sub groups of the group is displayed in the rig
527. r Web Clients must be opened one for each MCU by entering the IP Address of each MCU If both conferences are running on the same MCU only one Collaboration Server Web Client window is required When conferences are cascaded the Participant list pane of each of the two conferences will display a linked icon amp a dial in linked icon in the destination conference Conference B and a dial out linked icon in the linked conference Conference A The Conferences list panes in each of the two conferences will display a cascaded conference icon indicating that a conference running on the MCU is presently cascading with another conference running on the same or another MCU The cascaded conference icon will be displayed for a short period of time and then disappear Conference A Linked Conference Dial out Linked Participant Signaling Host 172 22 3 242 E E E z E a kj a Ae oRk OFS ae HG Ce ie Name statupd 1D Start Tim End Tir Name Status Role IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Dire Audio Video Ener Type Y Nar 41881 8 01AM 9 39 Conf a 4 Participants eh 12 acca aes 40021 8 05AM 9 39 Rox Singa a gt Non 172 21 H323 amp amp Dial out 4 al Mu fe 123 cong 171 22 H323 amp Dial out 4 gt ea Ro fx POLY gt conn 172 22 rmx H 323 Se Sir Rex singa gt conn 172 21 H 323 4 Dial in al an Polycom RealPresence Collabora
528. rator conference that is ongoing can be saved as a template To save an ongoing Operator conference as a template 1 Inthe Conferences List select the Operator conference you want to save as a Template 2 Click the Save Conference to Template ge button or Right click and select Save Conference to Template Conferences 1 A Save Conference to Template Start Recording Copy Conference Quick Search Conference Properties The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the ongoing conference Display Name the Login name of the Collaboration Server User The Template is displayed with the Operator Conference icon ie E e a a g Display Name Status Ui SUPPORT_1 OK Ui Marc_12693 OK Eg Marc_20183 OK As Marc OK Duke_13626 0K AS SUPPORT OK 10 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 10 12 Starting an Operator Conference from a Template An ongoing Operator conference can be started from an Operator Template saved in the Conference Templates list To start an ongoing Operator conference from an Operator Template 1 In the Conference Templates list select the Operator Template to start as an ongoing Operator conference You can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is identical to your Login Name For example if your Login name is Polycom you can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is Polycom If an ongoin
529. rator s Guide The following fields are displayed for each event Table 19 22 Auditor Event Columns Event ID The sequence number of the event generated by the Collaboration Server Date amp Time The date and time of the event taken from the Collaboration Servers Local Time setting The Username Login Name of the user who triggered the event Reporting Module The Collaboration Server system internal module that reported the event e MCMS MPL Central Signaling MPL Simulation Collaboration Server Web Client CM Switch ART Video e MUX Workstation The name alias of the workstation used to send the request that triggered the event IP Address The IP address of the workstation used to send the request that Workstation triggered the event Event Type Auditor events can be triggered by API HTTP Collaboration Server Internal Event Event The process action request or transaction that was performed or rejected POST SET transactions API Configuration changes via XML API Login Logout API GET HTTP PUT HTTP MKDIR HTTP RMDIR HTTP Startup Collaboration Server Internal Event Shutdown Collaboration Server Internal Event Reset Collaboration Server Internal Event Enter Diagnostic Mode Collaboration Server Internal Event IP address changes via USB Collaboration Server Internal Event 19 48 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Table 19 22 Auditor Event
530. re was a problem in the capabilities sent by the capability endpoint H323 call closed Local capability wasn t The endpoint did not accept the capabilities sent by the accepted by remote gatekeeper H323 failure Internal error occurred H323 call closed Remote stop The endpoint stopped responding responding H323 call closed Master slave problem A People Content cascading failure occurred SIP bad name The conference name is incompatible with SIP standards SIP bad status A general IP card error occurred SIP busy everywhere The participant s endpoints were contacted successfully but the participant is busy and does not wish to take the call at this time SIP busy here The participant s endpoint was contacted successfully but the participant is currently not willing or able to take additional calls SIP capabilities don t match The remote device capabilities are not compatible with the conference settings SIP card rejected channels The IP card could not open the media channels SIP client error 400 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 400 Bad Request response The request could not be understood due to malformed syntax SIP client error 402 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 402 Payment Required response SIP client error 405 The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 405 Method Not Allowed response The method specified in the Request Line is understood but not allowed for the address identified by the Request U
531. reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Polycom Inc Under the law reproducing includes translating into another language or format As between the parties Polycom Inc retains title to and ownership of all proprietary rights with respect to the software contained within its products The software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provision Therefore you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material e g a book or sound recording Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Polycom Inc is not responsible for printing or clerical errors Information in this document is subject to change without notice Table of Contents Table of Contents Polycom RMX 1800 Overview 0 00 c cece eee eee eee 1 1 About the Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide oo ec eee eeeenseeeeteneesenees 1 1 Who Should Read This Guide sicing nee a cue vescuesenuloersionvsitevene veers 1 1 PHOT EQUISILES raa E E EEE A cuegresdsstusverssvessntedibient suave 1 2 How This G ideis Organized saosin irn eean en EEEE EE Ei aii 1 2 About the Polycom RMX 1800 System s se sssessesissrsssssressesrsrisrisrssnserinnrsnesnenrresesnrsnrerrenrsses 1 2 Network Services Guidelines ss ssnsssessssissessrssiesisstsstestesrenresrtsnentenrenrinesnreresnenteneere 1 3 IP Netwo
532. ress Polycom Inc 16 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 4 Click the SIP Servers tab gt RMX CSIP gt 1 323 Service Name IP Network Service gt SIP Servers gt ICEServers SIP Servers Role Name IP Address Status Not Available 0 0 0 0 Not Available Not Available 0 0 0 0 Not Available Close The SIP Servers tab displays the following fields Table 16 13 IP Network Services Properties SIP Servers a Active The default SIP Server is used for SIP traffic Backup The SIP Server is used for SIP traffic if the preferred proxy fails Name The name of the SIP Server IP Address The SIP Server s IP address Status The connection state between the SIP Server and the Signaling Host Not Available No SIP server is available Auto Gets information from DHCP if used 16 22 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services NAT Network Address Translation Traversal NAT Traversal is a set of techniques enabling participants behind firewalls to connect to conferences hosted on the Collaboration Server remotely using the internet Session Border Controller SBC All signaling and media for both SIP and H 323 will be routed through an SBC The following SBC environments are supported e RealPresence Access Director RPAD a Polycom SBC e Acme Packet a 3rd party SBC e VBP Polycom Video Border Proxy Deployment Architectures The following NAT
533. rks cis ccicistsescvicesineneves tatenenvseasteveatsasstdnenvstedesbedeveanusvesevsarsesevsnvicvenassavnabenease 1 3 Workstation Requirements c 0 cesresesecsasnsiceesivsrsvecawssorebvsensesnotenesononstenesisonstbeetbeebu ia 1 4 Conference PIOMeS 5 ici wosdese Sees eeasae wees eeewenesee wae es 2 1 Conferencing Mode scscctssiesesesssssaseseesaesovensvasasescvevaneseaevevnaesesuveshdebcsescssdoscurveuawos ctevdvassveretonnets 2 1 AVC Conferencing Continuous Presence CP Conferencing 0 0 0 eee eeneeeeees 2 2 Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences 0 eceseesseeeeeseseeeceeeeseneeeeneensaeeees 2 3 AVC Conferencing Parameters 0 cece ees eeeseeeeceeseeeecessseseeesessseeseseeseeesenenee 2 4 Basic Conferencing Parameters ccccs es ceseseeeeeecenseeeeeeeesesseseeneseeseeeneneteneney 2 4 Supplemental Conferencing Features oo cece rece ceeeeeeetenesseeeeeeeneees 2 5 Operator Conferences CP only Conferences c cece eeeeeee tere eeneeeeeneneees 2 5 Default Profile Settings in CP Conferencing Mode 0 ec eeeseeeeeeeeneseneeeneneeneees 2 6 Viewime Profiles siess tiin aE e E A death eases stecesta settee EE R 2 8 Profile LOOM DAR reirse rrn EE ciate E E E E ES 2 8 Modifying an Existing Profile sssini 2 9 Del ting a Conference Profile ici scscsccscssssessssessesacscosssorsestensvetsvsconosensticvevsstovorvactensndtsestanseas 2 9 Defining New Profiles vsssscsssisavscsasatsecaresgithacssagstenrsrsecvsnarsenqitenstvanecesesurhedbeaget
534. rkstations by users with administrator privileges The MSI utility requires the IP addresses of all the Collaboration Server systems both control unit and Shelf Management IP addresses that each workstation is to connect to If the IP address of the any of the target Collaboration Servers is changed the ActiveX components must be reinstalled Installing ActiveX 19 52 To install ActiveX components on all workstations in the network 1 Download the MSI file EMA ClassLoaderInstaller msi from the Polycom Resource Center The MSI file contains installation scripts for both NET Framework and NET Security Settings 2 Create a text file to be used during the installation containing the IP addresses of all the Collaboration Server systems both control unit and Shelf Management IP addresses that each workstation in the network is to connect to The file must be named url_list txt and must be saved in the same folder as the downloaded MSI file Name Size Type O dotnetFx File Folder JE EMA ClassLoaderInstaller msi 690KB Windows Installer Package setup exe 421KB Application GEE Task Rocuesect Furl listo Notepad Log File Edit Format View Help http 127 0 0 1 https 127 0 0 1 http 172 22 1 1 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities 3 Install the ActiveX components on all workstations on the network that connect to Collaboration Server systems The installation is done b
535. rom Template Schedule Reservation from Template Belete Conference Template Start Conference from Template 2 Marc ae hedule Reservation from Template Marc ng nase Import Conference Templates SR PEETER T EEE Export Conference Templates BE Duke_i Export Conference Templates Export Selected Conference Templates ieee Template Pi rti emplate Properties Template Properties The conference is started For detailed description of Conference Templates see Using Conference Templates on page 11 2 Monitoring Conferences When MCUs are connected to the RMX Manager they are automatically monitored that is any ongoing conference that is started on that MCU is automatically added to the Conferences pane and its participants are monitored To list participants from several conferences running on the same or different MCUs gt gt Inthe Conferences pane using Windows multiple selection methods select the conferences whose participants you want to list The participants are displayed in the Participants list pane By default the participants are grouped by conferences and the name of the MCU is displayed in the first column of the properties table enabling sorting according to MCU name Grouping the Participants by MCU The Participants can be grouped by MCU and then by conferences To change the display mode for the Participants pane gt gt On the Collabora
536. rs If set to 0 re registration is disabled Note e It is recommended to use default settings e This is a re registration and not a keep alive operation an alternate gatekeeper address may be returned Aliases Alias The alias that identifies the Collaboration Server s Signaling Host within the network Up to five aliases can be defined for each Collaboration Server Note When a gatekeeper is specified at least one alias must be entered in the table Additional aliases or prefixes may also be entered The type defines the format in which the system alias is sent to the gatekeeper Each alias can be of a different type H 323 ID alphanumeric ID E 164 digits 0 9 and Email ID email address format e g abc example com Participant Number digits 0 9 and Note Although all types are supported the type of alias to be used depends on the gatekeeper s capabilities 8 Click the Ports tab Polycom Inc 16 11 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Settings in the Ports tab allow specific ports in the firewall to be allocated to multimedia conference calls P Network service Properties gt gt Networking gt IP Network Service Name gt Routers gt DNS gt Conferencing IP Network Type H 323 amp SIP x gt Gatekeeper Fixed Ports gt Ports gt QoS TCP Port from 49152 to 49472 gt SIP Servers UDP Port from 49152 to 50431 gt Securi
537. rson Pause Recording 1 Chairperson Secure Conference 71 Chairperson Unsecured Conference 71 Chairperson Show number of participants 88 Everyone Request private assistance 0 Everyone Requestassistance for conference 00 Chairperson Request to Speak 99 Everyone Polycom Touch Control f Everyone a e Available for dial in and dial out participants e A participant can request to speak more than once during the conference e Supported in all conference types e Supported in H 323 and SIP environments e The duration of the icon display cannot be modified Participant Alerts List The Participant Alerts list contains all the participants who are currently waiting for operator assistance Conference Name Status Disconne Role IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Dil Audio Video Encryptio FECC Tok Con Sales fx Wanda 3 Awaiting Individual assist 172 22 H 323 4 Dial o Participants are automatically added to the Participants Alerts list in the following circumstances e The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong conference ID or conference password and waits for the operator s assistance e The participant requests Operator s Assistance during the ongoing conference This list is used as reference only Participants can be assisted and moved to the Operator conference or the destination conference only from th
538. rticipant then dials in before the system dialed out to that participant the system creates a second participant in the Participants list and tries to call the dial out participant If the dial out participant was designated as the conference lecturer the system will not be able to replace that participant with the dial in participant that is connected to the conference Defined dial out participants and dial in participants are considered to be two separate participants Polycom Inc 4 39 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Enabling the Automatic Switching Automatic switching between participants viewed on the lecturer s screen is enabled in the conference Profile or during the ongoing conference in the Conference Properties gt gt In the Profile Properties Video Settings dialog box select the Lecturer View Switching check box gt General I Display Name gt Advanced I gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR I Presentation Mode gt Recording I Same Layout gt Site Names 3 I Lecturer View Switching gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Auto Scan Interval s fo S FJ IV Auto Layout 1 a Iz 4 5 10 Overlay Px This option is activated when the conference includes more sites than windows in the selected layout If this option is disabled the participants will be displayed in the selected v
539. rticipants to be connected e The conferences are activated e Participants are connected to all the ongoing conferences until all system resources are used up A scheduled Reservation cannot be activated and is deleted from the schedule if An Ongoing conference has the same Numeric ID Sufficient resources are not available in the system If a problem prevents a Reservation from being activated at its schedule time the Reservation will not be activated at all This applies even if the problem is resolved during the Reservation s scheduled time slot A Profile that is assigned to a Reservation cannot be deleted Reservations are backed up and restored during Setup gt Software Management gt Backup Restore Configuration operations For more information see Software Management on page 19 37 All existing reservations are erased by the Standard Restore option of the Administration gt Tools gt Restore Factory Defaults procedure Reservations can also be scheduled from Conference Templates For more information see see Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template on page 11 9 Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations Using the Reservation Calendar To open the Reservation Calendar gt gt Inthe RMX Management pane click the Reservation Calendar button Reservations Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 am PELE LE PEPE FEF EP EPPS fr
540. rts users to any faults or errors the MCU encountered during operation Two indication bars labeled System Alerts and Participant Alerts signal users of system errors by blinking red in the event of an alert Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 View Administration Setup Help RMXIP Address 10 226 105 20 Signaling Host 10 226 105 21 Logout ax M 4 amp 4hrckXkRGOGe see M A amp ie FB E Display Name Status 1D Name Status Role IP Address Phone Alias Name SIP_ Network Dialing Directior Ena 3 5 marc_45306 7777 Marc_45306 51 participants Hiera amp Type Nig fe Administrato lt b Connected 0 0 0 0 Administrator SIP S Dial in aii H Res 10 226 105 lt I gt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP amp Dial in Rex 10 226 105 lt I gt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP f Dial in 5 Rex 10 226 105 lt gt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP f Dial in e Re 10 226 105 lt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP amp Dial in fx Administrato lt b Connected 0 0 0 0 Administrator SIP S Dial in F Rex 10 226 105 lt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP amp Dial in z gt Rex 10 226 105 lt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP 8 Dial in See Callaboratio Syren ex 10 226 105 lt gt Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP amp Dial in fx 10 226 105 lt B Connected 0 0 0 0 10 226 105 13 SIP S Dial in fax 10 226 105 lt gt Connected 0 0 0
541. rvation to another time slot 1 Select the Reservation 2 Hold the mouse button down and drag the Reservation to the desired time slot 3 Release the mouse button To change the Reservation s Start time 1 Select the Reservation 2 Move the mouse over the top edge of the Reservation s square 3 When the cursor changes to a vertical double arrow J hold the mouse button down and drag the edge to the desired Start Time 4 Release the mouse button To change the Reservation s End time 1 Select the Reservation 2 Move the mouse over the bottom edge of the Reservation s square 3 When the cursor changes to a vertical double arrow J hold the mouse button down and drag the edge to the desired End Time 4 Release the mouse button To View or Modify Reservations using the Reservation Properties dialog box 1 Inthe Reservations List navigate to the reservation or its recurrences you want to view using the Show Day Show Week Today Back Next or List buttons 2 Double click or right click and select Reservation Properties to select the reservation to be viewed or modified The Reservation Properties General dialog box opens 3 Select the tab s of the properties you want to view or modify 4 Optional Modify the Reservation Properties 5 Click OK The dialog box closes and modifications if any are saved Polycom Inc 9 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservati
542. rver Administration and Utilities 16 To specifically define one or more valid terminals ensure that the Accept SNMP Packets from any Host option is cleared and then click the Add button The Accepted Host IP Address dialog box opens Accepted Host IP Address g Host IP Address 17 Enter the IP Address of the Manager terminal from which valid queries may be sent to the MCU and then click OK Click the Add button to define additional IP Addresses The IP Address or Addresses are displayed in the Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts box regarded as a violation of the MCU security and if the Send Authentication Trap check box is selected an appropriate message will be sent to all the terminals listed in the SNMP Properties Traps dialog box 4 Queries sent from terminals not listed in the Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts box are 18 In the Collaboration Server SNMP Properties Security dialog box click OK Audible Alarms In addition to the visual cues used to detect events occurring on the Collaboration Server an audible alarm can be activated and played when participants request Operator Assistance Using Audible Alarms The Audible Alarm functionality for Operator Assistance requests is enabled for each MCU in either the Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager The Audible Alarm played when Operator Assistance is requested is enabled and selected in the Setup gt Audible
543. rver Web Client a An active video Meeting Room that was activated when green the first participant connected to it h A passive video Meeting Room that is waiting to be ex i gray activated ID Displays the Meeting Room ID This number must be communicated to H 323 conference participants to enable them to dial in Duration Displays the duration of the Meeting Room in hours using the format HH MM default 01 00 Polycom Inc Chapter 6 Meeting Rooms Table 6 2 Meeting Rooms List Columns Continued a Conference The password to be used by participants to The Collaboration Password access the Meeting Room If blank no password Server can be is assigned to the conference This password is configured to valid only in conferences that are configured to automatically prompt for a conference password in the IVR generate conference Service and chairperson 7 passwords when Chairperson Displays the password to be used by the users to these fields are left Password identify themselves as Chairpersons They are blank granted additional privileges If left blank no chairperson password is assigned to the conference This password is valid only in conferences that are configured to prompt for a chairperson password Profile Displays the name of the Profile assigned to the Meeting Room For more information see Defining New Profiles on page 2 9 SIP Registration The status of registration with the SIP server
544. s List is displayed Reservations List o Gl sar Ha Display Name 1o Start Time End Time internal ID Status Conference Passw Profile D SUPPORT_180 17989 07 11 2008 05 00 07 11 2008 05 30 183 ok 987654 Factory_Video_Profile D SUPPORT_157 91272 06 11 2008 18 30 06 11 2008 19 30 169 ok Factory_Video_Profile co SUPPORT_108 97493 06 11 2008 18 30 06 11 2008 19 30 170 ok Factory_Video_Profile Es Logistics 00582 05 11 2008 15 00 05 11 2008 17 00 168 ok Factory_Video_Profile D Sales 12295 04 11 2008 12 00 04 11 2008 13 00 167 ok Factory_Video_Profile D deb_templatel 20940 02 11 2008 23 45 03 11 2008 00 45 127 ok Factory_Video_Profile 2 Optional Sort the data by any field column heading by clicking on the column heading A or A symbol is displayed in the column heading indicating that the list is sorted by this field as well as the sort order 3 Optional Click on the column heading to toggle the column s sort order To return to Calendar View gt gt In the Reservation Calendar toolbar click any of the buttons Show Week Show Day Today to return to the required Reservation Calendar view Polycom Inc 9 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Scheduling Conferences Using the Reservation Calendar Creating a New Reservation There are three methods of creating a new reservation e Method I Creating a reservation with default duration of 1 hour e Method II Creating a reservation with defa
545. s a EE AE E 19 4 Resource MANAG EMeN et seisesesenesireir ereer siasnscechote cusunsnnssingiscvdbesstestadvenesecuees SENSE KE 19 5 Resource Capacity recite dived ri esee ieee E tame EEEE EA E REEE 19 5 Resource Usage earen in as A A EE 19 6 AVC Conferencing Continuous Presence ss sssssssssresetetsteriesrrsrtetseterteret ee 19 6 Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution ccccceeseseseeeeee 19 6 ROESOUTCE RE POLE sxccststesictscsestdiee tess ti cacsdesedeccnas acaba cesdda sa idee E EE ET 19 8 Displaying the Resource Report oo csesesesseseeessesesesesenesesescseseaeseeeseae 19 8 Polycom Inc ix Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Port WSase TAKESHO A sie cosess ccs coves socectacensy gen dnsssesesdutupsnsdse ips sbestvades ts evsunidods r 19 10 Setting the Port Usage Threshold oo ccc esc eseeeeceeeeeeseeceseneneneteeeenes 19 10 SIP Dial in Busy Notification ccc es eeceeeeseeceneeeneseteeesneteteeaeees 19 11 Port Usase Gage i2e vei Shiite nol iil Riese eel hte ete 19 12 Systeri Information sesso isinira eni ee EE EEE AEE EE E eS 19 13 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol ss sssssesssesissssrresireesrsrrssresrenrssreseesres 19 15 MIBs Management Information Base sseceesssssseseeesessseeseeesessseeseseseseseees 19 15 Traps sesssissesisscalssusssscaissussesssdesduvenesies susssaaesedusvsdsesesvevsiagedaevssssesdoensasessdasesaszeseaacasaseatoasbes 19 15 GUId lines i a E Seen
546. s an ASCII name for the Display Name field that can be modified using Unicode encoding English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most characters length varies according to the field European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of the maximum Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the maximum The maximum length of text fields also varies according to the mixture of character sets Unicode and ASCII Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters If the same name is already used by another conference Meeting Room or Entry Queue the Collaboration Server displays an error message requesting you to enter a different name Routing Name Enter a name using ASCII text only If no Routing Name is entered the system automatically assigns a new name as follows e Ifan all ASCII text is entered in Display Name it is used also as the Routing Name If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text or full Unicode text is entered in Display Name the ID such as Conference ID is used as the Routing Name Polycom Inc 7 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 7 2 Entry Queue Definitions Parameters Continued a Profile Select the Profile to be used by the Entry Queue The default Profile is selected by default This Profile determines the Bit Rate and the video properties with which participants connect to the Entry Queue and destination conference In Ad Hoc confer
547. s internal state and statistics The data collected is saved into a single compressed file containing all the information from each system component in its relative format txt xml etc In case the disk is malfunctioning the file will be written to the RAM involves only a small amount of information where the RAM size is 1 2 a gigabyte The zipped file info tgz can be opened with the following applications WinRAR and WinZip The entire zipped file is then sent to Polycom s Network Systems Division for analysis and troubleshooting Using the Information Collector Polycom Inc When the Information Collector is used the following steps are performed Step 1 Creating the Information Collector file Step 2 Saving the Information Collector file Step 3 Viewing the information in the Information Collector file 19 43 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Step 1 Creating the Information Collector Compressed File To create the compressed file 1 Inthe Collaboration Server menu click Administration gt Tools gt Information Collector The Information Collector dialog box is displayed Standard Security Mode From Date 9 14 2011 From Time 11 20 AM To Date 9 14 2011 KNKI To Time 11 25 am Name Audit CDR CFG Core Dumps cs Faults Logs Logs System amp Startup Network Traffic Capture Participant Recordings E U U D a o O O D UE NIDS
548. s of multiple occurrence reservations can be modified after the Reservation has been created e A single occurrence Reservation cannot be modified to become a multiple occurrence reservation e Reservations can only be modified one at a time and not as a group e If Reservations were created as a recurring series the system gives the option to delete them individually or all as series Viewing and Modifying Reservations Reservations can be viewed and modified by using the Week and Day views of the Reservations Calendar or by using the Reservation Properties dialog box Using the Week and Day views of the Reservations Calendar In the Week and Day views each Reservation is represented by a shaded square on the Reservation Calendar Clicking on a Reservation selects the Reservation A dark blue border is displayed around the edges of the Reservation indicating that it has been selected The Start Time of the Reservation is represented by the top edge of the square while the End Time is represented by the bottom edge 9 14 Polycom Inc Chapter 9 Reservations The cursor changes to a vertical double arrow when it is moved over the top and bottom sides of the square 11 23 2008 11 25 2008 Tue11 26 2008 Wed 1 4 00 Click amp Drag tg Change Start Time 15 00 00 16 Click amp Drag to Move gt 17 Reservation 1 8 00 19 Click amp Drag th Change End D To move the Rese
549. s selection is Hi Resolution Graphics Only HD720 5 can be selected as the Content Resolution with 384 kbps allocated as the conference Content Rate Content Settings fii Resolutio Graphics Cascade Resolution fps 64 96 a ome owe Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps 1024 1z 4096 384 512 768 512 512 768 768 E e Only endpoints that connect at a Line Rate of 768 kbps that is required to support a Content Rate of 384 kbps will receive content in the Content channel Endpoints that connect to the conference at a line rate lower than 768 kbps will not receive content e If the Content Settings selection is Live Video HD720 5 HD720 30 or HD1080 15 can be selected as the Content Resolution with 768 kbps allocated the as the Conference Content Rate _ Content Settings one Cascade Resolution Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps 7es 1024 147 4096 Apg 823 1152 ioe 2043 e144 256 384 768 512 768 768 768 768 cn 768 768 1152 1152 The higher Content Resolution should be selected according to the resolution capabilities of the majority of the endpoints connecting to the conference Endpoints that cannot support the selected Content Resolution are considered Legacy Endpoints and will not receive content Selecting a Customized Content Rate Customized Content Rate functionality ca
550. s show a comparison between the resolutions used at various line rates for H 264 baseline and the H 264 High Profile for Motion and Sharpness Video Quality setting according to the Resolution Configuration Mode Balanced Resource Optimized or Video Quality Optimized Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing H 264 Base Profile and High Profile Comparison Sharpness A comparison between the resolutions used at various line rates for H 264 Baseline and the H 264 High Profile for Sharpness Video Quality setting according to the following Resolution Configuration Modes Resource vs Quality Balanced Resolution H 264 High Profile vs H 264 Base Profile Sharpness 1080p 60 fps 1080p 30 fps 720 30 fps H 264 SD 30 fps Base amp High Profile CIF 30 fps 64 128 256 384 1024 1280 1920 3584 4M 512 832 1536 2048 Line Rate Base High E Profile WN Profile Figure 3 1 Resolution usage for H 264 High Profile and H 264 Base Profile for Sharpness at various line rates when Resolution Configuration is set to Resource Quality Balanced Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Resource vs Quality Resource Optimized H 264 High Profile vs H 264 Base Profile Sharpness H 264 Base amp High Profile Resolution 1080p 60 fps 1080p 30 fps 720 60 fps SD 30 fps CIF 30 fps 64 128 256 384 768 1024 1280 1536 1920 2560 4M Line Rate Base High
551. s that the communication with the SIP server cannot be established Possible causes are e Incorrect IP address of the SIP server e The SIP server listening port is other than the one defined in the system e The OCS services are stopped SSH is enabled SWITCH not responding Check the Switch card System Cards MPM Plus mode are not System configuration changed Please reset the MCU System Configuration modified System configuration flags were modified Reset the MCU System resources of Audio ports usage has exceeded Port Gauge threshold System resources of Video ports usage has exceeded Port Gauge threshold Polycom Inc B 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table B 1 Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description System resources usage has exceeded Port Gauge threshold Temperature Level Critical Possible explanations e Temperature has reached a critical level Temperature Level Major Possible explanations e Temperature has reached a problematic level and requires attention The Log file system is disabled because of high system CPU usage The software contains patch es The software contains patch es User Name SUPPORT cannot be used in Enhanced Security Mode Version upgrade is in progress Voltage problem Possible reasons for the problem e Card voltage problem e Voltage problem Warning Upgrade started and SAFE Upgrade protection is turned OFF Yellow Alarm Problem sending rece
552. s the requested layout for the entire duration of the conference set the conference to HD Video Switching mode In asymmetrical Video Layouts SD A participant in the large frame that sends CIF is displayed in CIF HD Where participants video windows are different sizes the Collaboration Server transmits HD and receives SD or lower resolutions In panoramic Video Layouts SD Participants that send CIF also receive CIF HD the Collaboration Server transmits HD and receives SD or lower resolutions the Collaboration Server scales images from SD to HD resolution H 264 High Profile Support in CP Conferences The H 264 High Profile is a new addition to the H 264 video protocol suite It uses the most efficient video data compression algorithms to even further reduce bandwidth requirements for video data streams 3 2 Video quality is maintained at bit rates that are up to 50 lower than previously required For example a 512Kbps call will have the video quality of a 1Mbps HD call while a 1Mbps HD call has higher video quality at the same 1Mbps bit rate H 264 High Profile should be used when all or most endpoints support it Guidelines H 264 High Profile is supported in H 323 and SIP networking environments H 264 High Profile is supported in Continuous Presence conferences at all bit rates video resolutions and layouts H 264 High Profile is the first protocol declared by the Collaboration Server to
553. s whenever the Video Layout changes e On Display the Site Names for the duration of the conference e Off default Do not display the Site Names Note If Display Mode is Off all other fields in this tab are grayed and disabled Click the arrows to adjust the font size in points for the Site Names display Range 9 32 points Default 12 Note Choose a Font Size that is suitable for viewing at the conference s video resolution For example if the resolution is C F a larger Font Size should be selected for easier viewing Select the color of the Site Names display text The color and background for Site Names display text is dependent on whether a Plain Skin or a Picture Skin was selected for the conference in the Profile Skins tab The choices are Plain Skin Picture Skin AaBbCc Default Default nosece White Text White Text AaBbCc No Background MEETS Red Background ni AaBbCc AabbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc For contrast no AaBbCc background is shown as AaBbCc black when the text is AaBbCc white AaBbCc AaBbCc A AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Note Choose a Background Color combination that is suitable for viewing at the conference s video resolution At low resolutions it is recommended to select brighter colors as dark colors may not provide for optimal viewing Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles 21 Click the Message Overlay tab to display the Message Overlay dialog box New prome
554. s who send frequent requests to refresh their Content display usually as a result of a problematic network connection The frequent refresh requests cause frequent refresh of the Content display and degrade the viewing quality When the system identifies the noisy participants the system will automatically suspend the requests to refresh the sent Content to avoid affecting the quality of the Content viewed by other conference participants This process is controlled by System flags Content Display Flags MAX_INTRA_REQUESTS_PER_INTERVAL_CONTENT Enter the maximum number of refresh intra requests for the Content channel sent by the participant s endpoint in a 10 seconds interval that will be dealt by the Collaboration Server system When this number is exceeded the Content sent by this participant will be identified as noisy and his her requests to refresh the Content display will be suspended Default setting 3 MAX_INTRA_SUPPRESSION_DURATION_IN_SECONDS_CONTENT Enter the duration in seconds to ignore the participant s requests to refresh the Content display Default setting 10 CONTENT_SPEAKER_INTRA_SUPPRESSION_IN_SECONDS This flag controls the requests to refresh intra the Content sent from the Collaboration Server system to the Content sender as a result of refresh requests initiated by other conference participants Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Enter the interval in seconds between the Intra
555. scsenssceen sued scodedsessdsscksnessseves cnesadesetsecosassvies sosdeapeseense 12 15 Displaying Participants Properties cccscceecsesseseseseseeseesceseeesescsesnsessseseeeesesees 12 15 IP Participant Proper thes ccsccccscsccesecscssscdscsssevecesesisssstsveecsesesdacsensshidesecsnssscacesvussidess epics 12 15 Monitoring SIP BFCP Content occ ceeesseseseseeseseeeesescsescsesssaearansseeseeteseneaeans 12 26 Detecting SIP Endpoint Disconnection ccc cece eeeeeeeeseeenenereseneneneneneney 12 27 Recording Conferences 00 cece cece eee eee 13 1 Creating Multiple Virtual Recording Rooms on the RSS oo eee eeeseseeeeeeteeeeees 13 2 Configuring the Collaboration Server to Enable Recording ccsccssesesseeseeseseeeeens 13 2 Defining the Recording Link 0 eeseeseeeeceeseseeeececeseesesssssesesesesessseseeeseneseees 13 2 Enabling the Recording Features in a Conference IVR Service s src 13 4 Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile cccesseseseseeseteeeeeeesesesnenenees 13 5 Recording Link Encryption descise n snenstvigsearsebsteshusvens 13 7 vi Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Table of Contents Recording Link Encryption Flag Setting eee eesesseseeesseseseseseeneseseees 13 7 Recording Link Settings escien enia a ste esvetuntedeearsunntinees 13 7 Managing the Recording Process 00 0 esseseeeeeesesssseeeesessssseesenssssesesesesssesesesesensseseees 13 8 Recording Link Layouts rex tiscsescsstesteis eusaesits coedeat
556. se was returned The server has authoritative information that the user indicated in the Request URI does not exist anywhere SIP global failure 606 A SIP Global Failure 606 Not Acceptable response was returned SIP gone The requested resource is no longer available at the Server and no forwarding address is known SIP moved permanently The endpoint moved permanently The user can no longer be found at the address in the Request URI SIP moved temporarily The remote endpoint moved temporarily SIP not found The endpoint was not found The server has definitive information that the user does not exist at the domain specified in the Request URI SIP redirection 300 A SIP Redirection 300 Multiple Choices response was returned SIP redirection 305 A SIP Redirection 305 Use Proxy response was returned The requested resource MUST be accessed through the proxy given by the Contact field SIP redirection 380 A SIP Redirection 380 Alternative Service response was returned The call was not successful but alternative services are possible SIP request terminated The endpoint terminated the request The request was terminated by a BYE or CANCEL request SIP request timeout The request was timed out Polycom Inc A 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table A 1 Call Disconnection Causes Continued Disconnection Cause Description SIP server error 500 The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 500 Server Internal
557. see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane on page 3 12 6 4 Polycom Inc 7 Entry Queues Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories Entry Queues An Entry Queue EQ is a special routing lobby to access conferences Participants connect to a single dial lobby and are routed to their destination conference according to the Conference ID they enter The Entry Queue remains in a passive state when there are no callers in the queue in between connections and is automatically activated once a caller dials its dial in number The maximum of number of Entry Queues that can be defined is 40 The parameters bit rate and video properties with which the participants connect to the Entry Queue and later to their destination conference are defined in the Conference Profile that is assigned to the Entry Queue For example if the Profile Bit Rate is set to 384kbps all endpoints connect to the Entry Queue and later to their destination conference using this bit rate even if they are capable of connecting at higher bit rates An Entry Queue IVR Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to enable the voice prompts guiding the participants through the connection process The Entry Queue IVR Service also includes a video slide that is displayed to the participants while staying in the Entry Queue during their connection process Different Entry Queues can be created to accommodate different conf
558. seneneneeeeey 3 11 Resolution Configuration Pane c ccc eee cseseseececeeseeeseececeeensnesesesesaneneteeey 3 12 Resolution Configuration Detailed eecceneeeeeceseeeeceeeeeeseeteeeneneteey 3 13 Flag Settings iioii an eena REAREA A A A 3 15 Setting the Maximum CP Resolution for Conferencing ss ssssssesereereere 3 15 Minimum Frame Rate Threshold for SD Resolution eee 3 15 Additional Video ResOl wth Ons esseeri eee eee a rE EEEE TaK EREE EEEE 3 15 Additional Conferencing Information 000 cece eee 4 1 Content Sharing sicuri aena ena AE eA AAC EERE E RE EE EES LEa e ei ea 4 1 H239 Protocol sierorisneenraea iranan enaren aE a n EEE IAEE EAR 4 1 SIP BECP Content Capabilities sissies eire e eE E EN EEE 4 2 Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference c cesessesesseeeseseseseeteneeees 4 3 Content Sharing Parameters in Content Highest Common Content Video Switching ModE sser a EE E EAA 4 5 Content SCtH NSS csessceleeveeetsnisttverssleanevencsdctesuandssvodsteatesstitlenstiavdisenedeasiveeedsiarapanness 4 6 Content Protocols irar ENA a Eria rii 4 7 Selecting a Customized Content Rate s ssssssssesissrssrisresresrerisreresreerienrsrrsreesres 4 13 Modifying the Threshold Line Rate for HD Resolution Content ee 4 15 Exclusive Content Mode sssini en sosessssebsseetssssoseversedebeovensevennsest 4 16 GUIGelIMeS sussies Sus Aisin iste ale wi Satna ena 4 17 STOPPING a Content SESSION x65 oc scseeies
559. senoduevsuriaevbansers 2 9 Defining AVC CP Conferencing Profiles ccccsesesssessseseesesssesssteseseeeeeeessesneneiees 2 10 CP Conferencing Additional Information 0 0 0 cece cesesseseeeseesesesensseseseseeenenenees 2 31 Overlay Layouts ceissicccsscucstisssesesazsssscveiaassisesesaivaesevedeagsescssducguenensrdige E a 2 31 Guidelines rnes ako atete seie Rae a pr ia SAS EE EEKE SS 2 31 Message Overlay for Text Messaging ss ssssssesierisressresiesresrisresresreresresrrsneesreresnrs 2 33 Guidelines seisseen reee an aese or ER opar Ee ee E E oeer rE REE EENET ESE 2 33 Chinese Font Types icc sssnissrcsessssetsesessvsssaessronenstesshonensvongdoncentononeotsbenedonorstenevivoxstobenseene 2 34 Site Names Definitio ariii iiia veriri ata EEk ENEE A E E ERES 2 35 GuideliheS aiceessesesssesacenassosssvensussesstesshsensedessiosnsviansss savennnsisussvensinndives sabvadisge ivtasdenee ss 2 35 Exporting and Importing Conference Profiles ccccesesssescsseeseseeeeteeeseesesesesneaeeseeeeens 2 36 GUILE GS 5c cd sesda coaches orire ETEN r REENE EE AE ER ERE EEEE E E 2 36 Exporting Conference Profiles sissiiisisiisiisinisiieissisisiisiiiiiiiiiiiis 2 36 Exporting All Conference Profiles from an MCU ss sssnsssssssrsstnsssrsrrsssrssreessees 2 36 Exporting Selected Conference Profiles eeeee tees ceeeeeeeceneneneneees 2 37 Importing Conference Profiles ccccccsteescatsies cvecensevevecseststeavsninstaesesiectenveesnsevavecnnaes 2 38 Vid
560. servers Note The IP address fields are enabled only if Specify is selected Register Host Names Select this option to automatically register the MCU Signaling Host Automatically to DNS with the DNS server Servers Local Domain Name Enter the name of the domain where the MCU is installed DNS Servers Addresses Primary Server Secondary Server The static IP addresses of the DNS servers ad A maximum of three servers can be defined Tertiary Server 16 6 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services 8 Click the Security tab gt IP gt Routers Network Service Name gt DNS gt Security I Secured Communication r Revocation Method NONE Global Responder URL F F K 9 Modify the following fields Table 16 4 Management Network Properties Security Parameters Le Secured Select to enable Secured Communication Communication The Collaboration Server supports TLS 1 0 and SSL 3 0 Secure Socket Layer A SSL TLS Certificate must installed on the Collaboration Server for this feature to be enabled Skip certificate Not supported with RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1500 validation for user 2000 4000 logging session 10 Click OK 11 If you have modified the Management Network Properties reset the MCU Modifying the Default IP Network Service Polycom Inc The Default IP Service parameters need to be modified if you want to change the
561. sesssssisresresssereeresresseene 8 21 G ideli es sieisen otsisin e a a ae e E EiS 8 21 Guidelines sisevee Ale ee ears Er ESENE TE E SEE een 8 21 Enabling and Disabling the Obtain Display Name from Address Book Feature irene us A E E TEE 8 21 Enabling and Disabling the Obtain Display Name from Address Book FCAT Cesc E E E E ER E S 8 21 Importing and Exporting Address Books ccccsssssssssseeesescsesneeseeeeeeseseesssesessseeesssseeeess 8 23 Exporting an Address BOOK gerenessenrent ania e EE 8 23 Importing an Address BOOK ierste ar A EEEE EEN EEE 8 23 R servations iesirea s iie iaa kei poi ho aa E EE a E a dee E as 9 1 GUI EINES iriser ie a A EEE E EEEE E DATENT Ee 9 1 RESOUTCES prensese NE e E ENEE E E EN EON 9 1 Reservations c2scs2icsevsnsnecssis ties e E ER E 9 2 Using the Reservation Calendar iseer teast nrin nE a 9 3 Toolbar Buttons isccsiessissessceccssessoscastssstvsaestesuivesassdssnveaesseeutveaesdbadiien sadesdtepssdesnbenen ties 9 3 Reservations VIEWS sics icecasceevisacsesnquiesaoheceucvudeclaansevdesa e R REENE EEE 9 4 Week VieW sicsesesssssevecacsssssseasspssesc cou casssteceetesvsdestyeseuseyeuedesvydhsteevansescusiesceeeitie sdecsidy tees 9 4 Daly VICW t aisc ts E Aes eee einen eal aaa nee 9 4 Today VIEW cietie iinei an AN E ER E 9 4 List View vacitiisdetiesisncenisitianigin etr a Eeer E aTa aain EPET EE EEEE EEEa 9 5 Changing the Calendar View cscs iesesescsesssesesenssesescesnedosesedenesosesesanotosescdenscesnetesdo
562. sh 2 Click the check box of the required language Only one language can be selected 3 Click OK 4 Restart the RMX Manager application to implement the language change Import Export RMX Manager Configuration 18 18 The RMX Manager configuration that includes the MCU list and the multilingual selection can be save to any workstation PC on the network and imported to any Multi RMX Manager installed in the network This enables the creation of the MCUs list once and distributing it to all RMX Manager installations on the network In addition when upgrading to a previous version the MCU list is deleted and can be imported after upgrade The exported file is save in XML format and can be edited in any text editor that can open XML files Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 18 RMX Manager Application To Export the RMX Manager Configuration 1 3 In the Multi RMX Manager click the Export RMX Manager Configuration gt button in the toolbar or right click anywhere in the MCUs pane and then click Export RMX Manager Configuration Add MCU Export RMX Manager Configuration Import RMX Manager Configuration The Export RMX Manager Configuration dialog box opens Click the Browse button to select the location of the save file or enter the required path in the Export Path box Export RMX Manager Configuration x Export Path CD The selected file path is displayed in the Export Path box
563. she is being connected as Audio Only Participant Help A voice menu that is played upon request from a participant listing Menu the operations and their DTMF codes that can be performed by any participant Password Changed A message is played when the password was successfully changed Successfully Recording Failed This message is played when the conference recording initiated by the chairperson or the participant depending on the configuration fails to start Recording in This message is played to participant joining a conference that is Progress being recorded indicating the recording status of the conference Request Billing Code Requests the participant to enter a code for billing purposes Requires Chairperson The message is played when the conference is on hold and the chairperson joins the conference For this message to be played the Conference Requires Chairperson option must be selected in the Conference Profile IVR dialog box Self Mute A confirmation message that is played when participants request to mute their line Self Unmute A confirmation message that is played when participants request to unmute their line Polycom Inc 15 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 15 14 18 Click the Video Services tab The New Conference IVR Service Video Services dialog box opens gt Global gt Welcome Conference IVR Service Name IVR_ENGLISH gt Conference Chairperson gt Confer
564. sing the parameters defined in the Profile Automatic Select this check box to immediately accept the conference creator Connection endpoint to the conference If the check box is cleared the endpoint is redirected to the conference and then connected 4 Click OK The new SIP Factory is added to the list 7 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 7 Entry Queues Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories Monitoring Registration Status The SIP registration status can be viewed in the Entry Queue or SIP Factory list panes ide X Display Name ID Profile Dial in N SIP Registration ft EQL 61421 Register Registered SIP Registration Psi ied DefaultFactory RTV Registered The following statuses are displayed e Not configured Registration with the SIP Server was not enabled in the Conference Profile assigned to the Entry Queue or SIP Factory When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile the Collaboration Server s registering to SIP Servers will each register with an URL derived from its own signaling address e Failed Registration with the SIP Server failed This may be due to incorrect definition of the SIP server in the IP Network Service or the SIP Server may be down or any other reason the affects the connection between the Collaboration Server or the SIP Server to the network e Registered the conferencing entity is registered with the SIP Server e Partially Regis
565. splay tab Polycom Inc To be able to display the video preview window Direct3D Acceleration options must be Enabled DirectX Diagnostic Tool System Direct Files D isplay Sound Music Input Network More Help Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information the DirectDraw Acceleration and Device Name Mobile Intel R 965 Express Chipset Family Main Driver Manufacturer Intel Corporation DAC Type Internal Approx Total Memory 384 0 MB Current Display Mode 1280 x 800 32 bit 60Hz 1 Plug and Play Monitor DirectDraw Acceleration Enabled Direct3D Acceleration Enabled AGP Texture Acceleration Not Available Notes Drivers Version Chip Type Mobile Intel R 965 Express Chipset Family Date WHQL Logo d Mini VDD VDD DDI version igxprd32 dll 6 14 0010 4859 English 2007 8 8 05 29 06 Yes igoxpmp32 sys nja 9 or higher Disable Test DirectDraw Disable _ Test Direct3D No problems found To test DirectDraw Functionality click the Test DirectDraw button above To test Direct3D Functionality click the Test Direct3D button above NextPage Save All Information If the video card installed in the PC does not support DirectDraw Acceleration a black window may be viewed in the Video Preview window 5 Click the Exit button Previewing the Participant Video To preview the participant video 1 List the conf
566. ss gt Ports IPv4 10 234 104 93 gt Qos gt SIP Servers J Security Media 1 IP Address gt SIP Advanced Ipv4 10 234 104 93 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 kaa 3 Modify the following fields Table 16 5 Default IP Network Service IP r e O Network Service The name Default IP Service is assigned to the IP Network Service by Name the Fast Configuration Wizard This name can be changed Note This field is displayed in all IP Signaling dialog boxes and can contain character sets that use Unicode encoding 16 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services Table 16 5 Default IP Network Service IP Continued E ee Seine IP Network Type Displays the network type selected during the First Entry configuration The Default IP Network icon indicates the selected environment You can select e H 323 For an H 323 only Network Service e SIP For a SIP only Network Service e H 323 amp SIP For an integrated IP Service Both H 323 and SIP participants can connect to the MCU using this service Note This field is displayed in all Default IP Service tabs Signaling Host IP On RMX 1800 this field is disabled as only one IP address is used for Address signaling and media transmission Media Card 1 Enter the address to be used by IP endpoints when dialing in to the IP Address MCU Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the MCU Default value 255 255 255 0 4 Click the Routers tab gt
567. stem Operator Conferences CP only Conferences Offers additional conference management capabilities to the Collaboration Server users enabling them to attend to participants with special requirements and acquire participant details for billing and statistics This service is designed usually for large conferences that require the personal touch For more information see Chapter 10 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move on page 10 1 Polycom Inc 2 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Default Profile Settings in CP Conferencing Mode The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default Conference Profile for CP conferences which allows users to immediately start standard ongoing CP conferences These are also the default settings when creating a new Profile The default settings are as follows Table 2 1 Default CP Only Conference Profile Settings Se Packet Loss Compensation LPR Disabled and DBA Auto Terminate e After last participant quits Enabled e When last participant remains Disabled Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Table 2 1 Default CP Only Conference Profile Settings Continued Network Services Accept Calls Enabled This Profile is automatically assigned to the following conferencing entities Meeting Rooms Maple_Room 1001 Entry Queue Default EQ 1000 Polycom Inc 2 7 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Viewing Profiles Conference Profil
568. strator s Guide The Conference Summary Record The conference summary record the first record in the unformatted CDR file contains the following fields Table C 1 Conference Summary Record Fields a rs File Version Version The version of the CDR utility that created the file version of the CDR The version of the CDR utility that created the file that created the file e _ Routing The Routing Name of the conference Name Internal Conference ID The conference identification number as assigned by the system Reserved Start Time The time the conference was scheduled to start in Greenwich Mean Time GMT The reservation time of a reservation that was started immediately or of an ongoing conference is the same as the Actual Start Time Reserved Duration The amount of time the conference was scheduled to last Actual Start Time The actual time the conference started in GMT Actual Duration The actual conference duration The conference status code as follows 1 The conference is an ongoing conference 2 The conference was terminated by a user 3 The conference ended at the scheduled end time 4 The conference ended automatically because no participants joined the conference for a predefined time period or all the participants disconnected from the conference and the conference was empty fora predefined time period 5 The conference never started 6 The conference could not start due to a problem
569. system upgrade The default value is All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of the system are made using the Resolution Configuration dialog box Possible flag values HD1080 High Definition at 60 fps HD720 High Definition at 60 fps HD High Definition at 30 fps D30 Standard Definition at 30 fps D15 Standard Definition at 15 fps CIF CIF resolution Default HD1080 For more information see Video Resolutions in AVC based CP Conferencing on page 4 1 Note From Version 8 1 MPM media card is not supported Polycom Inc 20 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 1 System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued pret ie eerictes een MAX_INTRA_REQUESTS_P_ Enter the maximum number of refresh intra requests for the ER_INTERVAL_ Content channel sent by the participant s endpoint in a 10 seconds interval that will be dealt by the Collaboration Server system When this number is exceeded the Content sent by this participant will be identified as noisy and his her requests to refresh the Content display will be suspended Default setting 3 MAX_INTRA_SUPPRESSIO Enter the duration in seconds to ignore the participant s N_DURATION_IN_SECOND requests to refresh the Content display S Default setting 10 MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAG Defines the maximum number of concurrent management EMENT_SESSIONS_PER_S sessions http and https connections per system YSTEM Value 4 80 Default
570. t Mono To save this format click the Save As button The Save As dialog box opens Select the location where the format will reside enter a name and then click OK x Save this format as PCM Cancel The system returns to the Sound Selection dialog box Click OK The system returns to the Properties for Sound dialog box Click OK The system returns to the Sound Sound Recorder dialog box You are now ready to record your voice message Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 15 IVR Services To record a new audio message Regardless of the recording utility you are using verify that any new audio message recorded adheres to the following format settings 16 000kHz 16Bit Mono Make sure that a microphone or a sound input device is connected to our PC i On your PC click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Entertainment gt Sound Recorder The Sound Sound Recorder dialog box opens 2 Click File gt New 3 Click the Record button The system starts recording 4 Start narrating the desired message For all audio IVR messages stop the recording anytime up to 3 minutes which is the maximum 4 duration allowed for an IVR voice message If the message exceeds 3 minutes it will be rejected by the Collaboration Server unit 5 6 Click the Stop Recording button Save the recorded message as a wave file click File gt Save As The Save As dialog box opens Seve in MARES my eBooks Emy
571. t CDR File display lt ccissassesssesassocscsassvescsesssosescscsestsoncnenssotonensnssonssenes 17 5 Refreshing the CDR List rroi aneinander iaci iien iai aE ea Ea Er Eei 17 6 Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records s sssssssssesiseissrisresresrerrisresses 17 6 RMX Manager Application 000 0c eee eee 18 1 Installing the RMX Manager erence a ra EE EERE EE 18 1 Starting the RMX Manager Application ss ssssssssissesssssierisrresrssresresresresnesnereerisnrsnenreenees 18 3 Connecting to the MCU nsencinenisnanincie enna a e a 18 4 RMX Manager Main Sereen sic i cniceeicntide natives an E E 18 6 MCUS Pane o n E T E E E E E S 18 7 Conferences Panessonnanier enren Aiea Si Re Re 18 8 Collaboration Server Management ccccscsessssssseesesesssesssnesessesesescsesnesssseeeees 18 8 List Pane E veevedsvhlvee cdvisteostaieeateseaesataviae adediesteees 18 9 StALUS Baw EEEE EEE 18 9 Address BOOK 4s shea iid cd tai ee ed eee a ne IE es 18 10 Conference Templates csscscscscscsezscessssssscsesssssecnsscusacaresesevededustesnstsonecsevededueseveets 18 10 Adding MCUs to the MCUs List oo ee cece ee ee cesses nesesssssesesessssseseseesessseeesesenenegs 18 10 Starting a COMLETENCE psec cstazeserssscs saves stscvissssazsonsatvensaazcsendesaasducvadeapyesenpcesy venssodeedvesedovendeaneds 18 12 Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane ccc eee ee eeeeeeeeee estes 18 13 Starting Reservation ciiiieecessadesacidacestenc
572. t Index column displays the CDR file s sequence in the CDR file set e CDRs that are up to 1MB consist of a single file Each file has a unique Display Name and a Part Index of 1 e Files included in a Multi Part CDR file sets have the same Display Name The first file of the set is numbered 1 with each additional CDR file numbered in an ascending numeric sequence Polycom Inc 17 5 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Refreshing the CDR List To refresh the CDR list e Click the Refresh button or right click on any record and then select Refresh Updated conference CDR records are retrieved from the MCU memory Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records To retrieve and archive CDR records 1 To retrieve a single CDR record right click the record to retrieve and then select the required format as detailed in Table 17 2 Alternatively select the record to retrieve and then click the appropriate button on the toolbar as detailed in Table 17 2 To retrieve multiple CDR records simultaneously use standard Windows multi selection methods Table 17 2 Conference Information Retrieval Options Menu Option Button Retrieve ee Retrieves the conference information as unformatted data into a file whose extension is cdr Retrieve Formatted FE Retrieves the conference information as formatted text XML into a file whose extension is xml Note Viewed when logged in as a special support user Retrieve Form
573. t LOSS c sesclescsscsscexess isestigess sea sirsie tenei rene S R EA En EERE TREKK ESR 4 35 Effects of Packet Loss on Conferences ccccccessescsesssneseeeeseeeseecenenesesesneeeeseess 4 35 Lost Packet RECOVELY seision corer e tis cetbann S E E 4 35 Lost Packet Recovery Guidelines ss sssssessssssesieseestssrestesresrssresresresersrenrenreseess 4 35 Enabling Lost Packet ReECOVETLY oo cece cesses eecessseseeesessssseseessseseseseseneseseseaes 4 36 Monitoring Lost Packet ReECOVELY miernes eisni ai ea REEN 4 36 Lecture Mode soins iei arie a ai AAEN EAE S A A 4 38 Fnabling Lecture Mod rssssssioroniemen siro i e n 4 38 Selecting the Conference Lecturer cccsssseccssesssssseseseeeenseessseesesesnsneesssees 4 38 Enabling the Automatic Switching 0 ees sees sessesesenensseseseseseeeseseeeees 4 40 Lecture Mode Monitoring sissisota a a a EEE EEE 4 40 Restricting Content Broadcast to Lecturer ss ssessssssesissesrrisresresresrisresresnrerisresses 4 42 Muting Participants Except the Lecturer sssssssssssssssssesisrerrisresierresrisresresresresresnes 4 43 G ideliN S sarisini ria sne 4 43 Enabling the Mute Participants Except Lecturer Option 0 0 4 44 Audio Algorithm S pPpott essresnsiiaicoriis aine iaar rir e ain ane a E 4 45 GUI SMES essri seriinin irea e i AE ENAERE EEEE RAA 4 45 SIP EnerypuOn aiinctiesidnce kiwis Oita ee ieee en er E EATR 4 45 MIMO E E 4 45 STETE siisii Erare EENE EE EE EEREN EN di EE AS
574. t Mode on page 4 16 Enable FECC This option is enabled by default allowing participants in the conference to control the zoom and PAN of other endpoints in the conference via the FECC channel Clear this check box to disable this option for all conference participants FW NAT Keep Alive The MCU can be configured to send a FW NAT Keep Alive message at specific Intervals for the RTP UDP and BFCP channels For more information see FW Firewall NAT Keep Alive on page 16 25 Interval If needed modify the NAT Keep Alive Interval field within the range of 1 86400 seconds For more information see FW Firewall NAT Keep Alive on page 16 25 6 Click the Video Quality tab The New Profile Video Quality dialog box opens e rra N gt General Display Name gt Advanced j gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR i a People Video Definition gt Recording gt Site Names Video Quality Sharpness jd gt Message Overlay Maximum Resolution Auto Zi gt Network Services Content Video Definition Content Settings HiResGraphics ad Content Protocol H264 HD x Polycom Inc 2 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 7 Define the following parameters Table 2 6 New AVC Profile Video Quality Parameters Field Option Description People Video Definition Video Quality Sharpness is the only supported
575. t When Move succeeds Move succeeds Move succeeds Connected only Possible connected connected connected non if endpoint was a encrypted encrypted encrypted defined participant in the source conference Otherwise move fails System Flag FORCE_ENCRYPTION_FOR_UNDEFINED_PARTICIPANT_IN_WHEN_AVAILABLE_MODE Recording Link Encryption Recording Links are treated as regular participants however the ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONEF System Flag must be set to YES if a non encrypted Recording Link is to be allowed to connect to an encrypted conference Table 4 13 summarizes the connection possibilities for a Recording Link that is to be connected to a conference for each of the conference profile and Entry Queue encryption options Table 4 13 Connections by Recording Link and Conference Encryption Settings Recording Link Connection Status according to flag ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_ COM EELS LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF Profile Setting Connected encrypted if possible Connected only if encrypted otherwise disconnected Encrypt All otherwise connected non encrypted No Encryption Connected non encrypted Connected non encrypted Connected encrypted if possible Connected encrypted if possible Encrypt when possible otherwise connected non otherwise connected non encrypted encrypted Encryption Flag Settings To modify the Encryption flags 1 Click Setup gt System Configuration The System Flags d
576. t an item from a menu For example Administration gt System Information indicates that you need to select System Information from the Administration menu 1 2 Polycom Inc Chapter 1 Polycom RMX 1800 Overview About the Polycom RMX 1800 System Polycom Inc The Polycom RMX 1800 system is a high performance scalable IP network H 323 and SIP MCU that provides feature rich and easy to use multipoint voice and video conferencing The MCU can be used as a standalone device to run voice and video conferences or it can be used as part of a solution provided by Polycom This solution may include the following components e Polycom RSS 4000 provides one touch recording and secure playback on video conferencing systems tablets and smartphones or from your Web browser e Polycom Distributed Media Application DMA provides call control and MCU virtualization with carrier grade redundancy resiliency and scalability e Polycom RealPresence Access Director RPAD removes communication barriers and enables internal and external teams to collaborate more easily and effectively over video The following diagram describes the multipoint video conferencing configuration with the Collaboration Server as a standalone system Figure 1 1 Multipoint Video Conferencing using a Polycom Collaboration Server The Polycom RMX 1800 unit can be controlled via the LAN by the Collaboration Server Web Client applicati
577. t if the Auto Terminate option is enabled Participant Quits Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse after the last participant has disconnected from the conference before the conference is automatically terminated by the MCU Conference Lock Not supported Flag Always contains the value 0 Maximum Number The maximum number of participants that can connect to the conference at of Participants one time The value 65535 auto indicates that as many participants as the MCU s resources allow can connect to the conference up to the maximum possible for the type of conference Audio Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 65535 Audio Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 65535 Video Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 65535 C 12 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 4 Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1 Continued Fe Video Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 65535 Data Board ID Not supported Always contains the value 65535 Data Unit ID Not supported Always contains the value 65535 Message Service The Message Service type Type Currently the only value is 3 IVR Conference IVR The name of the IVR Service assigned to the conference Service Note If the name of the IVR Service contains more than 20 characters it will be truncated to 20 characters Lecture Mode Type Indicates the type
578. t one MCU is connected This screen is similar to the Web Client Main Screen with the addition of the MCUs pane As in the Web Client the panes are displayed according to the Authorization Level of the logged in User The MCUs pane is displayed to all users Ongoing MCUs Pane List Pane Address Book Pane Conferences The selected MCU is highlighted Pane RMX Manager MCU selected Sales 172 25 104 120 Polycom RMX Manager View Ad bd Find AS SS Display Name 1P Address Status Product T Monitored Voice video Name 2 mcu 172 22 190 40 Disconnect RMX20 mcu Name _ Status E Sales 172 25 104 120 Major RMX15 0 48 24 78 I 721290 Niv Wagner 3 participants Sales amp Jesus lt gt Connected Sales Ree DWB lt Connected RPX Sim Vineyard WaterTower NorthChurch Sales Rey Austi lt Connected Support_gk TPW 1 so3ejduioy eoue auto_demo Support_400_ Lex Broadway_NY MinuteMan e mcu Display N Status ID Start Tim End Ti SIP Regis Internal ID Dial in Numt Sales By 7212 36803 16 00 16 00 Not Conf 10148 Sales 7213 50304 16 00 16 00 Not Conf 10149 pea ira Hercules SimbaLab Device Vineyard OTX CastleIsland O Management l j m Pane ememoras _______________ wre oTx Pratyaksh_Indi Frequently Used a PSD OTX Connections SHELLY_HDX8 AR Users Andover Conf F A Sig
579. t size is selected both rolling and static messages may be truncated if the message length exceeds the resolution width Changes to the Message Overlay display characteristics position size color and speed are immediately visible to all participants Changes to the Message Overlay Content are immediately visible to all participants When there is a current Message Overlay The current message is stopped immediately The Display Repetition count is reset to 1 The new message Content is displayed lt Display Repetition gt times or until it is stopped and replaced by another Content change If a Repeating Message is modified before it has completed all its repetitions it is changed immediately without completing all of its repetitions The modified Repeating Message is displayed starting with repetition one Message Overlay messaging is not supported in Lecture mode If during the ongoing conference the Show Number of Participants DTMF option default DTMF 88 is used when the displayed number of participants is removed the message overlay text is also removed Participants that have their video suspended do not receive Message Overlays messages Message Overlay text messages cannot be sent via the Content channel Message Overlay messages are not displayed when the PCM menu is active Message Overlay text settings are not saved in the Conference Template when saving an ongoing conference as a Conference Template
580. tal number of Video ports in the system according e The number of Video ports in use e The High Port Usage threshold For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Port Usage Gauges on page 3 7 MCU State The MCU State indicator displays the status of the selected MCU For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide MCU State on page 3 7 Address Book Displays the Address Book of the selected MCU regardless of its Monitored status The Address Book is a list of Participants and Groups that have been defined on the selected Collaboration Server The information in the Address Book can be modified only by an administrator All Collaboration Server users can however view and use the Address Book to assign participants to conferences The name of the selected Collaboration Server is displayed in the title of the Address Book pane For more details see the Polycom RMX 1800 Getting Started Guide Address Book on page 3 8 Conference Templates Conference Templates enable administrators and operators to create save schedule and activate identical conferences The Conference Templates pane lists the Conference Templates that have been defined on the selected Collaboration Server regardless of its Monitored status The Conference Templates pane is initially displayed as a closed tab The name of the selected Collaboration Server and the number of saved Conference Templates is indicate
581. tance inpre H e The participant s connection Status changes reflecting the help request For more information see Table 10 2 e The conference status changes and it is displayed with the exclamation point icon and the status Awaiting Operator e The appropriate voice message is played to the relevant participants indicating that assistance will be provided shortly Polycom Inc 10 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The following icons and statuses are displayed in the Participant Status column Table 10 2 Participants List Status Column Icons and Indications Awaiting Individual The participant has requested the operator s Assistance assistance for himself herself Awaiting Conference The participant has requested the operator s Assistance assistance for the conference Usually this means that the operator is requested to join the conference When the Operator moves the participant to the Operator conference for individual assistance the participant Status indications are cleared Participant Alerts List The Participant Alerts list contains all the participants who are currently waiting for operator assistance Conference Name Status Disconne Role IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Di Audio Video Encryptio FECC Tok Con Sales Rx Wanda 3B Awaiting Individual assist 172 22 H 323 p Dial o Participants are automa
582. tandard recommendation Note For homologation and certification testing this flag must be set to 1 QOS_IP_SIGNALIN Used to select the priority of IP packets when DiffServ is the is the selected G method for packet priority encoding Range Ox Default 0x28 SIP_TIMERS_SET_ SIP Timer type timeout settings according to standard or proprietary INDEX protocol Possible values are 0 Default 1 SIP Standard recommendation Note For homologation and certification testing this flag must be set to 1 Deleting a Flag To delete a flag 1 Inthe System Flags dialog box select the flag to delete and click the Delete Flag button 2 Inthe confirmation message box click Yes to confirm 3 Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box 20 20 Polycom Inc Chapter 20 System Configuration Flags Auto Layout Configuration Polycom Inc The Auto Layout option lets the Collaboration Server automatically select the conference video layout based on the number of participants currently connected to the conference You can modify the default selection of the conference video layout to customize it to your conferencing preferences Customizing the Default Auto Layout The default Auto Layout is controlled by 13 flags PREDEFINED AUTO LAYOUT_0 PREDEFINED_AUTO_ LAYOUT _12 Each of the 11 Auto Layout flags can be left at its default value or set to any of the Possible Values listed in Table 20 4 The flag that controls th
583. te At the End When Last Participant Remains Only one participant is still connected to the conference for the predefined time period excluding the recording link which is not considered a participant when this option is selected Note The selection of this option is automatically cleared and disabled when the Operator Conference option is selected The Operator conference cannot automatically end unless it is terminated by the Collaboration Server User Auto Redialing The Auto Redialing option instructs the Collaboration Server to automatically redial H 323 and SIP participants that have been abnormally disconnected from the conference Auto Redialing is disabled by default Auto Redialing can be enabled or disabled during an ongoing conference using the Conference Properties Advanced dialog box The Collaboration Server will not redial an endpoint that has been disconnected from the conference by the participant The Collaboration Server will not redial an endpoint that has been disconnected or deleted from the conference by an operator or administrator 2 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Table 2 5 New AVC CP Profile Advanced Parameters Continued Exclusive Content Select the Exclusive Content Mode check box to limit the Content Mode broadcasting to one participant preventing other participants from interrupting the Content broadcasting while it is active For more details see Exclusive Conten
584. teentecenss 9 6 Scheduling Conferences Using the Reservation Calendar ccccseeseeseseeeeneeeeeeeees 9 8 Creating a New Reservation scriniis tiiran anria a E i 9 8 Managing Reservations eerti inaire Teeni er en Eo E E EEEE OR 9 14 Guidelines isesi e E Ee E EEE Se RE 9 14 Viewing and Modifying Reservations s ssssssesierisressessiertsrtsresrerrerresresntsrenresresnes 9 14 Using the Week and Day views of the Reservations Calendar 00 9 14 Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservations se ssssssssississsesresiesiesrisresresresresresses 9 16 Deleting Reservations sisssecsissusscscsescwticsesisectvesssdoetasseaiessvonenosisanoteeseusbeot RRN eaa ika 9 17 Searching for Reservations using Quick Search sssssssssesissisrresiesisrssresresresresress 9 18 Operator Assistance amp Participant Move 5 5 10 1 Operator Comferen ces crne neren eene ei e eeren Eee ea Ee aE EEE EESE NESES 10 1 Defining the Components Enabling Operator Assistance ss ssssssessesresrerrisresees 10 2 Defining a Conference IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options 10 3 Defining an Entry Queue IVR Service with Operator Assistance Options 10 5 Defining a Conference Profile for an Operator Conference ccseeseseeeees 10 6 Starting an Ongoing Operator Conference 0 0 eeeeesee ee ceneeeeene senses 10 8 Polycom Inc v Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Saving an Operator Conference to a Temp
585. tent bit rate for the current conference is re calculated and decreased Bit rate allocation by the MCU is dynamic during the conference and when the Content channel closes the video bit rate of the People conference is restored to its maximum During a conference the MCU will not permit an endpoint to increase its bit rate it can however change its Content resolution The Collaboration Server can decrease the allocated Content bit rate during a conference The following table summarizes the bit rate allocated to the Content channel from the video channel in each of the Content Settings according to the conference line rate Table 4 3 Decision Matrix Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel per Conference Line Rate Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps Settings 768 1472 eee Be H ESS TET 128 192 256 384 384 512 768 768 1536 1536 Graphics Customized The Content Bit Rate is selected from a menu in the Content Video Definition pane Content Rate See Selecting a Customized Content Rate on page 4 13 4 6 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Table 4 4 Decision Matrix Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel per Conference Line Rate Content Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate kbps Content Settings 768 1472 se 832 1728 DOCE AISI Tel 128 192 256 384 384 oe Customized The Content Bit Rate is selected from a menu in the
586. tent is shared using H 263 For more information see Content Sharing on page 4 1 Lecture Mode The lecturer is seen by all participants in full screen while the lecturer views all conference participants in the selected video layout For more information see Lecture Mode on page 4 38 Presentation Mode CP Conferences only When the current speaker s speech exceeds a predefined time 30 seconds the conference layout automatically changes to full screen displaying the current speaker as the conference lecturer on all the participants endpoints During this time the speaker s endpoint displays the previous conference layout When another participant starts talking the Presentation Mode is cancelled and the conference returns to its predefined video layout Presentation mode is available with Auto Layout and Same Layout Ifthe speaker in a video conference is an Audio Only participant the Presentation Mode is disabled for that participant Video forcing works in the same way as in Lecture Mode when Presentation Mode is activated that is forcing is only enabled at the conference level and it only applies to the video layout viewed by the lecturer Encryption Used to enhance media security at conference and participant levels For more information see Media Encryption on page 4 27 Conference Recording The Collaboration Server enables audio and video recording of conferences using Polycom RSS recording sy
587. tered This status is available only in Multiple Networks configuration when the conferencing entity failed to register to all the required Network Services if more than one Network Service was selected for Registration Ad Hoc Conferencing The Entry Queue can also be used for Ad Hoc conferencing If the Ad Hoc option is enabled for the Entry Queue when the participant enters the target conference ID the system checks whether a conference with that ID is already running on the MCU If not the system automatically creates a new ongoing conference with that ID The conference parameters are based on the Profile linked to the Entry Queue As opposed to Meeting Rooms that are predefined conferences saved on the MCU Ad Hoc conferences are not stored on the MCU Once an Ad Hoc conference is started it becomes an ongoing conference and it is monitored and controlled as any standard ongoing conference For more information about Ad Hoc conferencing see Appendix D Ad Hoc Conferencing on page D 1 Polycom Inc 7 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Polycom Inc 3 Address Book The Address Book stores information about the people and businesses you communicate with The Address Book stores among many other fields IP addresses phone numbers and network communication protocols used by the participant s endpoint By utilizing the Address Book you can quickly and efficiently assign or designate participants to conferences Gr
588. the Line Rate defined for the conference Note This check box cannot be cleared when defining a new participant during an ongoing conference To specify the video rate for the endpoint clear this check box and then select the required video rate Select the video compression standard that will be forced by the MCU on the endpoint when connecting to the conference H 261 H 263 H 264 Select Auto to let the MCU select the video protocol according to the endpoint s capabilities The Auto check box is automatically selected to use the Resolution defined for the conference To specify the Resolution for the participant select the required resolution from the drop down menu Select whether the endpoint uses encryption for its connection to the conference Auto default setting indicates that the endpoint will connect according to the conference encryption setting Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book Table 8 4 New Participant Advanced Properties Continued i Cascaded If this participant is used as a link between conferences select e Slave if the participant is defined in a conference running on a Slave MCU e Master if the participant is defined in a conference running on the Master MCU It enables the connection of one conference directly to another conference using an H 323 connection only The conferences can run on the same MCU or different MCU s For more information see Basi
589. the content rate supported by that endpoint Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Setting the Minimum Content Rate for Each Content Quality Setting for H 264 HD The following System Flags determine the minimum content rate required for endpoints to share H 264 high quality content via the Content channel A System Flag determines the minimum line rate for each Content Setting e Graphics e Hi Resolution Graphics e Live Video In order to change the System Flag values the flags must be manually added to the System Configuration For more information see Modifying System Flags on page 20 1 Table 4 6 H 264 HD System Flags Content Settings Flag Name Range Default Graphics H264_HD_GRAPHICS_MIN_CONTENT_RATE 0 1536 Hi Resolution H264_HD_HIGHRES_MIN_CONTENT_RATE 0 1536 256 Graphics Live Video H264_HD_LIVEVIDEO_MIN_CONTENT_RATE 0 1536 4 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Example Table 4 7 summarizes an example of two participants trying to connect to a conference running at a Line Rate of 1024Kbps The Content Setting for the conference is Hi Resolution Graphics and the H264_HD_HIGHRES_MIN_CONTENT_RATE System Flag setting are used to determine if Content will be shared with the participant Table 4 7 Participant Content Sharing Based on Connection Line Rate and System Flag Setting Participant Conference Line Rate Bit Rate Line Rate Bit Rate Allocation Allocatio
590. the participant It enables the Collaboration Server users to monitor the quality of the video sent and received by the participant and identify possible quality degradation The video preview is displayed in a separate window independent to the Collaboration Server Web Client All Web Client functionality is enabled and conference and participant monitoring as well as all other user actions can be performed while the video preview window is open and active Live video is shown in the preview window as long as the window is open The preview window closes automatically when the conference ends or when participant disconnects from the conference It can also be closed manually by the Collaboration Server user Video Preview Guidelines Polycom Inc e Video preview window size and resolution are adjusted to the resolution of the PC that displays the preview e Video Preview of the video sent from the conference to the participant is shown according to the line rate and video parameters of the level threshold to which the participant is connected e Only one preview window can be displayed for each Collaboration Server Web Client connection workstation 4 21 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Only one preview window can be displayed for a single conference and up to four preview windows can be displayed for each on different workstations one per workstation and one per conference Live video that is shown in the preview windo
591. the system configuration SIP Registration To register the conferencing entity to which this profile is assigned with the SIP Server of the selected Network Service click the check box of that Network Service in this column When SIP registration is not enabled in the conference profile the Collaboration Server s registering to SIP Servers will each register with an URL derived from its own signaling address Accept Calls To prevent dial in participants from connecting to a conferencing entity when connecting via a Network Service clear the check box of the Network Service from which calls cannot connect to the conference 24 Click OK to complete the Profile definition A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list 2 30 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles CP Conferencing Additional Information Overlay Layouts Overlay Layouts allow additional participant endpoints to be displayed in 1x1 conference Video Layouts The following Overlay Layouts are available for use in CP Conferences 1Standalone Endpoint 2 Standalone Endpoints 3 Standalone Endpoints Although the following Overlay Layout is included in the Profiles Video Settings dialog box it is not available for use in any conferencing mode Guidelines Polycom Inc The Overlay Layouts are supported with both new and old Skins in CP mode For more information see Skins on page 2 22 The Overlay Layouts are 20 of the height
592. they contain only conference properties Polycom Inc 2 9 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Defining AVC CP Conferencing Profiles To define a new Profile 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click Conference Profiles 2 Inthe Conference Profiles pane click the New Profile button The New Profile General dialog box opens gt General r Display Name gt Advanced I gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR ERA Routing Name gt Site Names gt Message Overlay gt Network Services I Operator Conference a oe 3 Define the Profile name and if required the Profile General parameters Table 2 4 New AVC CP Profile General Parameters Display Name Enter a unique Profile name as follows English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most characters length varies according to the field European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of the maximum Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the maximum It is recommended to use a name that indicates the Profile type such as Operator conference or Video Switching conference Note This is the only parameter that must be defined when creating a new profile Note This field is displayed in all tabs 2 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Table 2 4 New AVC CP Profile General Parameters Continued Li
593. tibility None 7 FW NAT Keep Alive Interval a gt gt Select the FW NAT Keep Alive check box and if required modify the Interval field within the range of 1 86400 seconds System Configuration in SBC environments In an environment that includes SAM a Polycom SBC to ensure that a RealPresence Mobile endpoint can send content to a conference the value of the system flag NUM_OF_INITIATE_HELLO_MESSAGE IN_CALL_ESTABLISHMENT must be set to at least 3 For more details on modifying the values of system flags see Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags on page 20 10 16 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Polycom RMX 1800 Network Port Usage 16 26 The following table summarizes the port numbers and their usage in the Polycom RMX 1800 Table 16 16 Collaboration Server Network Port Usage Summary Connection Port rune HTTP TCP Management between the Collaboration Server and RP Collaboration Server Web Client HTTPS 443 TCP Secured Management between the Collaboration Server and RP Collaboration Server Web Client DNS 53 TCP Domain name server Can be disabled in the IP Network Service DHCP TCP Dynamic Host Configuration Can be disabled in the Protocol IP Network Service Secured shell It is the Collaboration Server terminal Network Time Protocol Enables access to a time server on the network H 323 GK 1719 Gatekeeper RAS messages RAS traffic H 323 Q 931 172
594. tically added to the Participants Alerts list in the following circumstances e The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong conference ID or conference password and waits for the operator s assistance e The participant requests Operator s Assistance during the ongoing conference This list is used as reference only Participants can be assisted and moved to the Operator conference or the destination conference only from the Participants list of the Entry Queues or ongoing conference where they are awaiting assistance The participants are automatically removed from the Participant Alerts list when moved to any conference including the Operator conference Audible Alarms 10 14 In addition to the visual cues used to detect events occurring on the Collaboration Server an audible alarm can be activated and played when participants request Operator Assistance Using Audible Alarms The Audible Alarm functionality for Operator Assistance requests is enabled for each MCU in either the Collaboration Server Web Client or RMX Manager The Audible Alarm played when Operator Assistance is requested is enabled and selected in the Setup gt Audible Alarm gt User Customization When the Audible Alarm is activated the wav file selected in the User Customization is played and it is repeated according to the number of repetitions defined in the User Customization Polycom Inc Chapter 10 Operator Assistance
595. ticipant The value in the formatted text file is Unreserved participant Node Type The node type as follows 0 MCU 1 Terminal Bonding Phone Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants Number The phone number for Bonding dial out calls C 31 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table C 35 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued we e Video Rate IP Address Call Signaling Port H 323 Party Alias Type SIP Party Address Type H 323 Party Alias SIP Party Address C 32 Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The video rate in units of kilobits per second A value of 4294967295 denotes auto and in this case the rate is computed by the MCU Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The IP address of the participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Note This field is only relevant to IP participants The signaling port used for participant connection A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU Note This field is only relevant to IP participants For H 323 participants the alias type as follows 7 E164 8 H 323 ID 11 URL ID alias type 12 Transport ID 13 Email ID 14 Participant number For SIP participan
596. ticipant button or right click the group to where you want to add the participant and select the New Participant option Alternatively click anywhere in the List pane and select the New Participant option The New Participant General dialog box opens gt General gt Advanced Name gt Information Endpoint Website Dialing Direction Type IP Address Alias Name Type Website IP Address I audio only Extension Identifier String Dial out z H 323 z 0 0 0 0 H 323 ID xl Polycom Inc Chapter 8 Address Book 3 Define the following fields Table 8 3 New Participant General Properties Fa Enter the name of the participant or the endpoint as it will be displayed in the Collaboration Server Web Client The Name field can be modified using Unicode encoding English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain the most characters length varies according to the field European and Latin text length is approximately half the length of the maximum Asian text length is approximately one third of the length of the maximum Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters The maximum length of text fields varies according to the mixture of character sets used Unicode and ASCII This field may not be left blank Duplicate participant names comma and semi colon characters may not be used in this field This name can also become the endpoint name that
597. ting All Conference Profiles from an MCU To export all Conference Profiles from an MCU 1 Inthe RMX Management pane expand the Rarely Used list 2 Click the Conference Profiles button 2 36 Polycom Inc 4 Chapter 2 Conference Profiles The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane Conference prorites tsy eee FERC Display Name Layout Line Ra Routing Encrypt Status SagiICBC o 1920 Profile No OK 2 DBA_Profile Auto Layout 4096 Profile No OK amp cjwei_test Auto Layout 1024 Profile No OK g Factory_Video_Profil H 384K Factor No OK cy Factory_GW_Profile Auto Layout 384K Factor No OK Click the Export Conference Profiles E3 button or right click the Conference Profiles pane and then click Export Conference Profiles leo_ rare v Pre pin mererenen ory_ In the Export Path field click Browse to navigate to the location of the desired path where you want to save the exported file In the Profiles file name field type the file name prefix The file name suffix _confProfiles xml is predefined by the system For example if you type Profiles01 the exported file name is defined as Profiles01_confProfiles xml Click OK to export the Conference Profiles to a file If the export file with the same file name already exists a prompt is displayed aaoo E al TestCP01_confProfiles xml already exists Are you sure you want to replace it
598. ting Faulty status Central signaling failure detected in IP Network Service Central Signaling indicating Recovery status Central Signaling startup failure Central Signaling component is down Conference Encryption Error Configuration of external database did not Check the configuration of the external DB complete CPU IPMC software was not updated Turn off the MCU and then turn it on CPU slot ID not identified The CPU slot ID required for Ethernet Settings was not provided by the Shelf Management D channel cannot be established DEBUG mode enabled Possible explanations e System is running in DEBUG mode e System DEBUG mode initiated In this mode additional prints are added and Startup and Recovery Conditions are different then Non Debug Mode Change the DEBUG_MODE flag value to NO and reset the Collaboration Server DEBUG mode flags in use The system is using the DEBUG CFG flags DMA not supported by IDE device Possible explanations e DMA direct memory access not supported by IDE device Incompatible flash card hard disk being used Flash card hard drive are not properly connected to the board one of the IDE channels is disconnected DMA was manually disabled for testing DNS configuration error Check the DNS configuration DNS not configured in IP Network Service not DNS not configured in IP Network Service in IP Network Service Configure the DNS in the IP Network Services Configure the DNS in the
599. tings Video Layout Encryption Lost Packet Recovery etc The maximum number of Conference Profiles that can be defined is 40 Conference Profiles are assigned to Conferences Meeting Rooms Reservations and Entry Queues The same Profile can be assigned to different conferencing entities When modifying the Profile parameters the changes will be applied to all the conferencing entities to which the profile is assigned Profile changes are not implemented in or affect ongoing conferences Conference Profile options differ according to the selected Conference Type AVC Advanced Video Codec Conferencing Mode offers Continuous Presence CP conferences and a special functional conference Operator Conferences Conferences based on Profiles can be saved to Conference Templates along with all participant parameters including their Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings enabling administrators and operators to create save schedule and activate identical conferences For more information see Chapter 11 Conference Templates Conferencing Mode The MCU system offers Transcoding AVC Conferencing A transcoded CP Continuous Presence conference is also described as an AVC Advanced Video Coding conference It supports the standard video protocols In this mode video is received from all the endpoints using different line rates different protocols SIP H 323 and video parameters e Video protocols H 261 H 263 H 264 Base and
600. tion Server View Administration Setup Help __ Signaling Host 172 22 3 242 Conferences 2 Participants 3 x ddress Bool amp X af lel Aek eS mew Ge amp ie e Name Status ID Start Tim End Tii Name Status Role IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Dire Audio Video Encr Type Y Nar i E Conf B 3 participants 122 fee Mum lt B conn 172 22 H 323 4 Dial out 4 D Mui Rex Singa gt conn 172 21 H 323 amp Dial out 4 T Rex Dial lt conn amp 172 22 40021 H 323 amp Dialin 2 Peeere Conference B Destination Conference EQ created Dial in Linked Participant Cascaded conference icon Polycom Inc 5 13 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Cascading Conferences H 239 enabled MIH Topology H 239 Multi Hierarchy MIH cascading is available to Collaboration Server users enabling them to run very large conferences on different MCUs in multiple levels of Master Slave relationships using an H 323 connection Multi Hierarchy MIH Cascading is implemented where the cascaded MCUs reside on different networks whereas Star Topology Cascading requires that all cascaded MCUs reside on the same network MIH Cascading allows e Opening and using a content channel H 239 during conferences e Full management of extremely large distributed conferences e Connecting conferences on different MCUs at different sites e Utilizing the connection
601. tion Server Menu click View gt Group by MCU View Administration Setup Help Zoom 100 zi Group By MCU Restore RMX Display Defaults The Participants pane display changes accordingly To toggle between the two display modes click View gt Group by MCU Polycom Inc 18 15 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Start Monitoring Stop Monitoring By default all conferences running on connected Collaboration Servers are monitored You can stop the automatic monitoring of conferences on a specific MCU in one of the following methods By clearing the check box in the Monitored column in the MCUs pane cnx M ASST ply Name iPad ress status produet tf ontored voice veo E 172 22 186 45 172 22 186 45 Disconnect RMX 40 V 172 22 190 40 172 22 190 40 Normal RMX 20 V 0 96 0 66 a A Right clicking the MCU icon and selecting Stop Monitoring Add MCU Disconnect MCU Remove MCU Export RMX Manager Configuration Import RMX Manager Configuration MCU Properties The check box is cleared in the Monitored column To start monitoring again click the check box in the Monitored column in the MCUs pane or right clicking the MCU icon and selecting Start Monitoring Start Monitoring Add MCU Disconnect MCU Remove MCU Export RMX Manager Configuration Import RMX Manager Configuration MCU Properties Modifying the MCU Properties 18 16 You can view the currently define
602. tion while endpoints are connected NO Gateway Calls are limited to 60 minutes For more information see the Gateway Functionality on page 19 1 Enables a cascaded link to enter a conference without a password Default NO for security reasons Enables or disables the display of Active Alarms before overwriting the older CDR Auditor Log files enabling the users to backup the older files before they are deleted Default NO When set to YES this flag enables the Collaboration Server system to notify users when an incorrect version upgrade downgrade or upgrade downgrade path is selected When set to NO after initiating an upgrade or downgrade software installation the Collaboration Server activates a fault alert in the Faults List Warning Upgrade started and SAFE Upgrade protection is turned OFF and the upgrade downgrade process continues Range YES NO Default YES Sets the MCU to allocate one CIF video resource to an endpoint regardless of the resolution determined by the Conference Profile parameters You can specify the endpoint types for which resource allocation can be forced to CIF resource enabling other types of endpoints to use higher resolutions in the same conference Enter the product type to which the CIF resource should be allocated Possible values are CMA Desktop for CMA desktop client VSX nnnn where nnmn represents the model number for example VSX 8000 Polycom Inc
603. tions Table 2 lists Transactions that are recorded by the Auditor Table 19 24 Transactions Transaction TRANS_CFG SET_CFG TRANS_IP_SERVICE DEL_IP_SERVICE TRANS_IP_SERVICE NEW_IP_SERVICE TRANS_IP_SERVICE SET_DEFAULT_H323_SERVICE TRANS_IP_SERVICE SET_DEFAULT_SIP_SERVICE TRANS_IP_SERVICE UPDATE_IP_SERVICE TRANS_IP_SERVICE UPDATE_MANAGEMENT_NETWORK TRANS_MCU BEGIN_RECEIVING_VERSION TRANS_MCU COLLECT_INFO TRANS_MCU CREATE_DIRECTORY TRANS_MCU FINISHED_TRANSFER_VERSION TRANS_MCU LOGIN TRANS_MCU LOGOUT TRANS_MCU REMOVE_DIRECTORY TRANS_MCU REMOVE_DIRECTORY_CONTENT TRANS_MCU RENAME TRANS_MCU RESET TRANS_MCU SET_PORT_CONFIGURATION TRANS_MCU SET_RESTORE_TYPE TRANS_MCU SET_TIME TRANS_MCU TURN_SSH TRANS_MCU UPDATE_KEY_CODE 19 51 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 19 24 Transactions Continued Transaction TRANS_OPERATOR CHANGE_PASSWORD TRANS_OPERATOR DELETE_OPERATOR TRANS_OPERATOR NEW_OPERATOR TRANS_SNMP UPDATE ActiveX Bypass At sites that for security reasons do not permit Microsoft ActiveX to be installed the MSI Windows Installer File utility can be used to install NET Framework and NET Security Settings components on workstations throughout the network All workstation that connect to Collaboration Server systems must have both NET Framework and NET Security Settings running locally These components are used for communication with the Collaboration Server and can only be installed on wo
604. tions see Content Sharing Parameters in Content Highest Common Content Video Switching Mode on page 4 5 AS SIP Content This Content Sharing option is not supported with Polycom RMX 1800 4 4 Polycom Inc Chapter 4 Additional Conferencing Information Table 4 2 H 239 Content Options Continued Ki Multiple Resolutions This Content Sharing option is not supported with Polycom RMX 1800 Content Protocol H 263 e Content is shared using the H 263 protocol e Use this option when most of the endpoints support H 263 and some endpoints support H 264 H 263 amp H 264 Auto Selection Content is shared using H 263 if a mix of H 263 supporting and H 264 supporting endpoints are connected e Content is shared using H 264 if all connected endpoints have H 264 capability H 264 HD default e Ensures high quality Content when most endpoints support H 264 and HD Resolutions H 264 Cascade and SVC Optimized e All Content is shared using the H 264 content protocol and is optimized for use in Cascaded Conferences For a detailed description of each of these settings see Content Protocols on page 4 7 Content Resolution Select a Content Resolution from the drop down menu The Content Resolutions that are available for selection are dependent on the content sharing mode Highest Common Content or Multiple Content Resolutions Line Rate and Content Settings that have been selected for the conference For a full list
605. ton The New Entry Queue IVR Service Global dialog box opens R Service D gt Global gt Welcome Entry Queue IVR Service Name l gt Conference ID gt General gt Video Services gt Operator Assistance Language Engish z External Server Authentication Never X Number of User Input Retries g lr Timeout for User Input Sec g DTMF Delimiter E z 4 rf 3 Fillin the following parameters Table 15 10 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Global Parameters Cae as Entry Queue Service Mandatory Enter the name of the Entry Queue Service The name Name can be typed in Unicode Maximum field length is 80 ASCII characters Language Select the language in which the Audio Messages and prompts will be heard The languages are defined in the Supported Languages function Polycom Inc 15 19 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 15 10 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Global Parameters Continued C External Server This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing to verify the participant s Authentication permission to initiate a new conference For a detailed description see Appendix D Ad Hoc Conferencing on page D 1 Select one of the following options None to start a new conference without verifying with an external database the user right to start it Conference ID to verify the user s right to start a new conference with an external database application using th
606. tor SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 10 226 105 13 SIP 4n976 10512 eto amp amp Dial in S Dial in S Dial in S Dial in S Dial in f Dial in amp Dial in S Dial in amp amp Dial in 8 Dial in S Dial in 8 Dial in S Dial in S Dial in S Dial in S Dial in f Dial in F Dial in S Dial in M nial in Hiera amp Type am You can click the blinking Participant Alerts indication bar to view participants that require attention For more information see System and Participant Alerts on page 19 1 Conference Level Monitoring In addition to the general conference information that is displayed in the Conference list pane you can view the details of the conference s current status and setup parameters using the Conference Properties dialog box Viewing the Properties of an Ongoing CP Conference 12 2 To view the parameters of an ongoing CP conference 1 Inthe Conference list pane double click the CP conference or right click the CP conference and then click Conference Properties Polycom Inc Chapter 12 Conference and Participant Monitoring The Conference Properties General dialog box with the General tab opens
607. trator s Guide 8 Click the Video Settings tab The New Profile Video Settings dialog box opens New Profile a x gt General i Display Name gt Advanced y j gt Video Quality Line Rate 384Kbps v gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Skins gt IVR I Presentation Mode gt Recording I Same Layout gt Site Names Bde I Lecturer View Switching gt Message Overlay gt Network Services Auto Scan Interval s 10 IV Auto Layout 1 a E 5 10 verlay 9 Define the video display mode and layout using the following parameters Table 2 7 New AVC CP Profile Video Settings Parameters Field Option Presentation Mode Same Layout Lecture View Switching Select this option to activate the Presentation Mode In this mode when the current speaker speaks for a predefined time 30 seconds the conference changes to Lecture Mode When another participant starts talking the Presentation Mode is cancelled and the conference returns to the previous video layout Select this option to force the selected layout on all participants in a conference Displays the same video stream to all participants and personal selection of the video layout is disabled In addition if participants are forced to a video layout window they can see themselves Select this option to enable automatic switching of participants on the Lecturer s screen when Lecture Mode is enabled for the c
608. ts are arranged in three groups Capability Call Status and H 221 Statistics H 320MCU MIB H320 Used to identify managed objects for an H 320 MCU It consists of four MCU MIB groups System Conference Terminal and Controls The Conference group consists of the active conferences The Terminal group is used to describe terminals in active MCU conferences The Controls group enables remote management of the MCU H323MC MIB H323 Used to identify objects defined for an H 323 Multipoint Controller It MC MIB consists of six groups System Configuration Conference Statistics Controls and Notifications The Conference group is used to identify the active conferences in the MCU The Notifications group allows an MCU if enabled to inform a remote management client of its operational status Note The Collaboration Server supports only one field in H 341 H323MC MIB The Collaboration Server reports the Gatekeeper address using H 341 H323MC MIB 323McConfigGatekeeperAddress 0 0 8 341 1 1 4 2 1 1 4 in response to a query from a manager Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Table 19 9 Standard MIBs MP MIB H323 MP MIB Used to identify objects defined for an H 323 Multipoint Processor and consists of two groups Configuration and Conference The Configuration group is used to identify audio video mix configuration counts The Conference group describes the audio a
609. ts the address type as follows 1 SIP URI 2 Tel URL Note This field is only relevant to IP participants For H 323 participants the participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants the participant address The address may contain up to 80 characters Polycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 36 Event Fields for Event 111 OPERATOR BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY 2 a nn aa Operator Name The login name of the operator moving the participant back to the conference PartyName PartyName The name of the participant being moved name of the participant The name of the participant being moved moved Party ID The identification number as assigned by the MCU of the participant being moved Table C 37 Event Fields for Events 2011 2012 and 2016 ee ae IP PvE _ IPv6 address of the participant s endpoint address of the participant s _ IPv6 address of the participant s endpoint Table C 38 Event Fields for Event 3010 PARTICIPANT INFORMATION e E The participant information fields These fields enable users to enter general information about the participant such as the participant s e mail address The maximum length of each field is 80 characters Not supported Always contains the value 0 Disconnection Cause Values Polycom Inc For an explanation of the disconnection causes see Appendix A Disconnection Causes on page A 1
610. tting this System Flag to NO The content management control BFCP utilizes an unsecured channel 60002 TCP even when SIP TLS is enabled Default YES When set to YES SIP People Content and BFCP capabilities are declared with all vendors endpoints Default YES Range YES NO Enable disable SirenLPR Audio Algorithm for use in IP H 323 SIP calls in both CP and VSW conferences Range YES NO Default YES Enables the SirenLPR audio algorithm when using encryption with the S P protocol Range YES NO Default NO Enables the Video Preview feature Default YES For more details see Video Preview on page 4 21 When set to YES the cascaded link is automatically set to Full Screen 1x1 in CP conferences forcing the speaker in one cascaded conference to display in full window in the video layout of the other conference Set this flag to NO when connecting to an MGC using a cascaded link if the MGC is functioning as a Gateway and participant layouts on the other network are not to be forced to 1X1 Default YES When set to YES Undefined participants must connect encrypted otherwise they are disconnected When set to NO default and the conference Encryption in the Profile is set to Encrypt When Possible both Encrypted and Non encrypted Undefined participants can connect to the same conferences where encryption is the preferred setting Default NO Setting this flag forces the use of the G717
611. ttings For more information see Video Resource Usage on page 3 4 and Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates and Resource Usage Summary on page 3 9 Guidelines e Resolution Slider settings affect all Continuous Presence CP conferences running on the Collaboration Server Video Switched conferences are not affected e A system restart is not needed after changing the Resolution Slider settings Resolution Slider settings cannot be changed if there are ongoing conferences running on the Collaboration Server Accessing the Resolution Configuration Dialog Box The Resolution Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking Setup gt Resolution Configuration in the Collaboration Server Setup menu 3 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 3 Video Protocols and Resolution Configuration for CP Conferencing Modifying the Resolution Configuration Polycom Inc The Resolution Configuration Basic Configuration dialog box is the first dialog box displayed Clicking the Detailed Configuration button toggles the display of the Detailed Configuration pane which displays sliders for modifying minimum connection threshold line rates for endpoints that support H 264 Base Profile or High Profile The Detailed Configuration pane can also be opened by clicking the Manual radio button in the Resolution Configuration pane Sharpness and Motion settings are accessed by clicking the Sharpness and Motion tabs when the Detailed Configuration is open
612. ttings will be restored once Reset is completed system settings will be restored once Reset is completed Collaboration Server fails to connect to Active Directory server Collaboration Server is uploading the version file To cancel the upload and the upgrade reset the Collaboration Server Collaboration Server user password list will be reset Secured SIP communication failed Error status 408 received from SIP proxy Security mode failed Certificate has expired Security mode failed Certificate host name does not match the Collaboration Server host name Security mode failed Certificate is about to expire Security mode failed Certificate not yet valid file Service Request failed SIP registrations limit reached SIP registrations limit reached SIP TLS Certificate has expired The current TLS certificate files have expired and must be replaced with new files SIP TLS Certificate is about to expire The current TLS certificate files will expire shortly and will have to be replaced to ensure the communication with the OCS SIP TLS Certificate subject name is not This alarm is displayed if the name of the Collaboration Server in the certificate valid or DNS failed to resolve this name file is different from the FQDN name defined in the OCS B 8 Polycom Inc Appendix B Active Alarms Table B 1 Active Alarms Continued Alarm Code Alarm Description SIP TLS Failed to load or verify certificate This alarm i
613. ttp lt MCU Control Unit IP Address gt RMXManager html or https lt MCU Control Unit IP Address gt RMXManager html 2 Press Enter To use the Windows Start menu 1 Click Start gt Programs a If the RMX Manager is displayed in the recently used programs list click RMX Manager in the list to start the application or b Click All Programs gt Polycom gt RMX Manager Polycom Inc 18 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide The MCUs screen is displayed listing the MCUs currently defined in the RMX Manager f amp RMX Manager E Polycom RMX Manager Viez Adnioistation Setup telp _ 5 x asa ay i I gt a A 3S S S Display Name IP Address Product Type MCU ll Sales 172 22 190 40 RMX 2000 172 25 104 120 RMX 1500 This screen enables you to add additional MCUs or connect to any of the MCUs listed For details on adding MCUs see Adding MCUs to the MCUs List on page 10 For each listed MCU the system displays the following information MCU Display Name as defined in the Add MCU dialog box IP Address of the MCU s control unit Product Type The MCU type RealPresence Collaboration Server 800s RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1500 RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 2000 or RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 4000 Before connecting to the MCU for the first time the Collaboration Server type is unknown so
614. ty gt SIP Advanced gt V35 Gateway Although you can define fixed ports these ports are not implemented by the RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1500 2000 4000 The port range recommended by IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority is 49152 to 65535 The Collaboration Server uses this recommendation along with the number of licensed ports to calculate the port range 9 Modify the following fields Table 16 7 Default IP Service Conferencing Ports Parameters a Fixed Ports Leave this check box cleared if you are defining a Network Service for local calls that do not require configuring the firewall to accept calls from external entities When cleared the system uses the default port range and allocates 4 RTP and 4 RTCP ports for media channels Audio Video Content and FECC Click this check box to manually define the port ranges or to limit the number of ports to be left open TCP Port from to Displays the default settings for port numbers used for signaling and control To modify the number of TCP ports enter the first and last port numbers in the range The number of ports is calculated as follows Number of simultaneous calls x 2 ports 1 signaling 1 control 16 12 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services Table 16 7 Default IP Service Conferencing Ports Parameters Continued CES UDP Port from to Displays the default settings for port numbers used for audio and
615. u need The following icons are used to indicate the default IP Network Service type Table 16 19 Default IP Network Service Icons o e oo This Network Service supports both SIP and H 323 connections and is designated as default for both SIP and H 323 connections a This Network Service supports both SIP and H 323 connections and is designated as default for H 323 connections This Network Service supports both SIP and H 323 connections and is designated as default for SIP connections This Network Service supports only H 323 connections and is set as default for H 323 connections This Network Service supports only SIP connections and is set as default for SIP connections 16 34 Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services Ethernet Settings The Polycom RMX 1800 is set to automatically identify the speed and transmit receive mode of each LAN ports These port settings can be manually configured if the specific switch requires it via the Ethernet Settings For more details see IP Network Monitoring on page 16 19 The Port numbers displayed in the dialog box do not reflect the physical Port numbers as labeled on the RealPresence Collaboration Server RMX 1500 2000 4000 system Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK Indications The RP Collaboration Server Web Client displays the Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK parameters as defined in the Default H 323 Network Service Conference Profile
616. ue already has the same name or ID Therefore it is recommended to modify the template ID display name routing name to be unique e A Reservation that has become an ongoing conference can be saved as Conference Template e SIP Factories and Entry Queues cannot be saved as Conference Templates e The conference specified in the Conference Template can be designated as a Permanent Conference For more information see Lecture Mode on page 4 38 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Using Conference Templates The Conference Templates list is initially displayed as a closed tab in the Collaboration Server Web Client main window The number of saved Conference Templates is indicated on the tab Polycom RealPresence Collaboration Server 1800 Conferences 2 a Participants EP 1 LOTT Gx Ha A ARo kO Bom oM Display Name Status 1D Start Time End Time Name Status Role IP Address Phone Alias Na Network Dialing Di Auc Marc_45306 Single Partici 26644 10 20 11 50 SUPPORT 1 participant SUPPORT d Single Partici 73254 11 32 12 32 Rex Marc lt Connected BI 10 253 72 13 H 323 amp Dial o 88 Conference Templates Tab as Number of Saved Conference Templates Mio Administration Satie ele SA REE RR an EE Laget 9 s zejdwa L e2ua10ju05 Clicking the tab opens the Conference Templates list Toolbar buttons Click to hide the Conference Templates List 4
617. ult duration of 2 hour e Method III Interactively define the reservation duration Each method requires the selection of a starting time slot in the Reservation Calendar The default time slot is the current half hour period of local time In all views if the New Reservation F button is clicked without selecting a starting time slot or if a time slot is selected that is in the past the Reservation becomes an Ongoing conference immediately and is not added to the Reservations calendar 8 10 20085un 8 11 8 13 2004 00 00 oT 02 0 3 00 04 05 4 Time Slot After selecting a starting time slot in the Reservation Calendar you can create a reservation with a default duration derived from the creation method used or by interactively defining the duration of the reservation Method I To create a reservation with default duration of 1 hour gt gt In the Reservation Calendar toolbar click the New Reservation E button to create a reservation of 1 hour duration Method II To create a reservation with default duration of 1 2 hour gt gt Right click and select New Reservation to create a reservation of 1 2 hour default duration Method III To interactively define the duration 1 Inthe calendar click amp drag to expand the time slot to select the required Date Start Time and Duration for the reservation 2 Inthe Reservation Calendar toolbar click the New Reservation butt
618. ulti Level Precedence and Preemption on page 23 36 Possible values YES NO Default No Used to disable EPC protocol Use of Polycom s proprietary protocol High Profile EPC may result in interoperability issues when used with other vendors endpoints Possible values YES NO Default NO Used to disable High Profile protocol Use of Polycom s proprietary protocol High Profile may result in interoperability issues when used with other vendors endpoints Possible values YES NO Default NO Used to disable the following Audio Codecs e G7221C e G7221 e Siren22 e Siren14 Possible values YES NO Default NO Used to disable H 323 LPR protocol Use of Polycom s proprietary protocol H 323 LPR may result in interoperability issues when used with other vendors endpoints Possible values YES NO Default NO Between the time a conference is scheduled and when it becomes active the IP of an endpoint may change especially in an environment that uses DHCP This flag determines if the E 164 number is to be substituted for the IP address in the dial string Range YES NO Default YES The IP address will be substituted with the E 164 number Enter the protocol to be used for secure communications Default TLSV1_SSLV3 both 20 17 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 20 2 Manually Added System Flags MCMS_PARAMETERS Continued E E RTCP_FIR_ENABLE When set to YES
619. umber The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU to the participant by the MCU Participant Current The participant line rate in Kbps Rate Table C 28 Event fields for Event 33 PARTY CHAIR UPDATE C Participant Name Participant Name The participant name The participant name name Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Chairperson Possible values e True participant is a chairperson e False Participant is not a chairperson participant is a standard participant Table C 29 Event fields for Event 34 PARTICIPANT MAXIMUM USAGE INFORMATION Cr e Participant Name Participant Name _ The name of the participant name of the _ The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Maximum Bit Rate The maximum bit rate used by the participant during the call Maximum Resolution The maximum resolution used by the participant during the call Note The reported resolutions are CIF SD HD720 and HD1080 Other resolutions are roundED up to the nearest resolution For example 2SIF is reported as SD resolution Maximum Frame Rate The maximum frame rate used by the participant during the call Participant Address For H 323 participants the participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants the participant address The address may contain up to 8
620. ure may be used to play back previously recorded video or audio feeds in the conference layout For more information see the RSS 4000 User Guide Participant Properties The Participant Properties option displays viewing only information for monitoring e g communication capabilities and channels used to connect to the conference Users will not be able to perform any functional requests from this window i e disconnect change layout and mute To manage the recording process using the Conference toolbar gt gt Inthe Conferences pane click one of the following buttons in the Conference tool bar axe 3 Display Name status Jo sterTime E varena D te Logistics g Empt 00947 15 20 SUPPORT f Empt 33421 15 20 The recording buttons will only be displayed in the conference tool bar for a conference that is recording enabled Table 13 2 Conferences List Recording Tool bar buttons EE Start Resume recording This button toggles with the Pause button 13 10 Polycom Inc Chapter 13 Recording Conferences Table 13 2 Conferences List Recording Tool bar buttons Continued aes my Pete im Pause recording This button toggles with the Start Resume button Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process By entering the appropriate DTMF code on the endpoint the chairperson can Stop the recording 74 Pause it 75 or Start Resume the recording 73 For more information on managing the recording
621. us Presence CP video streams and built layouts Video quality in Continuous Presence conferences is affected by the conference line rate that determines the maximum line rate to be used by the connecting endpoints and the video capabilities of the endpoints such as the video protocol video resolution and frame rate Content sharing is available in all CP conferences This requires extensive processing of the video sent to each participant in the conference The higher the video rate and resolution the more processing power is required By default every conference Entry Queue and Meeting Room has the ability to declare the maximum CP resolution as defined for the system This includes conferences launched by the Collaboration Server Web Client and conferences started via the API CP conferencing is defined in the Conference profile by settings the following main features e Setting the Conferencing Mode to AVC only e Conference Line Rate e Video Quality Motion or Sharpness e Video Layout Video Protocol Support in CP Conferences The video protocol selected by the system determines the video compression standard used by the endpoints In Continuous Presence conferences the system selects the best video protocol for each of the endpoint according to the endpoint s capabilities The following Video protocols are supported in CP conferences e H 261 the legacy video compression algorithm mandatory to all endpoints It is used by
622. used to import the Conference Profiles on multiple MCUs 2 8 Polycom Inc Chapter 2 Conference Profiles Modifying an Existing Profile You can modify any of the Profile s parameters but you cannot rename the Profile To modify the Profile Properties 1 In the Conference Profiles list double click the Profile icon or right click the Profile icon and then click Profile Properties g Lecture Auto La Delete Profile Import Conference Profiles Export Conference Profiles Export Selected Conference Profiles uF Profile Properties The Profile Properties General dialog box opens Deleting a Conference Profile To delete a Conference Profile 1 2 3 4 In the Conference Profiles list select the Conference Profile you want to delete Click the Delete Profile 3 button or Right click the Conference Profile to be deleted and select Delete Profile from the drop down menu A confirmation dialog box is displayed Click OK in the confirmation dialog box The Conference Profile is deleted A Conference Profile cannot be deleted if it is being used by Meeting Rooms Entry Queues SIP Factories and Reservations A Profile that is assigned to only one ongoing conference and no other conferencing entity can be deleted Defining New Profiles Profiles are the basis for the definition of all ongoing conferences Reservations Meeting Rooms Entry Queues and Conference Templates and
623. ut switching between participants occurs every 15 seconds Conference participants cannot change their Personal Layouts while Lecture Mode is enabled Automatic switching is suspended when one of the participants begins talking and it is resumed automatically when the lecturer resumes talking Enabling Lecture Mode 4 38 Lecture Mode is enabled at the conference level by selecting the lecturer Conference participants cannot change their Personal Layouts while Lecture Mode is enabled Automatic switching between participants viewed on the lecturer s screen is enabled in the conference Profile Selecting the Conference Lecturer Selecting a lecturer for the ongoing conference enables the Lecture Mode You can select the lecturer during the definition of the ongoing conference e after the conference has started and the participants have connected to the conference To select the lecturer and enable the Lecture Mode while starting the conference gt gt Inthe Conference Properties Participant dialog box enable the Lecture Mode in one of the following methods Display Name SUPPORT _913682034 Duration 1 Jo0 F Permanent Conference Name IP Addres Alias Na Network Dialing Di Encryption ex 172 172 21 H 323 Dial out auto Qa 172 172 21 H 323 Dialout auto ey 172 172 21 H 323 Dial out auto Qx 172 172 21 H 323 Dialout auto None Z T Dial Out M
624. vents 2010 2011 2015 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 re Owe IP Address The IP address of the participant An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address was specified for the participant and the gatekeeper is used for routing In all other cases the address overrides the gatekeeper Signaling Port The signaling port used for participant connection H 323 Participant Alias Type SIP For H 323 participants the alias type as follows Participant Address 7 E164 Type 8 H 323 ID 13 Email ID 14 Participant number For SIP participants the address type as follows 1 SIP URI 2 Tel URL H 323 Participant Alias Name SIP For H 323 participants Participant Address The participant alias The alias may contain up to 512 characters For SIP participants The participant address The address may contain up to 80 characters Table C 15 Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2012 USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 Event 2016 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2 ee Encryption Indicates the participant s encryption setting as follows 0 The participant is not encrypted 1 The participant is encrypted 2 Auto The conference encryption setting is applied to the participant Participant Name The name of the participant Participant ID The identification number assigned to the participant by the MCU Tabl
625. ver must be reset to implement the change 16 16 Polycom Inc Polycom Inc Chapter 16 IP Network Services 14 Click the Security tab TP Network Service Properties gt Networking gt IP Network Service Name IP Network Service gt Routers gt DNS IP Network Type H 323 amp SIP z gt Conferencing gt Gatekeeper I SIP Authentication gt Ports User Name gt Qos gt SIP Servers Password gt Security gt SIP Advanced I H 323 Authentication User Name Password 15 Modify the following fields Table 16 10 Default IP Network Service Security SIP Digest me eee SIP Authentication Click this check box to enable SIP proxy authentication Select this check box only if the authentication is enabled on the SIP proxy to enable the Collaboration Server to register with the SIP proxy If the authentication is enabled on the SIP proxy and disabled on the RMX calls will fail to connect to the conferences Leave this check box cleared if the authentication option is disabled on the SIP proxy User Name Enter the user name the Collaboration Server will use to authenticate itself with the SIP proxy This name must be defined in the SIP proxy These fields can contain up to 20 Password Enter the password the Collaboration Server ASCII characters will use to authenticate itself with the gatekeeper This password must be defined in the SIP proxy 16 1
626. vice to modify For more information about the tabs and options of this dialog box see Defining a New Conference IVR Service on page 15 6 3 Modify the required parameters or upload the required audio files 4 Click OK 15 25 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Replacing the Music File 15 26 The Collaboration Server is shipped with a default music file that is played when participants are placed on hold for example while waiting for the chairperson to connect to the conference if the conference requires a chairperson or when a single participant is connected to the conference You can replace the default music file with your own recorded music Music file guidelines e The file must be in wav format e Music length cannot exceed one hour e The music recording must be in the range of 12dB to 9dB Adding a Music File To replace the Music file 1 Inthe Collaboration Server Management pane click IVR Services 2 Inthe IVR Services list toolbar click the Replace Change Music File 33 button The Install Music File window opens Install Music File Music File Path BD Piy selected File Z Play RMX File 3 Click the Browse button to select the audio file wav to upload The Open dialog box opens 21x Lookin BEE O o enda ory to My Recent Documents to OperWSInstall Files of type 4 Select the appropriate audio wav file and then click the Open button
627. videos My Ewisoft Web my 150 Files a My Music B My Pictures my PSPS Files my Received Files my Skype Pictures File name X Save as type Sounds way Cancel Format PCM 16 000 kHz 16 Bit Mono Verify that the Format reads PCM 16 000 kHz 16Bit Mono If the format is correct continue with step 10 If the format is incorrect click the Change button The Sound Selection dialog box is displayed Sound Selection Name Saves Remove Format PCM Attributes 16 000 kHz 16 Bit Mono 31 kb sec v In the Name field select the name of the format created in step 7 on page 15 28 15 29 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide 9 Click OK The system returns to the Save As dialog box 10 In the Save in field select the directory where the file will be stored 11 Inthe Save as Type field select the wav file format 12 In the File name box type a name for the message file and then click the Save button 13 To record additional messages repeat steps 1 to 10 O To upload your recorded wav file to the Collaboration Server see step 6 on page 15 8 Creating a Welcome Video Slide The video slide is a still picture that can be created in any graphic application To create a welcome video slide 1 Using any graphic application save your image in either jpg or bmp file format 2 For optimum quality ensure that the image dimensions adhere to the Collaborati
628. w does not include the Content when it is sent by the participant Video Preview is supported in cascaded conferences If the video preview window is opened when the IVR slide is displayed to the participant it will also be displayed in the video preview window Video Preview is supported with H 264 High Profile Video Preview is disabled in encrypted conferences Video preview cannot be displayed when the participant s video is suspended Participant s video preview and the CMAD window cannot be open and running simultaneously on the same PC as both require the same DirectDraw resource Workstation Requirements 4 22 To be able to display the video preview window the following minimum requirements must be met Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 Internet Explorer 7 and later DirectX is installed DirectDraw Acceleration must be enabled and no other application is using the video resource Hardware acceleration must be enabled Testing your Workstation To ensure that your workstation can display the video preview window 1 2 In Windows click Start gt Run The Run dialog box opens In the Open field type dxdiag and press the Enter key or click OK A Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you open EEA x A confirmation message is displayed Click Yes to run the diagnostics The DirectX Diagnostic Tool dialog box opens Click the Di
629. words assigned by the MCU Possible values are Odisables the automatic password generation Any value other than 0 enables the automatic generation of conference passwords if the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to NO e 1 16 default 6 If the default is used in non secured mode the system will automatically generate conference passwords that contain 6 characters NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MA The maximum number of digits that the user can enter when X_LEN manually assigning a password to the conference Range Default both Modes 16 NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MI_ Defines the minimum length required for the Conference N_LEN password Value 0 16 e Default PAL_NTSC_VIDEO_OUTPU_ When set to AUTO default the video output sent by the T Collaboration Server is PAL This ensures full synchronization between the frame rate of the speaker and the video encoder ensuring smoother video In environments where endpoints are PAL the flag can be set accordingly to change the video encoding of the Collaboration Server to be compatible with the majority of endpoints in the call Possible Value PAL RESTRICT_CONTENT_BRO If set to YES only the conference lecturer may send content ADCAST_TO_LECTURER to the conference If set to NO any conference participant can send content Default YES RRQ_WITHOUT_GRQ To enable registration some gatekeepers require sending first RRQ and not GRQ Set flag to YES if this behavior is required by the gate
630. xample the endpoint disconnected H323 call closed Remote reject The endpoint rejected the call H323 call closed Remote unreachable The call remained idle for more than 30 seconds and was disconnected because the destination device did not answer Possible causes can be due to network problems the gatekeeper could not find the endpoint s address or the endpoint was busy or unavailable for example the do not disturb status is selected H323 call closed Unknown reason The reason for the disconnection is unknown for example the endpoint disconnected without giving a reason H323 call closed Faulty destination Incorrect address format address H323 call closed Small bandwidth The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth to the connection with the endpoint H323 call closed Gatekeeper reject The gatekeeper rejected the endpoint s ARQ ARQ H323 call closed No port left There are no ports left in the IP card H323 call closed Gatekeeper DRQ The gatekeeper sent a DRQ H323 call closed No destination IP For internal use address H323 call Call failed prior or during the The endpoint did not send its capabilities to the capabilities negotiation stage gatekeeper H323 call closed Audio channels didn t The endpoint did not open the audio channel open before timeout A 2 Polycom Inc Appendix A Disconnection Causes Table A 1 Call Disconnection Causes Continued H323 call closed Remote sent bad The
631. xport DT y Polycom Inc 6 Chapter 11 Conference Templates In the Templates file name field type the file name prefix The file name suffix _confTemplates xml is predefined by the system For example if you type Templates01 the exported file name is defined as TemplatesO1_confTemplates xml The system automatically defines the Profiles file name field with the same file name prefix as the Templates file name field For example if you type Templates01 in the Templates file name field the exported profiles file name is defined as TemplatesO1_confProfiles xml Click OK to export the Conference Templates and Conference Profiles to a file Importing Conference Templates Polycom Inc You can import Conference Templates and Conference Profiles from one MCU to multiple MCUs in your environment To import Conference Templates 1 In the Collaboration Server Web Client main window click the Conference Templates tab The Conference Templates are displayed Click the Import Conference Templates EX button or right click the Conference Templates pane and then click Import Conference Templates Delete Conference Template Start Conference from Template Schedule Reserratie ere temnlate 1 Import Conference Templates p Expo erence Export Selected Conference Templates Template Properties The Conference Templates Import dialog box is displayed Conference Templates Import T
632. y adding the SNMP_FIPS_MODE System Flag to system cfg and setting its value A value of YES means that MD5 will neither be displayed as selectable option nor supported Range YES NO Default NO Authentication Password Privacy Enter the privacy protocol DES or AES Protocol The availability of the DES Privacy Protocol as a selectable option is controlled by adding the SNMP_FIPS_MODE System Flag to system cfg and setting its value A value of YES means that DES will neither be displayed as a selectable option nor supported Range YES NO Default NO Privacy Password 13 Type the IP Address and the Community name of the manager terminal used to monitor the MCU activity and then click OK The Community name is a string of characters that will be added to the message that is sent to the external Manager terminals This string is used to identify the message source by the external Manager terminal The new IP Address and Community name is added to the Trap Destinations box a To delete the IP Address of a Manager terminal select the address that you wish to delete and then click the Remove button The IP address in the Trap Destinations box is removed 14 Click the Security tab 19 26 Polycom Inc Chapter 19 Collaboration Server Administration and Utilities Polycom Inc The Collaboration Server SNMP Properties Security dialog box opens RMX SNMP Properties I Send Authentication Trap User
633. y the network administrator using a 3rd party network software installation utility and is transparent to all other users Polycom Inc 19 53 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Resetting the Collaboration Server RMX System Reset saves system configuration changes and restarts the system with the latest settings To reset the RMX 1 Inthe RMX Management pane click the Hardware Monitor button The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed 2 Click the Reset 9 button Temperature Voltage R LANS Normal When the Collaboration Server system is reset during Collaboration Server startup the Progress Bar appears at the bottom of the Collaboration Server Status pane a Frequently Used Connections ti 3 3 b a Fi 3 Hi H Fi ti 2 PR Users A Signaling Monitor WB Hardware Monitor Meeting Rooms E Reservations Rarely Used a A Entry Queues fig IVR Services m G P Network Services Recording Links Gir ISDN PSTN Network Services ala 0 10 Time GMT Time Category Level Code Description ae B aa The progress bar displays the amount of time remaining for the reset process to complete Starting up 15 25 The Startup progress is also indicated by a green bar moving from left to right The duration of the Startup depends on the type of activity that preceded the MCU reset For example Fast Configuration Wizar
634. y to the conference It is used to register the conference in the gatekeeper and the SIP server Start Time The time the conference started End Time The expected conference end time Note This field is not shown when the conference is set as a Permanent Conference Conference A numeric password for participants to access the conference Password Polycom Inc 12 3 Polycom RMX 1800 Administrator s Guide Table 12 1 Conference Properties General Continued fon bate Chairperson A numeric password used by participants to identify themselves as Password the conference chairperson Profile The name of the conference Profile from which conference parameters were taken Line Rate The maximum transfer rate in kilobytes per second Kbps of the call video and audio streams Max Number of Indicates the total number of participants that can be connected to Participants the conference The Automatic setting indicates the maximum number of participants that can be connected to the MCU according to resource availability 2 Click the Advanced tab The Conference Properties Advanced dialog box opens gt General reee Display Name SUPPORT_1977301518 gt Video Quality Duration Ja es gt Video Settings gt Audio Settings gt Customized Polling gt Skins gt IVR Encryption gt Information gt Recording mi gt Site Names K gt Network Services A Before First Joins
635. ycom Inc Appendix C CDR Fields Unformatted File Table C 35 Event Fields for Events 108 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO CONFERENCE OPERATOR ATTEND PARTY TO CONFERENCE Continued eas eee Party and MCU Note This field is only relevant to ISDN PSTN participants Phone Numbers The participant phone numbers are listed first followed by the MCU phone numbers Ident Method Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The method by which the destination conference is identified as follows 0 Password 1 Called phone number or IP address or alias 2 Calling phone number or IP address or alias Meet Method Note This field is only relevant to dial in participants The meet me per method as follows 1 Meet me per MCU Conference 3 Meet me per participant 4 Meet me per channel Net Interface Type The type of network interface between the participant and the MCU as follows 0 ISDN 2 H 323 5 SIP H243 Password The H 243 password or an empty field if there is no password Chair Not supported Always contains the value 0 Video Protocol The video protocol as follows 1 H 261 2 H 263 3 H 264 4 H 264 255 Auto Audio Volume The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant The value is between 1 lowest and 10 loudest Undefined Type The participant type as follows 0 Defined participant The value in the formatted text file is default 2 Undefined par

RMX 1800 Administrator`s Guide Version 8.1.8

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents